30+ Turkish Recipes Perfect For Beginners - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/international-recipes/turkish-cuisine/ Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Tue, 20 Jan 2026 23:24:02 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.3 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/cropped-cropped-Foolproof-Living-Favicon-image-resized-32x32.png 30+ Turkish Recipes Perfect For Beginners - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/international-recipes/turkish-cuisine/ 32 32 Stuffed Onions with Ground Beef and Rice https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-onions/ https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-onions/#respond Wed, 10 Dec 2025 15:27:48 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=85205 Ingredients You’ll Need If you’ve been following along on social media, you’ve probably seen me testing this recipe quite a…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

Growing up in Türkiye, our holiday tables looked a little different than the ones we have here in the US. Kebabs were always on the menu, but whenever my mom wanted to make something special, she made these ground beef stuffed onions, or soğan dolması as we call it.

It has been years since I last made them, but seeing their recent popularity on social media made me pull out my mom’s handwritten notes and bring this recipe back to life.

Here are a few things that make this version special:

  • It has roots in Turkish cooking. There are many versions of stuffed onions across the Mediterranean and the Middle East, but the Turkish style uses pomegranate molasses to give the dish a gentle, sweet-and-tangy balance.
  • The ingredients are simple. Pomegranate molasses might sound unfamiliar, but most grocery stores now carry it. Everything else is a pantry staple, and I included plenty of substitutions so you can make it work with what you have on hand.
  • It looks impressive, but it is easier than it seems. Once you soften the onions and get the hang of rolling them, the rest of the process is surprisingly approachable and very forgiving.

If you have never made stuffed onions before, I think you will be pleasantly surprised by how doable this dish actually is.

Ingredients You’ll Need

If you’ve been following along on social media, you’ve probably seen me testing this recipe quite a bit. As I worked through each round, I learned a few things about choosing the right ingredients.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

The exact measurements are in the recipe card below, but these are the notes I kept from all that testing:

Onions: Look for onions that are firm, fresh, and heavy for their size. Yellow onions work beautifully because they naturally become sweeter as they cook, but Vidalia onions and Walla Walla onions will also work if you want an even milder flavor. Red onions are also an option, but stuffed red onions are slightly sweeter than yellow onions.

Pro tip: In the recipe card, you’ll see four medium onions. If you’re making this for the first time, go ahead and buy one extra just in case. Depending on the size, four to five onions usually give me about 20 to 22 usable layers, which is right around what you’ll need for this stuffed onion recipe.

Ground beef: Fat equals flavor, so I like using 85/15 ground beef because it stays juicy and tender. If you prefer something richer, use 80/20 ground beef. 

You can also use lamb if you like, or half lamb and half beef, which is pretty traditional. If you are looking for a lighter alternative, though not traditional, ground chicken would also work, but be aware that it would have a slightly different flavor profile.

White rice: I’m using long-grain white rice here, the everyday enriched kind that you can find in most grocery stores. 

My mom always rinsed the rice under cold water until it ran clear, so I do that too, but I know some people prefer not to wash their rice, and that’s perfectly fine.

Some people soak their rice before using it, which helps it cook a little faster, but since we are using a rather small amount, I do not think that it is necessary. 

Alternatively, medium bulgur wheat can be a good substitute for rice. It would have a distinct earthy flavor profile, but it would still be delicious.

Pomegranate molasses: Can you make it without it? You surely can. But, should you? Absolutely not, because pomegranate molasses takes these stuffed onions to another level, giving them the signature slightly sweet-and-sour taste. So, do not skip it.

Pro Tip: When shopping for it, look for a brand that uses 100% pomegranate juice and no added sugars. If you can’t find it in your local grocery stores’ Middle Eastern section, look for it online. My favorite one is this Pomegranate Molasses.

Red pepper paste: This is known as biber salçası in Turkish cooking. You can find mild or hot versions, and both work here. If you can’t find it, you can use an equal amount of tomato paste as a substitute, and it will still be delicious.

Most Middle Eastern supermarkets carry it, but if you can’t find it there, you can buy it online. I like Oncu Turkish Mild Pepper Paste, which has great depth without being overly spicy.

Spices: This part of the recipe is the most flexible, and you can get as creative as you want. I use ground cumin, dried mint, black pepper, and red pepper flakes for a little heat.

If you can’t get your hands on dried mint, you can omit using it or use a tablespoon of chopped fresh mint instead.

How to Make Stuffed Onions

If this is your first time making stuffed onions with meat, and it looks like a lot of work, let me assure you, it is not. Once you start stuffing and rolling your first couple of onions, you’ll see quickly that the whole process is actually quite simple.

Below, I am sharing every step of the process with the little things I learned from my mom and from making this Mediterranean dish over the years for my own family:

A collage of images showing the preparation of the onions to make stuffed onions.

Step 1 – Prep the onions: If there’s one part to pay a little extra attention to, it’s this step. We’re trying to separate the layers in one piece as much as we can. Even if a few tear, don’t worry, they still work just fine once they’re stuffed.

Start by cutting off both ends of each onion, peeling the outer skin, and making a single straight cut down to the center without slicing all the way through. Doing this helps the layers loosen easily after boiling. Use a sharp knife here to make it easier on yourself.

Step 2 – Boil the onions: Add the onions to a large pot of water, bring it to a boil, and let it simmer for about 15 minutes.  You don’t want them overly soft, just soft enough that they don’t rip when you start separating the layers later. 

A collage of images showing the onion layers and the beef and rice filling.

Step 3 – Let them cool and separate the layers: Spread the onions out on a plate and let them cool on the counter.

Pro Tip: It takes a while to cool down, especially the inner layers. If you are short on time, you can place them in a colander and run them under cold tap water to speed up cooling. However, it is imperative that you let them drain properly before you start stuffing and rolling them.

When cool enough to handle, carefully remove each layer of the onion, being gentle to avoid tearing it. You should have about 20-22 onion layers in the end. 

As you peel off each layer, you’ll notice a thin membrane. If you have the time, remove it; it helps the onions cook more evenly and prevents any chewiness. But if you’re in a pinch, you can skip this step. I’ve made this dish plenty of times, leaving the membrane on, and it still turns out great.

As you get closer to the middle, you’ll end up with the onion cores. Don’t throw them out. We’ll use them in the filling, so put them in a large bowl.

Step 4 – Mix the filling: Preheat the oven to 400°F (204°C), and while it heats, make the filling. Add the ground beef, rice, red pepper paste, tomato paste, all of the spices and seasoning, pomegranate molasses, and parsley to the bowl with the chopped onion cores.

Using clean hands, give it a good mix so that everything is evenly combined. You’re looking for a mixture that feels slightly sticky and moist but holds together when you press it between your fingers. 

Step 5 – Roll each layer into a little stuffed onion (aka dolma): Place about 1 ½ tablespoons of filling inside each layer and roll it tightly.

Pro Tip: As you stuff and roll, you’ll see that the very outermost layers of the onion are longer than the inner layers. I find that stuffed onions made with these longer layers are a bit chewy, so I cut them in half. This way, all layers are roughly the same size, and every stuffed onion tastes the same after everything is baked.

Stuffed onion in a skillet with the sauce.

Step 6 – Arrange them in the pan: I am using a 3 ½-quart cast iron skillet, but a large casserole dish would also work well. 

Place the stuffed onions in a spiral, starting from the outer edge, tucking each one right up against the next.

You want them close enough to support each other without squeezing them too tightly. In my 12-inch pan, depending on the size of my onions, I can usually fit 18-22 stuffed onions in one spiral layer.

Step 7 – Make the sauce: In a measuring cup, combine olive oil, pomegranate molasses, tomato paste, red pepper paste, garlic, salt, and boiling water. Whisk until everything dissolves. 

Pour the sauce right over the onions. You can cover the pan with foil or a large sheet of parchment paper.

Pro Tip: During my recipe testing, I kept thinking the sauce looked like too much. It isn’t. You need that liquid to help the onions and filling cook slowly and evenly, and most of it evaporates in the oven, leaving just the right amount behind.

Stuffed roasted before and after they are baked.

Step 8 – Bake: Place the onions in the oven, covered, for about 30 minutes to soften all the way through. Then uncover the dish and let them brown and caramelize around the edges for another 20 minutes or so.

You’ll see that the remaining liquid will be thicker and reduced almost in half.

Step 9 – Finish with fresh parsley and serve: I love adding a handful of parsley at the end to brighten the entire dish. Serve your baked stuffed onions warm, with extra sauce spooned over the top.

Expert Tips From My Mediterranean Kitchen

Stuffed roasted onions look fancy, but once you understand a few small techniques, the whole process becomes much easier (and more enjoyable).

Here are a few lessons I learned during my recipe testing, along with a few things I learned watching my mom make these when I was growing up in Türkiye.

Don’t over-boil the onions: Keep a close eye on them once they start boiling. Let them simmer just until they become soft enough to bend, usually around 15 minutes. If you cook them too long, the layers become mushy and tear easily when you try to separate them. 

Cool the onions before handling: Letting the onions cool takes some time. If you are in a pinch, you can run them under cold water to speed things up. However, it is imperative that you drain them properly before stuffing.

It is okay to cut long onion layers: The outer layers of the onion are sometimes too long for rolling. If they are, simply slice them in half. Too much onion wrapping around the filling can become chewy after baking.

You do not need extra oil: Some versions of this recipe online (especially on social media) add additional (between ¼ cup to ½ cup) olive oil to the filling. I tested this recipe both ways and did not think it was necessary, especially if you are using 85/15 ground meat.

That said, if you’re using leaner meat, feel free to add ¼ cup olive oil to keep the filling tender and moist.

Use boiling or hot tap water for the sauce: When making the sauce, it is hard to dissolve everything with cold (or even room temperature) water, so I recommend using hot water to make it easier on yourself. 

Use parchment paper or foil to cover: Most Turkish cooks use parchment paper to cover the dish. You need to cut it so it covers the entire surface and stays put. However, aluminum foil can also be used.

Ground beef stuffed onions in a skillet from the top view.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Beef stuffed onions garnished with parsley from the top view.
Print

Stuffed Onions Recipe

This Baked Ground Beef Stuffed Onions recipe is a showstopping main dish made with tender onion layers stuffed with a beef-and-rice filling. Everything bakes in a sweet-tangy pomegranate molasses sauce that caramelizes beautifully in the oven.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Cooling time (for Onions) 20 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 55 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 493kcal

Ingredients

For The Onions

  • 4 large onions ~ 2 ½ lbs
  • Salt

For The Filling

  • ½ lbs ground beef 85-15
  • ½ cup white rice rinsed under hot tap water
  • ¼ cup pomegranate molasses
  • 2 tablespoons red pepper paste Use tomato paste if you can't find it
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon allspice
  • ½ teaspoon dried mint optional
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes Urfa or Aleppo pepper, optional
  • 1 cup chopped fresh parsley plus more for garnish

For The Sauce

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ¼ cup pomegranate molasses
  • 2 tablespoons red pepper paste Use tomato paste if you can't find it
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 ½ cups boiling water or hot tap water

Instructions

  • Cut both ends of the onion and peel them one by one. Slice halfway through to the center without cutting all the way.
  • Fill a medium-sized saucepan with water and add the onions over medium heat. Bring to a boil and simmer for 15 minutes. The leaves will soften, and separate a bit.
  • Using a slotted spoon, carefully remove the onions from the boiling water and transfer them to a plate, and let them cool.
  • When cool enough to handle, carefully remove each layer of the onion, being gentle to avoid tearing it, and discard the thin membrane as needed. As you get closer to the middle, you’ll end up with the cores of the onions. Set them aside; we’ll use them in the filling.
  • You should have about 20-22 layers of onions in the end. Set them aside.
  • Meanwhile, preheat the oven to 400 degrees F.
  • While the oven is heating, make the filling. Into a mixing bowl, place ground beef, white rice, pomegranate molasses, red pepper paste, tomato paste, kosher salt, black pepper, ground cumin, allspice, dried mint, red pepper flakes, and chopped fresh parsley.
  • Chop the reserved onion cores and add them to the bowl. Give it a good mix to ensure everything is fully incorporated.
  • When it is time to stuff, fill each layer of the onion with a tablespoon of the meat filling, then roll tightly. Repeat this process for the remaining onion layers, then arrange them in a spiral pattern in a large skillet or casserole dish.
  • To make the sauce, whisk together olive oil, pomegranate molasses, red pepper paste, tomato paste, garlic, salt, and boiling water in a measuring cup until combined.
  • Carefully pour the sauce over the stuffed onions. You can cover it with foil or a large sheet of parchment paper.
  • Bake in the oven for 30 minutes, then remove the parchment paper and continue baking for an additional 20 minutes, or until onions turn golden brown.
  • Garnish with chopped parsley and serve immediately.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 18-22 stuffed onions, which is ideal for serving 4 adults, with each adult eating 4-5 stuffed onions. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: Prep the onions and the filling. Stuff and roll the onions and arrange them in a casserole or skillet. Cover tightly and keep in the fridge for up to 24 hours. When ready to cook, make the sauce and bake as directed.
  • Storage: Bring the leftovers to room temperature, place in an airtight container, and store in the fridge for up to 3-4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 493kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 40mg | Sodium: 1353mg | Potassium: 672mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin A: 1596IU | Vitamin C: 35mg | Calcium: 88mg | Iron: 4mg

What to Serve With Stuffed Onions

So you’ve made your beautiful stuffed baked onions. They’re tender, aromatic, and perfectly seasoned. But what should you serve alongside them to turn this into a complete meal?

Below are a few traditional and Mediterranean-inspired pairings to help you serve them the way they’re enjoyed across Türkiye:

Pair them with a cool yogurt sauce: A creamy yogurt sauce is one of the most classic pairings to dolma-style dishes. My Yogurt Dill Sauce adds a bright, herby note with lemon and fresh dill, while my Tzatziki Sauce Recipe is a classic pairing with thick Greek yogurt, cucumber, and garlic. 

Add a refreshing salad: A crisp salad never disappoints. Turkish Shepherd Salad is a traditional go-to with juicy tomatoes, cucumbers, and herbs, especially in the summer months. If you want something a bit more herby, Tabbouleh is another option with lots of fresh herbs.

Serve with rice or pilaf: To make this a little more filling, pair your stuffed onions with a starchy side dish. If you want a Turkish side, my Bulgur Pilaf is a classic, or try my Vermicelli Rice, another staple you’ll often see served alongside dishes like this in many Mediterranean restaurants. And if you want a gluten-free option, Lemon Quinoa brings a fresh, zesty note without overpowering the main dish.

How to Make Ahead, Store & Reheat 

One of the things I love most about this stuffed onion recipe is that you can make it ahead, and it tastes better the next day.  The flavors magically deepen as they sit, which makes it an ideal recipe for make-ahead dinners, holiday prep, or easy leftovers. 

Here’s how I do it:

Make Ahead: You have two make-ahead options:

  • You can prepare, stuff, and roll all the onions, arrange them in your pan, and refrigerate them unbaked, without the sauce, for up to 24 hours. When you’re ready to cook, simply mix the tomato sauce, pour it over the onions, and bake as directed.
  • Alternatively, you can bake them completely a day ahead. Let them cool, cover tightly, and refrigerate. Just pop them in the oven to warm thoroughly, sprinkle with fresh herbs, and serve!

Storage: Once baked, let the stuffed onions cool completely before storing. Transfer them to an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 4 days. 

Reheat: Reheat the stuffed onions in a 350°F (177°C) oven, loosely covered with parchment or foil, for 10-15 minutes, or just until warmed through. You can also microwave them if needed, but the oven keeps the texture softer and more consistent.

Freezing: Stuffed onions freeze very well. Once completely cooled, place them in an airtight container and freeze for up to 2 months. For the best texture, thaw them overnight in the refrigerator, then reheat.

FAQs

Can I make this recipe vegetarian?

Yes, you can make a vegetarian version. Simply increase the rice to 2 cups and add 3 tablespoons of extra-virgin olive oil to the filling. It is not traditional, but some cooked lentils or mushrooms can be added to the mixture to make it even more satisfying.

What if my onion layers fall apart?

This usually happens when the onions are overcooked. Boil them just until they’re soft enough to bend, but not mushy. Using firm, fresh onions also helps because the layers are sturdier.

Can I make stuffed onions ahead of time?

Yes. To do so, stuff the onions, arrange them in the baking dish, cover tightly, and refrigerate for up to 24 hours. When you’re ready to serve, simply add the sauce and bake.

Can I use brown rice?

Technically, yes, but it takes much longer to cook and stays much firmer inside the onions. For best results, stick with white rice (long-, medium-, or short-grain). If using brown rice, soak it for at least 1 hour to soften it before adding it to the filling mixture.

Can I use red or white onions?

Yes. Red, white, or yellow onions will all work for this recipe. Just make sure the onions you choose are fresh, firm, and not soft, so the layers hold up well when boiling and rolling.

How is this recipe different than Greek Stuffed Onions?

While the concept is pretty similar, the Greek version of this recipe does not use pomegranate molasses. It is also often made with ground pork, but, similar to my recipe here, ground beef and ground lamb can be good substitutes for pork.

Other Mediterranean Recipes You’ll Love

If these meat-stuffed onions made you curious to try more, I invite you to check out a few of my favorite recipes from the Mediterranean and Middle Eastern regions below:

  • If make-ahead meat dishes are your favorite, try my Greek Lamb Meatballs for an easy dinner or a quick appetizer.
  • You’ve probably seen the Doner Kebab recipe going viral on social media. It takes the century-old classic recipe and turns it into a weeknight dinner with a clever shortcut.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-onions/feed/ 0
Viral Doner Kebab https://foolproofliving.com/doner-kebab/ https://foolproofliving.com/doner-kebab/#comments Wed, 03 Dec 2025 02:41:53 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=85054 Ingredients You’ll Need The ingredients for this Turkish doner kebab are simple and easy to find. You can find the…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from front view.

Turkish cooking has been having a moment on social media, and I love seeing it finally get the attention it deserves. First, it was the Turkish Pasta trend; now, it is this homemade doner kebab. 

These shortcuts are clever because they make dishes that have been around forever feel doable on a weeknight with ingredients most people already have. The rolling technique you see everywhere was first shared by Mezemike, and it took off for a reason.

For me, this recipe hits close to home. I grew up in Bursa, Turkiye, where the authentic version of this dish, Iskender Kebab, was invented. So even though we never made it using this method, I immediately understood why people loved it. It captures the spirit of the dish in a much more doable way without a trip to Turkiye.

My goal here is simply to walk you through this shortcut in a clear and honest way, with a few tips to help you get as close to the real thing as possible in your own kitchen.

Ingredients You’ll Need

The ingredients for this Turkish doner kebab are simple and easy to find. You can find the full list of ingredients with exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes on a few ingredients from my testing:

Doner meat ingredients:

Doner meat ingredients from the top view.

Onion: While many viral versions use only the juice, I prefer using the whole onion, as it helps tenderize the meat, keeps it moist, and adds the depth that real doner has. To get it extra fine, I blend it into a puree, along with the garlic. 

If you don’t have a food processor, a box grater would work well too. Use the large holes to grate the onion, and reserve the juices.

Ground beef: It goes without saying that fat is flavor, so it is key here. I recommend using 85/15 ground beef for the best texture and taste. The shortcut doner kebab recipe uses ground beef, but in Turkey (depending on the region), it’s usually made with lean lamb. 

If you want to get as close as possible to the real deal, use ground lamb to make a lamb doner kebab. Lamb is the classic choice for traditional Turkish doner. Or alternatively, if you want to ease into it, you can try 50% ground beef and 50% ground lamb.

Greek yogurt: Yogurt tenderizes the meat and keeps it moist. I tested this recipe both with full-fat yogurt and 2%. While both work, the texture is richer with the full-fat kind.

Spices: The classic doner meat seasoning includes ground cumin, paprika, and red pepper flakes. If you want to get as close to the real thing as possible, I would also recommend adding a pinch of dried oregano.

For the vegetables: 

Roasting vegetables like tomatoes and peppers is optional, but they are the traditional accompaniment to doner kebab, whether you wrap the meat in lavash or serve it with rice.

Ingredients for the sauce and making durum.

Tomatoes: You can use any tomato variety. If using larger tomatoes, quarter them so they roast evenly and are easier to tuck into the wrap (aka dürüm) later on.

Green peppers: Any long, green pepper works here. Traditional Turkish doner shops use sivri biber, which are mild and have a thinner skin. But because I can’t find them here in the US, I usually use Anaheim peppers or jalapeños. If you’re sensitive to heat and using jalapeños, I recommend removing the seeds before roasting them. 

For the Sauce:

Most versions of the viral recipe don’t include this sauce, but I can’t, in good conscience, publish this recipe on my site without sharing it with you. If you ask me, the sauce is a must, and you just need 2 ingredients.

Butter: I am using unsalted butter so I can better control the seasoning. If all you have is salted butter, simply add a little less salt to the sauce.

Tomato paste & water: Use any brand of tomato paste (domates salcasi) you like. While not traditional, I sometimes change it up and use hot/mild red pepper paste (biber salcasi) for a spicier sauce.

For Serving:

Lavash bread: The classic bread used for wrapping meat is lavash. You can make lavash at home or buy it at the store. Here in the US, my favorite brand is Joseph’s, but I also like Trader Joe’s. 

Alternatively, you can stuff the meat in Pita Bread (in its pockets) to create a similar “sandwich” feel.

Sumac Onions: Optional, but I cannot imagine serving any type of Turkish kebab without them. It takes just a few minutes to put together and is essential to make it taste authentic.

How to Make This Viral Turkish Doner Kebab

Okay, there is a reason why this shortcut doner method has taken over social media. It gives you the same tender, well-seasoned meat you’d find in Türkiye, but in a quicker way you can easily make in your own kitchen for a weeknight dinner.

Here’s how to make it:

Steps showing pureing aromatics and making the meat mixture.

Step 1 – Prep the oven and aromatics: Start by preheating your oven to 400°F (204°C). While it heats, add the onion and garlic to your food processor and blend until smooth and pureed.

Don’t strain out the liquid; that moisture is what keeps the meat juicy and helps everything bind together. 

Step 2 – Mix the meat: Transfer the onion mixture to a large bowl and add the ground beef, tomato paste, yogurt, and spices. Using your hands, mix until everything is thoroughly combined for about 1-2 minutes. It should be well mixed, so you get a bit of each flavor in every bite.

Images showing the rolling of the meat mixture to make Turkish doner kebab.

Step 3 – Divide and shape the mixture: Once the meat is mixed, divide it into three equal pieces. During my initial testing of this recipe, I divided it into 4 portions, which worked well, but I felt the rolled doner was a bit thinner than I would like after cooking. 

That said, you can do either 3 or 4 pieces. It is more a matter of personal preference.

Step 4 – Roll the meat into a sheet: Place one piece of meat in the center of a 12×16 sheet of parchment paper, then place another sheet on top. Use a rolling pin (or your hands) to gently press it into an even rectangle. You want an even layer that’s neither too thin nor too thick.

Sometimes the meat pushes out of the sides of the parchment. Don’t worry, just tuck it back in so it’s not as thin, and keep going.

Pro Tip: Some of the videos I’ve seen on social media make it look so easy to roll out to a perfect rectangle. During my testing, I learned that the shape didn’t matter. Instead, the important thing was to roll the meat evenly on the parchment paper.

Photos showing the rolling of the meat to make the viral doner kabob recipe.

Step 5 – Roll it into a log: Remove the top parchment sheet. Now, starting from the short end closest to you, roll the meat tightly (with the bottom parchment still attached).

Transfer the rolled log to a sheet pan and repeat with the remaining pieces.

Pro Tip: Watching the videos on social media, you’ll likely see people roll the meat (like you are rolling cinnamon rolls) or fold it onto itself. As long as it is evenly rolled, both methods would work.

A collage of photos showing the preparation for the veggies with the rolled doner meat.

Step 6 – Add the vegetables: Once all three logs are on the pan, add the quartered tomatoes and whole peppers to the same pan (onto the side) and drizzle them with olive oil and a little kosher salt. 

Step 7 – Bake: Bake everything for about 15-20 minutes. When it’s done, the meat should look lightly browned, and the vegetables should be softened. 

Remove the pan from the oven and let everything cool for 5 minutes or just enough that you can unroll it without burning your hands.

Showing the cooked doner meat getting unrolled and torn into big pieces.

Step 8 – Tear the meat: Unroll each piece gently, then tear the meat into strips by hand. I don’t strip them down too small, just into large chunks.

Photo showing the texture of the butter and tomato sauce.

Step 9 – Make the tomato-butter sauce: Start by melting the butter in a small saucepan. Then, stir in the tomato paste using a fork (or even a whisk). At first, it will look a bit curdled, which is normal. Once cooked for 20-30 seconds, whisk in some hot water to achieve a more sauce-like consistency.

Pro Tip: Use hot (tap) water here; cold water will make the sauce harder to combine. Let it come to a gentle boil, then take it off the heat.

Expert Tips From My Turkish Kitchen

After testing this recipe multiple times (and growing up eating the real Turkish version), I’ve learned that a few small details make all the difference between a doner that tastes flat and one that tastes like it came straight from a shop in Türkiye. Here’s what helped the most:

Warm your bread: Your wrap is only as good as your bread, and there is nothing better than warmed lavash (or pita). You can quickly warm it in the oven or on a dry skillet, or simply set it on top of the warm meat for a minute to soften (and soak up a bit of the juices on top).

Even thickness when rolling: When you’re pressing the meat between the parchment sheets, you don’t want it paper-thin. We are aiming for even thickness so it cooks properly and stays juicy. If the meat spills out the sides of the parchment, just tuck it back in. Using a rolling pin makes it easier, but your hands work just as well.

Use sturdy parchment paper: Not all parchment paper is the same. Thinner parchment becomes soggy, tears easily, and makes rolling a lot harder. A sturdier brand helps the meat keep its shape, especially if you plan to refrigerate the logs overnight. I used 12×16 parchment sheets, and they held up beautifully.

Don’t overbake it: The meat cooks surprisingly fast. About 15-20 minutes is usually the perfect amount of time, and baking it any longer can dry out the meat. It should be tender enough to tear into strips.

Also, I’ve seen people put the doner meat under the broiler after unrolling it to make it “crispy”. Personally, I did not think that it was necessary as doner is supposed to be served tender and softer than crispy.

Brush and sear the wrap: This is an optional step, but if you have a few extra minutes, for a restaurant-style finish, you can brush the outside of the lavash with a little tomato-butter sauce and sear it in a skillet for 30-60 seconds or place it in a turned-off (but still warm) oven to warm it up a bit while you are assembling the rest of the wraps.

Doner kebab meat with roasted tomatoes and peppers on the side.
Print

Viral Doner Kebab Recipe

A shortcut version of Turkish doner kebab made with ground beef and rolled in parchment paper, just like the one trending on social media. When you serve it with roasted tomatoes, peppers, and the traditional tomato-butter sauce, it comes surprisingly close to the real thing in a fraction of the time.
Course Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 483kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

For The Doner Meat

  • 1 onion medium-sized/peeled and cut into large chunks
  • 2 cloves garlic peeled
  • 1 lb ground beef 85/15
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • 2 tablespoons Greek yogurt full-fat or no fat (both would work)
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

For The Vegetables

  • 3 tomatoes quartered / medium sized
  • 2 green peppers
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • teaspoon black pepper

For The Sauce (optional)

  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • ¼ cup hot water
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt

For Serving (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 °F (204°C).
  • Place the onion and garlic in a food processor and pulse until fully chopped/pureed. Place it in a large bowl.
  • Into that same bowl, add in the beef, tomato paste, Greek yogurt, ground cumin, paprika, red pepper flakes, salt, and pepper.
  • Using clean hands, mix well until thoroughly combined.
  • Divide the mixture into 3 equal pieces*.
  • Grab a large sheet of parchment paper and place one of the pieces in the middle. Place another sheet of parchment on top and, using a rolling pin (or your hands), roll it out into a rectangle. Do your best to make it as even as possible.
  • Remove the parchment paper on top. Starting from the bottom with the short side facing you, roll the meat (with the parchment paper) onto itself in 2-inch increments until complete. Transfer it to a large sheet pan.
  • Repeat the same process for the remaining pieces.
  • Move the rolled meat to the side and add the tomatoes and peppers to the same sheet pan. Drizzle them with olive oil and season with salt and pepper.
  • Transfer it to the oven and bake for 20 minutes.
  • When done, unfold the rolled meat and tear it into large pieces.
  • To make the sauce, melt the butter in a small saucepan over medium heat. Add the tomato paste and water and mix until combined. Cook until it comes to a boil and remove from the heat.
  • To make “durum”, lay a piece of lavash on a cutting board and spread it with a tablespoon of tomato sauce. Add a handful of meat on top, along with some roasted tomatoes and peppers, and a handful of sumac onions (if using).
  • Drizzle it with more tomato sauce and gently roll it up from the bottom, tucking the filling in as you go.
  • Repeat the same process for the remaining lavash bread and doner meat. Using a sharp knife, cut it in half and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4 doner kebab wraps ideal for serving four adults. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storing leftovers: If you know you’ll have leftovers, I recommend storing all components of the recipe separately in airtight containers. If stored in the fridge, they should be good for up to 3-4 days.
    You can store the wraps as well, but I recommend consuming them in the next day or two. You can reheat in a low-heat (300°F) oven until warmed to your liking.
  • Some versions of this recipe divide the doner meat mixture into 4 pieces (instead of 3 as I did) for 1 pound of ground meat. During my testing, I thought the doner meat made with 4 pieces was too thin to my liking, but either way would work.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 483kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 38g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Trans Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 111mg | Sodium: 1064mg | Potassium: 838mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 1814IU | Vitamin C: 66mg | Calcium: 69mg | Iron: 4mg

How To Serve Doner Kebab?

You made the doner meat, roasted the veggies, and have the most delicious, silky tomato-butter sauce ready. Now it is time to serve. And if you want the full Turkish experience, pour yourself a cold Ayran, the simple salted yogurt drink we serve with every kebab dish. 

The good news is that you have a few options:

Make A Wrap (aka dürüm): 

Photo of the durum made with doner meat.

This is how they serve it in the viral videos, and, quite honestly, this is how you would find it in Turkey if you buy it from a street vendor. It is called dürüm and is usually made by rolling the meat in lavash bread.

To assemble, place a warm piece of lavash bread on a cutting board and spread it with a generous spoonful of the tomato sauce.

Add a handful of the doner meat, some roasted peppers and tomatoes, and a spoonful of Sumac Onions. Drizzle it with a tablespoon of the tomato sauce.

Roll the lavash tightly, tucking the filling in as you go. Slice in half, then serve immediately with extra sauce on the side. 

Pro Tip: If you prefer something sturdier or don’t have lavash on hand, you can use store-bought or Homemade Pita Bread or any of your favorite flatbreads instead.

Iskender-Inspired Plate: 

I grew up in Bursa, where doner kebab is often served Iskender-style. It uses the same ingredients you already prepared, but the assembly gives it a completely different feel. 

If you want to serve your doner meat this way, place torn pieces of warm pide bread on a plate, drizzle with tomato sauce, pile the meat on top, and finish with more sauce. 

Serve it with a dollop of creamy yogurt on the side, along with the roasted peppers and tomatoes.

With Rice:

Depending on the region, especially when you eat doner kebab in a restaurant, it often comes with rice, a few French fries, and some pickles on the side. After it is assembled, the tomato sauce is poured over the meat and rice, turning it into a simple yet just as delicious meal. 

If you want to serve it that way at home, I highly recommend making my Vermicelli Rice to keep it as close to the real thing as possible.

Viral Turkish doner recipe served with sumac onions and tomato sauce from the top view.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Reheat

Make ahead: You have a few great make-ahead options:

  • Prep the rolls the day before: You can fully roll the meat logs ahead of time and refrigerate them until you’re ready to bake. The only thing to keep in mind is the parchment paper. Some get soft and wet easily, so choose a good-quality one to help the logs hold their shape overnight. I like this precut parchment paper that is not only sturdy enough but also easy to roll.
  • Prep the meat mixture ahead: If you’d rather roll it fresh the next day, simply mix the meat mixture, transfer it to an airtight container, and refrigerate. This resting time allows the aromatics to mingle and develop even further.

Pro Tip – Make the sauce fresh: The tomato-butter sauce only takes a few minutes to make and tastes best when made right before serving. I do not recommend making it ahead of time for the best results.

Storage: If you know you will have leftovers, store the meat, sauce, and roasted vegetables separately. They all keep well in the fridge, in an airtight container, for 3-4 days. This helps the texture stay closer to its fresh state. 

If not, as long as stored in an airtight container, the rolls will still hold up nicely and keep well in the fridge for 1-2 days.

Freezing: You can freeze the doner meat in two easy ways:

  • Freezing raw rolled logs: Simply wrap each roll tightly in stretch film (or place it in an airtight freezer-safe container) and freeze for up to 2 months. When you’re ready to enjoy, thaw it overnight in the fridge, then bake as directed.
  • Freezing the cooked meat: After baking, tear the meat, let it cool completely, and freeze it in an airtight container or freezer bag. For the best texture, reheat it in a skillet rather than in the microwave.

Reheating: If you store the meat separately from the rest of the ingredients, you can warm it up in a skillet over medium heat with a splash of water or a little butter. I would recommend avoiding the microwave, as it tends to dry out the meat and make it chewy.

If you have leftover sauce, warm it up in a skillet and add a little warm water to thin it out.

FAQS

Can I make this with ground chicken or turkey?

Yes, you can. Just keep in mind that in this recipe, more fat equals more flavor. If you are choosing to use chicken or turkey, choose dark-meat ground chicken or dark-meat ground turkey to replicate the rich flavors doner kebab is known for.

Is this an authentic Turkish doner?

Not exactly. Traditional doner is made on a vertical spit and slowly roasted for hours. This version is a shortcut that went viral online because it captures the spirit of doner in a way that’s easy to make at home.

What’s the difference between doner, shawarma, and gyro?

All three are sliced, seasoned meats cooked on a rotating spit, but the spices and toppings vary depending on the part of the Mediterranean/Middle East they are served:
– Döner is Turkish. Compared to shawarma and gyro, it is less seasoned, usually made with beef or lamb, and served with tomato sauce, savory yogurt, and grilled vegetables.
– Shawarma (Middle Eastern) is heavily spiced with ground turmeric, clove, cinnamon, and cardamom. It is traditionally made with chicken and beef.
– Gyro (Greek) includes dried oregano, garlic, and Mediterranean herbs, and is typically served with tzatziki. It is usually made with chicken or beef.

Can I make this without parchment paper?

I don’t recommend it. The parchment is what helps the meat hold its shape as it bakes. Without it, the logs won’t roll tightly, and the meat can spread or fall apart.

Can I make this in the air fryer?

Yes, just make sure the rolls fit inside your air fryer basket. Cook them at 400°F (204°C) for about 15 minutes. Be sure to check it around the 12th-minute mark, as air fryers tend to cook faster than ovens.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Turkish Recipes You Might Also Like

If you enjoyed this homemade doner kebab recipe, here are a few more Turkish recipes I think you’ll love:

  • If you’re craving something bold and spicy, my Adana Kebab is as close to the authentic version as you can get at home. It’s the traditional lamb kebab I grew up eating, and this homemade version still captures the rich, smoky flavor of the original.
  • For a comforting and simple weeknight dinner, my Turkish Stuffed Eggplant is a classic. The roasted eggplant with the garlicky tomato-beef filling makes it one of the most iconic dishes in Turkish cuisine.
  • And if you want something quick and nostalgic, try my Turkish Meatballs. Made with just a couple of simple ingredients, they’re the meatballs I grew up eating in Turkey.


This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/doner-kebab/feed/ 14
Chicken Kofta https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kofta/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kofta/#comments Tue, 02 Sep 2025 13:35:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83148 I kept her tricks in my own version so you can enjoy juicy, reliable patties year-round. You can grill them…]]>

I kept her tricks in my own version so you can enjoy juicy, reliable patties year-round. You can grill them outside in summer, roast them on a sheet pan with veggies, or cook them quickly on the stovetop or even in your air fryer.

Grilled chicken kofta served with hummus, sliced onions and tomatoes.

Ingredients for the Juiciest Chicken Kofta

Having grown up eating this dish and after making it countless times, I’ve learned a few helpful things about the key ingredients. You’ll find the complete list in the recipe card below, but here are some highlights, including substitutions:

Ingredients for the recipe from  the top view with the name of the ingredients.

Onion: Both white and yellow onions work. My mom always grated the onion so it blended evenly into the mixture. Be sure to drain the liquid, as grated onions release a significant amount of juice. Red onion would also work, but it would have a slightly sweeter flavor.

Ground chicken: I prefer to use organic chicken when available. Ground chicken made with dark meat adds more richness, but lean ground chicken breast also works if you prefer a lighter option.

Panko breadcrumbs: I usually reach for panko, but regular or seasoned breadcrumbs will also work. For a gluten-free option, use gluten-free breadcrumbs. Half a cup is the sweet spot. Any less and the mixture feels loose, any more and it turns too dense.

Fresh Garlic Cloves: Mince them as finely as you can. Garlic powder works in a pinch, but fresh garlic makes a big difference here.

Baking soda: This is our secret ingredient and one of my mom’s little tricks. A small amount of baking soda alters the pH of the meat, allowing the proteins to bind less tightly, which helps koftas remain tender while retaining their shape. And in case you are wondering, you won’t taste the baking soda in your cooked chicken koftas.

Egg: The egg works as a binder, which is especially helpful with lean ground chicken. Some recipes skip it, but I’ve tested it both ways and find that adding one keeps the patties from falling apart. If you prefer not to use it, the kofta will still work, though they may be a little more delicate when cooking.

Spices & Seasonings: I opted for ground cumin, sweet paprika, kosher salt, and black pepper, but adding ground coriander would also be a great option. If you want some heat, Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes are great options. Start with a small amount and adjust to taste.

Herbs: I opted for fresh Italian parsley, but any fresh herbs, such as mint or dill, work beautifully.

Optional Add-Ins:

Tomato paste: You can add up to 1 tablespoon to the mixture to add moisture and a pop of color. Red pepper paste also works, but it will slightly change the flavor.

Cheese: Both grated Parmesan cheese and low-moisture mozzarella work well here, about ¼ cup. Parmesan adds a savory umami boost, but it is salty, so be mindful of the salt in the rest of the recipe.

How to Make Chicken Kofta: Step-by-Step Instructions

Person showing how to grate an onion using a box grater.

Step 1 – Prep the onion: Set a fine mesh strainer over a bowl and grab your box grater. Using the large holes, grate the onion and place it right into the strainer. Then, using the back of a spoon, press it down to squeeze out as much juice as you can. 

It may feel like extra work, but draining the onion is key for kofta that hold their shape. If you prefer, you can chop the onion instead, but it won’t blend as seamlessly into the mixture.

Ground chicken kofta mixture in a bowl before and after it is mixed.

Step 2 – Mix everything together: Transfer the grated onion to a large mixing bowl, then add the ground chicken, panko breadcrumbs, garlic, baking soda, cumin, paprika, egg, salt, black pepper, red pepper flakes, and parsley. 

I like to mix it with my hands, gently working it until just combined. This helps you feel when everything is evenly distributed and prevents overmixing, which can make the patties too dense.

A collage of images showing the shaping of the meatballs and grilling them.

Step 3 – Shape the kofta: Pour a little olive oil (or water) into a small bowl to keep nearby. Scoop about two tablespoons of the mixture, or use a cookie scoop so you’ll get even chicken kofta meatballs. 

Lightly oil your hands, and roll and press them into oval-shaped patties. Dip your hands in olive oil as needed to prevent the mixture from sticking to your hands and to help you form smooth, even patties.

Pro Tip: Traditionally, ground chicken koftas are shaped into oval patties, which is how my mom used to make them. You can also roll them into meatballs, flatten them slightly, or even press them onto skewers to make chicken kofta kebabs. Just remember that different shapes may cook a little faster or slower.

Step 4 – Let them rest: Place the shaped kofta on a platter, cover with plastic wrap, and let them sit at room temperature for 10-15 minutes while you heat up your grill, skillet, or oven. This quick rest helps them hold their shape when you cook them. If you are prepping ahead, you can refrigerate them instead.

How To Cook Chicken Kofta

My favorite way to cook chicken kofta is on the grill for those beautiful char marks, but I know that is not always possible. The good news is that they also turn out delicious when cooked in the oven or on the stovetop. Below are the steps for each method:

On The Grill

Step 1 – Preheat and prep the grill: Heat to medium-high and clean the grates thoroughly. A hot, oiled surface keeps the patties from sticking and gives them good grill marks.

Step 2 – Grill the Kofta: Place the patties on the grill and cook for 2 to 3 minutes per side, turning them over to ensure even cooking.

Step 3 – Check for doneness: Use an instant-read thermometer and remove the kofta as soon as the center reaches 165°F (74°C). Pulling them off at exactly the right temperature keeps them juicy and tender.

In The Oven

Step 1 – Preheat the oven: Set your oven to 375°F and line a baking sheet with parchment paper. The parchment not only makes cleanup easier, but it also helps prevent the bottoms of the kofta from sticking or over-browning.

Step 2 – Arrange and Bake: Place the patties in a single layer, leaving some space between each one to allow hot air to circulate. Bake for about 15 minutes, flipping halfway through for even cooking.

Step 3 – Avoid overbaking: Start checking the temperature at the 14-minute mark. Chicken cooks quickly in the oven, and once it reaches an internal temperature of 165°F (74°C), it can dry out rapidly.

On The Stove Top

Step 1 – Heat the skillet: A cast-iron pan works best because it retains heat evenly and provides a good sear for the kofta. Add a tablespoon of olive oil and heat until it begins to shimmer. A hot pan sears the outside quickly, helping to lock in the juices.

Step 2 – Cook the kofta: Place the patties in the skillet and cook 2-3 minutes per side, keeping total cook time under 8 minutes. Medium-high heat gives you golden outsides while keeping the inside tender.

Step 3 – Cook in batches if needed: Avoid overcrowding the pan, as this will lower the temperature and cause the kofta to steam instead of sear. Cooking in two batches is worth it for the better browning and flavor. Check for 165°F (74°C) in the center before serving, so you know they are cooked perfectly.

In the Air Fryer

Step 1 – Preheat: Set your air fryer to 375°F (191 °C) and lightly spray or brush the basket with olive oil to prevent sticking.

Step 2 – Arrange: Lay your chicken koftas in a single layer, leaving a small amount of space between each one to ensure even cooking.

Step 3 – Cook: Air fry for about 12 minutes, flipping them halfway through. They’re ready when the centers reach 165°F (74 °C) on a meat thermometer or when they’re nicely golden on the outside.

How To Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Reheat

Chicken kofta is a great make-ahead recipe, whether you’re planning for a busy weeknight or stocking the freezer for later. You can prepare the mixture ahead of time, store leftovers after cooking, or freeze them raw or cooked. Here’s how I handle it:

Make Ahead: Shape the koftas, place them on a baking sheet, wrap with stretch film, and store them in the fridge for up to 24 hours. 

Storing Leftovers: You can enjoy them warm or cold. If you’re eating them cold, just let them come to room temperature so they’re not fridge-cold. Store them in an airtight container and they’ll keep in the fridge for 3 to 4 days.

Reheat: My favorite way to reheat is on the stove with just a splash of water in the pan. The steam from the water gently warms the kofta, keeping them from drying out. 

You can also pop them in a 300°F (149°C) oven for 5-10 minutes or until they are heated through. 

Freeze (raw or cooked): You can freeze them raw or cooked. Below is how I do it.

  • Raw: Place the shaped ground chicken kofta on a parchment-lined sheet pan, cover with plastic wrap, and freeze for a couple of hours until firm. Then move them into a freezer bag so they don’t take up much space. They should last up to 3 months this way. When you’re ready to cook, thaw them overnight in the fridge.
  • Cooked: Store in a freezer-safe container, pressing out as much air as you can to prevent freezer burn. They’ll keep for up to 3 months. Thaw them in the fridge overnight.
Grilled chicken koftas on a plate served with lemon wedges.

Expert Tips

Even though making this chicken kofta recipe is simple, a few small details can make all the difference in how tender, juicy, and perfectly cooked they turn out. Below are my notes from years of making this recipe, along with what I learned from testing various methods.

  • Do not overmix the mixture: Overmixing the meat compresses the protein fibers and squeezes out some of the natural moisture. This is what can make the cooked chicken koftas feel dense instead of soft and tender. I like to mix just until all the ingredients are evenly combined. 
  • Wet your hands when shaping:  Be aware that the meat mixture is very sticky. To make shaping easier, I keep a small bowl of olive oil (or water) nearby and dip my hands in it to keep them moist. A small amount of liquid makes the mixture glide smoothly, resulting in even, smooth patties.
  • Avoid cooking straight from the fridge: If you’ve prepped the mixture ahead of time and stored it in the fridge, let it sit at room temperature for 20-30 minutes before cooking. Starting with ice-cold meat can cause the kofta to cook unevenly. Allowing it to come closer to room temperature helps them cook more evenly and stay juicy.

Serving Suggestions for Chicken Kofta

If you’re wondering what to serve with chicken kofta, the good news is that it’s one of the most versatile dishes I make. You can build it into a wrap, pair it with grains, or add it to a mezze platter for entertaining. Here are some of my favorite ways to serve it:

  • Wraps: My favorite way to serve kofta chicken is tucked into Homemade Pita Bread or wrapped in soft Lavash Bread, with fresh veggies, and drizzled generously with one of my creamy yogurt sauces, such as Mint Yogurt Sauce or Yogurt Dill Sauce. It’s quick, satisfying, and makes the perfect grab-and-go meal.
  • Salad: A simple crisp salad balances the warm spices in the kofta beautifully. Try my Mediterranean Pasta Salad for a crowd-pleasing, make-ahead option, or keep it light with a fresh green salad, such as my Spring Mix Salad or Fattoush.
  • Sheet Pan Kofta: For a hands-off option, make a sheet pan chicken kofta dinner by roasting the chicken koftas in the oven with quick-cooking vegetables like onions, bell peppers, and cherry tomatoes. Everything comes out ready at the same time, making it ideal for busy weeknights. 
  • Mezze Platter: Add these Turkish chicken meatballs to a mezze platter alongside Hummus, Tzatziki, and CAVA’s Feta Sauce, then add some warm bread and a few marinated olives. It’s the easiest way to make dinner feel like a little Mediterranean feast. If you prefer ground beef, my Turkish Meatballs are another great option for a mezze spread.
  • Grains: For a more filling plate, serve the kofta over Vermicelli Rice or Seasoned Quinoa. A spoonful of yogurt sauce ties everything together.

FAQs

What is the difference between kebab and kofta?

The biggest difference lies in how the meat is prepared and cooked. In Turkey, we call it chicken kofte. It is made from ground meat mixed with spices and herbs, then shaped into logs, patties, or little meatballs. If you shape it into long cylinders and wrap them around skewers, you get chicken kofta kebab. Kebab, on the other hand, is more about the cooking style and typically refers to chunks of meat, sometimes accompanied by vegetables, grilled on skewers.

Why did my kofta fall apart?

The most common reasons are either too much moisture or not enough binding. Be sure to squeeze out as much juice as possible from the onion before adding it to the mixture. Additionally, letting the shaped kofta rest for 10-15 minutes before cooking also helps them stay together.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Mediterranean Chicken Dinners You Might Like

If you enjoyed this chicken kofta recipe, here are a few other Mediterranean chicken dinners to add to your weeknight rotation:

  • For a customizable meal prep-friendly dinner, my Chicken Shawarma Bowl is a great choice. It is a great dinner you can make ahead and enjoy during the week.
  • If you love a mix of savory, spicy, and sweet, my Harissa Honey Chicken is always a hit. All you need is 30 minutes of marinating time.
  • For a hands-on Mediterranean chicken recipe, try cooking Chicken Kabobs in the Oven.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Grilled chicken kofta in a platter from the top view.
Print

Chicken Kofta Recipe

Juicy, tender chicken kofta comes together in less than an hour with simple ingredients. Grill, bake, or pan-sear these seasoned patties and serve with warm bread, crisp salads, or your favorite sides for a delicious Mediterranean dinner.
Course Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Halal
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 6 minutes
Resting time 15 minutes
Total Time 36 minutes
Servings 10 koftas
Calories 103kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 onion medium-size / peeled (about ½ cup)
  • 1 lb ground chicken
  • ½ cup panko breadcrumbs
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ¼ teaspoon baking soda
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon sweet paprika
  • 1 egg
  • 1 ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • ¼ cup fresh Italian parsley chopped
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil to use when shaping the kofta (or water)

Instructions

  • Place a fine mesh strainer over a bowl and set it aside. Using the large holes of a box grater, grate the onion*. Place the grated onion into the strainer. Using the back of a spoon, strain all of its juices. Transfer the onion to a large mixing bowl. Discard the juices.
    Person grating onion and then straining its juices.
  • Into that same bowl, add 1 lb ground chicken, ½ cup of panko breadcrumbs, 2 cloves of minced garlic, ¼ teaspoon of baking soda, 1 teaspoon of ground cumin, 1 teaspoon of sweet paprika, 1 large egg, 1 ½ teaspoon of kosher salt, ½ teaspoon of black pepper, ¼ teaspoon of red pepper flakes, and ¼ of chopped fresh parsley.
    A collage of images showing the making of the chicken kofta mixture.
  • Mix with clean hands until well combined.
  • Pour the olive oil into a small bowl. To shape the kofta, scoop about 2 tablespoons of the mixture, oil your hands lightly, and form into 10 oval patties (or your preferred shape). A cookie scoop works well for even portions.
    Person shaping chicken koftas and grilling them.
  • Arrange the koftas on a platter, cover with plastic wrap, and let them rest at room temperature for 10-15 minutes before cooking.

Cooking On The Grill

  • Preheat a gas grill to medium-high heat. Clean the grates, then oil them using a paper towel dipped in oil.
  • Grill the kofta for 2-3 minutes for each side, turning often, until lightly golden brown and cooked through. They’re ready when an instant-read thermometer inserted into the center registers 165°F.
  • Transfer to a plate and let rest for 5-10 minutes before serving.

In The Oven

  • Preheat your oven to 375 °F (191°C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Arrange the chicken koftas on the baking sheet and bake for 15 minutes, flipping them halfway through the cooking process for even baking.

On The Stove top

  • Heat a tablespoon of olive oil in a cast-iron skillet (or a large non-stick skillet) over medium high heat until shimmering.
  • Place the patties in the skillet, and cook undisturbed, for 2-3 minutes or until lightly golden brown. Continue to cook each side, turning every 2-3 minutes. It should take no more than 8 minutes to cook.*

In The Air Fryer

  • Preheat your air fryer to 375 °F (191°C). Lightly spray (or brush) it with oil.
  • Arrange the koftas in a single layer, leaving enough room between each patty for air to circulate.
  • Air fry for 12-13 minutes, turning them halfway through, until the center of a chicken kofta registers 165°F (74 °C) when inserted with a meat thermometer.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 10 chicken koftas. The nutritional values listed below are per kofta.
  • Grating the onion: I know that grating the onion is the most time-consuming part of this recipe, and I think it is worth the effort, as it allows the onion to blend seamlessly into the meat mixture. However, if you prefer, you can chop your onion finely. Be sure to remove any juices (if present) before use.
  • Baking soda: The small amount of baking soda helps keep the koftas hold their shape. In case you are wondering, no, you won’t taste it in the finished dish.
  • Do not overcrowd the pan*: When cooking on the stove, it is best to cook your koftas in batches to achieve a good crust. If you cook them all at the same time, koftas will steam instead of sear.
  • Storing leftovers: Once your chicken patties come to room temperature, you can place them in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 4 days. You can enjoy them cold or warm. 

Nutrition

Calories: 103kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 55mg | Sodium: 434mg | Potassium: 286mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 267IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kofta/feed/ 2
Turkish Shepherd Salad https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/#respond Mon, 25 Aug 2025 18:22:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83027 What is Shepherd Salad? If there were such a thing as the easiest salad in the world, Shepherd Salad would…]]>

What is Shepherd Salad?

If there were such a thing as the easiest salad in the world, Shepherd Salad would probably top the list. 

The name may sound a little unusual, but it comes from humble origins. In the countryside of Turkey, shepherds carried simple, inexpensive ingredients like tomatoes, cucumbers, onions, and peppers. Out in the fields, they would quickly chop everything and dress it with olive oil and lemon juice for a fresh, no-cook meal.

Shepherd salad in a bowl with spoons on the side.

Because these were the kinds of ingredients that were affordable and easy to find, Shepherd Salad has always been considered a simple, everyday dish rather than a luxury.

Today, Çoban Salatası remains a staple across Turkey and the Eastern Mediterranean. While it shares some similarities with Greek Salad, Shepherd Salad does not usually include cheese or olives, keeping it lighter and more refreshing. 

I left Turkey over 20 years ago, but to this day, I still make this salad almost daily when summer produce is at its peak. It’s one of those recipes that instantly brings me back home.

Simple Ingredients You’ll Need 

You’ll only need a handful of fresh vegetables and pantry staples to make this easy summer salad. You can find the full ingredient list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my experience and from how it is traditionally made in Turkey:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

Tomatoes: Use the ripest, juiciest tomatoes you can find. Heirloom, Roma, cherry, or even steak tomatoes all work well.

Cucumbers: The authentic Turkish shepherd salad recipe uses Persian cucumbers, which are crunchy and with fewer seeds compared to English cucumbers. However, both types can be used in this recipe. If your cucumbers are freshly picked, it is not necessary to peel them, but I recommend tasting them, as older cucumbers may have bitter skin.

Scallions: I opted for scallions (also known as green onions) for their mild flavor, but finely chopped red onion or white onion can be used if you prefer a sharper bite. If you’re using green onions, you can use both the white parts and the green parts.

Green peppers: Traditionally, this salad is made with a Turkish pepper called sivri biber, a long, slender pepper that can range from mild to hot. Since I can’t find it here in the US, I usually use Anaheim peppers or jalapeños. For a milder option, a green bell pepper works as well.

Lemon juice: For the best taste, use freshly squeezed lemon juice, but in a pinch, bottled juice would also work. You can also swap it with white wine vinegar, apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar for a slightly different tang.

Olive oil: I recommend using a mild-flavored extra virgin olive oil.

Sumac powder: Sumac is usually available in the Middle Eastern or Mediterranean section of most grocery stores, sold as sumac spice or sumac powder. I often buy mine online, and if you are new to sumac, I really like Eastanbul Sumac Spice.

Just be sure to check the best-by date, as sumac has a shorter shelf life than many other spices (usually around 6 months).

Fresh herbs: I use fresh flat-leaf parsley in this recipe, but you can easily switch it up with whatever herbs you have on hand. In Turkey, it is very common to add fresh mint, fresh dill, or even a mix of the two.

Optional Add-Ins (Modern Variations):

The traditional Shepherd’s Salad is made with just the basics, but you can easily make it your own with a few optional add-ins. Some of my favorites are:

Olives: A handful of olives is a delicious way to make this salad more substantial and filling. In Turkey, we often use briny, firm varieties like Gemlik olives, but Kalamata and black olives work as well. Any olives you enjoy, even simple green olives, will do the trick.

Feta cheese: For the best taste and creamy texture, choose a good-quality feta made from sheep’s or cow’s milk and stored in brine. 

Dried mint: In some parts of Turkey, a small pinch of dried mint is sprinkled over the salad for more of an earthy flavor. It is not used in every version, but it is a traditional touch that pairs well with the sumac.

Urfa Chile or Aleppo Pepper: For a little heat, you can also sprinkle in some Urfa Chile pepper, Aleppo pepper, or any red pepper flakes you have on hand. For the most authentic result, aim for a variety that isn’t too spicy so the fresh flavors of the salad can really shine.

How to Make Turkish Shepherd Salad (Step-by-Step Guide)

Making Shepherd’s Salad couldn’t be simpler. You don’t need any special equipment; just a sharp knife, a cutting board, and a bowl. Here’s how to prepare it:

A collage of images showing the assembling of shepherd's salad.

Step 1 – Chop the vegetables: One of the hallmarks of this salad is that everything is cut into small, even pieces. This way, every bite has a little bit of everything. Dice the tomatoes, cucumbers, scallions, and peppers, then transfer them to a large bowl.

Step 2 – Add the dressing: Drizzle the vegetables with lemon juice and olive oil. Sprinkle with sumac, salt, and black pepper.

A collage of images showing the mixing of Turkish tomato and cucumber salad.

Step 3 – Finish with herbs: Add the chopped parsley on top. Using salad tongs (or clean hands), gently toss until the vegetables are evenly coated. Tossing gently is key, as it helps keep the tomatoes from getting mushy.

Step 4 – Serve: Enjoy right away while the vegetables are crisp and fresh. Shepherd’s Salad is best served immediately, since the salt and lemon juice draw water out of the vegetables, and the salad can become watery if it sits too long.

Storing Leftovers & Making Ahead

Making Ahead: You can chop the vegetables a few hours in advance and store them covered in the refrigerator. For the best texture, wait to add the dressing until just before serving to keep the vegetables crisp and prevent too much liquid from collecting in the bowl.

Storing Leftovers: Place any leftovers in an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 2 days. Keep in mind that the vegetables will naturally release some liquid as they sit, which will make the salad softer the next day. If that happens, just give it a quick toss and, if needed, add a squeeze of fresh lemon juice to brighten it back up.

Freezing: Freezing is not recommended since the vegetables lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the freshest taste and crunch, enjoy this salad right away.

Expert Tips:

While Shepherd’s Salad is simple to make, a few small details can take it from good to truly authentic. Here are my best tips:

  • Use fresh ingredients: This salad depends on peak-season produce. Ripe, juicy tomatoes and crisp cucumbers make all the difference. If your vegetables aren’t in season, sprinkle them with a pinch of salt and let them sit for a few minutes to bring out their natural juices.
  • Finely chop the vegetables: The traditional way in Turkey is to cut everything into small, even pieces. This will give you a mix of everything in each bite, and it will also ensure the lemon and olive oil coat everything evenly.
  • Season just before serving: Salt and lemon juice draw liquid out of the vegetables, especially tomatoes. So to keep the salad crisp, add the dressing and seasonings right before you bring it to the table.
  • Mix gently: Toss the salad lightly with your hands or salad tongs so the tomatoes don’t break down and become mushy.
  • Keep it chilled: Shepherd’s Salad is especially refreshing when served slightly cold. If you prep the vegetables ahead, store them in the fridge and dress just before serving.

Delicious Ways to Serve Turkish Shepherd Salad:

The pairing options are endless for this Turkish tomato and cucumber salad. While you can enjoy it with nearly any meal, here are some of my favorite ways to serve it:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Turkish shepherd salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Turkish Shepherd Salad Recipe

An authentic Turkish Shepherd Salad (Çoban Salatası) made with juicy tomatoes, crisp cucumbers, peppers, onions, and parsley. Light, refreshing, and ready in just 15 minutes.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 119kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 medium-sized tomatoes diced into 1 ½ inch cubes
  • 3 Persian cucumbers peeled and sliced ¼ inch thick
  • 2 scallions both green and white parts, thinly sliced
  • 2 green peppers Aneheim peppers, jalapenos, or serrano peppers – seeds removed and sliced thinly
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon sumac
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Place tomatoes, cucumbers, scallions, and green peppers in a large bowl or a large platter.
    Side by side images showing the ingredients of Turkish shepherd's salad.
  • Drizzle it with lemon juice, olive oil, and season with salt, pepper, and sumac.
  • Sprinkle it with fresh parsley and toss to combine.
    Side by side photos showing the making of coban salad.
  • Serve it right away.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6 cups of salad (depending on the size of your vegetables), and it is ideal for 4 (large) servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Place leftovers in an airtight container and keep them in the fridge for up to 2 days. It is normal for the vegetables to release their juices as they sit. Just give it a stir before serving.
  • Optional add-ins: As I was writing this recipe, I wanted to stay true to the traditional recipe. However, some modern-day versions of this recipe add other ingredients like a handful of crumbled feta cheese, chopped black olives, and a sprinkle of red pepper flakes (or Urfa chile if you can get your hands on.) All of these would be great addition to the recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 119kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 588mg | Potassium: 247mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 748IU | Vitamin C: 61mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg

FAQ’s

What’s the difference between Turkish Shepherd Salad and Greek Salad?

Both salads feature tomatoes and cucumbers as their base, but they are prepared and served differently. In Turkish Shepherd Salad, the vegetables are finely chopped so every bite has a mix of everything. It’s dressed simply with olive oil, lemon juice, and sometimes a sprinkle of sumac, and traditionally does not include cheese or olives (though you can add them if you like).

Greek Salad (Horiatiki), on the other hand, is made with larger chunks of vegetables and usually includes feta cheese, olives, and oregano, giving it a heartier and more briny flavor.

Can I add cheese to Turkish Shepherd Salad?

While it is not traditional, you can sprinkle it with a handful of crumbled feta cheese.

What does Çoban mean in Turkish?

Çoban, pronounced as Chough-bahn, means Shepherd.

Other Turkish Salads You Might Like:

Turkish cuisine is known for similar, easy-to-make salads like this one that you can make during the peak tomato season. A few of my favorites are:

  • Summer tomatoes mixed in with white beans and red onions, Piyaz (Turkish White Bean Salad) is yet another simple salad 
  • At every kebab restaurant in Turkey, you’ll find a side of ezme, and my version shows you how to make this authentic “Turkish salsa” at home with just a few simple ingredients.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/feed/ 0
Turkish Ezme https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-ezme/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-ezme/#respond Mon, 25 Aug 2025 18:22:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82987 What Is Turkish Ezme? Ezme is a finely chopped Turkish tomato salad or dip that you can make in 10…]]>

What Is Turkish Ezme?

Ezme is a finely chopped Turkish tomato salad or dip that you can make in 10 minutes. Today, I’m sharing my mom’s version, along with the tips I’ve learned from her, to make it authentically spicy or more gentle.

This year, I made it my mission to share some of my favorite kebab recipes, and you simply can’t talk about kebabs without mentioning their ultimate pairing: Turkish ezme

Turkish ezme on an oval plate from the top view.

Pronounced exactly as it looks, this bright tomato salad (or dip) is one of the most authentic dishes you’ll find alongside kebabs in Turkey.

Often described as a Turkish “salsa” by those trying it for the first time, for those of us who grew up with this simple dish, Turkish ezme is so much more. It’s refreshing, a little spicy, and the perfect companion not only to kebabs but to any grilled meats.

Originating from the regions best known for their kebabs, Gaziantep, Urfa, Adana, and Mardin, Turkish ezme is a staple that’s deeply woven into the kebab tradition. Each region puts its own spin on it; Gaziantep’s version (referred to as Antep Ezme) is usually spicier, while Urfa’s might lean more tomato-forward.

If you’ve ever been to a kebab restaurant, you’ll know what I mean. The moment you order, they don’t ask whether you’d like ezme on the side. They just bring it, often with a side of lavash or pita bread for scooping, along with other staples like cacik (pronounced ja-juk, aka the Turkish cousin of tzatziki) and hummus. It’s part of the ritual, and to me, it’s as essential as the kebab itself.

Traditional Turkish ezme is made with finely chopped onions, ripe tomatoes, and peppers mixed with red pepper paste, lemon juice, and a handful of spices. 

Depending on how it’s prepared, it can be spicy (called Acılı Ezme) or more mild if you remove the seeds of the peppers or cut back on the red pepper flakes.

Ingredients You’ll Need & Why They Matter

The ingredients in Turkish Ezme dip are simple, fresh, and rooted in the flavors of the Eastern Mediterranean. While it uses everyday ingredients, there are some nuances that I’d like to share to ensure your version is as close to the original.

Ingredients for the recipe with text on each ingredient.

Yellow Onion: Traditional Ezme is made with yellow or white onions. At first, a whole onion may seem like a lot, but once it’s finely chopped and mixed in, it melts into the salad and gives just the right balance. 

While not traditional, red onion would also work, but it would have a slightly sweeter flavor.

Garlic: The authentic version of this Turkish dipping sauce does not use garlic, but my mom always did, so I am following in her footsteps. That small tweak is what makes my family’s version unique. It can be omitted if you are a purist.

Kosher Salt: I use kosher salt not only to flavor the overall ezme but also to soften the chopped onion and garlic. It also helps mellow their sharp, raw flavors.

Tomatoes: Authentic Turkish ezme is traditionally made with tomatoes from the Southeastern region of Turkey. Because of the hot, dry climate, those tomatoes are less juicy than what we often find here in the US.

For the best results, use firm, not overly ripe, tomatoes such as Roma, heirloom, or even cherry tomatoes. Whatever you choose, it’s important to remove the seeds.

Ezme should be juicy enough to scoop up with bread but not watery. If taking the seeds out feels like too much work, you can chop the tomatoes finely and strain them briefly through a fine mesh sieve to get rid of the excess liquid.

In the winter months, when good tomatoes are harder to come by, some people turn to canned whole peeled tomatoes. While that can work in a pinch, I find the taste of fresh tomatoes makes the biggest difference in capturing the true spirit of ezme.

Green Peppers: The authentic recipe uses Turkish sivri biber. The name literally means “pointed pepper,” and that’s exactly what it looks like: long, thin, and tapering to a point. 

Since I cannot get my hands on sivri biber here in the US, I use Anaheim, jalapeno, or serranos as an alternative. I remove seeds to keep the spice levels mild, but if you prefer yours spicy (and want to make an acili ezme recipe, as we say in Turkish), feel free to keep some.

Red Pepper Paste (or Tomato Paste): Red pepper paste is yet another traditional ingredient used in most kebab and meze recipes. I buy mine online. Tukas’s red pepper paste is my favorite. However, tomato paste is a good substitute.

Lemon Juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice is the best, but if bottled juice is all you have on hand, that would work in a pinch.

Fresh Herbs: I kept the recipe simple and only used fresh parsley, but my mom always added a few tablespoons of chopped fresh mint and dill in addition to parsley. If you are growing your own herbs, this is a fantastic recipe to put them to good use.

Sumac: A sprinkle of sumac is the finishing touch for this Turkish salad. I buy sumac online, but you can find it in the Middle Eastern/Mediterranean section of your grocery store. If you can’t get your hands on it, you can omit it. Your salad will still taste great.

Urfa Chili Pepper (or Aleppo Pepper or Red Pepper Flakes): For a smoky finish, use the traditional Urfa chili (Urfa biber). If you prefer a bit more straightforward, less smoky, bright finish, use Aleppo chili (Pul biber). If you do not have either of those, a pinch of any red pepper flakes you have on hand would also work.

Optional Add Ins:

Classic Turkish ezme is usually made with the ingredients I listed above, but depending on the region and sometimes the creativity of the chef, you will find different variations. The add-ins below are not traditional in every version, but they are wonderful ways to build on the base and make it your own.
Pomegranate Molasses (optional): You’ll often see restaurants finish off this Turkish red sauce with a drizzle of pomegranate molasses, especially if they are serving it as a part of a meze platter. 

While it is an optional ingredient in this recipe, if you are into Mediterranean cooking, I highly recommend investing in a bottle. It provides a unique depth, a fruity tartness that can’t be replicated with just lemon juice.

When shopping for pomegranate molasses, look for a brand that lists only one ingredient: pomegranate concentrate. That way, you’ll get the purest taste without added sugar or preservatives. The one I always buy online is Eastanbul.

Olive Oil: A tablespoon (or two) of olive oil drizzled at the last minute makes it richer. I recommend an extra virgin olive oil that is mild in flavor, such as Garcia de la Cruz.

Walnuts: A close cousin of Turkish ezme is a dish called Gavurdağı Salatası. In some parts of Turkey, it’s common to add a handful of chopped walnuts, which makes the salad richer and adds a pleasant crunch. You can mix them in with the vegetables or simply sprinkle them on top as a garnish.

Pomegranate Seeds: For a beautiful pop of color, a juicy burst of sweet-tart flavor, and a delicate crunch that makes the dish feel even more special, you can add (2 tablespoons) pomegranate seeds.

How to Make Turkish Ezme?

Making this authentic recipe is surprisingly simple, and it all starts with fresh, high-quality ingredients. This Turkish dip gets its signature texture from chopping everything very finely by hand, which gives the salad its unique, crushed consistency. Here is how I make it in my kitchen:

Person chopping onions.

Step 1 – Mince and Soften the Aromatics: On a large cutting board, finely chop the onion and garlic. Sprinkle them with kosher salt and gently knead the mixture with your hands.
Adding the salt not only helps soften the raw onions but also mellow their sharpness. Transfer the mixture to a medium-size mixing bowl.

A collage of images showing of the cutting tomatoes and peppers.

Step 2 – Add the Fresh Vegetables: Using a sharp knife, carefully remove the seeds from the tomatoes and chop them finely. If you’d rather not fuss with seeding, chop them and give them a quick press through a fine mesh sieve to remove the extra liquid.

Next, remove the seeds from your peppers and chop them as finely as possible. When cutting peppers, I highly recommend wearing gloves if you have them. The oils can cause a burning sensation on your hands and sting really badly if you accidentally touch your eyes.

Transfer the tomatoes and the peppers to the bowl. Some cooks use a food processor for convenience, but I find it’s easy to over-process and end up with more of a puree of vegetables. I think hand chopping is worth the effort, especially if you are looking for the most authentic version of this Turkish red sauce.

Person mixing the ingredients for ezme in a bowl.

Step 3 – Mix in the Flavorings: Stir in the red pepper paste (or tomato paste), lemon juice, chopped parsley, sumac, and Urfa chili flakes (if using).

Step 4 – Thoroughly Combine: Using a large spoon, gently mix everything together until all the ingredients are well incorporated and evenly coated. Don’t rush this step, as ezme should feel like one unified mix, not separate vegetables.

Step 5 – Finish and Serve: You can serve it straight from the bowl, but if you want to do it the way we do it in Turkey, then transfer it to a small to medium-sized oval plate. Drizzle with pomegranate molasses or olive oil (if using) and serve right away, ideally with some warm pita or lavash on the side.

Make Ahead and Storage Tips

Make Ahead: This Turkish dip actually tastes even better after it has rested. I often make it a few hours in advance and let it chill in the fridge so the flavors can deepen and meld.

Keep in mind that the juices will settle as they sit, so you may have to drain them before serving.

Storage: Leftover ezme keeps well for 2-3 days when stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Just be sure to give it a good stir before serving, and again, drain the juices as needed.

Freezing: This dish is best when enjoyed fresh, so I do not recommend freezing it as it will lose its signature texture when thawed.

Expert Tips from My Turkish Kitchen

Use a fine mince when chopping by hand: The secret to ezme’s classic texture is how finely everything is chopped. You don’t want big chunks in there. Take your time when chopping; it is part of what makes this recipe so good.

Dealing with excess juice: Earlier, I mentioned removing the seeds from the tomatoes to get the authentic texture that ezme is known for. But if you don’t mind some extra juice, that’s perfectly fine too. It will still taste fresh and delicious.

Using a food processor: My mom would probably turn in her grave if she saw me recommending a food processor when making ezme. Traditionally, everything is chopped by hand, and I still believe that’s the best way to get the right texture. That said, I know it can be a real time-saver, especially if you’re making a big batch.

If you do decide to use one, here’s what I recommend:

  • Start with the harder vegetables (onions, garlic, peppers) and chop them finely before adding the softer tomatoes.
  • Once you add the tomatoes, use short pulses instead of running the machine continuously. This helps you avoid ending up with a puree and keeps that slightly crushed consistency that makes ezme special.

Make it your own: Once you’ve made the basic recipe I shared below, try creating your version by adding a bit more heat (there is a reason people ask for ‘acili ezme’, the spicy version of this dish) or incorporating some of the optional ingredients I mentioned above.

How to Serve Turkish Ezme (The Ultimate Kebab Side Dish)

Ezme is one of those dishes that goes with almost everything. While it’s a classic alongside kebabs, its fresh, tangy flavor also makes it a great match for other Mediterranean favorites, from grilled meats to mezze platters.

  • With Kebabs or Grilled Meats: Ezme is the ultimate side to dishes like Adana Kebab or Chicken Kebab. Its acidity and spice help balance the richness of the meat, which is exactly why it’s such a common pairing in Turkey.
  • Part of a Meze Platter: Add it to a Mediterranean-inspired mezze platter alongside hummus, baba ganoush, and muhammara. Don’t forget the lavash, Turkish pide bread, or pita bread (or pita chips) for scooping! This dish is meant for sharing.
  • As a Spread or Sandwich Topping: Use leftover ezme as a spread for sandwiches or wraps the next day. It’s especially good on my Grilled Lamb Burgers, adding a bright, tangy kick that makes them even more special.
Spicy ezme served on an oval plate from the top view.
Print

Turkish Ezme Recipe

This authentic Turkish Ezme is a refreshing tomato and pepper salad that pairs perfectly with kebabs or grilled meats. Quick, fresh, and versatile. Vegan, no-cook, and gluten-free recipe.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 73kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 yellow onion medium size
  • 1 clove garlic finely minced
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 4 medium tomatoes
  • 2 green peppers Anaheim, jalapeño, or serrano, seeded
  • 1 tablespoon Turkish red pepper paste or tomato paste
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped
  • 1 tablespoon sumac
  • ¼ teaspoon Urfa chili Aleppo pepper, or red pepper flakes (optional)
  • 2 tablespoons pomegranate molasses optional

Instructions

  • On a large cutting board, finely chop onion and garlic. Sprinkle with kosher salt and knead gently to soften. Transfer to a large bowl.
    Person chopping onions for ezme.
  • Remove the seeds of your tomatoes and give them a fine chop. Alternatively, you can chop them first and strain through a fine mesh strainer to remove the juices. Transfer the tomatoes to the bowl.
    Person chopping tomatoes and peppers on a cutting board.
  • Chop the seeded peppers finely and add them to the bowl.
  • Stir in the red pepper paste, lemon juice, parsley, sumac, and chili flakes (if using). Mix well to combine.
    Person mixing ezme salad ingredients in a bowl.
  • If using, drizzle with pomegranate molasses and serve*.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 to 2 1/2 cups of ezme, which is ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Leftovers will keep well for 2-3 days when stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator.
  • *Let it rest before serving: It is optional, but if you have the time, chill it in the fridge for about 30 minutes before serving. This gives the ingredients a chance to mingle and develop deeper flavor. Just keep in mind that it will release some of its juices as it sits, so you may want to spoon out the excess liquid before bringing it to the table.
  • Adjusting the spiciness: If you prefer your ezme to be on the milder side, I recommend taking the time to remove all of the seeds of your peppers and avoid using red pepper flakes.

Nutrition

Calories: 73kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.5g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 624mg | Potassium: 512mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 1623IU | Vitamin C: 77mg | Calcium: 34mg | Iron: 1mg

FAQ’s

Is ezme spicy?

Ezme has a gentle heat, but you can easily control the spice level. If you prefer it mild (or not spicy at all), take the time to remove all of the seeds of your peppers and omit using red pepper flakes.

How does Acılı ezme vary by region?

In Turkey, every region puts its own spin on ezme. In Gaziantep, it’s usually spicier, in Urfa it leans more tomato-forward, and in Adana it often includes extra pepper paste. My mom’s version here is closest to what you would find in kebab restaurants across the country.

Can I make it less acidic?

Absolutely. If you’re sensitive to acidity, try reducing the amount of fresh lemon juice or skipping the pomegranate molasses. It will still taste fresh and delicious.

How long does Turkish ezme last in the fridge?

As long as it is stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator, it should still be fresh for up to 3 days.

Other Turkish Salads You Might Like:

If you’re already convinced to make this Turkish ezme salad recipe, you’re already on your way to creating a fantastic feast. Here are a few more fresh and delicious Turkish salad recipes to serve alongside your grilled meats:

  • My go-to Turkish summer salad, Piyaz, is A zesty and refreshing salad made with white beans, red onions, tomatoes, and parsley, all tossed in a simple lemon-olive oil dressing. It’s a perfect complement to rich, grilled meats.
  • For a simple side salad that will pretty much work with any grilled meat and vegetable, look no further than my Turkish Shepherd Salad.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-ezme/feed/ 0
Sumac Onions Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/sumac-onions/ https://foolproofliving.com/sumac-onions/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 21:22:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82353 What Are Sumac Onions? Growing up in Turkey, sumac onions were always on the table. For us, they were what…]]>

What Are Sumac Onions?

Growing up in Turkey, sumac onions were always on the table. For us, they were what pickled onions are for many American homes: a simple, tangy side that brightens up almost any meal.

While we called it “sumac onions” and served it more like a condiment, some people also refer to it as a “red onion salad” and serve it as a side dish. Both are perfectly acceptable.

Sumac onions in a bowl from a top view.

Now, in case you are not familiar, the key ingredient is sumac. It is a deep red spice made from dried berries (not peppers, though many people think so) with a tangy lemony flavor and slightly earthy taste. Unlike chili powders, it isn’t spicy hot.

When mixed with thinly sliced red onions, sumac helps tame their sharpness, turning them into a slightly sweet and refreshing bite. That’s why you’ll often see sumac onions served alongside meat-centric dishes like lamb, beef, or chicken kebabs. They cut through the richness and spice, bringing a welcome crunch and a pop of brightness to every bite.

Simple Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll need only a few basic pantry staples to make this sumac onions recipe. You can find the complete list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Ingredients for sumac red onions in bowls from the top view.

Red Onion: Since this is the main ingredient, use a fresh red onion and slice it as thinly as possible. A sharp knife works well, but a mandolin ensures even slices. In a pinch, you can substitute white or yellow onions, though the flavor will be slightly different.

Extra Virgin Olive Oil: A mild-flavored olive oil works best.

Lemon Juice: My mom always used lemon juice, as most Turkish families do, but other acidic ingredients like apple cider vinegar, red wine vinegar, or lime juice also work. Keep in mind, though, that the flavor profile will vary depending on the acid you use.

Kosher Salt: I used Diamond kosher salt, but if you are using other brands like Morton’s or sea salt, I would use half the amount and adjust it as necessary.

Sumac: Usually available in the Middle Eastern section of most supermarkets, sold as sumac spice or sumac powder. If you’re new to sumac, I really like Eastanbul sumac spice (affiliate link). Keep an eye on the best-by date, since sumac typically has a shorter shelf life than many other spices, about 6 months.

Red Pepper Flakes (Urfa Chili or Aleppo Pepper): Optional, but the authentic version often uses a pinch of Urfa chili or Aleppo pepper. If you can’t get your hands on either one of those, any other red pepper flakes you have on hand would also work.

Fresh Chopped Parsley: Finely chopped parsley is traditional, but you can switch it up depending on the dish you are serving it with. For example, fresh mint pairs beautifully when serving with lamb.

Pomegranate molasses (optional): A drizzle of pomegranate molasses is optional, but it would add a nice sweetness, especially if you are serving this with kebabs.

Tomatoes (optional): If I am serving this sumac onion salad with lamb kabobs like the traditional Adana Kebab, I add a handful of halved cherry tomatoes. They bring a pop of color and an extra touch of freshness.

How to Make Sumac Onions (Step-by-Step Guide)

Making Turkish sumac onions is as straightforward as it gets. You don’t need any special equipment, just a sharp knife and a bowl. Follow these simple steps, and you’ll have a tangy, refreshing side ready to serve with your favorite dishes.

A collage of images showing thinly sliced onion and a bowl of onions mixed with the rest of the ingredients.

Step 1 – Slice the onions: On a sturdy cutting board, cut the red onion in half lengthwise. Remove the skins and slice thinly into half-moon shapes. A sharp knife works best, but always keep the flat side of the onion against the board for safety.

Step 2 – Mix the ingredients: Place the sliced onion in a medium bowl. Add the olive oil, lemon juice, kosher salt, sumac, and Aleppo pepper (if using).

A collage of images showing thinly sliced red onions being massaged and garnished with parsley.

Step 3 – Massage: Using clean hands, gently massage the onions for 1-2 minutes, until they have softened slightly and absorbed the seasonings.

Step 4 – Garnish and rest: Sprinkle with chopped parsley and toss to combine. If you have the time, cover and refrigerate for 10-15 minutes before serving to let the flavors meld.

Helpful Expert Tips

Whether you’re serving sumac pickled onions as a condiment for kebabs or tucking them into sandwiches, this recipe is simple enough for anyone to make. Still, a few tips can help you get the best results on your first try:

  • Soak the onions if needed: If you’re sensitive to the strong, pungent taste of red onions, soak the slices in cold tap water with a pinch of salt for about 10 minutes, then drain before mixing. This works especially well if you plan to serve them right away. However, keep in mind that if you are making them ahead, this step is unnecessary, as their sharpness naturally mellows as they sit in the fridge.
  • Use fresh sumac: Unlike many other spices, sumac has a relatively short shelf life. Check the freshness before using it. I list one tablespoon in the recipe, but I often add closer to 2 tablespoons at home because I love the flavor. Taste and adjust to your preference.
  • Slice evenly: Try to cut the onions into even slices so each bite has the same texture and balance of seasoning. A mandolin can be helpful, but a sharp chef’s knife works just fine.
  • Don’t skip the massage: Gently massaging for a minute not only softens the onions but also helps them absorb the sumac and other seasonings more fully. 
  • Serve slightly chilled: While you can enjoy them right away, serving them chilled adds a refreshing crunch that pairs especially well with rich meat dishes.
  • Watch out for stains: Sumac has a deep red color, and when mixed with red onions, it can easily stain.. Avoid wearing your favorite white shirt while preparing it, and consider using gloves if you prefer.

Delicious Ways to Serve Sumac Onions

The pairing options are endless for this Turkish onion salad. While you can serve it with nearly any savory dish, here are some of my favorite ways to enjoy it:

  • With Kebabs & Grilled Meats: Sumac onions are the classic pairing with the rich, smoky kebabs that Turkish, Lebanese, and other Middle Eastern cuisines are known for. I especially love to serve on top of my Adana Kebab, Chicken Shish Tawook, Doner Kebab, and Oven Chicken Kebabs.
  • With Shawarma: Their tangy bite balances the spices in shawarma beautifully. Try them with my Easy Chicken Shawarma or Beef Shawarma.
  • In Bowls: Add freshness and brightness to grain or salad bowls. They’re perfect on top of a Chicken Shawarma Bowl or a Homemade CAVA Bowl.
  • With Seafood Dishes: They pair wonderfully with Grilled or Baked salmon, adding contrast to the richness of the fish.
  • Make it a part of your mezze platter: Serve it along with other mezze platter staples like Hummus, Muhammara, and Baba Ganoush.
  • Vegetarian & Vegan Favorites: Sumac onions bring life to plant-based meals, adding a burst of freshness that makes every bite more satisfying. I love serving them alongside Rice with Vermicelli or crispy Falafel.

Storing Leftovers & Making Ahead

Making Ahead: This recipe is perfect for meal prep since the onions continue to mellow and develop flavor as they sit. You can make them 2–3 days in advance and store them in an airtight container or mason jar in the fridge.

Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers refrigerated for 3 to 4 days. Just give them a quick stir before serving to mix the seasonings back in.

Freezing: Freezing isn’t recommended, as the onions lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the best taste and crunch, enjoy them fresh.

Zoomed in photo of sumac onions in a bowl.

FAQs

What do sumac onions taste like?

Sumac onions have a bright, tangy taste with a hint of sweetness. The sumac adds an earthy, citrus-like note that softens the sharpness of raw red onions.

How do you make raw onions less strong/pungent?

If you find raw onions too sharp, soak the slices in a bowl of cold water with a pinch of salt for about 10 minutes, then drain well before using.

How long do sumac onions last / How should I store sumac onions?

They should last for 3-4 days as long as they are stored in an airtight container or a jar with a tight-fitting lid.

Can I add other ingredients or variations?

Yes, absolutely. Sumac onions are very versatile. You can drizzle in a little pomegranate molasses for extra sweetness, swap in fresh mint instead of parsley, or add spices like ground cumin for a different twist.

Other Middle Eastern/Mediterranean Condiments You Might Like

If you enjoy this onion sumac salad, chances are you’ll love other Middle Eastern and Mediterranean condiments too. Here are a few to try next:

  • If you’re a fan of the bold, spicy flavors of the region, my homemade harissa recipe is a must-try.
  • Bright and earthy with lemon and garlic, tahini sauce is one of the easiest ways to add depth to grilled meats or roasted vegetables.
  • When you want to mellow out the richness of kebabs or grilled meats, everyone’s favorite creamy Greek white sauce (known as tzatziki) made with cucumber, garlic, and dill is hard to beat.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Turkish red onion sumac salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Sumac Onions Recipe

These quick and tangy Sumac Onions are a quick Middle Eastern condiment. Made with thinly sliced red onions, lemon juice, olive oil, and sumac, they add a refreshing, citrusy bite that balances rich dishes like kebabs, shawarma, or grilled fish. Serve as a side, condiment, or salad for a fresh pop of flavor.
Course Condiment
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 45kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 red onion medium sized
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoon sumac
  • ¼ teaspoon Urfa or Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Cut onions in half lengthwise, remove the skins, and slice thinly into half-moon shapes. Transfer to a medium bowl.
  • Add the olive oil, lemon juice, Kosher salt, sumac, and Aleppo pepper.
    Two images side by side showing onions being thinly sliced and onions in a bowl garnished with sumac.
  • Using your hands, gently massage the onions for 1–2 minutes until they soften slightly and absorb the seasonings.
  • Add the parsley and toss to combine.
    A collage of images showing sumac onions massaged and then garnished with parsley.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes ½ to ¾ of sumac onions, which would be ideal for serving 4 adults. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Onions: While the traditional recipe is made with red onions, in a pinch, you can use white onions, but keep in mind that the flavor profile will be slightly different.
  • Make Ahead: These onions get even better as they sit. You can prepare them 2-3 days in advance and store them in an airtight container or jar in the fridge.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in the fridge for up to 4 days. Just give them a quick stir before serving to mix the seasonings back in.
  • Freezing: Not recommended, as the onions lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the best flavor and crunch, enjoy them fresh.

Nutrition

Calories: 45kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 295mg | Potassium: 61mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 207IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 10mg | Iron: 0.2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/sumac-onions/feed/ 0
Lavash Bread Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/lavash-bread-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/lavash-bread-recipe/#comments Tue, 29 Jul 2025 21:19:46 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82286 If you’ve ever been to a Middle Eastern or Mediterranean restaurant, chances are you’ve had lavash. Similar to pita, it’s…]]>

If you’ve ever been to a Middle Eastern or Mediterranean restaurant, chances are you’ve had lavash. Similar to pita, it’s the go-to bread for serving with kebabs, dips, and salads. Growing up in Turkey, I learned early on that you simply don’t eat kebab without a piece of warm lavash.

Yes, you can find it at the store, but once you taste a freshly cooked, puffed-up lavash straight from the skillet, there’s no going back. And the best part? It’s easier to make than you think.

In this post, I’ll walk you through the step-by-step process of making lavash bread, complete with foolproof tips and troubleshooting advice, so you can confidently make it at home anytime.

What is Lavash? A Journey Through This Ancient Flatbread

Lavash (or lavaş, as we call it in Turkey) is a soft, thin flatbread with ancient roots stretching across the Middle East and Central Asia. While the lavash bread recipe may vary slightly from region to region, it is a staple in many countries across the region, including Armenia, Iran, Kazakhstan, Azerbaijan, and Turkey.

At its core, lavash is as simple as bread gets: just flour, water, salt, sugar, milk (optional), and yeast. But despite the short ingredient list, the result is anything but basic. 

Depending on where it’s made, lavash can be thick and chewy or paper-thin and crisp. 

My version here sits right in the middle; soft enough to wrap around your favorite kebabs but sturdy enough to use it as a utensil to scoop up dips and salads just like we do in Turkey.

Essential Ingredients for Lavash Bread

The traditional lavash bread recipes you’ll find in cookbooks are usually made with just three ingredients: flour, water, and salt. 

While that version is beautiful in its simplicity, it can take a bit more time and technique to get right. In my version, I use a small amount of yeast to help the dough rise more easily, a splash of milk for a softer texture, and a touch of sugar (or, in my case, honey) to feed the yeast and get it bubbling faster.

You’ll find the exact measurements of this homemade lavash recipe in the recipe card below, but here are a few essential notes and tips from my testing to help you get the best results every time.

Ingredients for the recipe are in small bowls from the top view.

Water: We use lukewarm water (around 110 °F – 43 °C) to activate the yeast. The temperature is important here because if it is colder, the yeast will not activate, and if it is hotter, it will kill it. 

Yeast: I use instant yeast in this recipe, but I still bloom it in warm water with a bit of honey to give it a head start. This step isn’t always necessary with instant yeast, but I’ve found it helps create a better rise and a more reliable dough. 

If you only have active dry yeast, you can use it the same way, just make sure it foams up before moving on.

Sugar: A small amount of sugar helps feed the yeast and encourages it to bubble up during the resting period. You can use granulated sugar, but I like to use honey to keep this recipe free of refined sugar. Either one will do the job.

Extra Virgin Olive Oil: I use a little bit of extra virgin olive oil, mostly for flavor. It adds a subtle richness to the dough and helps keep the lavash soft. 

Milk: A small amount of milk makes the dough softer and adds a slightly richer texture. I use whole milk, but any kind you have on hand will work. Just make sure it’s at room temperature so it doesn’t interfere with the rising time. 

If you prefer a dairy-free version, you can use water instead.

All-Purpose Flour vs. Bread Flour: The recipe I am sharing here is made with all-purpose flour, which yields a soft and pliable dough that is perfect for rolling kebabs. If you prefer a sturdier, chewier texture, you can swap in bread flour instead. It has a higher protein content, which gives the dough more structure.

Kosher salt: I used Diamond kosher salt, which is less salty than most kosher salts. If you use other brands, such as Morton’s, be sure to use half the amount. 

Step-by-Step: How to Make Lavash Bread at Home

Whenever I make any kind of bread, I always want to know how far in advance to start, especially if I’m planning to serve it for dinner. This easy lavash recipe takes about 1.5 hours from start to finish, including time to knead, rise, and cook. So if dinner’s at 7, starting around 5:30 pm is just right.

This recipe makes 10 lavash, just in case you are planning ahead or cooking for a crowd.

Here’s how to make lavash at home, step by step:

Yeast is activated and mixed with oil in a bowl.

Step 1 – Activate the Yeast: Place the lukewarm water (around 110°F / 43°C) and honey (or sugar) in a measuring cup. Stir well to make sure the honey is fully dissolved. Add the yeast and let it sit for 5 minutes, or until you see a grey-ish thick layer of bubbly foam on top. Then stir in the olive oil and milk until fully combined.

Wet ingredients are added into the dry ones and mixed.

Step 2 – Combine Wet & Dry Ingredients: In a large mixing bowl, combine the flour and salt. Pour in the yeast mixture and knead the dough with clean hands for about 5 minutes, or until no dry flour remains. 

At this point, the dough (and your hands) will be sticky, and that is totally normal. As you knead, turn the dough frequently to ensure everything comes together evenly.

The bread dough risen and then kneaded.

Step 3 – First Rise: Cover the bowl with a clean kitchen towel (or loosely with plastic wrap) and let it rise in a warm part of your kitchen for 20 minutes. By the end of that time, it should look a little smoother and slightly puffed in volume.

Step 4 – Knead the Dough: Lightly flour your kitchen counter and transfer the dough over. Knead it for about 5 minutes.

You don’t really need much of a technique here, but when I’m kneading it, I usually press the whole dough with the heel of my hand, push it away, fold it back over, and give it a turn. Then I just keep repeating that motion until the dough feels smooth and stretchy.

It shouldn’t be too sticky, but if it is, go ahead and sprinkle in a bit more flour, just a little at a time (no more than a tablespoon). You don’t want to use too much flour, as this can make your lavash too dry or stiff.

Alternatively, you can knead the dough in a stand mixer using the dough hook. However, keep in mind that you might not need to knead it as long. The visual cue to pay attention to is for the dough to be smooth and no longer sticking to the sides.

The dough rolled and cut into the balls.

Step 5 – Divide the Dough: Shape the dough into a log approximately 12 inches long and divide it into 10 equal pieces. When you go with 10, each lavash ends up being about 9 to 10 inches in diameter once it is rolled out and cooked. If your skillet is smaller, you can divide the dough into 12 and make slightly smaller ones.

You can totally eyeball it, but if you want all your lavash to be about the same size, a kitchen scale helps.

Grab a dinner plate and sprinkle it with a little flour. Roll each piece into a ball and place them on the plate. Then cover them loosely with a kitchen towel and let them rest for 20 minutes.

The lavash dough is rolled out.

Step 6 – Heat the Skillet & Roll Out the Dough: When you are ready to cook, heat a large (10- or 12-inch) nonstick or cast-iron skillet over high heat until it is really hot. This part is essential because if the pan isn’t hot enough, the dough will stick. You’ll know it is ready when a few drops of water sizzle and disappear almost instantly.

While the pan heats up, start rolling out the dough. Take one ball at a time and roll it into a 9- to 10-inch circle using a rolling pin. Do your best to keep it round, but I’ll be honest; it is a little tricky at first. 

The good news? It gets easier the more you do it, and honestly, a slightly wonky lavash still tastes just as good.

The lavash cooked in a skillet from the top view.

Step 7 – Cook the Lavash: Before you start rolling, grab a basket (a tortilla warmer works beautifully if you have one) or a bowl and line it with a kitchen towel. We need a place to store the freshly cooked lavash and keep it soft and warm. Set that aside.

Carefully transfer the rolled-out dough to the hot skillet. Within 10 to 15 seconds, you should see little bubbles start to form on the surface. Give it a flip, cook for another 10 seconds, then flip again. As it cooks and puffs, you’ll see golden brown spots start to appear, which is exactly what we want.

Keep flipping every 10-15 seconds, and cook for about 40-50 seconds total, or until both sides are cooked and it has some nice color.

Transfer the freshly cooked lavash to your prepared basket and cover it with the towel to keep it warm. Then just repeat the process (roll, cook, and store) for the remaining dough balls.

Expert Tips 

Roll it out thin: The key to getting soft, pliable lavash is rolling the dough really thin. I know it is tempting to focus on making a perfect circle, but honestly, thinness matters more than shape. Even if your lavash isn’t perfectly round, it will still taste great.

And if you have a pasta machine, that is a great shortcut to get an even, thin sheet of dough without too much effort.

Go easy on the extra flour: It is tempting to keep adding flour if the dough feels sticky, but try to trust the process and the visual cues I mentioned earlier. Only add more flour when the dough really starts to stick (especially while rolling), and try to work quickly. Too much flour can lead to stiff, dry lavash, and we definitely don’t want that.

Keep it warm: Don’t skip setting up a spot to keep the cooked lavash warm. Otherwise, while you are busy cooking the rest, the earlier ones will cool down and lose their soft, pliable texture. And you don’t need anything fancy; a basket or a bowl lined with a clean kitchen towel works perfectly.

Work faster with a buddy: The most time-consuming part of this recipe is rolling and cooking the lavash. But it goes a lot quicker (and is honestly more fun) if you have someone helping out. I usually rope my husband in. He is in charge of the skillets and cooks two at a time while I roll out the dough. Teamwork makes it so much easier.

Stay close while it cooks: These flatbreads cook fast, so it is important to keep a close eye on them, even while you are multitasking. I know you’ll likely be rolling out the next one while one is cooking (I do the same), but try not to turn your back on the skillet. It gets very hot, and things move quickly, so just stay aware, especially if you have young kids around.

Troubleshooting Common Lavash Baking Issues

While this lavash flatbread recipe is pretty straightforward, I ran into a few hiccups during testing, so I wanted to share some tips in case you experience the same. Here are a few common issues and what might be causing them:

Dough isn’t rising: After the first 20-minute rest, your dough should be slightly larger and less sticky. If that is not happening, chances are your yeast was not properly activated. This usually comes down to the water being too cold or too hot. If you don’t see bubbles on top during the blooming stage, it is best not to add that mixture to the flour and just start fresh with a new batch.

Dough is too sticky or too dry: Before the first rise, the dough will be sticky, and that is completely normal. After it rests and you begin kneading, it should smooth out and become easier to handle. 

A little flour on the counter is fine if it is sticking too much, but try not to overdo it. Too much flour can dry the dough and make the lavash stiff.

Lavash isn’t bubbling in the skillet: If you are not seeing bubbles after placing the dough in the pan, there are usually two possible reasons: either the skillet isn’t hot enough, or the dough was rolled too thick.

Serving Suggestions:

If you’re wondering how to use lavash, the short answer is anywhere you’d use your favorite flatbread. But like most bread recipes, there are so many other ways to enjoy it. Below are a few of my favorite recipes to pair with lavash:

Adana kebab rolled in lavash bread.

Kebabs: The most traditional way to serve lavash is as a wrap for kebabs, like my Turkish Adana Kebab and Homemade Doner Kebab. Its thin, soft texture makes it perfect for rolling, and it does a great job soaking up all the delicious juices from the meat. That said, you don’t have to stop at kebabs. Any grilled meat, like my Shish Tawook,  works beautifully wrapped in lavash.

Shawarma: Beyond kebabs, homemade lavash is the perfect wrap for your favorite shawarma recipes, such as my Chicken Shawarma or Beef Shawarma. Just roll up the meat with your favorite toppings for a delicious, handheld meal.

Scooping Mezes and Dips: While pita is often the go-to for serving with meze like baba ganoush, hummus, or muhammara, warm lavash is just as good, if not better. Tear off a piece and use it to scoop up the dips right off the plate. No spoon needed.

Breakfast: Lavash is also fantastic with a simple Turkish breakfast spread. I love serving it alongside cheeses, olives, Turkish eggs, and freshly sliced tomatoes and cucumbers. And if I feel like treating myself a bit, I sometimes even brush it with some melted butter while it is still warm.

Other versatile uses: Lavash is one of those breads you can serve with just about anything. Use it to dip into soups and stews, wrap up leftovers, or even turn it into a quick wrap. Any time you find yourself reaching for bread, lavash will do the job beautifully.

​​How to Store, Freeze and Reheat Lavash

I’ll be honest, lavash is best on the day that it is made while it is still warm. As it cools, it tends to lose its softness. That said, if you store it properly, it is still great the next day. Here’s how I do it:

Storage: Let the lavash cool to room temperature, then place it in an airtight container or sealable zip-top bag. Keep it in the fridge for up to 3 or 4 days.

Freezing: Once cooled, place the lavash in a freezer-safe container or freezer bag with sheets of parchment paper between each piece. Try to remove as much air as possible before sealing. It will keep in the freezer for up to a month. When you’re ready to use it, thaw overnight in the fridge.

Reheating: You have two options here:

  • In the oven: Preheat the oven to 325°F. Lightly spray the lavash with water, place it on a baking sheet, and warm for 8 to 10 minutes or until heated through. You can reheat multiple pieces using this method.
  • In the microwave (my favorite method): Lightly wet two sheets of paper towel and wrap the lavash in between. Microwave for 30 seconds, then carefully remove the towels. If it needs a bit more time, repeat for another 10 to 15 seconds. When using this method, it is best to reheat your lavash one piece at a time.

Frequently Asked Questions

What’s the difference between lavash and pita?

Lavash and pita are both Middle Eastern flatbreads, but they’re not quite the same. Pita is usually thicker and bakes up with a pocket in the center, which makes it great for stuffing. Lavash, on the other hand, is thinner, softer, and more flexible, making it easier to use as a wrap.
Additionally, pita is usually cooked in a very hot oven, whereas lavash bread is often cooked on a skillet, griddle, or traditionally (especially in Armenia) in a tonir (or tandoor) oven.

Can I make lavash without yeast?

Yes, you can. I like to use yeast because I find yeasted dough to be easier to work with, but you can make lavash using only flour, salt, and oil.

Can I make lavash on a griddle?

Yes, you can. A griddle works just as well as a skillet, especially if you want to cook more than one lavash at a time. Some people even prefer to roll the dough into an oval shape to fit better on a rectangular griddle.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Bread Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you’re a fan of lavash, chances are you love Middle Eastern breads just as much as I do. Here are a few more recipes from the archives:

  • Stop buying pita at the store and try making your own. It’s easier than you think. Check out my post on how to make pita bread, complete with foolproof tips perfect for beginners.
  • If you’ve ever had a traditional Turkish breakfast, you’ve probably had simit. Some people call it Turkish bagels, and once you try it, you’ll understand why it’s such a favorite. This one’s worth your time.
  • No sourdough starter? No problem. My no-knead olive bread is one of the easiest, most hands-off bread recipes you can make. Just mix, let it rest, and bake.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Lavash bread in a basket from the top view.
Print

Lavash Bread Recipe

This easy lavash bread recipe is made with just a few basic ingredients you probably already have on hand and cooked on the stovetop until soft and lightly puffed. Perfect for wrapping kebabs, scooping dips, or serving with your favorite Middle Eastern dishes.
Course Bread
Cuisine Middle Eastern, Turkish
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Rolling and resting time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Servings 10 servings
Calories 211kcal

Ingredients

  • ¾ cup warm water at 110 °F degrees
  • 1 teaspoon honey
  • 1 ½ teaspoon instant yeast aka quick rise yeast – (5g)
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • ½ cup whole milk at room temperature
  • 3 ¼ cups all purpose flour plus more for rolling (423 g)
  • 1 ¼ teaspoons kosher salt 8g

Instructions

  • Place ¾ cup of warm water and 1 teaspoon of honey in a measuring cup. Stir to ensure that the honey is fully dissolved.
    The yeast activated and mixed with olive oil in a bowl.
  • Add the yeast and stir until it is well combined. Let it rest for 5 minutes. It will have a thick layer of bubbles on top.
  • In the same measuring cup, add ¼ cup olive oil and ½ cup milk. Give it a good stir. Set it aside.
  • Combine 3 ¼ cups all-purpose flour and 1 ¼ teaspoons kosher salt in a large bowl.
    Dry ingredients are being mixed with the wet to make lavash dough.
  • Add the yeast mixture and knead for 5 minutes, first mixing the dough until no flour remains and then turning it into a ball. In the end, it will be a very sticky dough, and that is normal.
  • Cover the dough with a clean kitchen towel and let it rest in a warm part of your kitchen for 20 minutes. It will get slightly larger in size.
    The dough is placed in a bowl to rise and a person is kneading it.
  • Transfer the now-rested dough to a lightly floured surface.
  • To knead the dough, press it with the heel of your hand, then push it away, fold it back over, and rotate it 45 degrees. Repeat this process for 5 minutes or until the dough is smooth. If it’s too sticky to work with, sprinkle in a bit more flour, 1 tablespoon at a time.
  • Shape the dough into a log and divide it into 10 equal pieces.
    The dough is cut into smaller pieces.
  • Roll each piece into a ball, dust it with flour, and transfer it onto a plate. Loosely cover the plate with a kitchen towel and let it rest for 20 minutes.
  • When you’re ready to cook, heat a large (12-inch) nonstick or cast-iron skillet over high heat for 5 minutes. The pan needs to be very hot to keep the dough from sticking. To test, flick a few drops of water into the skillet. If they sizzle and disappear right away, it’s ready.
  • While the pan heats up, roll out one dough ball into a 10-inch circle using a rolling pin and more flour as needed. As you roll, it might be tricky to keep a perfect circle, and that’s totally fine. Just do your best.
    Lavash dough rolled out with a rolling pin.
  • Carefully transfer the rolled dough to the hot skillet. Cook for 10 seconds (you’ll see bubbles forming), then flip. Cook for another 10 seconds, then flip again. Repeat for a total of 3-4 flips or until it looks fully cooked and has golden spots.
    Lavash cooked in a skillet from the top view.
  • As soon as it’s done, wrap the warm lavash in a clean kitchen towel and place it in a basket to keep warm. Continue adding each cooked piece to the basket, keeping them wrapped so they stay soft and warm while you finish the rest.
  • Repeat the same rolling and cooking process with the remaining dough balls.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 10 lavash, each approximately 9 to 10 inches in diameter. The nutritional values below are per piece.
  • Storage: Bring the leftover bread to room temperature and store in an airtight container (or a Ziploc bag) for up to 4 days.
  • Reheating: You can reheat in a low-heat oven (325°F) for 8-10 minutes, or until thoroughly warmed through. Or you can wrap it in a lightly wetted paper towel and microwave for 30 seconds. 
  • A word on the yeast: I used instant rapid yeast as I find that it blooms faster but active dry yeast can also be used.
  • This recipe was adapted from Betul Tunc’s cookbook Turkuaz Kitchen’s lavash recipe with minor changes.

Nutrition

Calories: 211kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 298mg | Potassium: 79mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 20IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/lavash-bread-recipe/feed/ 8
Adana Kebab Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/adana-kebab/ https://foolproofliving.com/adana-kebab/#comments Tue, 29 Jul 2025 21:17:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82217 Recently, a local reader challenged me to share how to make this iconic kebab at home. Having grown up in…]]>

Recently, a local reader challenged me to share how to make this iconic kebab at home. Having grown up in Turkiye and with a good friend who owns a kebab restaurant in Adana (and serves nothing else!), I felt uniquely qualified to take on the challenge.

In this post, I will walk you through every aspect of creating these juicy, flavorful skewers with confidence. I’ll share how to choose the right meat, the true authentic seasonings, essential shaping techniques, and foolproof grilling tips I’ve picked up through my own recipe testing.

Adana wrap on a plate from the top view.

What Is Adana Kebab?

At its essence, Adana Kebab (or as we call it, Adana Kebap) is Turkey’s most iconic grilled lamb skewer. Hailing from the city of Adana, this traditional recipe is made with just a handful of core ingredients: finely ground lamb, tail fat, a specific Turkish red pepper called kapya, fiery Urfa chili flakes (or Aleppo pepper), salt, and black pepper.

Although many online versions include aromatics and spices like onion, garlic, or cumin, the authentic recipe adheres to those five basics.

The traditional method also calls for hand-mincing the meat with a special curved knife called a zırh (affiliate link), threading it onto wide metal skewers, then grilling it over charcoal for a deeply smoky, rich result.

The True Secret of Adana Kebab: Ingredients and Their Role

When it comes to the ingredient list for this Turkish classic, the most important thing to remember is that less is more.

Sure, you can add onion, garlic, or spices like cumin and coriander. But my suggestion is to first master the basics of the authentic recipe, and then tweak it to your own preferences from there.

Ingredients for Turkish lamb kebabs in bowls from the top view.

You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here is a more detailed breakdown of what you will need.

The Meat: Lamb, Beef, or Both?

That said, even though I just made a case for sticking to tradition, I’ll be the first to bend the rules a bit, starting with the most important part of the recipe: the meat.

The authentic version is made by chopping lamb (typically from the shoulder) and tail fat with a curved knife called a zırh (in the US, it is referred to as a cleaver knife).

The goal with using a tool like zırh is to chop the meat and fat together, back and forth, so that it (almost) forms a paste. In a way, you’re grinding the meat yourself, by hand, until the fat and muscle bind naturally.

Now, as much as I love the idea of sticking to the original, even as someone who cooks for a living, I don’t own a zırh.

And as for tail fat? Let’s just say it’s not exactly easy to find.

So, in the spirit of making this Turkish skewers recipe doable for home cooks (dare I say it, even on a weeknight), I use ground lamb instead. I know it’s not quite the same, but I truly believe it’s the next best thing.

Now, you might be wondering: can you use ground beef instead, or a combination of both? The answer is yes and yes. But there’s one very important detail to keep in mind: fat content.

What makes Adana Kebab so iconic, and so delicious, is the fat. Fat doesn’t just add richness. It also helps the meat hold together and cling to the skewer as it cooks. It’s the secret to that signature juicy texture and the reason these kebabs don’t dry out or fall apart on the grill.

Since ground lamb naturally has more fat than beef, you’ll need to make adjustments if you’re using beef. Look for a fatty grind, ideally a 60/40 ratio if possible. 

If you’re buying from a butcher, ask for ground chuck with extra fat, or see if they can add in some beef fat trimmings for you.

Signature Seasonings of Adana: Red Pepper, Urfa Chili, and Salt

There’s a common belief that most kebab recipes rely heavily on aromatics like onion and garlic, along with spices such as ground cumin, coriander, and paprika.

Red Pepper

While that might be true for many types of kebab, this ground lamb skewer recipe challenges that idea. Instead of layering in lots of spices, it highlights one very specific ingredient: a red pepper called kapya. Native to Turkey, kapya peppers are known for their sweet and smoky flavor and add a distinctive depth to the original recipe.

I would have loved to use Kapya here, but since it’s not widely available in the US, I went with the next best thing I could find: red Fresno peppers.

If you can’t get your hands on those, a red bell pepper will also work.

Urfa Chili Flakes (Pul Biber)

The next signature ingredient is Urfa chili pepper (affiliate link), also known as Aleppo-style red pepper flakes. Urfa chili has a deep, earthy heat that’s mild yet complex, and it complements the richness of the lamb beautifully.

If you can find it, it is absolutely worth using. That said, you can use any red pepper flakes you have on hand. And, of course, feel free to adjust the heat level to suit your preferences.

Paprika

To help round out the flavor of the red pepper, especially when using substitutes like Fresno or bell pepper, I like to add a little extra depth with paprika. I use two teaspoons of my favorite kind to help bring in some of the sweetness and smokiness that kapya naturally offers.

This is also a great place to put your own spin on the recipe. Use sweet paprika, smoky paprika, or a combination of both, depending on what you prefer and have on hand.

Salt & Pepper

Finally, we have salt and black pepper.

And I’ll say this upfront. The amount of salt might surprise you. The recipe calls for one tablespoon of kosher salt for two pounds of ground lamb. It may sound like a lot, but it is essential.

Salt not only enhances the taste, but it also helps the meat bind and hold its shape on the skewer.

Of course, not all salts are created equal. I use Diamond Crystal kosher salt (affiliate link), which is lighter and less salty by volume than many other brands. If you are using something like Morton’s kosher salt, I recommend starting with half the amount and adjusting to taste.

I also add a touch of black pepper to round out the simple seasoning.

The Essential Tool Worth Investing in for Home-Style Adana Kebab

Whenever I share a recipe here on the blog, I try to avoid using tools or gadgets that most home kitchens don’t already have.

But in the case of this Turkish lamb skewers recipe, I wanted to stay as true to the original as possible, which meant making one small exception; I had to buy the thick, flat metal skewers (affiliate link) traditionally used in Adana.

My thinking is this: if you enjoy making kebabs at home, this is a worthy one-time investment that will more than pay off in the long run.

During my recipe testing, I first attempted to make these kebabs using thin bamboo skewers commonly found in most households. I had such a hard time getting the meat to stick and hold that signature thickness. The mixture kept slipping off or falling apart during grilling, which made the whole process stressful.

That’s when I realized that the people who have been making this Adana recipe for generations must know what they’re doing. So, I ordered a set of one-inch-wide kebab skewers (affiliate link), and the difference was night and day.

Here is how it is helpful:

  • The thicker skewers give you more surface area to work with when shaping the meat. 
  • Their width helps the meat cling better, and the longer body allows you to form a full-length kebab that cooks evenly over the grill. 
  • They also help the meat stay intact when exposed to high heat, which is especially important when working with a high-fat mixture like this one.

How to Make Adana Kebab at Home

Once you have your ingredients prepped and your skewers ready, the rest comes down to technique. It’s not difficult, just a few key steps to follow for the best results. Here’s how I break it down:

Preparing your kebab mixture:

Step 1 – Chop and Drain the Red Peppers

Start by removing the seeds and chopping the red peppers as finely as you can. This helps them blend seamlessly into the meat mixture, rather than showing up as visible chunks.

After chopping, place the peppers in a fine mesh strainer and press gently to release their juices. This step is essential as we want to remove as much liquid as possible so the mixture doesn’t become too wet or soggy when it’s time to shape.

Meat mixture in a bowl from the top view.

Step 2 – Prepare the Meat Mixture

In a large mixing bowl, combine the drained chopped peppers, ground lamb, paprika, red pepper flakes, salt, and black pepper. Using clean hands, mix everything together until fully combined and evenly seasoned.

Once it’s mixed, divide the meat into equal portions based on how many skewers you plan to use. My set came with three skewers, so I divided the mixture into three even parts. You can eyeball it or, if you prefer precision, weigh the portions using a kitchen scale.

If you want to make it ahead, just cover the bowl and place it in the fridge. In fact, if you can plan ahead, I highly recommend it. Giving the mixture a chance to rest helps the flavors come together and settle into the meat. An overnight rest (up to 24 hours) can really make a difference.

Shaping your Adana Kebabs

The meat is being threaded onto the skewer.

Step 3 – Thread Onto the Skewers

When you’re ready to thread the meat, start by setting up your workstation. Grab your skewers, a small bowl of water to wet your hands, and bring out the meat mixture from the fridge.

To thread, take one portion of the ground lamb mixture, shape it into a ball, and gently insert the skewer through the center. Using your hands, press and spread the meat down the length of the skewer, turning it as you go to create an even shape.

If or when the mixture starts to feel sticky, lightly wet your hands to prevent the meat from sticking too much. Just be careful not to overdo it. A little water goes a long way, and too much can make the mixture too soft to hold together.

As you work, do your best to keep the thickness even from top to bottom. Once you’ve shaped the kebab, take a moment to gently press and seal the top and bottom ends of the meat onto the skewer.

Step 4 – Create the signature ridges

Adana skewers shaped from the top view.

If you’ve had Adana Kebab before, you’ve probably noticed the pattern of shallow ridges pressed into the surface. They’re not just for appearance. These indentations help the meat cook more evenly over high heat and give the kebab its signature look.

To make them, use your thumb and forefinger to gently press along the length of the meat, making shallow marks every couple of inches. Rotate the skewer and repeat the same motion on the other side.

Grilling Your Kebabs

Step 5 – Grill

Lamb kebabs on the grill.

The traditional way to cook Adana Kebab is over a charcoal grill, which gives it that distinct smoky taste and slightly crisp exterior. That said, I used my gas grill for this version to keep it simple and approachable for home cooks. Both methods work well, and below you’ll find tips for each.

If using a gas grill: Preheat your grill to 400°F to 425°F. Clean the grill grates thoroughly and brush them with oil to prevent sticking.

Carefully place the Adana kebab skewers on the grates and grill, turning them frequently to ensure even cooking and a nice char on all sides.

Depending on the thickness and length of your kebabs, this will take about 10 to 12 minutes.

Because the meat is rich in fat, you may see flare-ups as it cooks. That’s completely normal, but it’s important to stay close to the grill while they’re cooking. 

Adjust the heat as needed and continue rotating the skewers to avoid burning and help them cook evenly.

If using a charcoal grill: Light your charcoal and let the coals burn until they’re covered with a thin layer of white ash.

Spread them out evenly and position the skewers directly over the heat. Grill the kebabs, turning them every couple of minutes to ensure even cooking and that nice, smoky char.

The total time will be similar, around 10 to 12 minutes, again depending on the heat level and the size of your skewers.

Similar to cooking it on a gas grill, keep a close eye during grilling, especially if you notice flare-ups. The goal is juicy, charred kebabs that stay intact from grill to plate.

Step 6 – Let It Rest While Making Sumac Onions

Sumac onions before and after they are mixed.

Once the kebabs are grilled, transfer them to a sheet pan and cover loosely with foil. Let them rest for about 5 to 10 minutes so the juices have time to settle back into the meat.

While the kebabs are resting, you can prepare one of the classic accompaniments to Adana Kebab: sumac onions, a traditional onion salad that beautifully balances the richness of the meat.

They’re easy to make, but if you’d like a more detailed breakdown, feel free to check out my Sumac Onions recipe.

To make a quick batch, combine sliced red onion, olive oil, lemon juice, kosher salt, sumac, and a pinch of red pepper flakes in a medium bowl. Using clean hands, gently massage the onions until they have softened slightly. Finish with a sprinkle of chopped parsley.

Assembling and Serving

Step 7 – Assemble:

Adana wrap being assembled and placed on a plate from the top view.

With the meat grilled and your sumac onions ready, all that’s left is the bread. Traditionally, Adana Kebab is served with lavash, a soft Mediterranean-style flatbread.

It’s similar to pita bread, and you can usually find it in most supermarkets. Of course, if you’d like to try making your own, I also have a homemade lavash recipe available for you to follow.

To assemble, place a piece of lavash flat on a plate and use it to slide the meat off the skewer. Since my skewers are quite large, I like to cut the kebab in half while it’s still on the skewer, then slide each half off gently. The meat should release easily.

From there, simply top it with a generous spoonful of sumac onions, a few slices of tomatoes, and a sprinkle of fresh parsley before rolling it up.

Needless to say, it is best to enjoy your Adana wrap while it’s still warm.

Expert Tips: Troubleshooting Adana Kebab

As you can see, making this Turkish Adana Kebab recipe doesn’t require any unusual ingredients or complicated cooking techniques. Still, while preparing this post, I made a few mistakes and learned a few things that I think would be helpful, especially if you’re making it for the first time.

Below are some tips to help you get the best results:

Falling off the skewer during grilling: During my recipe testing, I had a couple of kebabs fall apart on the grill. In the end, I realized there are two main reasons this can happen:

  • Not enough fat: If the meat doesn’t have enough fat, it will have trouble sticking to the skewer and keeping its shape. So don’t skip the fat, especially if you’re using ground beef or a beef-lamb mix.
  • Ends not sealed properly: Sealing the ends means gently squeezing and securing both the top and bottom of the kebab where the meat meets the skewer. If this step is skipped, the meat may loosen or fall off when exposed to high heat.

Even thickness is key: As you’re threading the skewers, make sure the meat is evenly distributed from end to end. I’ll admit, it takes a little practice, but once you shape your first one, it gets easier. Taking the time to shape the kebab evenly helps it cook properly and stay intact.

Let it rest: As with any kebab recipe, letting the meat rest in the fridge before grilling makes a big difference. That chill time allows the salt to work its way through the mixture and gives the flavors time to meld.

Keep a close eye on the grill: Because of the high fat content, flare-ups are normal while grilling. This is where you may need to manage the heat a bit. Stay close by, and turn the skewers often so they cook evenly without burning.

Using make-shift skewers: During my research for this recipe, I came across a few versions where people used makeshift skewers by wrapping bamboo skewers (or wooden skewers) with aluminum foil.

I’ll be honest, I haven’t tried that method myself. After testing this recipe more than five times, I can say that even with thick metal skewers, getting the meat to stick takes a bit of technique. So while it might work in a pinch, I’d be hesitant to recommend it. In my experience, investing in proper wide skewers makes the process much more reliable and much less frustrating.

How to Serve Adana Kebab: Authentic Turkish Pairings for a Complete Meal

So you made your Adana Kebab, garnished it with sumac onions, and wrapped it in warm lavash. Good for you! But what if you want to take it up a notch?

Below are a few traditional pairing ideas in case you’d like to serve it the way we do in Türkiye:

Pair it with a classic Turkish salad: Turn your kebab into a full feast by serving it alongside a fresh salad like the classic pairing, Turkish Ezme. Alternatively, you can go with a traditional Shepherd’s Salad (Çoban Salatası), a white bean salad like Piyaz, or even my Greek Cucumber Salad for a cooling contrast.

Add grilled vegetables: If you have a little extra time, grill some tomatoes or green peppers on the side while your kebabs are cooking. These simple vegetables add a lovely charred flavor and are often served right on top of the kebab in restaurants across Türkiye.

Serve with rice or bulgur pilaf: For a more substantial meal, pair your kebab with a starch. My Vermicelli Rice or Bulgur Pilaf are both authentic and satisfying options that round out the plate perfectly.

Drizzle it with yogurt sauce: While not traditional, a spoonful of tzatziki sauce or my yogurt mint sauce can be a nice addition, especially if you’re serving this to kids or anyone who prefers a milder dish. The creamy yogurt helps balance the spices and adds a cooling contrast to the richness of the meat.

Don’t forget the ayran: In Türkiye, if you order Adana Kebab at a restaurant, chances are your server will bring out a glass of ayran without even asking. This cool, tangy yogurt drink helps balance the spices in the kebab and brings everything together. The good news is you can make ayran at home in just a few minutes.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Adana kebab on a plate served over lavash.
Print

Adana Kebab Recipe

This Adana Kebab recipe is a home-cook-friendly version of the iconic Turkish ground lamb kebab, made with ground lamb, red peppers, and Urfa chili (also known as red pepper flakes). Threaded onto wide skewers and grilled to perfection, it's rich, juicy, and full of authentic flavor. Served with lavash and sumac onions, it's a complete meal that brings the taste of Türkiye to your own backyard.
Course Dinner, Lamb
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Halal
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 12 minutes
Resting time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 32 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 669kcal

Ingredients

For the kebab

  • 2 red peppers red fresno chilis or ½ red bell pepper
  • 2 lbs ground lamb or 1 lb ground lamb + 1 lb ground beef
  • 2 teaspoons paprika
  • 1 teaspoon Urfa chili flakes or Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes
  • 1 tablespoon kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • Water to wet your hands

For the Sumac Onions

  • 1 medium-sized red onion sliced
  • 1 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoons sumac
  • ¼ teaspoon Urfa chili flakes Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped

To Serve with

  • 6 Lavash or pita bread

Instructions

  • Start by preparing the peppers. Remove the seeds and chop them as finely as you can. Place the chopped peppers in a colander set over a bowl and let them drain to release their juices. Once drained, transfer them to a large mixing bowl.
  • Add the ground lamb, paprika, Aleppo pepper, salt, and black pepper to the bowl with the peppers.
    Ground lamb mixed with red peppers and spices in a bowl.
  • Using clean hands, mix everything together until fully combined and the seasonings are evenly distributed.
  • Divide the meat mixture evenly based on the number of skewers you have. For example, if you have 3 skewers, divide the mixture into 3 equal portions.
    A person is threading the meat onto the skewer.
  • Take one portion, shape it into a ball, and gently insert the skewer through the center.
  • Fill a small bowl with cold tap water and keep it nearby. Using your hands, carefully press and spread the meat down the length of the skewer, turning it as you go to ensure even thickness all around. Lightly wet your fingers as needed to prevent the meat from sticking to your hands. Remember that just a little water is enough to help shape the kebabs without making the mixture too wet.
    Adana kebab on skewers ready to grill.
  • Once shaped, gently press and secure the top and bottom edges of the meat where it starts and ends on the skewer. This is an essential step in that it helps prevent the meat from breaking apart during grilling.
  • To create the traditional ridges, use your thumb and forefinger to lightly press along the length of the kebab, making shallow marks every couple of inches. Rotate the skewer and repeat on the other side. These ridges help the meat cook evenly and give the kebabs their signature look.
  • Preheat your gas grill to 400°F-425°F. Clean the grill grates well and brush them with oil to prevent sticking.
    Turkish Adana on the grill.
  • Once the grill is ready, place the Adana kebab skewers on the grates. Grill for 10-12 minutes, turning them often so they cook evenly and develop a nice char on the outside.
  • Keep in mind that because the meat has a higher fat content, you may experience flare-ups. Stay close to the grill and adjust the heat as needed to prevent burning.
  • Once cooked to your liking, cover the meat with foil and let it rest for 5-10 minutes.
  • While the meat is resting, make the sumac onions. In a medium-sized bowl, mix the sliced onions, olive oil, lemon juice, salt, sumac, and red pepper flakes.
    Sumac onions in a bowl.
  • Using clean hands, gently massage the onion mixture until slightly softened. Garnish with parsley.
  • When ready to assemble your Adana kebab, grab a lavash (or pita bread), place the meat on top, and garnish with sumac onions. Roll and serve right away.
    Adana kebab served on lavash with sumac onions on top.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves six adults and the nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Using beef instead of lamb: You can make this recipe with beef or with a mixture of beef and lamb, but it is important that you use a cut that is high in fat or ask your butcher to incorporate some beef trimmings to your ground beef.
  • Keep a close eye while grilling: Because the meat is rich in fat, you may see flare-ups as it is grilling. That’s expected, but it’s essential to stay close to the grill while they’re cooking.
  • Storage: Bring your kebabs to room temperature and store in the fridge for up to 3-4 days.
  • Reheating: Warm in a low oven set to 300°F (150°C) for about 10 to 15 minutes, or until warmed through. Cover loosely with foil to prevent it from drying out.

Nutrition

Calories: 669kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 33g | Fat: 39g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Cholesterol: 110mg | Sodium: 1755mg | Potassium: 487mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1809IU | Vitamin C: 56mg | Calcium: 39mg | Iron: 6mg

Storing, Reheating and Freezing Instructions:

While freshly grilled Adana Kebab is always best, leftovers can be stored, frozen, and reheated with good results. Here’s how I handle it:

Storage: Let the kebab cool to room temperature, then place it in an airtight container. Store it in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.

Freezing: Wrap the leftover meat tightly in parchment paper, then wrap again with aluminum foil to keep everything in place. Transfer to the freezer and store for up to 1 month. When ready to use, thaw overnight in the fridge.

Reheating: Reheat in a low oven set to 300°F (150°C) for about 10 to 15 minutes, or until warmed through. Cover loosely with foil to prevent it from drying out.

Can You Make Adana Kebab Without a Grill? (Oven & Stovetop Alternatives)

While many online sources suggest you can easily cook Adana Kebab in the oven or on the stovetop, the truth is, the very essence of true Adana Kebab comes from cooking it over an open flame.

To be perfectly honest, that signature smoky flavor and crisp exterior are incredibly difficult to replicate without a grill.

However, I understand not everyone has a grill, and /or weather conditions may not cooperate to grill kebabs on the outside.

In that case, you can adapt this recipe, but it’s important to know you’ll likely be missing out of the signature smokey flavors. These alternatives are best thought of as Adana-style ground lamb kebabs, not a substitute for the real thing.

Cooking in the Oven

Step 1: Line a quarter sheet pan with a wire rack. This helps the meat cook evenly and allows air to circulate underneath. Preheat your oven to 400°F (204°C).

Step 2: Spread the meat mixture onto the rack in an even layer. Using a knife or spatula, divide it into 6 to 8 portions to mimic the shape and size of skewers.

Step 3: Bake for 20 to 23 minutes. Finish with 1 to 2 minutes under the broiler to develop a bit of char on top.

Cooking on the Stovetop

To be completely honest, I don’t recommend trying to cook full skewers on a skillet. It’s just too difficult to manage the thickness and shape. Instead, I suggest turning the meat mixture into Adana Kofte-style meatballs, which are easier to handle and still delicious.

Step 1: Form meatballs. Use a small cookie scoop or tablespoon to portion out the meat. Roll and gently flatten each one in the palm of your hand, then set them aside on a plate.

Step 2: Heat the pan. Add about a tablespoon of oil to a cast-iron or heavy-bottomed skillet. Heat it until it’s shimmering and very hot-this ensures you get a nice sear rather than steaming the meat.

Step 3: Cook in batches. Add the meatballs to the skillet, being careful not to overcrowd the pan. Cook them on all sides until nicely browned and cooked through, working in batches and adding more oil if needed.

FAQs

Is Adana kebab very spicy?

It depends. The heat in Adana Kebab comes mainly from the red peppers and Urfa chili used in the recipe. The level of spiciness can vary based on how many pepper seeds you include and how hot your red pepper flakes are.

If you want a milder version, simply remove all the seeds from the peppers and use less Urfa chili or substitute with a milder variety. If you like it spicy, keep some of the seeds and use more chili to dial up the heat.

Can I add onion, garlic, or other spices like cumin to this recipe?

You can, but keep in mind that it won’t be considered authentic Adana Kebab anymore. The traditional version is very simple and doesn’t include aromatics like onion or garlic.
That said, if you’d like to experiment with your own version, you can absolutely add them. Just make sure to grate them finely (or use a food processor to chop it finely) and strain out any excess liquid before mixing them into the meat. This helps keep the mixture from getting too wet and falling apart on the grill.

How do I know when Adana Kebab is cooked through?

You will know that it is fully cooked when it is nicely browned with grilled marks on the outside, is firm to touch and juicy when cut open.

What if I don’t have wide metal skewers?

Wide, flat metal skewers are essential for shaping and grilling Adana Kebab properly. If you don’t have them, you can try doubling up bamboo skewers or flattening them slightly, but keep in mind that the results won’t be quite the same.

You’ll likely lose the traditional look, and there’s a higher chance the meat won’t stay in place during grilling.

Other Authentic Turkish Recipes You Might Like:

If you’ve landed on this page, I suspect you’re a fan of Turkish food and maybe looking for even more foolproof, beginner-friendly recipes from my home country. Below are a few more classics you might also enjoy:

  • If you’ve ever been to a kebab restaurant and looked over the menu, chances are you’ve seen Turkish Red Lentil Soup on the list. It’s a simple 30-minute soup that’s just as beloved and familiar as Adana Kebab.
  • And if you’re in the mood for something cozy and quick, Turkish Pasta is another weeknight favorite that’s gone viral for a reason. It’s easy to make and loaded with comforting flavors.
  • Treat yourself to Türkiye’s most famous breakfast dish with my Turkish Eggs (Çılbır), poached eggs nestled on garlicky yogurt, drizzled with spicy butter, and ready in minutes. It’s truly a unique and satisfying experience!

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/adana-kebab/feed/ 2
Easy Tzatziki Sauce Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/#comments Tue, 01 Jul 2025 16:52:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15923 What is Tzatziki Sauce? (Beyond the White Gyro Sauce) You know that question about your desert island food? Tzatziki would…]]>

What is Tzatziki Sauce? (Beyond the White Gyro Sauce)

You know that question about your desert island food? Tzatziki would be mine. 

At its core, tzatziki is a yogurt-based dip made with strained yogurt (also known as Greek yogurt), cucumber, garlic, lemon juice, and herbs (typically dill or mint).

Referred to by many names, such as Greek Tzatziki sauce, Tzatziki Sauce, and Cucumber Yogurt Sauce, it can be served as a dip, a sauce, or even as a dressing. 

It pairs well with just about anything, from meat to gyros, to Turkish kebabs, to grilled or roasted vegetables.

While many people in the U.S. know it as the white sauce that comes with a gyro, that version is often heavier, sometimes made with mayonnaise or sour cream, and doesn’t always include cucumber. 

My homemade tzatziki sauce recipe is different here. It’s the real thing. The kind of tzatziki you’ll find on tables in homes across Turkiye, Greece, and beyond.

Essential Ingredients for Authentic Tzatziki (And Why They Matter)

The good news is that this easy tzatziki recipe requires only a few simple ingredients and comes together in minutes. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful tips to keep in mind when shopping:

Tzatziki sauce ingredients from the top view with text on the image.

Full-fat Greek Yogurt (also known as Strained Yogurt): I think the best yogurt for tzatziki is a whole-milk, plain Greek yogurt. It yields a rich and creamy tzatziki dip, a main characteristic of this Mediterranean sauce.  If your container has any liquid sitting on top, be sure to strain that out before using.

You can also use plain, unsweetened yogurt or even low-fat or fat-free yogurt, but the texture will be a bit looser compared to Greek yogurt.

Fresh Cucumber: Either Persian or English cucumbers work well. I like to peel them first, as some cucumber skin can be bitter. Still, it is a personal preference.

I grate them using the large holes on a box grater and then drain them in a mesh sieve. It might seem like an extra step, but thoroughly draining the grated cucumber helps eliminate excess liquid, giving you the thick, creamy consistency that this cucumber tzatziki sauce is known for.

Fresh Garlic Cloves: The traditional version of this Mediterranean yogurt sauce calls for fresh, finely minced garlic. I usually add two cloves per 1 ½ cups of yogurt, but feel free to adjust the amount based on your preferences. 

If you prefer a milder flavor, garlic powder is a fine substitute. Since it’s more concentrated, I recommend using about 1 teaspoon per 1 ½ cups of yogurt.

Fresh Herbs: I like using fresh dill, but fresh mint is another classic option. In Turkiye, it’s also common to use dried dill or mint if fresh isn’t available. That said, I think fresh herbs bring a brighter, more vibrant taste.

Fresh Lemon Juice: Just a squeeze is enough to brighten the flavors and balance the richness of the yogurt.

Kosher Salt and Black Pepper: You won’t need anything beyond basic seasoning here. Start with the amounts listed in the recipe and adjust to taste.

Extra Virgin Olive Oil (Optional): You won’t see olive oil listed in my recipe because my mom never used it. I find that thick, whole-milk yogurt gives the sauce all the richness it needs. However, if you’d like to add it, a tablespoon of olive oil per 1 ½ cups of yogurt is a good starting point.

How to Make Easy Homemade Tzatziki: A Step-by-Step Guide

Making a delicious tzatziki with yogurt, shredded cucumber, and lemon juice doesn’t require any special cooking techniques, so anyone can do it.

A collage of images showing how to strain grated cucumber and make the yogurt mixture.

Step 1 – Grate and drain the cucumber: Using the large holes of a box grater, grate the peeled cucumber and transfer it to a fine-mesh strainer. Press down with a spatula to release the excess moisture. I usually let it sit for a few minutes to help the juices drain completely.

Once drained, you should have about 1 cup of grated cucumber.

Alternatively, you can wrap the shredded cucumber in a clean tea towel and squeeze it by hand to remove as much liquid as possible.

Step 2 – Whisk the yogurt base: In a medium bowl, combine the Greek yogurt, freshly squeezed lemon juice, minced garlic, salt, and black pepper.

Whisk until smooth and creamy. This is also a good time to give it a quick taste and adjust the seasoning if needed.

A collage of photos showing how to make tzatziki from scratch.

Step 3 – Add cucumber and herbs: Fold in the drained cucumber and fresh dill or mint. Mix until everything is evenly combined.

Step 4 – Cover and chill:
You can serve it right away, but if you have the time, cover and let it rest in the fridge for at least 30 minutes. This allows the flavors to meld and deepen.

A bowl of tzatziki surrounded with vegetables.
Print

Easy Tzatziki Sauce Recipe

An easy tzatziki sauce recipe that you can make in minutes and serve with all your savory Mediterranean/Middle Eastern dishes.
Course Sauce
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 61kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 English Cucumber peeled (or 2 Persian cucumbers)
  • 1 ½ cups Whole Milk Greek Yogurt unsweetened and unflavored
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 2 cloves fresh garlic peeled and minced finely
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • cup fresh dill or fresh mint

Instructions

  • Using the large holes of a box grater, grate the cucumber. Transfer it into a fine-mesh strainer and strain all of its juices, pressing it with a rubber spatula. Set aside.
    A collage of images showing how to make the recipe.
  • In a medium-size mixing bowl, whisk together yogurt, lemon juice, minced garlic, salt and pepper.
  • Using a spatula, fold in the cucumber and dill. Transfer to a bowl.
    Person making the tzatziki in a bowl.
  • If you have time, cover with plastic, and let it sit in the fridge for a few hours before serving.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ¼ to 1 ½ cups of tzatziki sauce which is ideal for 4 servings as a condiment. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make the recipe as written up to 2 days before serving. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. Be sure to give it a good stir before serving.
  • Storage: This sauce will stay fresh for about 3-4 days. Simply place leftovers in an airtight container and keep them in the fridge. If you notice any liquid separation, just give your Tzatziki a good stir before serving.
  • A word on olive oil: My recipe relies on rich yogurt for creaminess and does not require adding any olive oil, unlike some other tzatziki recipes. However, for extra depth, drizzle 1 tbsp extra virgin olive oil on top before serving.
  •  

Nutrition

Calories: 61kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 4mg | Sodium: 31mg | Potassium: 245mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 381IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 105mg | Iron: 1mg

Expert Tips from a Lifelong Tzatziki Maker

This recipe is pretty straightforward, but there are a few things I want to point out so you can end up with the best tzatziki on your first try:

  • Don’t skip draining the shredded cucumber: This is the single most important step when it comes to achieving that creamy texture tzatziki is known for. Yes, it’s an extra step, but it makes all the difference.
  • DIY Greek Yogurt: If you don’t have Greek yogurt, you can strain plain yogurt at home. Just place a fine-mesh sieve over a bowl and line it with cheesecloth (a paper towel will also work in a pinch). Add the yogurt, cover it, and let it sit in the fridge for a few hours. The longer it sits, the thicker it becomes.
    Since plain yogurt has more liquid, I recommend using about half a cup more than the recipe calls for to account for the liquid that will drain.
  • Avoid overmixing: Once you have folded in the cucumber and herbs, mix only until the ingredients are just combined. Overmixing can cause the cucumber to release more liquid, which may water down the sauce.
  • Do not skip the chilling: To me, the secret to the best tzatziki sauce is letting it rest in the fridge. This time allows the flavors (especially the garlic and fresh herbs) to develop and deepen. Even just 30 minutes makes a difference, but planning for an hour or two can yield even better results.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

Make Ahead: You can make this Greek tzatziki sauce recipe a day or two ahead. Just be sure to transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge.

Storage: Leftovers will keep for up to 3 days in the refrigerator. Give it a good stir before serving, and if any liquid has collected on top, simply pour it off or drain it before mixing.

Delicious Ways to Serve Tzatziki Sauce in Your Daily Cooking

Images showing food that uses tzatziki.

I may or may not have been caught eating this Mediterranean classic with a spoon. All jokes aside, tzatziki is a staple for a reason. It pairs beautifully with just about any meat or vegetable dish that could use a cooling, creamy contrast. Here are a few of my favorite ways to use it:

Kabobs and Gyros: Simply drizzle it right on top! If you want to try something different, try drizzling this sauce over my Karniyarik recipe (aka Turkish Stuffed Eggplant), Greek Yogurt Chicken, Shish Taouk, or Baked Chicken Kabobs, Chicken Shawarma, or serve it with Turkish Kofte

Sauce for Burgers and Sandwiches: I love using it as a spread for Greek Lamb Burgers (pictured above) or my Chicken Pita Wraps. It adds a creamy contrast and brings everything together.

Vegetables and Vegetable Dishes: A dollop of tzatziki can turn simple roasted eggplant into a delicious appetizer. It’s also a great match for baked zucchini fritters, crispy falafel, or just about any veggie-forward dish you’d serve at a gathering.

With Salads: Tzatziki isn’t just a dip; it makes a fantastic, creamy addition to various salads. I particularly love a dollop alongside or even mixed into my easy Greek salad for an extra layer of freshness.

Grain Bowls: Drizzle it over shawarma chicken bowls (pictured above) or make it part of a DIY Cava bowl. It adds creaminess and brightens the rest of the toppings.

Part of a Meze Platter: Serve it in a bowl as a dip on a large platter along with cheese and crackers, olives, hummus, muhammara, pita bread (or pita chips), and fresh raw vegetables.

Tzatziki Sauce Variations & Substitutions:

  • Dairy-Free/Vegan Options: To make this vegan or dairy-free, use a neutral-flavored plant-based yogurt. I prefer unflavored cashew yogurt, but coconut or almond milk yogurt can also work. Just make sure it’s unsweetened and as thick as possible for the best consistency.
  • Herb Variations: You can easily make this creamy tzatziki sauce your own by switching up the herbs. Fresh dill and mint are classic options, but parsley or chives are also great alternatives. No fresh herbs on hand? You can leave them out and still have a delicious dip.
  • Making it Thinner (like Turkish Cacık): If you have ever been to Turkiye, you’ve probably had cacik, a thinner version of tzatziki. To achieve that texture, simply use plain yogurt instead of Greek yogurt, or stir in about ½ cup of cold water (or more, depending on your preference) until you reach the desired consistency.

FAQs:

How Do You Spell Tzatziki?

The phonetic spelling is /tsaˈtsiːki/. The word for this Greek yogurt cucumber sauce is spelled T-Z-A-T-Z-I-K-I. It is a loanword from Modern Greek, which actually comes from the Turkish word cacık, of unknown origin.

How Do You Pronounce Tzatziki?

So, how do you say Tzatziki? The correct way to pronounce Tzatziki is “tsah-see-key.” Think of the tsah part as how you say “pizza,” without the first two letters.

Can Tzatziki sauce be frozen?

Technically, you can freeze yogurt, but after thawing, it loses its creamy consistency. This is generally true for most savory yogurt-based dressings or sauces. Therefore, I wouldn’t recommend freezing Tzatziki sauce.

Can I use non-fat yogurt?

Yes, you can use any plain yogurt you like. However, I recommend sticking to Greek Yogurt as it is thicker than other yogurt types. The higher the fat content, the more delicious and creamy it would be, but non-fat or low-fat plain yogurt would still do the job.

Do I have to strain the juice of the cucumber?

The correct answer is yes. Some people even go as far as straining yogurt and cucumber in a colander lined with cheesecloth overnight in the fridge. I guess it is because they prefer a thicker consistency. However, in my opinion, the thickness of Tzatziki is a personal preference. If you like yours runny then no need to strain the juices and vice versa.

Do I have to peel the cucumber?

It is a personal preference. I prefer to peel mine as some cucumber skin can be bitter.

Can I substitute sour cream for yogurt?

I don’t usually recommend it, as the flavor and texture are quite different. Sour cream is richer and tangier than yogurt, and it has a higher fat content, which can make the sauce feel heavier than intended.

What can i substitute for greek yogurt in tzatziki sauce?

If you don’t have Greek yogurt, you can use plain (unsweetened) yogurt to make tzatziki. Since it is not as thick as Greek yogurt (also known as strained yogurt), I recommend straining its liquid before use. Simply place it in a fine-mesh strainer lined with cheesecloth and set it in a bowl.

Other Yogurt Sauce Recipes You Might Also Like:

  • My Yogurt Dill Sauce is bright, herby, and perfect for serving with salmon, baked potatoes, or simple roasted vegetables.
  • A drizzle of my Greek yogurt salad dressing instantly turns any salad greens into a refreshing, creamy side that goes with just about any meal.
  • A spoonful of my Yogurt Tahini Sauce adds a creamy, nutty layer to grain bowls, roasted veggies, or just about anything that needs a little something extra.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/feed/ 25
Bulgur Pilaf https://foolproofliving.com/moms-bulgur-pilaf/ https://foolproofliving.com/moms-bulgur-pilaf/#comments Wed, 14 May 2025 11:56:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7708 If you are unsure about what to do with that bag of bulgur in your pantry, you’re not alone. It’s…]]>

If you are unsure about what to do with that bag of bulgur in your pantry, you’re not alone. It’s just not as popular as grains like brown rice or quinoa here in the U.S. But you’re in the right place. 

I grew up eating (and cooking) this ancient grain on the regular, and on this site, you’ll find plenty of approachable and flavorful recipes using bulgur wheat. Start with this Turkish bulgur pilaf recipe, and when you are ready for more, learn How To Prepare and Cook Bulgur like rice or try my Chicken with Bulgur and Tabbouleh Salad recipes.

Turkish bulgur pilaf in a pot with a wooden spoon on the side.

What You Need To Know in a Nutshell

  • What is Bulgur Pilaf? Also referred to as bulgar pilaf, bulgur pilavi, or bulghur pilaf, this traditional dish is made by cooking bulgur with aromatic vegetables and spices. It’s a beloved staple across Mediterranean and Middle Eastern countries, especially in Turkish, Lebanese, and Armenian cuisines. Made with coarse bulgur, it has a chewy texture and a naturally nutty flavor that makes it both hearty and satisfying.
  • Two versions to choose from: Depending on the region (or your own preference), bulgur wheat pilaf can be made with vegetables like onions, tomatoes, and peppers, or kept more basic with toasted vermicelli. Both are equally simple to prepare and delicious in their own way.

How To Make Bulgur Pilaf?

This Mediterranean Bulgur Wheat Pilaf recipe comes together in just a few steps with pantry staples. Here is how you cook it:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.
  1. Gather your ingredients:  For the full list of ingredients, check out the recipe card below. Here are a few helpful notes and substitution ideas:
    • Bulgur: You’ll find several types of bulgur at the store, but for this recipe, coarse or extra coarse bulgur works best. I usually order mine online (affiliate link), but Bob’s Red Mill red bulgur is a good alternative and easy to find in most grocery stores.
    • Tomato: One large fresh tomato is all you need. If you do not have fresh tomatoes on hand, you can either omit it or add one more tablespoon of tomato paste.
    • Pepper: A small green bell pepper can be used instead of jalapenos.
    • Cooking liquid: For extra flavor, use vegetable stock or chicken stock instead of water.
    • Spices and herbs: Ground cumin and fresh parsley are classic choices, but feel free to experiment with other spices such as ground coriander and paprika. The same applies to fresh herbs.  If you have it on hand, a combination of fresh mint, dill, and parsley would be fantastic in this Mediterranean bulgur recipe.
A collage of images showing how to make bulgur pilaf with tomatoes and chickpeas.
  1. Saute aromatics: Heat olive oil in a medium saucepan over medium heat. Add onion, ground cumin, green pepper, and saute until translucent, 4-5 minutes. Stir in the minced garlic and tomato paste and cook, stirring constantly, for a minute or so.
  2. Add in the rest of the ingredients: Add in bulgur, chopped tomatoes, chickpeas, and your cooking liquid of choice. Season with salt and pepper, and stir to combine everything evenly.
A collage of images showing bulgur wheat pilaf before and after it is cooked.
  1. Let it cook: Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, and lower the heat. Let it simmer for 10-12 minutes or until most of the liquid is absorbed.
  2. Let it rest & serve: Off the heat, rest for 10 minutes (with the lid on), fluff it with a fork. Garnish with fresh chopped parsley and serve.

Bulgur With Vermicelli – Mom’s Version

A lot of Turkish rice dishes include vermicelli, like the classic Vermicelli Rice Pilaf. So it’s no surprise that bulgur pilaf with vermicelli is also a popular variation. As a matter of fact, it was one of my mom’s signature recipes. 

Bulgur wheat pilaf with vermicelli from the top view.

To cook Bulgur Pilaf with Vermicelli:

  1. Heat oil (or butter): You can use any oil, but as is usually the case, butter makes this pilaf taste better. Heat it on medium heat.
  2. Saute vermicelli: Add in ¼ cup of the vermicelli (or orzo) and saute until it is golden brown. It should feel like it is almost burning. 
  3. Add in the coarse bulgur wheat: Add in bulgur wheat and saute for 4-5 minutes while constantly stirring.
  4. Add in the liquid & bring it to a boil: Add in your cooking liquid (water, stock, or a combination), salt, and pepper. Stir to combine.
  5. Cook: Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat, and let it simmer for 12-15 minutes.

Expert Tips

  • Use the right bulgur grind: For the best texture, stick with coarse or extra coarse bulgur (sometimes sold as “pilavlik bulgur”). Finer (sold as fine bulgur) varieties tend to become mushy and won’t give you the signature chewy bite that it is known for. If you are new to cooking bulgur and adding it in your recipes, feel free to check out my post I wrote on Types of Bulgur Wheat.
  • Should you rinse bulgur before cooking? It’s totally up to you. Rinsing isn’t required, especially if your bulgur is pre-packaged and clean. But if you’re buying from bulk bins, a quick rinse under cold water is a good idea.
  • Toast for extra flavor: If you have a few extra minutes, toast the bulgur briefly before adding the liquid. It might come as an extra step, but doing so deepens the nutty flavor and adds a subtle complexity to the overall dish.
  • Liquid-to-bulgur ratio: My go-to ratio for 1:2, meaning for every 1 cup of coarse bulgur, you will need 2 cups of liquid. That said, depending on the brand and grind of bulgur, you might need slightly more or less liquid. If the grains still feel firm after the liquid is absorbed, add a splash of hot water, cover, and let it sit a bit longer.
  • Do not skip the resting: Letting the pilaf rest covered after cooking helps the grains fully absorb any remaining moisture and gives you a fluffier final dish.
  • Adjust the seasoning after cooking: Taste your bulgur pilaf before serving and adjust the salt, pepper, or herbs to your liking. While it is optional, a squeeze of lemon juice just before serving can brighten the flavors beautifully.

Serving Suggestions

Traditionally, bulgur pilaf is served with chicken or beef recipes as a side dish. That being said, it can stand on its own as a vegetarian dish, especially if it is served with a side salad. Here are a few of my favorite pairings:

  • Red meat: Bulgur pilaf pairs beautifully with hearty meat dishes, especially the ones with rich sauces that the pilaf can soak up. Try it with my eggplant beef stew or Ina’s pot roast to add a Mediterranean twist to your meal. And if you’re in the mood for something a little lighter, it goes perfectly with lamb meatballs.
  • Chicken: This pilaf is the perfect side dish for classic Middle Eastern chicken recipes. Serve it with juicy Shawarma Chicken or Shish Taouk for a meal that feels special but is super easy to pull together. 
  • Vegetarian: For a simple vegetarian meal, serve the pilaf with creamy cucumber and yogurt sauce (aka tzatziki), yogurt dressing, or a cold glass of ayran. Or, if you’re feeling a bit fancy, use it as a filling in my Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant recipe—it’s a beautiful dish that looks impressive but is easy enough for a weeknight dinner.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This Bulgur Pilaf recipe is one of the most popular Turkish recipes on Foolproof Living, and for good reason, it is absolutely delicious. If you try it, please leave a comment and rating below to let me know how it turned out. And don’t forget to tag your photos on Instagram with #foolproofeats so I can see and share your creations!

Turkish bulgur pilaf recipe in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Turkish Bulgur Pilaf Recipe

This Bulgur Pilaf recipe is a classic Middle Eastern/Mediterranean side dish made with simple pantry ingredients. Ready in about 20 minutes, it has a satisfying chewy texture and a subtle nutty taste, making it perfect to serve with meat, chicken, or as a light vegetarian meal.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 12 minutes
Total Time 22 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 214kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tbsp olive oil or butter
  • 1 onion chopped, medium sized (approximately 1 cup)
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 green pepper seeded jalapeno or a small bell pepper would work (approximately 1/2 cup)
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 tbsp tomato paste
  • 1 cup coarse bulgur both coarse and extra coarse bulgur would work for this recipe
  • 1 fresh tomato cut into small cubes (approximately 1 cup)
  • 1 can chickpeas 14 oz. can, drained and rinsed
  • 2 cups water or vegetable broth
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon ground black pepper

Garnishes

  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Saute onion and tomato paste: Heat olive oil in a medium saucepan over medium heat. Add in onion, cumin and green pepper and saute until translucent, 4-5 minutes.
    Person showing how to saute veggies to make bulgur wheat pilaf.
  • Stir in the minced garlic and sautee for 30 seconds. Add in tomato paste and stir constantly for a minute or so.
  • Add in bulgur wheat, tomatoes, chickpeas, and water (or stock). Season it with salt and pepper.
  • Stir to combine, bring it to a boil, put the lid on, and turn down the heat to low. Let it simmer for 10-12 minutes or until most of the liquid is absorbed.
    Bulgur pilaf before and after it is cooked.
  • Off the heat, allow it to rest for 10 minutes (with the lid on), fluff it with a fork, garnish with parsley, and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 4 cups of bulgur pilaf, which serves four people as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Reheat in a pot with a splash of water over medium heat until warmed to your liking.
  • Freezing: Bring leftovers to room temperature, transfer to a freezer-safe container, and freeze for up to 2 months. Thaw it a day in advance in the fridge and warm it up on the stove before you are ready to serve it.
  • Bulgur and Vermicelli Pilaf: An earlier version of this recipe included a more basic bulgur pilaf made without tomatoes, tomato paste, vegetables (onion, pepper, etc.) and chickpeas. It is how my mother made it. To cook Bulgur Pilaf with Vermicelli:
    1. Heat oil (or butter): Heat oil in medium heat.
    2. Saute vermicelli: Add in 1/4 cup vermicelli and saute until it is golden brown for 5-6 minutes while constantly stirring it with a wooden spoon. It should feel like it is almost burning. 
    3. Add in the coarse bulgur wheat: Add in bulgur and saute for 4-5 minutes while constantly stirring.
    4. Add in the liquid & bring it to a boil. Add in your cooking liquid (water, stock, or a combination), salt and pepper. Give it a stir. Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat, and let it simmer for 12-15 minutes.
    5. Rest & Serve: Let it rest (with the lid on) for 10 minutes and then fluff it with a fork before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 214kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 661mg | Potassium: 407mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 499IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/moms-bulgur-pilaf/feed/ 49
Lamb Burgers Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/lamb-burgers/ https://foolproofliving.com/lamb-burgers/#respond Tue, 06 May 2025 20:00:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81378 How to Make Lamb Burgers? These Mediterranean lamb burgers are quick to prepare and easy to cook. Whether you’re using…]]>

What You Need to Know in a Nutshell

Before we jump into how to make lamb burgers, here are the key things to know that will help you get it just right:

How to cook the lamb patties: I like grilling them during the summer months, but if I make these burgers during the colder months, I cook them in the oven or on the stovetop. You’ll find the cooking instructions for all methods below.

How long does it take to cook? Depending on the thickness of your patties, on the grill, they take about 10–12 minutes. In the oven at 400°F, expect around 15–18 minutes. On the stovetop (using a cast iron skillet), go for 5–6 minutes per side.

Seasoning for lamb burgers: A flavorful blend of cumin, coriander, paprika, and lemon zest gives the ground lamb burgers a Mediterranean-style taste that pairs beautifully with tzatziki.

What to put on lamb burgers: We keep these Greek-style lamb burgers fresh and simple by layering the burger patties with tzatziki sauce, a slice of tomato, pickles, and curly greens. However, other burger toppings like pickled red onions, sumac onions, a dollop of CAVA’s feta cheese dip, or even a spoonful of harissa would also work beautifully, especially if you’re leaning into the Mediterranean flavors.

How to Make Lamb Burgers?

These Mediterranean lamb burgers are quick to prepare and easy to cook. Whether you’re using a grill, oven, or skillet, here’s how to do it with step-by-step photos:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Step 1 Gather your ingredients: You’ll find the complete list in the recipe card below. But here are a few quick ingredient notes and substitutions:

  • Ground Lamb: The base for this lamb patty recipe is ground lamb, which naturally has a higher fat content (typically around 20–25%), making it juicy. If you prefer something slightly leaner or want a milder taste, try a 50/50 mix of ground lamb and ground beef. Lamb and beef burgers still capture that Mediterranean feel but with a milder flavor that some people prefer.
  • Fresh Herbs: Parsley is essential for freshness. Mint is optional, but I recommend using it. Mint adds a bright, cooling note that helps balance the natural gaminess of the lamb.
  • Spices: Cumin, coriander, and paprika create a warm, aromatic base that complements the richness of the lamb. For more depth, you can use a tablespoon of my Mediterranean Spice Blend or Middle Eastern 7 Spice, which work beautifully with these ground lamb patties.
  • Toppings: We used tzatziki, tomato slices, pickles, and greens. For a different sauce for lamb burgers, try my Mint Yogurt Sauce or Lemon Tahini Sauce, which are quicker to make.
  • Hamburger Buns: Store-bought burger buns work just fine, but if you have the time, I highly recommend making my Brioche Burger Buns.
A collage of photos showing how to make the lamb mixture.

Step 2 Prepare the burger meat: Mix ground lamb, garlic, herbs, spices, lemon zest, salt, and pepper in a large bowl until just combined. Resist the urge to overmix the lamb mixture as it can make patties dense and tough instead of tender and juicy.  

A collage of images showing the lamb patties before and after they are cooked.

Step 3 Form the patties: Shape into four patties, about 4 inches wide. Press a shallow thumbprint in the center of each, which is key to a perfect lamb hamburger patty recipe.

Step 4 Cook the patties: Whether you’re grilling, baking, or pan-searing, you can cook these patties to your preferred level of doneness (here is a temperature chart). For medium, aim for an internal temperature of 145°F (63°C); for well done, cook to 160°F (71°C). The best way to check is by inserting an instant-read thermometer into the center of the patty.

  • On the Grill: Preheat the grill to medium-high heat (400–425°F / 200–220°C). Clean and oil the grates, then place the lamb patties on the grill. Cook for 3–4 minutes per side for medium, or 5–6 minutes per side for well done.
  • In the Oven: Preheat your oven to 400°F (200°C). Place the patties on a parchment-lined baking sheet and bake for 15–18 minutes, flipping them halfway through.
  • On the Stove: Heat a tablespoon of oil in a cast-iron, grill pan, or non-stick skillet over medium heat. Cook the lamb burgers for 5–6 minutes per side, depending on the size of your patties and doneness preference.
The toppings from the top view.

Step 5 Toast the buns & prep your toppings: While the burgers cook, place the buns on the cooler side of the grill or in the oven to toast them lightly. This is also a great time to slice your tomato, rinse the greens, and get your pickles and tzatziki ready for assembly.

An image showing how to prepare lamb burgers.

Step 6 Assemble: Spread tzatziki on the bottom bun, add a thinly sliced tomato, greens, pickles, and the grilled lamb burger patty. Top with more tzatziki and the top bun. Serve right away.

Expert Tips

Here are a few tips to help you get the best results when making this recipe:

  • Thumbprint trick: Don’t skip the small dent in the center of each lamb patty as it helps the burgers cook evenly and keeps them from puffing up in the middle as they cook.
  • The secret to juicy lamb burgers: Mix the ingredients just until combined to avoid a dense texture, and cook the patties only until they reach your desired doneness (145°F (63°C) for medium or 160°F (71°C) for well done). Overmixing or overcooking are the most common reasons for dry burgers.
  • Prevent falling apart: If your lamb burger patties tend to break apart on the grill, try chilling them in the fridge for 30 minutes before cooking and avoid flipping too early. During testing, I found versions of this recipe that use breadcrumbs or egg as a binder. I didn’t find those additions necessary in my version here, but they can be helpful if your mixture feels too soft or loose.
  • Shape slightly larger than the bun: As the lamb burger patties cook, they shrink slightly. To ensure a perfect fit, shape your patties just a bit wider than the buns. They’ll cook down to the correct size.

Serving Suggestions

These lamb hamburgers are easy to pair with a variety of fresh and satisfying sides. Here are some of my favorite ideas:

  • Coleslaw: If I make these lamb burgers for a cookout, I usually serve them with a bright, crunchy slaw like my Red Cabbage Slaw or Mayo-Free Coleslaw, which pairs beautifully and can be made ahead.
  • Mediterranean-inspired salads: Continuing with the Greek/Mediterranean theme, serve these lamb burgers with a Mediterranean Pasta Salad or a Greek Cucumber Tomato Salad—both are refreshing, easy to prep ahead, and complement the flavors of the burgers beautifully.
  • Bean Salads: Serve alongside my Five Beans Salad or Cowboy Caviar for a colorful, protein-packed addition—great for outdoor cookouts.

More Lamb Recipes You Might Like:

If you enjoy cooking with lamb, be sure to check out some of my other go-to lamb recipes like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Ground lamb burger layered with tzatziki sauce from the front.
Print

Lamb Burgers Recipe

These juicy Greek-style lamb burgers are seasoned with warm Mediterranean spices and topped with tzatziki, fresh tomato, and crisp greens. They are quick to prepare and easy to cook on the grill, stovetop, or in the oven. Perfect for a weeknight dinner or casual cookout.
Course Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 546kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 lb ground lamb
  • 2 garlic cloves peeled and minced
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped finely
  • 2 tablespoons fresh mint chopped finely optional
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

For Serving

  • 4 burger buns sliced in half
  • 1 cup Tzatziki Sauce or yogurt dill sauce
  • 1 tomato sliced
  • ½ cup sliced pickles dill or bread-and-butter, depending on your preference
  • 4 leaves curly greens or any other salad greens

Instructions

  • Place 1lb ground lamb, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 2 tablespoons of fresh parsley, 2 tablespoons of fresh mint, 1 teaspoon of ground cumin, 1 teaspoon of ground coriander, ½ teaspoon of paprika, 1 teaspoon of kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon of ground black pepper in a large bowl.
    Lamb mixture before and after it is mixed.
  • Using clean hands, mix until all the ingredients are fully combined, being careful not to overwork the meat.
  • Divide the meat mixture into four equal portions and shape them into 4-inch-wide patties. As you shape them, remember that they shrink slightly during the cooking process so it is best to make them a bit larger than your burger bun.
    Lamb patties being shaped and grilled.
  • Use your thumb to gently press a shallow indent in the center of each patty—this helps them cook evenly and prevents puffing on the grill. Cover and set aside while you preheat the grill.

To Cook On the Grill:

  • Preheat a gas grill to medium-high heat (around 400–425°F). Once hot, scrape the grates clean and brush them with olive oil.
  • Place the lamb patties on the grill and cook for 3–4 minutes per side for medium (145°F) or 5–6 minutes for well done (160°F), depending on your preference. Once cooked, place them on a plate, cover with aluminum foil and let them rest for 2-3 minutes for the juices to redistribute.

To Cook in the Oven:

  • Preheat your oven to 400°F (200°C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Transfer the patties to the baking sheet and bake for 15–18 minutes, flipping them halfway through.

To Cook on the Stove:

  • Heat a tablespoon of oil in a cast-iron, grill pan, or non-stick skillet over medium heat.
  • Place the lamb patties on the hot skillet and cook for 5–6 minutes (or more, depending on your doneness preference) per side.
  • While the patties are cooking, place the buns on the cooler side of the grill (or in the oven or the skillet) to warm them through.

To Assemble

  • To make lamb burgers, spread some tzatziki (or yogurt dill sauce) on the bottom half of each bun. Add a slice of tomato, some salad greens, a few pickle slices, and a grilled lamb patty. Spoon a little more tzatziki over the top of the meat, then place the top bun on and serve.
    Ground lamb burgers on a plate with yogurt sauce.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes four lamb burgers. The nutritional values below are per serving and include the toppings. 
  • Other herbs: While I opted for fresh parsley and mint, you can use other fresh herbs like rosemary and oregano in smaller quantities (about 1 to 2 teaspoons each) as they tend to be more potent.
  • Make ahead: You can mix and shape the lamb burger patties up to a day in advance. Store them covered in the fridge until you’re ready to cook.
  • Leftovers: Cooked lamb burgers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Reheat gently on the stove or in the oven to avoid drying them out.
  • Freezing: 
    • To freeze raw, place uncooked patties on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper and freeze until solid. Then transfer to a freezer-safe bag or container with parchment between each patty. They’ll keep for up to 2 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight before cooking.
    • To freeze cooked lamb patties, bring them to room temperature, cover tightly with plastic wrap, and freeze for up to a month.

Nutrition

Calories: 546kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 37g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 93mg | Sodium: 1305mg | Potassium: 454mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 892IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 194mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/lamb-burgers/feed/ 0
Quinoa Tabbouleh https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/ https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/#comments Sat, 01 Mar 2025 12:47:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20389 Growing up in a Mediterranean country, tabbouleh, or kisir, was a staple in our house. It was my mom’s go-to spring…]]>

Growing up in a Mediterranean country, tabbouleh, or kisir, was a staple in our house. It was my mom’s go-to spring and summer salad, which she paired with pretty much everything. 

This version, made with protein-rich quinoa (a fantastic substitute for bulgur), is the latest addition to my Quinoa Salad recipes collection, and it’s just as delicious as the traditional recipe. If you love quinoa as much as I do, be sure to check out my Mediterranean Quinoa Salad for another fresh and vibrant option. 

Quinoa tabouli being drizzled with the dressing.

And if you’ve ever wondered about the different names and spellings—tabbouleh, tabouli—they’re simply variations of the same name, reflecting different versions of the Arabic word.

Recipe Ingredients:

This tabouli quinoa recipe is made with simple ingredients that make a bright and refreshing salad. The fresh herbs and crisp vegetables provide a delicious contrast to the fluffy quinoa, while the tangy lemon dressing ties everything together beautifully. You will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Quinoa: This quinoa tabbouleh salad will work with any type of quinoa. Red, black, tricolor and white quinoa would all work. It is imperative to rinse quinoa before cooking if you want it to taste good. 
  • Cooking liquid: While water works just fine, I highly recommend cooking your quinoa in vegetable stock. It adds depth of flavor, ensuring that the base of your quinoa tabouli salad is tasty right from the start.
  • Fresh lemon juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice is my favorite acid for the dressing used in this recipe, but in a pinch, white wine vinegar can be used. The flavors would be slightly different but still be great.
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil
  • Fresh herbs: A mix of fresh herbs is key to classic tabouli, and this quinoa version is no exception. I like to use a cup of fresh flat-leaf parsley, a cup of fresh dill, and half a cup of fresh mint leaves, but there’s no strict rule—adjust to your taste! You can stick to just parsley and dill or skip the dill altogether if it’s not your favorite.
  • Fresh tomatoes: I prefer using colorful cherry tomatoes for their sweetness and vibrant look, but any variety will work—just be sure to chop them into small pieces for even distribution.
  • Cucumber: I prefer Persian cucumbers as they are crunchy, but English cucumbers would also work.
  • Scallions: Green onions provide a mild onion flavor that ties everything together. While it is not traditional, finely chopped red onion could be a good substitute in a pinch. 
  • Seasonings: I kept it simple with just kosher salt and pepper in this tabbouleh quinoa salad recipe, but you can add a touch of ground cumin, ground coriander, or a pinch of red pepper flakes to the dressing for extra depth of flavor.

Optional Add-Ins

While the recipe for quinoa tabouli I’m sharing stays close to the traditional version, you can easily customize it with a few extra ingredients. These aren’t traditional, but they add delicious new flavors:

  • Feta Cheese: A handful of crumbled feta adds a creamy, salty contrast that pairs perfectly with the Mediterranean flavors.
  • Kalamata Olives: Their briny, tangy taste enhances the salad and adds an extra punch of flavor.
  • Garlic: The traditional tabbouleh salad recipe does not use garlic in the lemon dressing, but you can always add a minced garlic clove if you are a fan.
  • Chickpeas: Again, the classic tabbouleh recipe does not use chickpeas, but sometimes I add a can of (drained and rinsed) chickpeas to make it even more satisfying.

How To Make Quinoa Tabbouleh?

Making this quinoa tabouli recipe is easy, and it comes together in just a few steps in under 20 minutes. Yes, there is a bit of chopping involved, but the result is a refreshing and wholesome dish that you’ll want to make on repeat.

A collage of images showing how to cook quinoa and make the dressing.
  1. Cook the Quinoa: Place the rinsed quinoa in a medium saucepan along with your cooking liquid and salt. Bring to a boil, reduce to a simmer, cover, and cook for about 10-12 minutes until the liquid is absorbed. Let it rest for 10 minutes, then fluff with a fork and transfer it to a large bowl to cool.
  2. Make the Dressing: While the quinoa is cooking, prepare the dressing. In a small bowl, whisk lemon juice, olive oil, salt, and black pepper until fully combined. 
  3. Chop the fresh herbs and veggies – Finely chop the fresh parsley, dill, and mint. Quarter the cherry tomatoes, dice the cucumbers and thinly slice the scallions. Add the chopped herbs, tomatoes, cucumbers, and scallions to the cooled quinoa.
Tabbouleh with quinoa in a salad bowl.
  1. Assemble your tabouli quinoa salad – Drizzle the cooked quinoa and the veggies with the dressing and gently toss to combine.
  2. Serve – Taste for seasoning and add more salt, pepper, or lemon juice as needed. Serve immediately or refrigerate for later.

How To Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

My favorite thing about this quinoa tabbouleh salad recipe is that it stores well. As a matter of fact, since the flavors meld together over time, it actually tastes even better the next day. Here is how I make-ahead and store leftovers:

  • Make Ahead: If preparing in advance, cook and cool the quinoa, chop the veggies, and make the dressing a day or two in advance. Store them separately in airtight containers in the fridge. Toss everything together about an hour before serving for the best texture and flavor.
  • Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Before serving, give it a quick stir, taste for seasoning, and refresh it with a squeeze of lemon and more seasoning if needed.
  • Freezing: You can technically freeze this dish, but I do not recommend it as it will lose most of its fresh flavors when thawed.

Expert Tips:

This recipe is simple and easy to make, but to ensure the best quinoa tabbouleh, here are a few key tips to help you get it right on your first try:

  • Chopping by hand vs. using a food processor: I like to chop the herbs by hand using a sharp chef’s knife as it gives me more control over the texture, ensuring evenly chopped herbs. Plus, there is no risk of over-processing, which can turn herbs into a paste. However, if you prefer a food processor, pulse in short bursts instead of running it continuously to prevent the herbs from turning into a paste.
  • Herb stems: When it comes to herbs, you can chop the parsley and dill stems, as they are tender and flavorful. However, with mint, I prefer using only the leaves unless you’re growing your own and it’s super fresh.
  • Are you short on time? You can prep the herbs and veggies a day in advance and store them in the fridge until you’re ready to put it all together.
  • Let the quinoa cool a bit: You can mix everything together while the quinoa is still warm for a slightly different texture and flavor, but letting it cool first helps keep the herbs fresh and vibrant. I usually cook the quinoa a day in advance—not only does this save time, but it also ensures it’s perfectly cooled and ready to use.
  • Cooking quinoa: While I opted to cook quinoa on the stovetop, you can cook quinoa in the microwave, in an instant pot, and a rice cooker. Feel free to pick the method that works best for you. Also, I usually cook a big batch and freeze some for later. If you have some cooked quinoa on hand, this quinoa tabbouleh comes together in minutes.
  • Serve at room temperature: This tabouli recipe with quinoa tastes best when served at room temperature, allowing the flavors to fully develop. If you made it in advance, take it out of the fridge 15 minutes before serving for the best taste and texture.

Serving Suggestions:

You can serve this gluten-free tabbouleh salad with any protein or vegetarian main or just by itself for a light meal. Below are a few of my favorite pairings:

Other Quinoa Salads You Might Also Like

If you make this recipe for tabbouleh salad with quinoa, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to leave a star rating and a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This recipe was originally published in September 2018 and updated in March 2025 with new step-by-step photos and more helpful tips. The recipe itself remains the same, with only minor edits for clarification.

Quinoa tabbouleh in a salad bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Quinoa Tabbouleh Recipe

Traditional Mediterranean Tabbouleh Salad made with a twist. Made with protein-rich quinoa, this vegan and gluten-free Quinoa Tabbouleh Salad Recipe is the perfect year-round salad for all your indoor and outdoor parties.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean, Turkish
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 27 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 205kcal

Ingredients

For the Quinoa:

  • 1 cup uncooked quinoa rinsed
  • 1 ¾ cups water or vegetable stock
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

For The Dressing:

  • 4 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed – plus more to taste
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt more to taste as needed
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For the Tabbouleh:

  • 1 cup fresh parsley chopped
  • 1 cup fresh dill chopped (optional)
  • ½ cup fresh mint leaves chopped
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes quartered
  • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and chopped or 1 English cucumber
  • 3-4 scallions sliced thinly both white and green parts

Instructions

  • Place 1 cup quinoa in a saucepan along with 1 ¾ cups of vegetable stock (or water) and a half teaspoon of kosher salt. Stir to combine, put the lid on, and bring it to a boil over medium-high heat.
    Person showing how to cook quinoa.
  • Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to low and cook for 10-12 minutes or until water is fully absorbed. Turn the heat off and let it rest for 10 minutes. Fluff it with a fork, transfer it to a large salad bowl, and let it cool while working on the rest of the ingredients.
  • Meanwhile, prepare the dressing by whisking together 4 tablespoons of freshly squeezed lemon juice, ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, and ¼ teaspoon black pepper in a bowl. Set it aside.
    A collage of images showing how to make the dressing and prep the ingredients.
  • To assemble the quinoa tabbouleh, add 1 cup of chopped parsley, 1 cup of fresh dill, ½ cup fresh mint, 1 cup of quartered cherry tomatoes, 2 chopped Persian cucumbers, 3 thinly sliced green onions into the bowl with the quinoa.
  • Drizzle it with the dressing. Give it a gentle toss.
    A bowl of tabouli with quinoa is being drizzled with the dressing.
  • Taste for seasoning and serve immediately.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 5 to 6 cups of tabbouleh, ideal for serving six adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Using dill: Most tabouli recipes are made with fresh parsley and mint, but my mom always added fresh dill, so I followed in her footsteps. If you are not a fan, you can omit using dill (and use more parsley or mint instead.)
  • A quick note on chopping herbs: Traditional tabbouleh is made with finely chopped herbs for a light, delicate texture, but if you prefer a rougher chop, that works too! It all comes down to personal preference.
  • Make Ahead: If preparing in advance, cook and cool the quinoa, chop the veggies, and make the dressing a day or two in advance. Store them separately in airtight containers in the fridge. Toss everything together about an hour before serving for the best texture and flavor.
  • Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Before serving, taste for seasoning and add more lemon juice and salt and pepper if needed. 

Nutrition

Calories: 205kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 408mg | Potassium: 404mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 1812IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 66mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/feed/ 22
Chicken Shawarma Bowl https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-shawarma-bowl/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-shawarma-bowl/#comments Tue, 25 Feb 2025 22:15:45 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80344 During the week, all-in-one dinner bowls like this and my  DIY CAVA bowl are a satisfying, time-saving option. With a…]]>

During the week, all-in-one dinner bowls like this and my  DIY CAVA bowl are a satisfying, time-saving option. With a little bit of advanced preparation, you can turn this popular street food (typically served with pita bread) into a hearty shawarma rice bowl perfect for a quick weeknight dinner. If chicken isn’t your preference, you can also make this shawarma bowl recipe with my classic Beef Shawarma.

Chicken shawarma bowl served with rice and toppings from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This is a wonderful recipe to make with leftover chicken shawarma, and it comes together very quickly if you have leftovers. Otherwise, you can make your chicken shawarma meal from scratch. You can find all of the ingredients at your everyday grocery store—no specialty shopping is required.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.
  • For The Marinade
    • Chicken: I used boneless skinless chicken thighs in this deconstructed chicken shawarma, which gives the best flavor and texture. But if you’d prefer to swap in chicken breasts, they will also work well. 
    • Kosher salt
    • Shawarma seasoning: My homemade spice blend, made with flavorful spices like ground cumin, paprika, turmeric, coriander, cardamom, and cinnamon, is easy to make and great to have on hand. But if you’d prefer to buy a ready-made jar, here’s my favorite one (affiliate link). 
    • Lemon juice
    • Extra Virgin Olive oil 
    • Garlic: I prefer fresh garlic cloves for the most impact but garlic powder could be used for a milder garlic flavor.
  • For The Rice
    • Water or Stock: While water is sufficient, using either vegetable stock or chicken broth when cooking your rice will give it more flavor.
    • Unsalted butter: I prefer unsalted butter so that I can adjust the salt but if all you have is salted butter, omit the additional Kosher salt. Alternatively, you can also use olive oil to cook your rice,
    • Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper
    • Rice: For my chicken shawarma rice bowl recipe, I used long-grain white rice. While I know it is controversial, I prefer to rinse my rice before cooking it.
  • Toppings For The Bowls
    • Cherry tomatoes: Look for fresh, crisp cherry tomatoes and cut them into quarters. Regular or grape tomatoes will also work if that’s what you have available.
    • English cucumber: Persian cucumbers are also an option. 
    • Curly salad greens: These can be one type of lettuce or a blend of various kinds. The key here is that you want a more delicate, curly leaf to slice thinly for texture in your shawarma chicken bowl.
    • Dill pickles: You can purchase these at the store, or pickle your own in advance. The zesty crunch these pickles provide makes them one of the chicken shawarma toppings you don’t want to skip!
    • Pickled red onions: If you’d like to make your own, here’s my pickled red onions recipe. Storebought is also ok to use. 
    • Tzatziki: While you can find many tzatziki options at the grocery store, making your own tzatziki using plain Greek yogurt, cucumbers, and fresh lemon juice is easy and extra tasty. 
    • Hummus: This is an optional ingredient that adds some creaminess to your chicken shawarma bowls. Again, you can select any version at the store, or you can make my Mediterranean Hummus in advance. 
    • Lemon: A couple of lemon wedges, served on the side, are optional for a touch of brightness as a finisher. 

Ingredient Substitutions

One of the best parts about this chicken shawarma rice bowl recipe is that it is endlessly customizable. There are so many different varieties that you can make, depending on which ingredients you have on hand or simply prefer. Here are some common substitutions you can use:

How to Make Chicken Shawarma Bowls?

Chicken shawarma over rice is a straightforward recipe that anyone can make. With a little advanced prep, you can even throw your shawarma bowls together quickly on a busy weeknight for a quick and easy dinner. 

A collage of image showing how to prepare chicken shawarma with rice.
  1. Prepare your chicken. Pat 1 ½ pounds of chicken thighs dry with paper towels and season them with 1 ½ teaspoon of kosher salt on both sides. Transfer them to a large bowl.
  2. Season your chicken and allow time to marinate. Add 2 tablespoons of shawarma seasoning, ¼ cup of lemon juice, ¼ cup of olive oil, and 2 cloves of fresh minced garlic to the bowl with your chicken in it. Mix it all together using kitchen tongs to coat the chicken with the marinade. Cover the chicken with stretch film and marinate it in the refrigerator for an hour or overnight.
  3. Cook your marinated chicken shawarma. Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F. Arrange the marinated chicken on the sheet pan and place it on the middle rack. Bake for 18-20 minutes or until the internal temperature of a chicken thigh registers 165 degrees F. If you prefer your chicken shawarma to be on the browned side, move the sheet pan to the top rack and broil for 2-3 minutes more, while watching it closely to prevent burning.
  4. Prepare your chicken shawarma for your bowls. Let the chicken rest for 5 minutes, then slice it into ½ inch strips (or you can cut it into cubes as well.)
A collage of photos showing how to make rice and assemble the bowl.
  1. Cook the rice. While the chicken is cooking, cook the rice. In a medium saucepan, add 2 cups of water (or stock), 1 tablespoon of unsalted butter, and 1 teaspoon of kosher salt. Bring to a boil over medium-high heat, then add the rinsed rice, reduce the heat down to low, cover, and cook until rice is tender, about 15-17 minutes. Remove from the heat and let it rest for 10 minutes (do not remove the lid); right before serving, fluff it with a fork.
  2. Assemble your chicken shawarma bowls. To assemble the shawarma chicken and rice, divide the rice among four bowls. Top it off with sliced shawarma chicken, a handful of cherry tomatoes, sliced cucumbers, salad greens, pickled cucumbers, pickled red onions, and a generous dollop of hummus and tzatziki.

How to Meal Prep & Store Leftovers?

My chicken shawarma bowls recipe can be adapted for your weekly meal prep routine. Here are a few simple instructions to ensure the optimal result: 

  • Meal Prep: How you prepare your shawarma meal in advance depends on how you prefer to eat it. Do you plan to enjoy it hot, or do you not mind eating it cold/at room temperature? 
    If you’d like to eat your chicken rice shawarma hot, then I recommend you store your rice and chicken together, keeping the rest of the toppings separate. This way, when you go to reheat your bowls, you can heat only the shawarma chicken and rice, then add the toppings afterward. If you don’t mind eating your chicken shawarma bowls cold or at room temperature, feel free to store everything together when you meal prep your bowls. 
  • Storing Leftovers: The same instructions as above apply here with any leftovers you have. Store the rice and chicken together separately from the toppings if you plan to eat it again hot. As long as they are kept in an airtight container in the fridge, they should be fresh for up to 3 days.
  • Reheating: You can reheat rice and chicken in a low-heat oven (around 300 degrees F) and then add the toppings right before serving.
Chicken Shawarma Rice Bowls with fresh lemon slices on the side.

Expert Tips

When it comes to all of the chicken shawarma bowl recipes you’ll find, this one is achievable and foolproof. Here are a couple extra tips that I have for you to ensure a seamless preparation experience in your own kitchen:

  • Feel free to cook your chicken in the manner you prefer. While the recipe below instructs you to cook your chicken thighs on a sheet pan in the oven, they will also come out just as delicious if you choose to grill them on a barbeque, or if you choose to use a cast iron skillet on the stovetop. You can find the details of each method in our chicken shawarma recipe.
  • Marinating your chicken will result in the best flavor. My mom always marinated our chicken shawarma overnight, allowing the spices to fully infuse the meat. This extra time helps the flavors develop and makes the chicken even more tender. However, if you’re short on time, you can cook it right away—shawarma seasoning is already packed with bold, aromatic flavors that will still shine through.
  • Short on time? Take the Trader Joe’s shortcut. If you live in the US and have access to Trader Joe’s, here’s a hot tip: The packaged chicken shawarma they sell at Trader Joe’s is fantastic and takes about 20 minutes to cook in the oven. It is a fantastic shortcut to make this shawarma chicken bowl in less than 30 minutes for a quick weeknight dinner. 
  • Make it lighter. If you want to cut down on calories, you can skip the rice and assemble your shawarma bowls over a bed of lettuce or cauliflower rice (for a low-carb and keto friendly option) instead. Additionally, you can add other veggies like thinly sliced red bell peppers, cucumbers, and radishes. 
  • Serve it as a part of a larger meal. While this recipe is a complete meal on its own, you can easily turn it into a feast by pairing it with chicken shawarma sides like warm pita bread, baba ganoush, muhammara, or a fresh cucumber and tomato salad.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make this Healthy Chicken Shawarma Bowls recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Chicken shawarma bowl garnished with pickled red onions from the top view.
Print

Chicken Shawarma Bowl Recipe

If you’re wondering how to eat chicken shawarma beyond the usual pita, this versatile grain bowl is the answer. Meal prep-friendly and easy to customize, this chicken shawarma and rice recipe transforms a classic shawarma plate into a hearty rice bowl with all the authentic Middle Eastern toppings like tzatziki sauce, hummus, and pickled red onions.
Course Lunch, Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean, Middle Eastern
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Marinading Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 40 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 747kcal

Ingredients

For The Marinade:

  • 1 ½ lbs. Boneless skinless chicken thighs or chicken breasts
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
  • 2 tablespoons shawarma seasoning
  • ¼ cup lemon juice
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 2 cloves garlic minced

For The Rice:

  • 2 cups vegetable stock or water or chicken stock
  • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter or olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 cup long-grain white rice rinsed and drained

For The Bowls:

  • 1 ½ cups cherry tomatoes quartered
  • 1 English cucumber cut into small pieces, or 3 Persian cucumbers
  • 1 ½ cup curly salad greens rinsed and sliced thinly (or any other salad greens)
  • ½ cup pickled cucumber sliced (aka dill pickles)
  • ½ cup pickled red onions
  • 1 cup tzatziki sauce or yogurt tahini sauce
  • 1 cup hummus optional
  • 4 wedges of a lemon

Instructions

  • Pat dry 1 ½ pounds of chicken thighs with paper towels and season with 1 ½ teaspoon of kosher salt on both sides. Transfer them to a large bowl.
    Person preparing chicken for the chicken shawarma rice bowl recipe.
  • Add 2 tablespoons of shawarma seasoning, ¼ cup of lemon juice, ¼ cup of olive oil, and 2 cloves of fresh minced garlic. Mix well using kitchen tongs to coat the chicken with the marinade. Cover the chicken with stretch film and marinate it in the refrigerator for an hour or overnight.
  • Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F. (218 degrees F.).
  • Arrange the marinated chicken on the baking sheet on a single layer and place it on the middle rack. Bake for 18-20 minutes or until a meat thermometer inserted into the thickest part of a chicken registers 165 degrees F. If you prefer your chicken shawarma to be on the browned side, move the sheet pan to the top rack and broil for 2-3 minutes (while watching it closely).
    Chicken shawarma before and after it is cooked.
  • Let the chicken rest for 5 minutes, then slice it into ½ inch strips (or you can cut it into cubes as well).
  • While the chicken is cooking, cook the rice. Into a medium saucepan, add 2 cups of water (or stock), 1 tablespoon of unsalted butter, and 1 teaspoon of kosher salt. Bring to a boil over medium-high heat. Add the rinsed rice, reduce the heat down to low, cover, and cook until rice is tender, about 15-17 minutes. Remove from the heat and let it rest for 10 minutes (do not remove the lid); right before serving, fluff it with a fork and season with black pepper.
    A collage of images showing cooking the rice and the assembled chicken shawarma bowl.
  • To assemble the chicken shawarma bowls, divide the rice among four bowls. Top it off with sliced shawarma chicken, a handful of cherry tomatoes, sliced cucumbers, salad greens, pickled cucumbers, pickled red onions, and a generous dollop of hummus and tzatziki.
  • Serve right away.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes four adult servings of chicken shawarma bowls. The nutrition values below include optional toppings like hummus and tzatziki.
  • Meal prep: If preferred, you can assemble it in airtight meal prep containers. If you go in that direction, I recommend storing cooked chicken and rice together and adding the toppings right before serving the most fresh shawarma rice bowls. 
  • Storing: Bring leftovers to room temperature, place in an airtight container and keep in the fridge for upto 3 days.
  • Marinading: The one-hour (or overnight) marinading is optional. If you are short on time, you can cook chicken right away.

Nutrition

Calories: 747kcal | Carbohydrates: 60g | Protein: 44g | Fat: 38g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 179mg | Sodium: 2615mg | Potassium: 896mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 948IU | Vitamin C: 23mg | Calcium: 159mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-shawarma-bowl/feed/ 2
Turkish Eggs Recipe (Cilbir) https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-eggs-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-eggs-recipe/#comments Thu, 06 Feb 2025 14:24:32 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80042 Growing up in Turkey, çilbir aka Turkish poached eggs, was a breakfast staple. As you have seen in so many…]]>

Growing up in Turkey, çilbir aka Turkish poached eggs, was a breakfast staple. As you have seen in so many of our Turkish cuisine recipes, our culture is big on using strained yogurt (commonly referred to as Greek yogurt) as a complement to our savory dishes. Thus, for me as a Turkish child, Greek yogurt and eggs for breakfast were frequent delights—and ones I still crave regularly as an adult in the US.

Turkish eggs placed on a plate with yogurt and spicy butter sauce and garnished with herbs.

What Are Turkish Eggs (Cilbir)?

Cilbir eggs (pronounced “chull-burr”) are essentially eggs and yogurt for breakfast. To make this Turkish eggs recipe, you prepare a garlic yogurt sauce and a chili butter sauce for your plate’s base, then you poach your eggs to place on top, and use crusty bread as your serving spoon to swirl the velvety combo together.

The tang of the yogurt and the zing of the chili sauce give the Turkish-style eggs a surprising pop that will leave you licking the plate. The best part is that while it looks like something you’d be served at a top-tier brunch restaurant, it comes together quickly and without fuss in your own kitchen.

Ingredients and Substitutions

A short list of ingredients and four simple components make this Turkish breakfast recipe something that is 100% achievable on both weekday and weekend mornings in under 25 minutes. Here’s what you’ll need to prepare this Turkish yogurt and eggs recipe:

The ingredients for cilbir from the top view.
  • For the Garlic Yogurt Sauce:
    • Plain Greek yogurt: Since this is a savory dish, it is important to select plain, unsweetened yogurt. Strained, as known as Greek yogurt, works best, but if all you have is regular yogurt, you can use that as well. If you have the time, you can place it over a cheesecloth-lined strainer and let it drip for a few hours to have a similar, thick consistency to Greek yogurt.
    • Fresh garlic clove: We only use 1 clove in our Turkish çılbır recipe, but you’re welcome to add more if you want a more intense garlic flavor. 
    • Lemon juice: Freshly squeezed from 1 lemon works best—just be sure to avoid dropping in any seeds. 
    • Kosher salt and black pepper
  • For the Poached Eggs:
    • Distilled white vinegar: We use a small amount in this Turkish egg dish as a tool to help our eggs coagulate more quickly during the poaching process. Not to worry—you won’t notice much of a vinegar flavor in the final dish. While distilled white vinegar is the traditional ingredient here, you’re also welcome to substitute in apple cider vinegar or white wine vinegar for the same effect. 
    • Eggs: We used large eggs, but extra large eggs would also work just fine.
  • For the Spicy Butter Sauce:
    • Unsalted butter: If you’d prefer to use salted butter instead, please be sure to adjust the additional salt to taste. We think this yogurt eggs recipe is best made with butter, but if you’d rather use oil, you may swap in olive oil or a combination of the two. 
    • Turkish red pepper flakes: We recommend that you use Urfa chili pepper or Aleppo pepper, which is also known as “pul biber.” If you can’t get your hands on it, you can use any chili flakes you have in your spice drawer. Also, if you are serving Turkish eggs and yogurt to children or those who cannot handle spicy foods, you can use paprika only. 
    • Sweet paprika: We prefer sweet paprika but smoked paprika can also be used.
    • Kosher salt
  • For Serving:
    • Fresh herbs: Depending on your palate, you can finish this dish off with a sprinkling of either fresh dill, parsley, or mint. Sumac is also an excellent Turkish seasoning to garnish this dish. 
    • Crusty bread: Your bread is used as a vehicle for scooping up the ultra-creamy Turkish eggs with yogurt. It is usually served with crusty bread such as our  No Knead Olive Bread, No Knead Artisan Bread, or if you want to do it as we do it in Turkiye, you can serve it with Simit or Pita Bread to scoop up the smooth, savory fusion of eggs and yogurt. Once you try it, you will know why it is one of the most popular Turkish egg recipes!

How to Make Turkish Eggs?

Yogurt and eggs for breakfast come together in a few simple steps. If you follow these step by step instructions, you’ll end up with a delectable way to start your day, Mediterranean-style.

Steps showing how to make Turkish eggs in a collage of photos.
  1. Yogurt with eggs starts with the yogurt sauce! In this first step, you’ll whisk together the yogurt, fresh garlic, lemon juice, salt, and pepper in a bowl. Then, simply cover it and set it aside so it can come to room temperature while you prepare your eggs. 
  2. Poaching the eggs is next, but don’t be intimidated—it’s easier than you think. Fill a medium saucepan with water that’s at least 4 inches deep and bring it to a boil over medium-high heat. Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to low and let it come to a simmer. This is when you stir in the vinegar, which is crucial for perfectly poached eggs.
  3. Draining the raw eggs first is important. While you are waiting for the water to come to a boil, place a fine-mesh strainer over a small bowl and crack an egg into it. Be very gentle at this step—you want to keep your yolk fully intact. Allow the excess watery egg whites to drop through the strainer, then transfer it into a ramekin. Repeat the same process for the rest of the eggs.
  4. Place a sheet of paper towel on a large plate and set it aside. (You’re going to use this to dry off your cooked eggs!)
  5. When you’re ready to poach your eggs, we recommend that you cook no more than two at a time, otherwise it can get overwhelming. First, stir the simmering water to create a vortex in the middle, carefully drop the egg in the middle, and then cook for 3 to 3 ½ minutes until the whites are firm and the yolk is set but still soft and runny. 
  6. Dry the cooked eggs as they come out of the water. Carefully remove the egg using a slotted spoon (draining the excess water) and then transfer it to the paper-towel-lined plate. Repeat the same process with the rest of the eggs, cooking each set two at a time.
  7. Immediately before serving, melt the butter in a small pan or skillet. This step comes together quickly, so we find it easiest to work with butter cut into smaller pieces. Next, add the Urfa chili pepper (or any red pepper flakes) and salt to your melted butter. Allow the combo to cook for 15-20 seconds, or until the butter starts to foam and sizzle. Do not let it brown!
  8. Plate your eggs with yogurt. Using the back of a large spoon, spread half of the yogurt sauce on a plate. Then, add two poached eggs on top of the yogurt sauce. Finally, drizzle it all with the sizzling chili butter sauce.
  9. Garnish your dish. Using the fresh herbs of your choice—parsley, dill, or mint—sprinkle them over the top along with a pinch of salt and pepper, to taste. Here is where you could also use sumac, if you’re interested. Repeat the same process for the second serving in its own dish. Serve immediately while still warm.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

The truth is, this is a dish that is meant to be made and enjoyed at the moment. Turkish eggs breakfast is simple though, so there’s not too much prep that needs to be done ahead of time—it’s already a streamlined recipe.

  • To Make Ahead: If you’d like, the component that you can make in advance is the garlic yogurt sauce. Simply mix it together and place it in the fridge. We recommend you allow it to come to room temperature before serving. 
  • To Store: Unfortunately, there’s really no good way to store poached eggs and yogurt that’s already been warmed, so eat up! 
Turkish eggs with greek yogurt on a plate served with toast on the side.

Expert Tips

If you’re looking for Turkish egg breakfast perfection, it’s definitely within reach if you take note of this insider advice:

  • Start with room-temperature eggs eggs. It is best to take your eggs out of the fridge 15-20 minutes before you are ready to poach them, as cold eggs straight from the fridge can lower the water temperature too much, which can lead to uneven cooking and a looser white.
  • Get yourself some fresh eggs for the best results. In his article on poaching eggs, my favorite food scientist/teacher, Kenji Lopez-Alt, says, “Fresh eggs have tighter whites and yolks that help them retain their shape better as they cook.” So, using fresh eggs, you will end up with perfectly poached eggs without those whispy white floaters.
  • Do not skip straining your raw eggs. Straining the egg before poaching helps remove the thin, watery part of the egg white, which is what tends to create those wispy strands in the water. By removing this excess liquid, you’re left with a firmer white that wraps neatly around the yolk, resulting in a more compact, poached egg.
  • Only poach two eggs at a time. The poaching process moves more quickly than you think, so sticking to two eggs at a time prevents you from getting overwhelmed and damaging the eggs due to rushing and overcrowding in the pan. 
  • Bring your yogurt to room temperature before plating. You do not want your hot eggs and hot chili butter sauce interacting with cold yogurt. That is why we recommend making the garlic yogurt sauce first so that it can come to room temperature while you are poaching the eggs.
  • Watch your butter—it burns easily. Your chili butter sauce is the final step because it is practically done instantaneously. Do not step away or leave it in the pan too long, as it will brown and burn, thus becoming unappetizing. 
  • Check your eggs for doneness. While this is more of a personal preference, runny yolks are one of the characteristics of this egg yogurt recipe. You will want to watch your eggs and remove them when they have reached the level of runniness you desire in your yolks. While it’s not traditional, soft fried eggs are acceptable if you don’t enjoy poached eggs. 
  • Presentation matters. This is an Instagram-worthy recipe. To achieve a finished dish like the one in our photos, be sure to plate as instructed by swirling the yogurt on the plate, then placing the eggs on top, then drizzling your chili butter sauce. The fresh herb topping gives a green flash of color that you won’t want to skip. 
  • Serve immediately. This is not the type of dish that you want to leave sitting around. Poached eggs are meant to be served right away, particularly here since you’ve just topped them with hot chili butter sauce.

FAQs

Where did Turkish eggs come from?

Turkish eggs originated during the Ottoman Empire, first appearing as a recipe in a book in 1876. While there have been a few variations on the dish over the centuries (cinnamon, onions, and tomato have made appearances), this Turkish eggs with Greek yogurt recipe has mostly stood the test of time as it is outlined here.

How do you pronounce çılbır?

The cilbir pronunciation isn’t as tricky as it looks. The ç character is pronounced like the English letter combination of “ch”. Then, the full word sounds like, chull-burr.

If you make your own Turkish Eggs Recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Turkish Recipes You Might Like

Turkish eggs recipe on a plate with bread on the side from the top view.
Print

Turkish Eggs Recipe (Cilbir)

Turkish eggs are a visually stunning dish that brings the bold flavors of the Mediterranean to your breakfast table. A low-carb, high-protein recipe, it is made by placing poached eggs on a bed of creamy, garlicky yogurt and drizzling it with a rich, spiced butter sauce. Served with crusty bread for scooping, every bite offers a perfect balance of textures and flavors—making it a standout in any Turkish breakfast spread.
Course Breakfast, Brunch
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 346kcal

Ingredients

For the Garlic Yogurt Sauce:

  • 1 cup unsweetened plain Greek yogurt room temperature
  • 1 clove fresh garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt or more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For the Poached Eggs:

  • 1 tablespoon white vinegar
  • 4 large eggs

For the Chili Butter Sauce:

  • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter* cut into pieces
  • 1 teaspoon Urfa or Aleppo pepper any red pepper flakes you have on hand
  • ½ teaspoon sweet paprika
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt

For Serving:

  • 1 tablespoon of fresh herbs such as parsley, dill, and/or mint
  • Sliced bread or toast

Instructions

  • To make the yogurt sauce, whisk together the yogurt, garlic, lemon juice, salt, and pepper in a bowl, cover it, and set it aside. I intentionally do this first so that it can come to room temperature while I poach the eggs.
  • To poach the eggs, fill a medium saucepan with water (it should be at least 4 inches deep) and bring it to a boil over medium-high heat. Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to low and let it come to a simmer. Stir in the vinegar.
  • While you are waiting for the water to come to a boil, place a fine mesh strainer over a small bowl and crack an egg while being super gentle to make sure not to disturb the yolk. Let the excess loose (watery) egg whites drop through and then transfer it into a ramekin. Repeat the same process for the rest of the eggs.
  • Place a sheet of paper towel on a large plate and set it aside.
  • When ready to poach the eggs, stir the simmering water to create a vortex in the middle, carefully drop the egg in the middle, and cook for 3 to 3 ½ minutes until the whites are firm and the yolk is set but still soft and runny.
  • Carefully remove the egg using a slotted spoon and then transfer it to the paper-towel lined plate. Repeat the same process with the rest of the eggs*.
  • Right before serving, melt the butter in a small skillet. Add the Urfa chili pepper (or any red pepper flakes) and salt. Let it cook, stirring gently with a wooden spoon, for 15-20 seconds until the butter starts to foam and sizzle and the color turns to a hazelnutty brown.
  • To assemble: Using the back of a large spoon, spread half of the yogurt sauce on a plate. Add two poached eggs on top and drizzle them with the sizzling chili butter sauce.
  • Garnish with fresh parsley or chopped dill; sprinkle it with a pinch of salt and pepper to taste. Repeat the same process for the second serving. Serve immediately while still warm.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves 2 people with each portion serving two eggs. The nutritional values below do not include the optional serving of bread/toast.
  • Butter: You can use salted butter, but if you do, omit the additional salt.
  • Cooking eggs: We recommend poaching no more than two eggs at a time for the best results.
  • Eggs: While this Turkish egg recipe is traditionally made with poached eggs, you can serve it with fried eggs or soft-boiled eggs as well. 
  • Make Ahead & Storage: You can make the garlic yogurt sauce a day in advance and store in an airtight container in the fridge. While technically you can store the leftovers in an airtight container, we highly recommend consuming this dish as soon as possible while it is still warm and fresh.

Nutrition

Calories: 346kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 378mg | Sodium: 1053mg | Potassium: 311mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1548IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 175mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-eggs-recipe/feed/ 2
Turkish Pasta https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-pasta/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-pasta/#comments Sat, 04 Jan 2025 17:34:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79631 Growing up in Türkiye and making my fair share of Turkish recipes, this comforting Turkish pasta dish, known as kiymali makarna, was…]]>

Growing up in Türkiye and making my fair share of Turkish recipes, this comforting Turkish pasta dish, known as kiymali makarna, was one of my mom’s go-to weeknight dinners. So, when I came across Anna Paul’s TikTok video of her mom making it, I was instantly transported back to my childhood.

This dish is a simplified take on manti, the iconic Turkish dumplings known for their labor-intensive preparation. Making manti is usually a communal activity involving making the dough from scratch, filling it with spiced meat, and folding each piece by hand. It is a process that takes hours. This “cheat manti” (or sometimes referred to as “manti pasta”) offers the same bold and comforting flavors but in a fraction of the time, making it perfect for modern weeknight cooking.

Pasta Turkish garnished with dried mint and tomatoes from the front view.

Ingredients and Substitutions:

This dish is all about combining simple ingredients to create layers of flavor. While the list of ingredients may look long, there are plenty of options when it comes to substitutions. Below is what you’ll need:

Ingredients from the top view.
  • Pasta: I use farfalle, but other small pasta shapes like fusilli or penne would work. You can also use your gluten-free pasta if you are following a gluten-free diet. For a gluten-free option, use your favorite gluten-free pasta. While alternative pastas like chickpea or brown rice pasta can be used, note that their distinct flavors might slightly change the overall taste of the dish.
  • Ground beef: Lean ground beef (93%) works best for a lighter, flavorful meat sauce. You can also use ground lamb, turkey, or chicken, but keep in mind that each will bring a distinct flavor profile to the dish.
  • Yellow onion: You’ll need about a cup of finely chopped yellow onion. Any type of onion, like Walla Walla, Vidalia or even white onion would work.
  • Red Pepper Paste : Traditionally, this recipe uses mildly hot red pepper paste, which adds a unique depth of flavor. It’s readily available online (affiliate link). If you don’t have it on hand, tomato paste makes a great substitute.
  • Spices: You’ll need a combination of onion powder (to enhance the onion taste), ground cumin, sweet (or smoked) paprika, red pepper flakes (such as Aleppo or Urfa chili pepper), salt and black pepper.
  • Greek Yogurt: I like the thickness of plain Greek yogurt (as you can see in my Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce recipe), but regular unsweetened plain yogurt would also work. Go for full-fat yogurt for the most delicious creamy sauce or low-fat for a lighter one.
  • Fresh Garlic: Use fresh garlic cloves for the signature garlicky taste. However, while not traditional, you can use garlic powder for a milder flavor.
  • Lemon Juice: Similar to my yogurt dressing recipe, a squeeze of lemon juice helps balance the strong garlic flavor.
  • Unsalted butter: You can use salted or unsalted butter, but if you go with the salted version, be sure to adjust the seasoning accordingly.
  • Kosher salt
  • Garnish: Though they are optional, the traditional Turkish pasta is sprinkled with a handful of dried mint and sumac. Alternatively, you can use chopped parsley and chili flakes, if you don’t mind the heat. I also added a handful of cherry tomatoes for some color, but they are also optional. 

How To Make Turkish Pasta?

At first glance, this recipe might seem to have many steps, but most of them can be done simultaneously, making the process quicker and more efficient. Here is how I do it:

A collage of images showing how to make the tiktok viral Anna Paul's Turkish pasta recipe.
  1. Cook the pasta: Bring a large pot of generously salted water to a boil. Add the pasta and cook according to the package instructions until al dente. Save half a cup of the cooking liquid, drain the pasta, and set it aside.
  2. Saute meat: While the pasta is cooking, add the ground meat in a large skillet (or a pan). In the viral TikTok video, Anna’s mom intentionally does not use olive oil, saying that the meat releases its oils as you saute it. Initially, I was a bit skeptical, but she was right. Still, if you feel like your meat can benefit from a little olive oil, feel free to use it.
  3. Cook with the spices and add the onion: Add the spices and cook, stirring constantly, for about 5 minutes, or until the meat is no longer pink. Then, add the diced onion and red pepper paste (or tomato paste) cook until softened. As you are sauteing, use the reserved pasta as needed, ensuring that the meat sauce maintains its moisture levels.
  4. Make the garlicky yogurt sauce: Whisk yogurt, minced garlic, lemon juice and kosher salt in a bowl until super creamy. Taste for seasoning and make sure it is seasoned according to your taste buds.
A collage of photos showing the butter sauce drizzle.
  1. Make the butter drizzle: I recommend making the butter drizzle right before serving. The process is super simple. Melt butter in a small saucepan and then stir in 1 teaspoon sweet paprika, ¼ teaspoon (or more) red pepper flakes and ½ teaspoon kosher salt. Cook until butter is fully melted and bubbly.
  2. Assemble: To serve, grab a pasta bowl. Place the cooked pasta at the bottom, spoon 4 tablespoons of the yogurt sauce on top followed by ⅔ cup of the cooked beef. Finish it with a drizzle (about one or two tablespoons) of the paprika butter sauce. Repeat the same process for the rest of the bowls.
  3. Garnish: If preferred, garnish with a handful of cherry tomatoes, a tablespoon of dried mint (or fresh parsley) and a teaspoon of sumac, if using. 

Make Ahead and Storage Tips:

While this dish is quick to assemble, you can save time by preparing some components in advance to assemble it in a flash. It also stores well, making for a flavorful lunch the next day. Here is how I do it:

  • Make Ahead: 
    • Meat sauce: Cook the meat and onion mixture, let it cool to room temperature, and store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 2 days.
    • Garlic yogurt sauce: Prepare the sauce and store it in a jar or airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days.
    • On the day you plan to serve: Cook the pasta while reheating the meat sauce on the stovetop. Right before serving, make the chili butter sauce and assemble as written in the recipe.
  • Storage & Reheating: If you can, I recommend keeping each component of the leftovers separate in airtight containers in the fridge. When ready to serve, reheat the pasta, meat, and butter sauce and assemble as described in the recipe.
Cheat manti pasta recipe in a bowl with a fork on the side.

Helpful Tips:

  • Cooking onion: When I first saw the viral video, I was a bit skeptical about sauteing the onion after cooking the meat, but to my surprise, I found that this method preserves the onion flavor better, creating a distinct and delicious contrast, very similar to manti. It’s different from how my mom prepared it, but I really enjoyed the end result.
  • Spice levels: The spicy butter drizzle is a signature component of this recipe. While the recipe below is more on the milder side, feel free to up the amount of red pepper flakes if you love spicy food. The yogurt sauce beautifully balances the spiciness creating a harmonious flavor profile.
  • Let it sizzle: I’ve seen some people make the butter drizzle in the microwave. While I understand that it is convenient (and one last dish to wash), the butter drizzle is supposed to sizzle when drizzled. That is why, for the most authentic Turkish pasta experience, take the extra minute to melt and season the butter in a skillet. The sizzling adds a burst of aroma and flavor that truly elevates the dish.
  • Curry powder: In Anna Paul’s version of Turkish pasta, she adds a dash of curry powder. While you’re welcome to include it, I chose to omit it since curry powder isn’t traditionally used in manti. To stay true to the version I grew up eating, I opted for the classic spices instead.

Other Pasta Recipes You Might Like

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make your own Turkish Pasta following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Turkish pasta recipe being drizzled with the melted butter sauce.
Print

Turkish Pasta Recipe

The TikTok-viral Turkish Pasta recipe, made famous by Anna Paul, is a 30-minute wonder that's as delicious as it is easy. Made by layering cooked pasta with garlicky yogurt, spiced ground beef, and a chili butter drizzle, this recipe is easy to make, satisfying, and totally worthy of the hype.
Course Main Course – Pasta Dish
Cuisine Turkish
Diet Halal
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 563kcal

Ingredients

For The Pasta

  • 8 ounces pasta I use farfalle but any shape would work
  • Kosher salt

For The Meat Sauce

  • 1 lbs ground beef 93%
  • 1 medium size onion chopped (about 1 cup)
  • 1 tablespoon red pepper paste or tomato paste
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 2 teaspoons sweet paprika
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Garlic Yogurt Sauce

  • 1 cup Greek yogurt unsweetened plain (full fat or skim)
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

For The Butter Sauce

  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 1 teaspoon sweet paprika
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes or more to taste (such as Aleppo Pepper or Urfa Chili pepper)
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

As Garnish (optional)

  • ½ cup cherry tomatoes cut in half
  • 4 tablespoons dried mint or fresh parsley
  • 2 tablespoons sumac optional

Instructions

  • Bring a large pot of water to a boil. Season the pasta water generously with salt. It should taste like the ocean. Add the pasta and cook until it is al dente. Timing might differ depending on the brand you use, so be sure to check the instructions on the packaging. Mine took about 9-10 minutes. Save ½ cup of the cooking liquid*, drain the pasta, and set it aside.
  • While the pasta is cooking, make the meat sauce. In a large skillet over medium heat, add 1 pound ground beef. Cook, breaking up the large chunks of meat with a wooden spoon for about 4-5 minutes or until it is no longer pink. As it cooks, it should release some of its oils.
  • Add the 1 medium-sized chopped onion, 1 tablespoon red pepper paste (or tomato paste), 1 teaspoon onion powder, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 2 teaspoons sweet paprika, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper. Cook, stirring regularly, until onions are softened and meat is fully cooked, for about 5-6 minutes. If needed, use the reserved pasta water to keep the sauteed meat moist. Set it aside.
  • To make the yogurt sauce, whisk together 1 cup of Greek yogurt, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 1 tablespoon of lemon juice, ½ teaspoon kosher salt in a bowl. Give it a taste and make sure it is seasoned to your liking. Set is aside.
  • Right before serving, melt 4 tablespoons butter in a small saucepan over medium heat. Add 1 teaspoon sweet paprika, ¼ teaspoon (or more) red pepper flakes and ½ teaspoon kosher salt. Stir and cook until butter is fully melted and bubbly.
  • To assemble, place the now-cooked pasta in a bowl. Top it off with 4 tablespoons of the yogurt sauce and ⅔ cup of the cooked beef. Drizzle it with a tablespoon (or more) of the butter sauce. Repeat the same process for the rest of the bowls.
  • If preferred, garnish with a handful of cherry tomatoes, a tablespoon of dried mint (or fresh parsley) and a teaspoon of sumac, if using. Serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Reserved liquid: I always save some of the pasta water in case my pasta dries out while I am working on the sauce. In this recipe, you (most likely) will not need it since we work simultaneously, but still, it is a good backup in case you need it.
  • No olive oil for sauteing the meat: I stayed true to the TikTok viral recipe by not using oil to saute the beef as the meat releases its oils as you cook it. Initially, I was a bit skeptical, but she was right. As long as you keep stirring, the meat will eventually release some of its oils and brown nicely. Still, if you feel your meat can benefit from a bit of olive oil, feel free to use it.
  • Storage & Reheating: Store each component of the leftovers separately in airtight containers in the fridge for up to 2 days. When ready to serve, reheat the pasta, meat, and butter sauce and assemble as described in the recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 563kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 33g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 83mg | Sodium: 983mg | Potassium: 692mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1054IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 135mg | Iron: 5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-pasta/feed/ 29
Muhammara Recipe (Roasted Red Pepper Dip) https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/#comments Mon, 26 Aug 2024 23:12:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=27123 If you are a fan of similar Middle Eastern dips and sauces, be sure to check out my Eggplant Yogurt…]]>

If you are a fan of similar Middle Eastern dips and sauces, be sure to check out my Eggplant Yogurt Dip, Roasted Carrot Hummus, Mediterranean Hummus, Baba Ganoush, and Roasted Vegetable Dip recipes.

What is Muhammara?

Muhammara is a traditional Middle Eastern red pepper dip or condiment typically served a dip or sauce with warm pita bread. It is claimed by many countries, but the actual origin is the Syrian city of Aleppo.

Also called Muhumra, Hamara, or Marmara, the dip is popular throughout Lebanon, Turkey, Armenia, the Middle East, and Meditteranean. It’s one of those recipes widely adapted according to the region and personal taste.

Muhammara is served in a large bowl and garnished with walnuts, scallions, and dill.

If you’ve never made this Middle Eastern pepper sauce, prepare to be amazed! Similar to its simpler version, roasted red pepper walnut dip, it is robust in flavor with sweet red peppers, nutty walnuts, and pomegranate molasses added to it to make it closer to its traditional version. All you need is a food processor and 30 minutes for a Meditteranean-inspired dip that is bright in color and flavor! Intrigued? Let’s break it down.

My aunt was the queen of Muhammara sauce! This a delicious dip I grew up eating. We put it on everything – pasta, eggs, vegetables – and brought it to all our special occasions. Being one of the popular recipes of the Turkish Cuisine, pita chips and muhammara dip was our version of bread and butter.

Key Ingredients:

To make this Mediterranean red pepper sauce, you will need the following ingredients:

All of the ingredients are photographed from the top view
Walnuts are roasted in a baking sheet
  • Red Bell Peppers – Purchase fresh, organic, sweet red bell peppers the day you are going to prepare the dip for the best flavor. If you’re in a pinch, jarred roasted red peppers can be substituted; however, it’s worth noting that the flavor of homemade roasted red peppers is much sweeter than using ones from a jar, and the texture is softer.
  • Raw Walnuts – Toasting walnuts beforehand brings out more of their nutty, creamy flavor. I like to purchase a bulk of walnuts and toast them in a single layer on a large baking sheet in a 350-degree oven until light golden brown (about 7 minutes) as soon as I get home from the store, then cool completely and store them in an airtight container in the freezer. That way I have toasted walnuts ready whenever I need them!
  • Crackers – The authentic muhammara recipe is made with bread crumbs. In this modern version, I followed in the footsteps of the authors of the Vegetable Illustrated and used crackers instead. You can use any type of lean crackers, such as the simple water cracker. However, for even more flavor variation, use a cracker scented with rosemary, thyme, flax seeds, or sesame seeds. For best results, gently crack the crackers in a zip-top bag and finish crushing with a rolling pin.
  • Scallions – Use both green and white parts and be sure to roughly chop prior to adding to the bowl of your food processor.
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil – This is a raw, uncooked sauce, so a good-quality Extra Virgin Olive Oil makes all the difference. My favorite is California Olive Ranch (affiliate link).
  • Pomegranate Molasses – If you are unfamiliar with pomegranate molasses, it is a slightly sweet, slightly tart syrup made from boiling down pomegranate juice (similar to how balsamic glaze is prepared). It gives the dip its signature sweet and tangy taste, adding an extra depth of flavor. It is a very popular ingredient in Middle Eastern cuisine and an authentic ingredient for this red pepper spread. Most supermarkets sell pomegranate molasses, but you can also purchase it online. If you need a suggestion, this pomegranate molasses (affiliate link) is the brand I use.
  • Lemon Juice – A hint of fresh acidity goes a long way and locks in the color of those beautiful roasted red peppers.
  • Paprika – I prefer sweet paprika over hot since the spice factor will come from the cayenne.
  • Cumin – Although not typically included, I like the punch of savory, smoky goodness cumin brings to this dip.
  • Kosher Salt – Use the amount called for in the recipe and adjust the taste to your liking at the very end. I also recommend finishing it off with some flaky sea salt.
  • Cayenne Pepper (or red pepper flakes) – A slight kick from the cayenne pepper transforms it into a healthy spicy capsicum dip (capsicum is another word for pepper). If you are not into spiciness, you can simply omit it. Alternatively, if you can get your hands on it, you can swap cayenne pepper with Aleppo pepper.

How to make Muhammara?

To make this Middle Eastern pepper sauce, simply:

Red peppers are roasted and charred
  1. Roast bell peppers. Prepare the bell peppers by slicing off the stem end, removing the seeds and core with a spoon, slice in half and cut each half in three pieces. Remove the stem from the end and slice the end into large chunks. Transfer to a parchment-lined baking sheet and broil for 10 minutes, or until skins are well charred, making sure to rotate halfway through.
  2. Steam the bell peppers. Once roasted and charred, transfer the red bell peppers to a large bowl and cover with plastic wrap to steam for 10 minutes (this makes it easier to remove the skins). At this point, you can either leave the skins on for extra charred flavor or remove them.
  3. Crush the crackers. Place the crackers in a plastic bag, seal tight and gently crush with your hands. Finish crushing the crackers into coarse crumbs by rolling over with a rolling pin.
Ingredients are placed in a food processor and photographed from the top view
Dip is photographed in the food processor after it is processed
  1. Process all the ingredients. In the bowl of a food processor, add the roasted red peppers, walnuts, crackers, scallions, olive oil, pomegranate molasses, lemon juice, paprika, cumin, salt, and cayenne and process until smooth, about 15-20 seconds, scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through.
  2. Garnish and serve. Transfer to a small bowl, spread it with the back of a spoon, garnish with fresh dill, scallions, sesame seeds, and a drizzle of olive oil. Serve with more crackers, pita or crudites.

Expert Tips:

  • Don’t have crackers on hand? Substitute ¼ cup plain breadcrumbs, which is actually more traditional. The crumbs are necessary to absorb extra moisture so the finished dip isn’t runny.
  • Want an even more smoky flavor? Replace the sweet paprika with an equal amount of smoked paprika. Also, if you can handle the heat, be sure to sprinkle it with Aleppo chili flakes.
  • For a vegan red pepper dip, make sure to purchase crackers that are vegan compliant.
  • Add a clove of garlic: While it is not a traditional ingredient, I sometimes add in a clove of minced garlic into the food processor for additional garlicky flavor as I did in this Vegan Red Pepper Dip recipe.

FAQs

How do you pronounce Muhammara?

Muhammara is the formal pronunciation and it sounds like it is written (though the “h” is slightly sibilant, almost as if you are exhaling through a sore throat). Not so easy to get right! Mm’hamara is a more idiomatic version. It also means roasted or burnt (made red), sharing the same etymological root as the word red (Ahmar).

Is Muhammara Similar To Harissa?

Not quite. Muhammara has a mildly spicy, tangy and sweet flavor and usually served as a dip, spread or a sauce, whereas Harissa is more of condiment that is usually used as a flavoring agent for soups, stews, marinades with rich spicy flavors.

Can I Use Jarred Roasted Red Bell Peppers?

You sure can. Just be sure to drain all the liquid before placing the peppers into the food processor or blender.

Can I Substitute The Pomegranate Molasses?

While it won’t be the same thing, you have a few options when it comes to substituting pomegranate molasses when making this Middle Eastern red pepper dip. You can use balsamic glaze, cranberry juice concentrate, or you can mixa few teaspoons of lemon juice with a tablespoon of honey to get a similar sweet and tangy flavor.

How Many Calories?

This recipe makes 1 1/2 cups and easily serves 6 people. And one serving of it is only 176 calories! When you pair the dip with fresh sliced vegetables, it’s even better for you. So go ahead, eat your veggies!

Can I Make Muhammara Without A Blender/Food Processor?

Yes, you can. You can first start by chopping all of the ingredients finely using a sharp chef’s knife and then mix them in a bowl. Alternatively, you can use a mortar and pestle for a smoother texture.

Is This Recipe Spicy?

The authentic Muhammara is usually mildly spicy. However, the spiciness level depend on the recipe you are using. Usually the spiciness comes from Aleppo pepper (or red pepper flakes). When making muhammara at home, you can easily adjust the amount of red pepper flakes you use according to your preference.

Storage Instructions:

  • To store your roasted bell pepper dip: Place muhammara in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days. Alternatively, drizzle it with a thin layer of olive oil to extend its shelf life. Doing so helps prevent air from reaching the roasted red pepper dip and, as a result, keeps it fresh longer.
  • Freezing: If you prefer to store it for a longer period of time, you can freeze this red bell pepper spread. Simply place it in an airtight container (or a freezer bag) remove the air out as much as you can and freeze for up to 2 months.
  • Thawing: Thaw it in the fridge overnight and give it a good stir before serving.

Ways to serve this Syrian pepper sauce recipe

There are a number of ways to serve this muhammara dip recipe, such as:

  • Dip: Definitely the most authentic, serve it as a dip with seed crackers, pita bread, or fresh sliced vegetables as a part of your mezze platter.
  • Spread: Slather it on sandwiches, fresh pita bread, wraps, or your morning toast. In my opinion, leftover muhammara makes the best sandwich spread.
  • Pasta Sauce: Prepare your favorite pasta and toss it in a large bowl with the muhammara and a bit of pasta water – no additional cooking required!
  • Pizza Sauce: Replace the tomato sauce on pizza with muhammara – such a fun, Meditteranean twist!
  • Topping: A scoop of muhammara makes an excellent topping for homemade CAVA bowls and pairs beautifully with other Mediterranean sauces like tzatziki and hummus.
A bowl of the dip is served with crackers on the side

Other sauce/dip recipes you might also like:

If you try this Muhammara dip recipe or any other Middle Eastern Dip recipes mentioned in this post, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

muhammara dip in a bowl from the top view
Print

Muhammara Recipe

Muhammara is a traditional Syrian red pepper dip made with roasted red peppers, walnuts, and pomegranate molasses. This recipe is easy to make, vegan and gluten-free. Serve as a dip, spread, or even as a pasta sauce. It is deliciously addictive!
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 176kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 red bell peppers medium-sized
  • ½ cup walnuts lightly roasted
  • cup crackers any type of lean cracker can be used*
  • 3 scallions chopped (both green and white parts)
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 ½ tablespoons pomegranate molasses*
  • 4 teaspoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 ½ teaspoons paprika
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • teaspoon cayenne pepper

Instructions

  • To roast the bell peppers: Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper. Slice the tops of the bell peppers and remove the stems from the tops. Using a paring knife (or a spoon) take out the core. Cut the bell pepper into three pieces. Place them on the sheet pan skin side up. 
  • Adjust oven rack 3 to 4 inches from the broiler element (or at the top rack) and heat broiler. Broil until the skin is well charred, 10 minutes. Be sure to rotate the sheet pan halfway through.
  • Place the now-charred peppers in a bowl, cover with plastic wrap and let it steam for 10 minutes. At this point, it is up to you to whether or not remove the skin. If you like the charred flavor, feel free to keep the skins on. If not remove and discard them. You should end up with approximately 1 cup of roasted bell peppers.
  • Place crackers into a ziplock bag and crush them with a rolling pin.
  • Place roasted peppers, walnuts, cracker crumbs, scallions, olive oil, pomegranate molasses, lemon juice, paprika, ground cumin, salt, and cayenne pepper into the bowl of a foods processor. 
  • Process until pureed, 15-20 seconds scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through processing. 
  • Transfer to a bowl and serve with crackers, pita bread, and/or crudites.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 1 1/2 cups of muhammara, which is ideal for serving 6 people as an appetizer/dip. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Best way to store: You can store this roasted red pepper dipping sauce recipe in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • * If you don’t have crackers on hand, substitute ¼ cups of plain breadcrumbs, which is actually more traditional.
  • Want an even more smoky flavor? Replace the sweet paprika with an equal amount of smoked paprika.

Nutrition

Calories: 176kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 227mg | Potassium: 149mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1358IU | Vitamin C: 55mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg

This recipe has been adapted (with minor changes) from Vegetables Illustrated (affiliate link).

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/feed/ 17
Crazy Feta https://foolproofliving.com/crazy-feta/ https://foolproofliving.com/crazy-feta/#comments Sat, 06 Jul 2024 14:45:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76598 I didn’t think feta cheese could get any better until I stumbled upon the crazy feta dip at the popular…]]>

I didn’t think feta cheese could get any better until I stumbled upon the crazy feta dip at the popular Cava restaurant chain. When I first had it, I knew I had to create a homemade crazy feta I could enjoy anytime I wanted. And I have to admit, I think this version is better than the original.

If you are into Cava and the taste of their delicious dips and spreads, you might also like other Mediterranean staples, including Tzatziki Sauce, Mediterranean Hummus, Baba Ganoush, and Harissa Sauce.

Cava feta dip served in a bowl with veggies and  pita chips from the top view.

What is Crazy Feta at Cava?

Cava is a popular Mediterranean fast-casual chain that opened in the DC area. It is known for its quick pick-up mezze bowls. Crazy feta is one of the featured dips, along with tzatziki, hummus, harissa, and roasted eggplant dip.

Cava’s crazy feta is made with feta, jalapenos, onions, and olive oil. The vegetables are roasted, and all the ingredients are whipped together until smooth.

Crazy Feta Ingredients

Cava feta dip requires just a handful of simple ingredients, which are easy to find at the grocery store. We will need:

Ingredients for the recipe with text on the image on each ingredient.
  • Jalapeno peppers: Look for two large jalapenos for the best flavor.
  • Onion: One yellow onion is all we need, but red onions could also work.
  • Garlic bulb: The roasted garlic head adds an incredible depth of flavor and a natural sweetness. I like to break the garlic bulb into garlic cloves for faster roasting or use already-made Roasted Garlic or Air Fryer Roasted Garlic.
  • Olive oil: Extra virgin olive oil provides a rich, fruity flavor.
  • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper makes the roasted veggies and feta cheese shine.
  • Feta cheese: Look for two 8-ounce feta cheese blocks (or feta bricks) in the cheese section of your grocery store, either made from cow’s milk, sheep’s milk, or a mix of the two.
  • Lemon: We need both the lemon zest and lemon juice, so zest the whole lemon before juicing.

How to Make Crazy Feta?

This crazy feta recipe is ready in 25-30 minutes, thanks to the quick roasting time. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

  1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper.
A collage of images showing how to make Cava feta dip recipe.
  1. Prepare vegetables: Place the sliced jalapenos, chopped onion, and peeled garlic cloves on the sheet pan. Drizzle with 2 tablespoons of olive oil, then season with Kosher salt and black pepper.
  2. Roast vegetables: Roast for 15 minutes, tossing once halfway through for even cooking. When pierced with a knife, the vegetables should be soft. Set aside to cool.
  3. Whip feta: In the bowl of a food processor (or blender) with the S-blade, add the feta cheese (broken into small pieces), olive oil, lemon juice, and lemon zest. Pulse several times until all ingredients are incorporated, scraping down the sides of the bowl as needed.
A food processor filled with feta, jalapeno, garlic and onion, before and after it is whipped.
  1. Make feta dip: Add the roasted vegetables to the feta mixture. Pulse until pureed to your desired consistency, scraping down the bowl as needed. Taste and adjust seasoning.
  2. Serve: Transfer to your favorite serving bowl and drizzle it with a teaspoon of olive oil, if desired. Serve as an appetizer with pita chips, crackers, or veggies on the side (see more Serving Suggestions below).

How to Serve Crazy Feta?

Crazy feta is one of those recipes that is extremely versatile. The Mediterranean flavors take front and center served as a dip or spread in any of the following ways:

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

Here are some of my expert tips for the best Cava crazy feta dip recipe:

  • Adjust the heat level: If you prefer a spicy dip, leave the seeds and ribs intact on the jalapenos.
  • Cut the vegetables roughly the same size: Chopping the vegetables about the same size (jalapenos sliced in half, onion cut into large chunks) and slicing the garlic cloves in half ensures they cook quickly and evenly.
  • Control the texture with the food processor: I love a smooth and creamy texture, but you can make this jalapeno feta dip as chunky or smooth as you like.
  • Make it your own: Customize it in any way you like, such as adding sun-dried tomatoes in oil, a sprinkling of fresh herbs, or some roasted red pepper.

FAQs

Is Cava feta pasteurized?

Yes, according to its packaging (sold at Whole Foods), the feta cheese is made with pasteurized cow’s milk and sheep’s milk.

How many carbs are in crazy feta cheese?

This recipe serves eight people as an appetizer, with each serving offering 4 grams of carbs.

Other Cava-Inspired Dips and Spreads

If you try this Cava Feta Dip recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Cava Copycat Crazy feta in a bowl served with pita chips and vegetables.
Print

Crazy Feta Recipe

If you are a fan of the Mediterranean food restaurant chain Cava, you are likely a fan of their Crazy Feta as well. If you have ever wanted to make it in your home kitchen, you have found the best copycat recipe. This quick and easy creamy feta dip is ideal for serving with pita chips and veggies or topping your favorite grain bowls and salads.
Course Condiment – Dip
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 8 serving
Calories 249kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

For The Vegetables:

  • 2 large jalapenos cut in half and deseeded
  • 1 medium sized yellow onion peeled and cut into large chunks
  • 1 bulb garlic peeled and sliced in half (10-12 cloves)
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Feta Dip:

  • 16 ounces feta cheese 2-8 ounce blocks, crumbled
  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more for drizzling
  • 4 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Place the jalapenos, onion, and garlic cloves on the sheet pan. Drizzle with 2 tablespoons of olive oil and sprinkle with the kosher salt and pepper.
  • Roast for 15 minutes, tossing once halfway through the process to ensure even cooking. Vegetables should be soft when pierced with a knife. Remove from the oven and set them aside to cool.
  • Place the feta cheese, olive oil, lemon juice, and lemon zest in the food processor. Pulse several times until all ingredients are incorporated. Scrape down the sides of the bowl as needed.
  • Add the roasted vegetables and pulse until pureed to your desired consistency, scraping down the sides of the food processor bowl to incorporate all ingredients. Taste and adjust seasoning as necessary.
  • Transfer to a serving bowl and if preferred, drizzle with olive oil. Serve with pita chips, crackers or veggies on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 2 cups of Crazy feta dip, ideal for serving eight people as an appetizer. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Adding salt: Feta can be salty, so it’s best to taste the feta before adding any additional salt to the recipe.
  • Best when served at room temperature: While the dip should be chilled, the flavors are most prominent at cool to room temperature. If you have stored the dip for later, remove it from the fridge 20 minutes before enjoying it.
  • Storage & Make-Ahead Instructions: This Cava crazy feta recipe tastes better the longer all the ingredients have a chance to mingle in the fridge, making it a great make-ahead recipe. To make ahead and store, simply:
    • Make Ahead: Prepare the dip at least 1 hour before serving. Keep covered in the fridge.
    • Storage: Store leftover dip in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
    • Freeze: The leftovers of this feta jalapeno dip can be frozen. Simply place them in a freezer-safe container, cover them with a lid, and freeze for up to a month. Thaw in the fridge overnight.

Nutrition

Calories: 249kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Cholesterol: 50mg | Sodium: 793mg | Potassium: 73mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 278IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 285mg | Iron: 0.5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/crazy-feta/feed/ 3
Mediterranean Nachos https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-greek-nachos/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-greek-nachos/#comments Thu, 20 Jun 2024 13:13:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=14175 You know those cravings when you want to munch on something extra delicious? Well, say hello to Mediterranean nachos. They’re…]]>

You know those cravings when you want to munch on something extra delicious? Well, say hello to Mediterranean nachos. They’re the perfect combination of fresh ingredients and crispy pita chips, and they’ll keep you coming back for more.

Vegan Greek nachos on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

Mediterranean-style nachos require a mix of fresh produce and pantry staples. While the topping has a medley of fresh vegetables, you can simplify it even more with Greek Cucumber Salad. But to make it as I did here, we will need:

Pita chips and oil for the base of the recipe.

For The Pita Chips:

  • Pita: I used whole wheat pita, but you can use regular pita if that is all that’s available at the grocery store. Alternatively, you can make our homemade pita recipe using a DIY approach. If you are short on time, store-bought baked pita chips can be used in a pinch.
  • Olive Oil: Use extra virgin olive oil for the most fruity flavor.
  • Kosher Salt
Topping ingredients for Greek nachos.

For The Topping:

  • Chickpeas: Chickpeas (or garbanzo beans) give it that Mediterranean style, but you can also use white cannellini beans or navy beans.
  • Tomatoes: Small and juicy cherry tomatoes provide both acidity and sweetness. Grape tomatoes, Roma tomatoes, or heirloom tomatoes all work too.
  • Cucumbers: I love small, thin-skinned Persian cucumbers, which you don’t need to peel. If you are using regular cucumbers or English cucumbers, be sure to peel and remove the watery seeds.
  • Green Onions: Mild scallions give it a savory bite. Red onion is another good option.
  • Olives: Greek Kalamata olives provide a delicious briny bite. Black olives or green olives will also work, or a mix of all three for a more complex flavor. Not a fan of olives? Omit them altogether.
  • Lemon Juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice offers the best citrus flavor. We will need it for the topping and the tahini sauce.
  • Garlic: Garlic gives the salad an extra bite. Use one fresh garlic clove for the best flavor.
  • Seasonings: Kosher salt and black pepper are all we need, just make sure to season the pita chips, salad topping, and tahini sauce and taste as you go.
Tahini dressing for nachos.

For The Herbed Tahini Sauce:

  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh parsley keeps it simple, but you can amp up the flavor even more with fresh dill, fresh basil, or fresh mint. Don’t have any fresh herbs on hand? Make this Lemon Tahini Sauce instead.
  • Tahini: Look for a runny tahini, and make sure to mix it well before using.
  • Fresh Garlic
  • Water: Water helps thin out the tahini dressing to the right consistency. Start with 2 tablespoons, then add more water, one tablespoon at a time, until a dressing-like consistency is reached.

Optional Add-Ins

For a few twists and different variations, add one, two, or all of the following:

How to Make Mediterranean Nachos?

If you think that you can not make nachos without cheese, think again! Here are the step-by-step instructions and photos to make this Greek nachos recipe:

  1. Prep: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper.
Steps showing how to prep Mediterranean nachos pita bread and topping.
  1. Prepare pita: Brush both sides of the pita bread lightly with olive oil. Stack them on top of each other and cut them into 8 triangles. If it is hard to cut it, you can do it in two batches.
  2. Bake pita chips: Spread the pita wedges into one single layer on the prepared sheet pan. Season with salt. Bake for 9-10 minutes, flipping halfway through. Remove from the oven and set aside while you prepare the topping.
  3. Make the topping: In a medium bowl, combine chickpeas, tomatoes, cucumber, green onions, olives, parsley, lemon juice, garlic, olive oil, salt, and pepper. Stir to combine.
A collage of images showing how to make the tahini dressing and assemble the nachos.
  1. Make the tahini sauce: In the bowl of a food processor with the blade attachment, add the tahini, lemon juice, garlic, parsley, water, and salt. Process until smooth and creamy. If the sauce is too thick, add water, one tablespoon at a time.
  2. Assemble nachos: Spread the toasted pita chips on a large platter. With a slotted spoon, scoop the tomato and cucumber mixture over the pita bread. Drizzle it with the tahini sauce. Garnish with more parsley, if desired. Enjoy!
Vegan Turkish nachos drizzled with tahini dressing from the top view.

FAQs

Can Mediterranean nachos be prepared ahead of time?

If you want to get ahead, components of the nachos can be prepared and stored separately. Dice the vegetables and make the tahini sauce up to 3 days in advance. Store all components separately. I recommend baking the pita chips right before assembling the nachos. 

How do you layer nachos so they don’t get soggy?

Start with a base of thick pita chips and layer evenly so that the toppings and sauce are evenly distributed. Also, use a slotted spoon for the salad topping, as we don’t want the extra juices.

Similar Appetizer / Party Food You Might Like:

Reprinted (with minimal changes) from the Love Real Food by Kathryne Taylor, Vegan Nachos Recipe by permission of Rodale Books.

Mediterranean Nachos recipe on a plate drizzled with herbed tahini sauce.
Print

Mediterranean Nachos Recipe

This Mediterranean Nachos recipe is a 20-minute vegan appetizer made by layering toasted pita chips with a quick tomato chickpea salad. Drizzled with homemade herbed tahini dressing, this is an easy recipe that is not only delicious but also visually impressive.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 9 minutes
Total Time 19 minutes
Servings 6 Servings
Calories 246kcal

Ingredients

For the toasted pita chips:

  • 4 whole wheat pitas 7-inch
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

For The Toppings:

  • 1 can chickpeas drained and rinsed (15-ounce can)
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes sliced
  • 1 Persian cucumber peeled (or not peeled), sliced thinly or half of an English cucumber
  • 2 stalks green onions chopped
  • ¼ cup black olives pitted and sliced (such as Kalamata olives)
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 garlic clove minced
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Herbed Tahini Sauce:

  • cup tahini shaken well
  • ¼ cup lemon juice
  • 1 garlic clove minced
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley leaves plus more as garnish
  • 2 tablespoons water plus more as needed
  • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt

Instructions

  • To make the pita chips, preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Brush both sides of the pita bread lightly with olive oil. Stack them on top of each other and cut them into 8 small wedges. If it is hard to cut them at the same time, you can do it in two batches.
  • Spread the pita wedges in an even layer on the prepared sheet pan and sprinkle them with salt. Bake for 9-10 minutes, flipping halfway through. You want them to be crispy, but they burn quickly, so keep a close eye on them as they bake. Remove them from the oven and set aside to cool for a few minutes.
  • Meanwhile, prepare the topping. In a medium bowl, combine chickpeas, tomatoes, cucumber, green onions, olives, parsley, lemon juice, garlic, olive oil, salt, and pepper. Stir to combine and set aside.
  • To make the herbed tahini sauce, place the tahini, lemon juice, garlic, parsley, water, and salt in the bowl of a food processor fitted with the blade attachment. Blend* until smooth. It should have a creamy consistency, so if needed, add more water in one-tablespoon increments.
  • To assemble: Spread the toasted pita chips on a large plate in an even layer. Using a slotted spoon, scoop the tomato and cucumber mixture over the pita bread. Drizzle it with the tahini sauce.
  • Garnish with more parsley, if desired. Serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 8-10 (loose) cups of nachos which is ideal for serving 6 people in appetizer portions. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Not a fan of olives? You can omit them.
  • No food processor?* You can make the tahini sauce by hand by finely chopping the parsley and vigorously whisking it until smooth.
  • Evenly distribute all the toppings: Make sure the toppings are scattered throughout the entire layer of pita chips. This way, each bite is just as delicious as the last.
  • Storage: While the nachos are best enjoyed the moment they are made, leftovers can be stored in an airtight container for an additional day. 

Nutrition

Calories: 246kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 749mg | Potassium: 290mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 458IU | Vitamin C: 19mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-greek-nachos/feed/ 15
Turkish Green Beans https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/#comments Wed, 19 Jun 2024 13:57:49 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6266 There is a classification of recipes in Turkish cuisine called zeytinyağlı, which translates as “dishes braised in olive oil”. Simply…]]>

There is a classification of recipes in Turkish cuisine called zeytinyağlı, which translates as “dishes braised in olive oil”. Simply put, it is seasonal vegetables like green beans, zucchini, or leeks are cooked in a good amount of olive oil along with summer tomatoes and onion and served at room temperature when their flavor is most prominent.

This Turkish beans recipe is essentially stewed string beans cooked in a warm skillet until soft, juicy, and melt-in-your-mouth tender. The result is very satisfactory as the low and slow cooking time produces super flavorful beans.

Turkish stewed green beans drizzled with yogurt sauce in a bowl.

I know many people enjoy making classic green bean dishes like Air Fryer Green Beans and Garlic Butter Green Beans, but I hope you give this version a try.

Ingredients You’ll Need

Turkish style braised green beans require just a handful of simple ingredients. We will need the following:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.
  • Fresh Green Beans: I used regular green beans you can easily find at the grocery store. However, the most popular green beans in Turkey are runner beans (çalı fasulye) and romano beans or flat beans (Ayşekadın fasulye). If you are lucky, you may be able to spot them at your local farmer’s market during the summer months. But you can use any green bean, including long beans, string beans, or Haricots Verts (French beans), in this recipe.
  • Olive Oil: Use extra virgin olive oil for a rich, fruity flavor.
  • Onion: Diced onion adds a delicious savory flavor. Feel free to replace the onion with washed and diced leeks instead.
  • Tomato Paste: This is optional, but tomato paste adds a depth of flavor, and it’s how my mom always made them.
  • Garlic: Fresh garlic cloves give these string beans an extra punchy bite.
  • Tomatoes: I used canned diced tomatoes with their own juices, which is why this recipe doesn’t include any water. However, if you are using fresh tomatoes (about 2 medium-sized tomatoes), add about ¼ cup water.
  • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper keeps the green beans front and center.
  • Sugar: Do not skip the sugar. This is the secret ingredient that brightens all the flavors and balances the bitterness in the vegetables.
  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh dill is classic, but fresh mint or parsley can be used instead.
  • Lemon Juice: A squeeze of lemon juice right before serving is optional but a welcome addition to brighten up the dish.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Meat: If you prefer more of a warm one-pot summer meal, you can brown ½ pound ground beef along with the onion and follow the rest of the recipe as written. Alternatively, you can use stew meat. If you go in that direction, be sure to dry the meat thoroughly, season it with salt and pepper, and sear it in the pot using a few tablespoons of olive oil until lightly browned but not fully cooked, 7-8 minutes. Remove onto a platter and follow the recipe as written. Add the browned stew meat back in after adding the green beans, and cook as directed.
  • Beans: It is not traditional, but you can toss in a can of drained and rinsed chickpeas (garbanzo beans) or white beans for an extra dose of plant protein.
  • Spices: You can add additional spices like cumin, red pepper flakes, Aleppo pepper, or paprika.
  • Cinnamon: Some variations of this Turkish bean dish include cinnamon, about ¼ teaspoon or so. My mom never added cinnamon, but I think a small amount would be a welcome addition.
  • Cheese: There is a similar recipe in Greece called fasolakia, which is often served with salty and tangy crumbles of feta cheese. We mostly serve it with a side of thick yogurt, but if you want to follow in the footsteps of the Greeks, you can crumble some feta on top.

How to Make Turkish Green Beans?

If you are ready to try something new, I can not imagine a better dish than this stewed green beans recipe. Luckily, it comes together in one pot in just a few easy steps. Simply:

A collage of images showing how to make Turkish style green beans recipe.
  1. Saute onion: In a medium saute pan or heavy pot (such as a Dutch Oven), heat olive oil over medium-high heat until warm but not smoking. Add the onion, and cook, stirring occasionally, until softened, about 5-6 minutes.
  2. Add aromatics: Stir in the tomato paste and garlic and cook for 1 minute.
  3. Add tomatoes and green beans: Next, stir in the diced tomatoes, green beans, kosher salt, black pepper, and sugar. Give it a gentle stir to ensure that the green beans and tomatoes are evenly distributed.
  4. Cook low and slow: Cover and bring it to a boil, then reduce the heat to medium-low and simmer until the beans are softened but still tender, 35-45 minutes. Be sure to stir it a few times while cooking.
Two images showing the finished dish.
  1. Garnish: Stir in the dill. Serve with yogurt and lemon wedges on the side.

Serving Suggestions

In Turkish tradition, braised green beans and accompanying vegetable dishes are served as a course themselves, before or after a meaty main dish. However, the rich and luxurious textures and flavors from this green bean dish can be served with any of the following:

Turkish Green Beans served on an oval plate.

FAQs

What are Turkish green beans?

Turkish green beans, also known as zeytinyağlı taze fasulye, are fresh green beans cooked in a tomato sauce made of tomatoes, onions, garlic, and olive oil and slow-simmered until tender.

What type of green beans should I use?

Fresh, tender green beans are ideal, but any variety will work, such as string beans, haricots verts, runner beans, or flat beans. For this recipe, avoid frozen and canned green beans.

Is this dish vegan?

Yes, Turkish green beans are naturally vegan and vegetarian as they are made with extra virgin olive oil, green beans, tomatoes, onions, garlic, fresh herbs, and seasonings.

Other Mediterranean Recipes You Might Also Like

If you try this Turkish Style Green Beans recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

Turkish green beans on a plate garnished with dill.
Print

Turkish Green Beans Recipe

This Turkish-style green beans recipe (Zeytinyagli Taze Fasulye) is a classic Turkish summer dish made by braising green beans with onions, tomatoes, and garlic in plenty of olive oil. It can be served as a side dish with meat or as a light meal by itself.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 servings
Calories 226kcal

Ingredients

  • 5 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 medium-sized onion chopped (~1 cup)
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 cab diced tomatoes (15-ounce can) or 2 medium tomatoes cut into small cubes
  • 1 pound fresh green beans trimmed and cut in half
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon granulated sugar or cane sugar or coconut sugar
  • ¼ cup fresh dill or parsley

For Serving (Optional)

Instructions

  • Heat the oil in a medium-size saute pan or a heavy bottom pan (such as a Dutch oven) over medium-high heat.
  • Add the onion, and cook, stirring occasionally, until softened, 5-6 minutes.
  • Stir in the tomato paste and garlic and cook for another minute or so.
  • Add the diced tomatoes, green beans, kosher salt, black pepper, and sugar.
  • Give it a gentle stir to ensure that the green beans and tomatoes are evenly distributed in the pan. Put the lid on, bring it to a boil, turn the heat to medium-low, and cook until the beans are softened but still tender, 35-45 minutes. Be sure to stir it a few times during the cooking process.
  • Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary. Stir in the dill and serve with yogurt and lemon wedges on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This dish makes 6-7 cups of braised green beans, which is ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Preparing the green beans: We used fresh string beans from supermarkets. To prepare them for cooking, simply cut the stem ends off first, then cut them in half, making sure all the beans are roughly the same size. If you are lucky enough to find romano beans or flat beans, you will need to remove the string from the bean. First, snap one end off and pull it all the way down to remove the string. Then repeat on the other side.
  • Cooking times may vary: Keep in mind that the cooking duration may be different depending on the type of green beans you use. Start checking around 25-30 minutes. If they are still crisp, keep cooking until tender.
  • The best part of this recipe is that it stores well and can be made ahead making it ideal for your summer meal prep. Here are my best make-ahead and storage tips:
    • Make Ahead: The dish can be made up to 2 days in advance and stored, covered, in the fridge. They often taste better the next day. Simply remove from the refrigerator 30 – 45 minutes before serving.
    • Storage: Leftover green beans will keep for up to 4 days in an airtight container in the fridge. Enjoy them cold as a salad or at room temperature.
    • Reheat: If you prefer the green beans warm, reheat them in a skillet over medium heat until warm.

Nutrition

Calories: 226kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Sodium: 622mg | Potassium: 366mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 851IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 61mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/feed/ 12
Beef Shawarma https://foolproofliving.com/beef-shawarma/ https://foolproofliving.com/beef-shawarma/#comments Wed, 12 Jun 2024 21:27:15 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75914 What is Beef Shawarma? Flavorful, tender, and rich, shawarma beef is a popular street food in the Middle East. It…]]>

What is Beef Shawarma?

Flavorful, tender, and rich, shawarma beef is a popular street food in the Middle East. It comes from slow-cooking layers of marinated steak on a vertical rotisserie or spit, then shaving the beef’s outer layer into thin slices. Usually, chefs serve the meat on breads like pita or lavash, topped with fresh veggies and drizzled with tahini sauce. However, it’s also common to see this dish as part of a grain bowl or beef shawarma platter.

Steak shawarma on a plate with pickles, tahini sauce, tomatoes and salad greens.

Though less traditional, you might also find a layered mixture of chicken and beef shawarma in some Middle Eastern countries.

Beef Shawarma Ingredients

Selecting the right ingredients is key to making the tastiest homemade shawarma. This ingredient list has everything you need, from the best meat to expert seasoning suggestions.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Beef: Flank steak and skirt steak are my favorite meats for shawarma due to their tender consistency and easy marination. You can also use ribeye steak for a more decadent finish, though this cut tends to be more expensive. No matter which cut you choose, just be sure to salt it before marinating to help break down its proteins and free up space for the juices to fill.
  • Shawarma beef seasoning: You can make homemade beef shawarma seasoning by combining ground cumin, ground coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, ground turmeric, ground cloves, ground cinnamon, ground nutmeg, and ground cardamom. Otherwise, you can simplify your meal prep by trying out a store-bought brand. Sadaf’s and NYShuk are my favorite brands.
  • Marinade: To make a marinade for beef shawarma, you’ll need:
    • Olive oil 
    • Fresh lemon juice 
    • Finely minced garlic
    • White vinegar: While it is not traditional, you can also use white or red wine vinegar as a substitute, depending on what you have on hand.
  • Onion: A thinly sliced onion helps make the meat more tender by breaking down its proteins. Additionally, onions have natural sugars that add a rich, savory flavor to the meat as it marinates.
  • Sauces: This recipe’s heartier flavors can easily be balanced by topping the meat with fresh condiments like my Yogurt Tahini Sauce, Lemon Tahini Sauce, Tzatziki, or even Hummus.
  • Vegetables: Traditionally, beef shawarma is served with fresh vegetables (such as sliced tomatoes, cucumbers, and curly green lettuce) and pickled vegetables like dill Gherkins, red onions, or pickled turnips. However, this is where you can make it your own with whatever fresh or pickled vegetable you have on hand.

How to Make Beef Shawarma

This easy beef shawarma recipe is a great way to enjoy authentic Mediterranean eats any night of the week. These simple instructions will ensure you come out with a perfectly tender, tasty meal—all without a vertical spit!

A collage of images showing how to prepare shawarma meat.
  1. Prepare the shawarma meat: Pat dry the steak on both sides with paper towels, then slice it against the grain into thin strips (¼-inch wide, three inches long). Sprinkle the steak pieces with one teaspoon salt and set it aside. 
  2. Combine the beef shawarma spices: Add the cumin, coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, turmeric, cloves, cinnamon, nutmeg, and cardamon to a medium mixing bowl. Blend the seasonings until thoroughly combined. Alternatively, you can use 3 tablespoons of store-bought shawarma seasoning.
  3. Marinate: Add the olive oil, white vinegar, lemon juice, garlic, and shawarma spice mix to a large bowl and whisk them together until fully incorporated. Then, add the beef strips and onions to the bowl, toss to coat, and cover the bowl. Refrigerate the mixture for a minimum of four hours or up to overnight.
A collage of images showing how to cook and serve shawarma beef.
  1. Prepare the Lemon Tahini Sauce: Right before serving, in a small bowl, whisk together the tahini paste, lemon juice, garlic, and kosher salt until blended. Stirring constantly, slowly add in the water until you reach your desired consistency. Taste for seasoning, adding more if necessary, and then set the sauce aside until ready to serve.
  2. Cook beef: Remove the flank steak from the refrigerator 30 minutes before cooking to let it reach room temperature. Then, heat a large skillet, such as a cast iron skillet, on medium high heat and add the marinated steak and onions to the pan. Reduce the heat to medium and stir the mix occasionally as it browns, remembering not to overcrowd the skillet. Continue cooking until you achieve your desired doneness (4-6 minutes), then place the meat and onions on a plate. Cover the mix with a loose aluminum foil tent and let it rest for ten minutes.
  3. Serve: Transfer the now-rested meat to a large platter and serve it with tomatoes, cucumbers, pickles, and tahini sauce. If you plan on making shawarma wraps, spread the Tahini Sauce on the bread, layer it with your favorite accompaniments, and finish it with the cooked steak.

How to Serve Beef Shawarma? 

My favorite part about this homemade beef shawarma recipe is its versatility. Below, you’ll find countless ways to make this dish yours, whether you want to serve it by itself or turn it into a crowd-ready platter or a delicious meat shawarma sandwich.

  • Platter: Equal parts filling and flavorful, a beef shawarma plate is the ultimate weeknight dinner. Serve your meat with a helping of zesty Tabbouleh, flatbread, pickled veggies, and toum (Lebanese garlic sauce), and you’re guaranteed to get a five-star review from all your dinner guests (kids included!).
  • Sandwich: In the mood for a beef shawarma sandwich or pita pocket? Spread a piece of pita with my Tahini Yogurt Sauce, then add your steak slices, sliced tomatoes, pickles, and lettuce. If you want to feel like you are at a Lebanese restaurant, serve this dish alongside a plate of French fries for an authentic Middle Eastern dinner.
  • Wrap: You can quickly transform this dish into a delectable beef shawarma wrap by placing your meat, Pickled Red Onions, tomatoes, and green curly lettuce onto a slice of lavash. Then, drizzle your toppings with Lemon Tahini Sauce and wrap it tightly.
  • Bowl: Easy to eat and deliciously customizable, steak shawarma dinner bowls make meal planning a cinch. All you have to do is serve your shawarma beef, veggies, and fresh parsley atop a bowl of grains (Bulgur Pilaf and Rice with Vermicelli are my favorites!). You can even give your recipe an extra creamy finish by serving it with a side of Hummus, Baba Ganoush, or plain yogurt.
  • Salad: You can get your fill of fiber and protein by topping a bowl of fresh vegetables with this succulent beef shawarma recipe. In particular, this warmly-spiced beef makes a great pair with Lebanese fattoush and my Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad.
Beef shawarma sandwich drizzled with tahini sauce in someones hands.

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

Anyone can learn how to cook shawarma beef that’s worthy of being in a Middle Eastern restaurant. Below are a few tips to help you succeed on your first try:

  • Cut meat against the grain: To prevent your shawarma from becoming chewy, I highly recommend cutting your beef against the grain. Doing so shortens the muscle fibers, making the meat more tender and easier to chew.
  • Don’t overcrowd the pan: When cooking steak shawarma, it’s best to avoid overcrowding your skillet to ensure that the meat is cooked evenly. Furthermore, basting the beef with the pan’s juices throughout the cooking process will ensure that the meat won’t dry out.
  • Let it rest: Do not skip the resting time, as it gives the meat time to reabsorb and equally distribute its flavorful juices. For the best results, I recommend letting this steak shawarma recipe rest for at least ten minutes before serving.

FAQs

What’s the difference between a gyro and shawarma?

Both shawarma and gyros come from slow-cooking layers of meat on a vertical roasting spit and shaving it into thin slices. However, the primary difference lies in their flavor profiles, as they use different spices during the marination process. For instance, the Greek gyro—often made of pork, lamb, or chicken—offers a brighter, more herby Mediterranean flavor, and you’ll usually find it served alongside light, creamy sauces like Tzatziki. By contrast, Middle Eastern shawarma—primarily made from beef and chicken—tends to have a warmer, more aromatic finish and is often accompanied by earthier, nuttier recipes, like Tahini Sauce and Hummus.

What is the best cut of beef for shawarma?

I recommend using flank steak, skirt steak, or sirloin tip (also known as beef flap steak) when making shawarma because they’re tender and easy to marinate. You may also use ribeye—a richer, more expensive cut—if it’s in your budget. While it is not traditional, you can use the shawarma seasoning to saute ground beef for an easy weeknight meal, introducing the flavors of shawarma in a simpler way.

What nationality is shawarma?

Shawarma originates from the Middle East, including countries like Turkey, Israel, and other Arabic areas. Because of the dish’s broad popularity, it’s also known by many other area-specific names, such as “Lebanese shawarma” and “Mediterranean beef shawarma.”

Other Beef Recipes You Might Also Like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make your own Beef Shawarma following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Beef shawarma on a platter with tahini sauce and vegetables.
Print

Beef Shawarma Recipe

Learn how to make the best beef shawarma at home with tender, juicy marinated beef, aromatic shawarma spices, and delicious toppings. Perfect for shawarma platters or stuffing into warm pita pockets for an authentic Middle Eastern experience!
Course Dinner
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Marinading Time 8 hours
Total Time 8 hours 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 668kcal

Ingredients

For The Beef

  • 2 pounds flank steak or skirt steak
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt

For The Shawarma Seasoning

  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon ground turmeric
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cloves
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¼ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cardamom

For The Marinade

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ¼ cup white vinegar
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 4 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed
  • 1 small onion thinly sliced

Tahini Sauce

  • ½ cup Tahini paste
  • ¼ cup lemon juice
  • 2 garlic cloves pressed or grated
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 4-6 tablespoons water

Optional Wraps

  • 4 Pita bread or Lavash (or more)
  • ½ cup Pickled red onions
  • 2 fresh tomatoes sliced
  • 1 cucumber peeled and sliced thinly
  • 1 cup pickles sliced
  • 2 cups green curly lettuce roughly chopped
  • Slices of a lemon optional

Instructions

  • Pat dry the flank steak on both sides and cut it into 1/4-inch strips, each measuring 3 inches long (lengthwise), against the grain. Sprinkle with the kosher salt and set it aside.
  • Make the shawarma seasoning: In a medium bowl, mix the cumin, coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, turmeric, cloves, cinnamon, nutmeg, and cardamon until thoroughly combined.
  • Make the marinade: In a large bowl, whisk together the olive oil, white vinegar, lemon juice, garlic, and shawarma seasoning until incorporated.
  • Add the flank steak strips and onions to the bowl and toss to fully coat.
  • Cover and refrigerate for at least 4 hours or overnight.
  • Make the lemon tahini sauce: In a bowl, whisk together the tahini paste, lemon juice, garlic, and kosher salt until blended. Slowly add the water while whisking until you reach your desired consistency. Adjust seasoning to taste. Set aside until ready to serve.
  • Cook the meat: Remove the flank steak from the refrigerator 30 minutes before cooking. Heat a large skillet (a cast iron skillet works best) on medium-high. Remove the flank steak and onions from the bowl and place on the skillet. Reduce heat to medium and stir occasionally as it browns. Cook for 4-6 minutes or until you achieve your desired doneness. Do not overcrowd the skillet. You may have to cook in 2-3 batches. Once cooked, place it on a plate or platter, loosely tent it with foil, and let it rest for 10 minutes before serving.
  • To serve as a wrap: Spread the tahini sauce on the bread (or inside of a pita pocket) and layer it with sliced tomatoes, pickles, cucumbers, lettuce and beef shawarma. Drizzle with more tahini sauce and if preferred with a squeeze of lemon juice right before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves 4 people if you serve it with the toppings/veggies, but if you decide to turn it into sandwiches/wraps, it will be enough for 6 servings.
  • Shawarma Seasoning: We used our own homemade shawarma seasoning mix, but if you prefer to use a storebought brand, I recommend using 3 tablespoons of seasoning.
  • The longer you marinate, the better: Technically, you can cook it after it has marinated for an hour, but like most meat recipes, the longer the beef stays in the marinade, the more delicious it becomes. If you have the time, I recommend marinating your meat overnight for the most profound flavor. This is one of those recipes where planning ahead pays dividends.
  • Store: You can store leftover steak shawarma in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 2-3 days.
  • Freeze: If you plan on preparing a few batches in advance, I highly recommend freezing the raw marinated meat (with the marinade) in a freezer-safe Ziploc bag until ready to use. However, you can also freeze the cooked meat in an airtight container for 2-3 months.
  • Thaw: To thaw your shawarma steak, place it in the fridge overnight and cook as directed in the recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 668kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 56g | Fat: 41g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Cholesterol: 136mg | Sodium: 1300mg | Potassium: 1273mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 529IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 155mg | Iron: 6mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/beef-shawarma/feed/ 1
Vermicelli Rice https://foolproofliving.com/vermicelli-rice/ https://foolproofliving.com/vermicelli-rice/#comments Thu, 30 May 2024 13:15:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75694 With so much rich, versatile flavor, this Lebanese rice pilaf recipe is just what your weeknight menu needs. If you’re…]]>

With so much rich, versatile flavor, this Lebanese rice pilaf recipe is just what your weeknight menu needs. If you’re craving even more rice and vermicelli recipes, my Chicken Rice Pilaf has a hearty yet fresh flavor that will satisfy any dinner party. Or, if you’re in the mood for a more robust, tomatoey side, my authentic Turkish Bulgur Pilaf is the perfect accompaniment to any meal.

Person fluffing freshly cooked Lebanese rice with vermicelli.

What is Vermicelli Rice?

Vermicelli rice—known as “riz bil sha’riyeh” in Arabic—is a classic Middle Eastern side dish made with three main ingredients: rice, vermicelli pasta, and oil. It may seem simple, but this basic pilaf recipe packs major flavor through its two-part cooking method: saute the pasta and then cook it with the rice.

Though some may add additional seasonings and ingredients to this recipe, its foundational roots run deep throughout Mediterranean and Arab countries, including countries like Lebanon, Syria, Jordan, and Turkey. For this reason, people often refer to the recipe as Jordanian rice, Beiruti rice, Lebanese rice with vermicelli, or even a Syrian rice recipe. In Turkey, we call it “Sehriyeli Pilav.”

Rice with Vermicelli Ingredients

It’s hard to find a side dish with fewer ingredients than this rice vermicelli recipe. Not only does this side dish have an utterly delicious taste, but it’s also cost-effective—in fact, you likely have most of these ingredients ready in your home pantry!

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • White rice: Long grain rice is a ideal in this Mediterranean pilaf rice recipe because it’s fluffier than short-grain rice and doesn’t clump after cooking. I prefer to use Basmati rice, but you can also use another long-grain white rice or jasmine rice if desired.
  • Oil: Because of its rich yet neutral taste, I like to use extra virgin olive oil to saute my vermicelli. However, you can also use unsalted butter or a combination of oil and butter if you want a more full-bodied flavor. Ghee—a clarified butter common in Indian cuisine—is also an option to reduce the amount of lactose in your recipe.
  • Vermicelli: Vermicelli is a thin noodle similar to spaghetti but cut into smaller pieces —probably the reason people call it “angel hair pasta noodles” and “angel hair rice.” You should be able to find vermicelli in the “Middle Eastern” section of grocery stores, but you can also purchase vermicelli online (affiliate link.)
  • Liquid: To cook the basmati rice, you will need about four cups of liquid. I kept things simple by using water as the cooking liquid, but you can also enhance the savoriness of your final dish by using chicken stock, vegetable stock, or a combination of liquids instead.
  • Seasoning: This naturally tasty vermicelli rice recipe requires little seasoning. You only need salt, black pepper, and some fresh herbs (such as parsley or mint) to ensure your rice side is as fragrant and savory as possible.

Optional Add-Ins

While this Arabic rice recipe is quite simple, you’ll find variations that include optional add-ins, making each version unique to the region where it is prepared. Below are a few optional additions that can enhance the flavor and texture of the dish:

  • Spices: If you want to add deeper, warmer notes to this rice with vermicelli recipe, I recommend adding a pinch of ground cinnamon (or even a stick of cinnamon!) to the mix. You can also add some cardamom to give your seasoning a more floral taste.
  • Toasted Nuts: Adding toasted pine nuts is a great way to give this recipe extra nuttiness and a delectable crunch. You can also transform this dish into Mediterranean almond rice by adding toasted almonds instead.
  • Dried fruits: Dried apricots, raisins, or currants provide a sweet contrast to the overall savoriness of this rice recipe.
  • Vegetables: Incorporating sautéed onions, carrots, or peas can add both texture and nutrition.

How to Make Lebanese Rice?

Learning to make rice with vermicelli doesn’t need to be stressful. These foolproof instructions will walk you through every step, ensuring that it always comes out perfectly fluffy and flavorful.

Steps showing how to make rice with vermicelli.
  1. Rinse the rice: Pour the uncooked rice into a fine mesh strainer, rinse it with cold water until it runs clear, and drain it. Set the rinsed rice aside.
  2. Saute the vermicelli: Pour the olive oil into a medium-sized saucepan (with a lid), then heat it over medium heat. Add the vermicelli to the pot and, stirring constantly, saute until they turn a deep golden brown color (4-5 minutes). If necessary, adjust the heat level to avoid burning.
  3. Mix in the rice: Add the drained rice to the saucepan and saute it, constantly stirring it with noodles, for five minutes on medium-low heat. Once the rice thoroughly mixes with the vermicelli, season the grains with kosher salt and cinnamon (if using).
  4. Boil: Pour four cups of water into the pasta and rice mixture and bring it to a full boil. 
A collage of images showing how to make vermicelli rice pilaf.
  1. Simmer: Cover the saucepan and reduce the stovetop’s heat to low. Continue to simmer the mixture (without stirring!) for 15 minutes or until the grains absorb all the water.
  2. Let it rest: Remove your rice vermicelli pilaf from the heat and let it rest for five minutes. After resting, uncover the dish and fluff it with a fork.
  3. Serve: Taste the rice and vermicelli pilaf for seasoning and add more if necessary. If desired, garnish the mix with black pepper and fresh parsley.

What to Serve With This Dish?

Growing up in Turkey, my mom would serve this tasty side dish with a side of plain yogurt—a classic combination ideal, especially for kids when they need a quick after-school snack. 

However, there are many other delectable pairings to make, whether you’re looking for iconic Turkish or Lebanese dishes to serve with rice or a simple colorful salad to brighten up your weekday lunches.

  • Meat dishes: Aromatic and succulent, Chicken Shawarma, Beef Shawarma, and Chicken Tawook are excellent choices when you’re looking for a customizable spread. Or, if you want to pair your vermicelli rice with elegant Middle Eastern flavors, my Turkish Kofta will take any dinner party to the next level.
  • Stews & soups: This Lebanese vermicelli rice makes the perfect side dish for hearty stews. My Eggplant Beef Stew will delight your taste buds with rich, melt-in-your-mouth meat, while my Vegetable Beef Soup strikes the ultimate balance between light, herby, and savory flavors.
  • Salad: Fattoush Salad is a classic choice for anyone who loves a mix of crisp, herby, and filling flavors. Otherwise, you can serve a juicy and bold tomato salad like Piyaz on the side for a colorful, gourmet spread.
Rice with vermicelli on a plate with a spoon on the side from the top view.

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

The best way to make this rice vermicelli dish is to use these pro-level pointers. With this easy guide, you can make a side as fluffy and savory as an authentic Lebanese restaurant.

  • Toast until golden brown: It’s essential that you toast your vermicelli long enough that it turns a light golden brown color, allowing it to develop a nutty flavor and tender texture before boiling. However, keep an eye on your vermicelli while sauteing it and stir it constantly to keep it from sticking to the pan or burning under the heat.
  • Rinse rice: You must rinse your rice under running water before adding it to this recipe to remove excess starch and unwanted debris. You may also soak the rice in hot water for 20 minutes before cooking it to speed up the cooking process, though I found this step unnecessary.
  • Ideal ratio: I find that the ideal rice-to-water ratio is one cup of rice for every two cups of water/liquid. Of course, this ratio may change slightly based on the specific ingredients you use and your desired end texture. However, this 1:2 ratio is a great starting point when making most vermicelli and rice recipes.
  • Let it rest: 5-10 minutes of rest is vital after cooking rice pilaf with vermicelli, as it gives the liquid time to evaporate and absorb into the grains once it’s done simmering. 
  • Use a kitchen towel to absorb moisture: In many Arabic countries, a common technique to ensure perfectly cooked vermicelli rice involves placing a clean kitchen cloth under the lid of the pot after the rice is cooked for 10-15 minutes before serving. This practice helps absorb excess moisture and prevents the rice from becoming too soggy. I didn’t choose to do this because I find that basmati rice tends to absorb liquid well, producing vermicelli rice that is perfectly fluffy and tender. However, if you use medium or short-grain rice, you may have to use this method to prevent rice from sticking.

FAQs

What’s the difference between vermicelli and rice vermicelli?

Despite their similar names, vermicelli and rice vermicelli aren’t the same thing. Vermicelli is popular in Italian and Middle Eastern cuisine, and it comes from a base of wheat flour and (sometimes) eggs. Because of this, it has the golden color of traditional Italian pasta and a thickness between angel hair pasta and spaghetti noodles. By contrast, rice vermicelli—a popular ingredient in Asian cuisine—comes from a mixture of rice flour and water, has a thinner shape, and is often white or slightly translucent.

What is vermicelli made out of?

Vermicelli noodles come from a mixture of wheat flour, water, and sometimes eggs. People then press this dough into a thin, angel hair-like shape and cook it in oil or water when ready to eat.

Is vermicelli rice healthy?

With proper portion control, vermicelli rice can offer some health benefits. For instance, basmati rice has a low glycemic index—an excellent choice for those watching their blood sugar levels. However, this recipe also uses oil and butter to saute its ingredients, so its fat levels may be higher, depending on your preparation method.

Are vermicelli gluten-free?

Vermicelli pasta isn’t gluten-free, as it contains wheat flour.

Other Rice Recipes You Might Like:

If you make your own Vermicelli with Rice following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Vermicelli rice on a plate with a spoon on the side.
Print

Vermicelli Rice Recipe

This vermicelli rice recipe combines toasted vermicelli with long grain rice for a fluffy and flavorful side dish. A staple in Middle Eastern cuisine, it is perfect for any main dish.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 338kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups long-grain rice such as Basmati rice
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ cup vermicelli
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 4 cups water chicken broth, or vegetable stock
  • 1/8 teaspoon cinnamon or a small cinnamon stick (optional)
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper optional
  • 1 tablespoon chopped parsley optional garnish

Instructions

  • Place the rice in a fine mesh strainer and rinse with cold water until it runs clear. Drain well and set it aside.
  • In a medium-sized saucepan, heat the olive oil on medium-high heat. Add the vermicelli and saute, stirring constantly, until golden brown, about 4-5 minutes.
  • Add the now-drained rice to the pot and saute, stirring constantly, for 5 minutes on medium-low heat until the rice is fully incorporated with vermicelli. Season with kosher salt and cinnamon, if using.
  • Add the 4 cups of water and bring the mixture to a full boil. Cover and reduce the heat to low.
  • Continue to simmer without stirring for 15-20 minutes until all the water is absorbed.
  • Remove from the heat and let it rest, covered, for 5 minutes. Uncover and fluff with a fork.
  • Taste for seasoning and adjust as necessary. Garnish with black pepper and chopped parsley, if desired.

Notes

  • Yields: This vermicelli rice recipe makes 5-6 cups of rice, ideal for 6 servings as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Store: You can store your leftover vermicelli and rice pilaf in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 4-5 days.
  • Reheat: To reheat this dish, I recommend microwaving it in 30-second increments until warmed to your liking. You may also consider adding a splash of chicken stock or water to the mixture to keep it from drying out while reheating. Alternatively, you can put the leftovers in a saucepan (with a splash of water/broth) and heat on low-heat until thoroughly warmed.
  • Use boiling water: If you’re on a time crunch, you can also hasten the cooking process of this dish by using boiling water when adding it to the toasted vermicelli and rice. That way, you don’t have to spend extra time waiting for the water to come to a boil.
  • Gentle heat: As soon as your mixture comes to a boil, turn down the heat and bring it to a simmer. This way, the grains can absorb the liquid at a natural rate, and your pot won’t boil over once you add the lid. During the simmering process, I’d like to move it to the smallest burner, also referred to as the simmer burner, to ensure my rice cooks in gentle heat.

Nutrition

Calories: 338kcal | Carbohydrates: 66g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 435mg | Potassium: 78mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 1IU | Vitamin C: 0.002mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vermicelli-rice/feed/ 1
Ayran – Turkish Salty Yogurt Drink https://foolproofliving.com/ayran-turkish-yogurt-drink/ https://foolproofliving.com/ayran-turkish-yogurt-drink/#comments Wed, 15 May 2024 20:46:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75384 What is Ayran? If you have visited Turkey or been to a Turkish restaurant, you have probably heard about the…]]>

What is Ayran?

If you have visited Turkey or been to a Turkish restaurant, you have probably heard about the popular Turkish yoghurt drink, ayran. It is one of the most popular drinks we serve with any spicy meal, whether kabob or vegetables. Made up of only three ingredients: yogurt, water, and salt, a serving of Turkish ayran is considered one of the best ways to treat yourself on a hot summer day.

A glass of froth ayran in a glass from the front view.

While it originated from Turkey, many Balkan, Central Asia, Middle East, and Mediterranean countries, such as Greece, Bulgaria, Armenia, Iran, Lebanon, and Iraq, also serve this salted yogurt drink with minor variations. For example, the Iranian version of ayran, called doogh, is often served with fresh mint, while the Arabs make a similar version and call it laban. The Greek version, ariani, is also very similar to ayran.

If you are familiar with Indian lassi, you might recognize the similarity in the texture of both drinks. However, unlike ayran, lassi is usually served sweet, often flavored with sugar, honey, or fresh fruit. 

Ayran Ingredients

The good news is that this Turkish yogurt drink recipe uses only 3 simple ingredients you probably already have on hand. You will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Plain Yogurt: I recommend using plain whole milk yogurt with no added sugars. You can also use low-fat or no-fat yogurt, but low-fat yogurt may not achieve the traditional creamy consistency. On the other hand, you can use plain Greek yogurt (also known as strained yogurt), but since it is thicker, you will need to use more water to adjust its consistency.
  • Cold Water: To keep this Mediterranean yogurt drink super refreshing, using cold water is essential. Some recipes suggest using ice, but I don’t recommend it as it can dilute the drink, affecting its consistency and texture.
  • Salt: You can use kosher, table, or sea salt. 

Optional Add-Ins & Substitutions:

  • Mint: During the summer months, I usually add a few leaves of chopped fresh mint to my ayran recipe. You can, however, also use dried mint if that is all you have.
  • Sparkling water: Growing up, we never added sparkling water to ayran, but with carbonated drinks becoming more popular, I see many people making this yogurt drink with sparkling water instead of regular water. This simple substitution for water can make it more palatable for people who enjoy carbonated beverages and are looking for a unique twist on the classic Ayran Turkish drink recipe.
  • Cucumber: Again, it’s not traditional, but I’ve seen a few slices of cucumber added as a garnish to make it look appetizing and reiterate that it is a salty drink.

How To Make Turkish Ayran?

The best part about making this Turkish yogurt recipe is that it takes no more than 5 minutes. I prefer a whisk, but you can also use an electric blender. Whipping it up in a blender is especially handy if serving it to a crowd or making a large batch. Below are the steps to make it both ways:

A collage of images showing how to make ayran drink.
  1. Ensure a smooth texture: Place yogurt in a large bowl or measuring cup and whisk until it is smooth and free of lumps. 
  2. Whisk: Add water and salt to the bowl and whisk vigorously until combined. Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary. Alternatively, you can put all of the ingredients in a blender and blend until fully combined.
  3. Chill: Tightly cover your yogurt milk drink in a glass bottle with a lid (or stretch film). Store in the fridge until ready to serve or for up to 2 days.
  4. Garnish & serve: Give it a good shake before pouring it into glasses, and garnish with fresh mint leaves if desired.

What To Serve with Ayran?

This Middle Eastern yogurt drink pairs wonderfully with several dishes, especially those with bold flavors and spices. Whether you’re having a meaty feast, a vegetarian delight, or a simple snack, ayran enhances the flavors and provides a refreshing balance to any dish it’s served with. Here are some delicious options to serve alongside this refreshing yogurt drink:

  • Kabobs: Whether you serve Shish Taouk, Chicken Shawarma, Doner Kebab, or Oven-Baked Beef Kabobs, ayran is the perfect accompaniment, providing a cooling and balancing effect.
  • Meat dishes: Popular Turkish dishes like Turkish Stuffed Eggplant (aka Karniyarik), Turkish Kofta Meatballs, Roast Rack of Lamb, Turkish Pasta, or lahmacun pair beautifully with this ayran yoghurt drink. The cold and refreshing drink cut through the richness of these hearty meat dishes (and spicy foods in general), enhancing the overall flavors.
  • Vegetarian Dishes: This drinkable yogurt drink pairs well with vegetarian dishes like Bulgur Wheat Pilaf, Spinach Borek, and Turkish Tabbouleh. Its tangy flavors complement the savoriness of these dishes, adding a refreshing touch to your meal.
  • Snack: If you want to transport yourself to Turkey within seconds, you need to do what Turks do: Serve ayran with simit (also known as Turkish bagel) for a simple yet satisfying snack. The chewy, sesame-coated bread and the cool, salty yogurt drink are delightful at any time of the day.
Middle eastern yogurt drink served in glasses and in a glass jar.

FAQs

What does ayran taste like?

Ayran has a refreshing, tangy flavor with a slight saltiness. The yogurt gives it a creamy texture, while the added water makes it light and easy to drink. 

Are ayran and kefir the same thing?

No, ayran and kefir are not the same things. Kefir is a fermented milk drink made using kefir grains, which contain a mix of bacteria and yeast, while ayran is made by mixing yogurt, water, and salt. They both have a tangy taste, but kefir offers a slightly effervescent texture due to the fermentation process.

What are the benefits of drinking ayran?

The traditional Turkish drink offers several health benefits. Since it is yogurt-based beverage, it is high in protein and a great source of essential nutrients, including calcium, potassium, and vitamin B12. Additionally, its salt content can help replenish electrolytes lost through sweat, making it particularly beneficial during hot weather or after physical activity. Lastly, the yogurt in ayran provides probiotics, improving gut health and aiding digestion.

Other Must-Try Turkish Recipes

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make this recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

A glass of Ayran Turkish yogurt drink from the front view.
Print

Ayran Recipe – Turkish Yogurt Drink

Enjoy the deliciously refreshing Ayran, a Turkish salted yogurt drink made from yogurt, water, and a pinch of salt. Serve it as an accompaniment to your favorite kabobs and meat dishes, or treat yourself to a healthy midday snack to cool off on a hot day.
Course Non Alcoholic Drink
Cuisine Turkish
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 75kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups whole milk plain yogurt unsweetened
  • 1 cup cold water
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt

Optional Add-Ins

  • A few leaves fresh mint chopped or dried mint

Instructions

  • Place yogurt in a bowl and whisk until smooth and no lumps remain.
  • Add water and salt to the bowl and whisk vigorously until combined and the texture is creamy and smooth.
  • Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary.
  • If preferred, add in some chopped mint for flavor. Pour into a glass jar, cover tightly with a lid, and chill until ready to serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4-5 cups of ayran, ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Yogurt: While I highly recommend using whole milk yogurt, you can also use low- or nonfat yogurt, though it won’t be as creamy. Greek yogurt can also be used, but you should use more water (about 1/2 to 3/4 cup) to get the right consistency. 
  • Storage: This yogurt drink will keep fresh in the fridge for up to 2-3 days as long as it is kept in an airtight container (such as a glass jar with a tight-fitting lid). Be sure to shake well before serving.
  • Foam on top: The ayran served in most kebab restaurants has a layer of foam on top, filled with visible air bubbles. Many Turkish people consider frothy ayran a sign of freshness and consider it the best part of the drink. When making it at home, the way to achieve bubbles on top is to whisk or shake it vigorously.
  • Adjust consistency and taste: The ideal yogurt-to-water ratio is 2 to 1. In other words, to make 4 servings of this yogurt drink, I use 2 cups of yogurt and 1 cup of water. However, you can adjust the consistency to your preference by adding more or less of each ingredient. The same goes for the amount of salt you use.
  • Serve it chilled: This drink is best served cold. For the best results, make a batch and store it in a glass jar in the fridge. You can also put the ingredients in a cocktail shaker with a few ice cubes, shake it vigorously, and strain it into a glass. Be sure to strain out the ice to avoid diluting the drink.
  • Keep it in the fridge: Since ayran is a dairy-based drink, it should be stored in the fridge (At or below 40°F (4°C)) to prevent bacterial growth and spoilage.

Nutrition

Calories: 75kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 16mg | Sodium: 205mg | Potassium: 190mg | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 121IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 150mg | Iron: 0.1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/ayran-turkish-yogurt-drink/feed/ 1
Easy Chicken Shawarma Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-shawarma-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-shawarma-recipe/#comments Fri, 10 May 2024 16:36:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75223 Middle Eastern chicken recipes are essential for anyone who loves savory, aromatic, and juicy flavors. After you try out this…]]>

Middle Eastern chicken recipes are essential for anyone who loves savory, aromatic, and juicy flavors. After you try out this homemade chicken shawarma, you can take your cooking to the next level by making other iconic Middle Eastern recipes, like my tender Shish Tawook and tangy Greek Yogurt Marinade.

Can’t get enough of the shawarma goodness? Also, try our Beef Shawarma recipe.

Mediterranean chicken shawarma served with pickles, lettuce, onion and tomatoes on a plate.

What is Chicken Shawarma?

Chicken shawarma is a quintessential Middle Eastern dish and popular street food made by slow-cooking a large cut of meat on a vertical spit. Chefs then shave off thin slices of meat from the outer edge and add it to the final recipe, whether a chicken shawarma wrap, pita pocket, or bowl.

Technically, shawarma is an Arabic food native to countries like Syria and Lebanon. However, this slow-cooked vertical rotisserie technique has many other versions based on the country of origin. 

For example, I grew up in Turkey eating doner kebabs, which are similar to shawarma except with less seasoning, emphasizing the meat’s natural flavors. Another popular variation is the Greek gyro, which uses a more herbaceous seasoning mix and often includes other meats like pork, lamb, and chicken.

Chicken Shawarma Ingredients

You don’t need to be an expert in Arabic cuisine to make shawarma worthy of a restaurant. Below, I’ve outlined all the ingredients you’ll need to make this simple dish, whether you want to make a marinade for chicken shawarma or are looking for expert topping ideas.

  • Seasoning: When it comes to shawarma chicken seasoning, you have two options: If you’re in a time crunch, you can buy it at the store for an easy, premade mix (my favorite store-bought brand is New York Shuk (affiliate link). Or, you can follow in my footsteps and make your own by following my Shawarma Spice Mix Recipe. If you choose the latter, you’ll need the following ingredients:
    • Ground cumin
    • Ground coriander
    • Paprika
    • Garlic powder
    • Black pepper
    • Ground turmeric
    • Ground cloves
    • Ground cinnamon
    • Ground nutmeg
    • Ground cardamom
Shawarma chicken spices and marinade ingredients from the top view with text on the image.
  • Chicken: I prefer boneless, skinless chicken thighs for this recipe, as they tend to be more flavorful than other cuts. However, depending on your preference, you could also use skinless chicken breasts or a combination of breasts and thighs.
  • Marinade: To make a chicken shawarma marinade, you’ll need a simple mixture of:
    • Kosher salt
    • Fresh lemon juice
    • Olive oil
    • Fresh cloves of garlic: Though it’s optional (the seasoning already has garlic powder), I’d like to add a few cloves of garlic to the marinade.
  • Toppings: One of the best things about this recipe is its easy customization with your favorite chicken shawarma toppings. Of course, you can choose whatever toppings you prefer. Still, if you want to serve your shawarma like I do, I recommend beginning with a sauce (like my favorite Yogurt Garlic Sauce or a classic Tzatziki), then adding tomato, lettuce, and turnip pickles. Furthermore, I also recommend using Middle Eastern bread—such as lavash, pita, or naan—as the dish’s base.

How to Make Shawarma Chicken?

True, a traditional chicken shawarma recipe usually involves slow-roasting the meat on a vertical spit. However, if you don’t have a rotisserie skewer on hand, don’t worry!

Below, you’ll find out how to make a homemade version of traditional shawarma in three easy ways (baked, grilled, and pan-seared)—all without sacrificing an ounce of delicious flavor.

A collage of images showing how to make chicken shawarma marinade.
  1. Make the chicken shawarma seasoning: Place the ground cumin, ground coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, ground turmeric, ground cloves, ground cinnamon, ground nutmeg, and ground cardamom in a large bowl. Mix the spices until thoroughly combined, then set them aside. 
  2. Dry the chicken: Use paper towels to pat dry the chicken thighs, then sprinkle both sides with salt.
  3. Marinate: Place the chicken in a large bowl. Then, add the shawarma seasoning, lemon juice, olive oil, and garlic (if used) and combine. Cover the bowl with stretch film and let the meat marinate for three hours or overnight.
A collage of images showing how to cook shawarma chicken in the oven, on the stove and on the grill.
  1. Cook the meat: You have three choices when it’s time to cook your chicken:
    • To make an oven-roasted chicken shawarma, preheat your oven to 425 degrees F. (218 degrees F.), and arrange the marinated chicken on a baking sheet. Place the pan in the middle rack and bake the chicken for 18-20 minutes or until the thickest part of the meat registers 165 degrees F. with a digital thermometer. If you want more thoroughly browned chicken, move the pan to the top rack and broil it for 2-3 minutes, ensuring you keep a close eye on the meat.
    • To make chicken shawarma on the stovetop, heat a large skillet over medium-high heat until hot (cast-iron, stainless steel, or non-stick pans would all work in this variation). Place the marinated thighs on the hot skillet and cook the first side for 4-5 minutes or until lightly charred. Then, turn the chicken to their other side and cook for another three minutes or until the meat reaches 165 degrees F. Depending on the size of your skillet, it may be best to cook your chicken in two batches to avoid overcrowding.
    • To make grilled shawarma chicken, begin by preheating your grill to 450 degrees F. Then, scrape the grill grates to remove any food residue and brush them generously with vegetable oil. Once the grill is heated, place the chicken on the grates, close the cover, and cook the thighs for five minutes on one side. Finish the cooking process by turning the chicken pieces to the other side and continue grilling for 3-4 minutes or until your chicken is cooked.
Freshly cooked chicken shawarma recipe on a plate.
  1. Rest and serve: Transfer the cooked chicken shawarma onto a plate, cover it with aluminum foil, and let it rest for five minutes. Once rested, serve the meat with your favorite toppings and enjoy.

How to Serve Chicken Shawarma?

Want to make the most of this Lebanese chicken shawarma recipe? Not only can you customize your shawarma toppings, but you can also choose how you want to eat it—in a wrap, pocket, bowl, or beyond!

Chicken Shawarma wrap made two ways, one with flatbread and one in a pita pocket.
  • Make it a wrap: One of the most iconic ways to enjoy this chicken dish is to turn it into a Middle Eastern wrap. Simply place the chicken slices on a flatbread, like lavash or naan bread, or sliced pita bread to make a shawarma pocket. To lend it creamy, nutty notes, you can also spread your bread with tahini sauce, like my tangy Yogurt Tahini Sauce. For a zesty and herby twist, try my Schug Sauce or Lemon Tahini Sauce. Finally, top the wrap with fresh ingredients, such as tomatoes, lettuce, pink turnip pickles, and pickled red onion, and enjoy.
  • Chicken Shawarma Bowl: If you’re not looking to make a handheld meal, this chicken shawarma couldn’t be easier to transform into a fork-ready meal. Serve your chicken pieces atop a base of savory Bulgur Pilaf or tender vermicelli rice, then top it with sliced tomatoes, cucumbers, and a dollop of Hummus. Voila! A complete, hassle-free meal.

What to Serve with Chicken Shawarma?

There are countless ways to enjoy this quick chicken shawarma recipe. Whether you’re in the mood for a chicken shawarma pita wrap or a hearty bowl of greens, these ideas will take your basic recipe to the next level.

  • Tzatziki Sauce: Want a classic chicken shawarma sauce to serve with your succulent main? I’ve got you covered. Tzatziki strikes a delectable balance between light and tangy flavors, perfectly balancing the chicken’s savory, well-spiced flavors.
  • Tabbouleh: Flavorful yet filling, tabbouleh is a delicious grain that transforms your protein into a complete meal. Try your chicken shawarma alongside my Turkish Tabbouleh Recipe or Quinoa Tabbouleh for an irresistibly bright, Mediterranean taste. 
  • Salad: You don’t need a grain to turn this Greek shawarma into a tasty meal. Try using your chicken to top a crispy-fresh Greek salad or a juicy tomato salad, like my ten-minute Piyaz, and you’ll never be at a loss for quick lunch ideas again.
  • Drink: If you want to do it as they do it in the Middle East, skip the soda and serve it with the popular salted yogurt drink (aka ayran). This refreshing drink cools it down and helps balance the flavors of the spicy chicken.

How to Store and Freeze?

After trying this home shawarma, you won’t want to let a single bite go to waste. These foolproof storage tips will keep your chicken as fresh and flavorful as possible—just what you need for easy meal prep!

  • Storage: Planning to store this dish from the get-go? I highly encourage storing each shawarma ingredient—such as the meat, toppings, and bread—in separate containers to ensure the utmost freshness. Then, you can store your cooked shawarma chicken in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. When ready to eat, reheat the slices and assemble your final dish just before serving.
  • Freezing: The best way to freeze this dish is to place your raw chicken and its marinade in an airtight container in the freezer. That way, you have a ready-made meal whenever the craving strikes. However, if you want to freeze leftovers, bring your chicken to room temperature and place it in an airtight container or freezer-safe bag with as much air removed as possible. Then, store it in the freezer until ready to thaw. 
  • Thawing & reheating: To thaw your frozen shawarma, begin by placing it in the fridge overnight. Then, reheat it in a preheated 350-degree F. oven for at least five minutes or until warmed to your liking. Once heated through, your chicken is ready to eat!

FAQs

Want to know more about this Arabic chicken shawarma recipe? Below, you’ll find answers to any remaining questions, from taste profiles to regional variations.

What does chicken shawarma taste like?

Rich, complex, and savory, chicken shawarma gets its big flavors from a warm and mildly spicy mix of traditional Middle Eastern ingredients, such as cumin, cloves, and cardamom. Furthermore, it’s traditionally cooked using a vertical spit, giving each slice a tender yet crisp finish that tastes amazing when added to dishes like Mediterranean wraps, bowls, and pita pockets.

What is the difference between shawarma and gyros?

In essence, the cooking process for shawarma and gyros is the same, as both use a vertical spit to slowly cook a large cut of meat in a rotisserie-like fashion. However, these two street foods call for slightly different seasoning mixes. For instance, Middle Eastern shawarma usually has a chicken base and a bolder mix of warm, fragrant spices. By contrast, gyros have a Grecian background and, as a result, have a lighter, more herby seasoning mix.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make your own Easy Chicken Shawarma following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Chicken shawarma served with lettuce, tomatoes, pickles and garlic yogurt sauce on a plate.
Print

Easy Chicken Shawarma Recipe

Bring the Middle East home with this Easy Chicken Shawarma recipe. Boneless chicken thighs marinated with shawarma seasoning cooked to perfection and then served in warm pita pockets (or flatbread.) This is a feast anyone can make with this foolproof recipe.
Course Chicken, Dinner
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Gluten Free, Halal
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Marinading Time 8 hours
Total Time 8 hours 35 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 492kcal

Ingredients

For The Shawarma Seasoning

  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon ground turmeric
  • ½ teaspoon ground cloves
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • ½ teaspoon ground cardamom

For The Marinade:

  • 2 lbs. Boneless skinless chicken thighs about 8 chicken thighs or chicken breasts
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
  • ¼ cup lemon juice
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 2 cloves garlic minced (optional)

To Serve (optional):

Instructions

  • Add ground cumin, coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, turmeric, cloves, cinnamon, nutmeg, and cardamom in a large bowl. Mix until thoroughly combined. Set it aside.
  • Pat dry chicken thighs with paper towels and sprinkle them with salt on both sides.
  • Transfer them into the bowl with the spices.
  • Add lemon juice, olive oil, and garlic if using. Stir to combine.
  • Cover it with stretch film and marinate it for 1 hour or overnight.

To bake in the oven:

  • Preheat your oven to 425 degrees F. (218 degrees F.). Arrange the marinated chicken on the sheet pan and place it in the middle rack. Bake for 18-20 minutes or until a meat thermometer inserted into the thickest part of a chicken registers 165 degrees F. If you prefer your chicken shawarma to be on the browned side, move the sheet pan to the top rack and broil for 2-3 minutes (while watching it closely).

To cook on the stovetop:

  • Heat a large skillet (cast iron, stainless steel, or non-stick would all work) over medium-high heat until hot. Place chicken thighs on the skillet. Cook the first side for 4-5 minutes or until lightly charred. Turn and cook the other side for another 3 minutes or until the chicken is fully cooked (until it reaches 165 degrees F.) Depending on the size of your skillet, it is best to do this in two batches instead of overcrowding the pan.

To grill:

  • Preheat your grill to 450 degrees Fahrenheit. Clean grill grates and brush them generously with vegetable oil. Place the chicken on the grill, close it with the cover, and cook for 5 minutes on the first side. Turn the chicken and cook for another 3-4 minutes or until the internal temperature reaches 165 degrees F. when an instant-read thermometer is inserted in the thickest part of the meat.

Cooking it on a vertical skewer pan (or the make shift version*)

  • Assemble a vertical skewer pan according to the packaging instructions. Prepare the chicken as directed in the recipe.
  • Preheat oven to 375 degrees F. Thread the marinated chicken onto the skewer, stacking the pieces tightly, and rotating each one as you go. This helps the stack hold together and ensures even cooking. If there’s any marinade left in the bowl, spoon it over the stack.
  • Transfer it onto a baking sheet and pop it in the oven. Bake for 1 ¼ to 1 ½ hours or until the thickest part of the stack registers 165 degrees F, basting it with a spoon halfway through the baking process.
  • Remove from the oven, let it rest, and slice before serving.

To serve:

  • Transfer the cooked chicken shawarma onto a plate. Cover with foil and let it rest for 5 minutes.
  • Meanwhile, prepare your garnishes. Make a batch of our yogurt tahini sauce (or tzatziki), slice a few tomatoes, and chop some lettuce.
  • Slice chicken into ½-inch strips, reserving the juices.
  • To make a shawarma wrap, spread your bread with a generous amount of tahini sauce and top it off with shawarma chicken, tomatoes, and lettuce. Alternatively, use pita bread: slice it in half to use the pocket, filling it with the sauce, meat, and vegetables. Drizzle the wrap with the leftover juices and more tahini sauce over the top, and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves 6 people generously with about 1 ¼ chicken thighs per person. The nutritional values below include the toppings and they are per serving.
  • Shawarma Seasoning: If you prefer not to make your own shawarma seasoning, you can buy it from the store. Our favorite brand is NYShuk (affiliate link) and we recommend using 2 tablespoons of shawarma spice per pound of meat.
  • Marinating time: While it requires some advance prep, I highly recommend marinating your meat in shawarma chicken spices before cooking. This is the secret to making the best chicken shawarma recipe. The marination process allows the seasoning to fully infuse the meat with smoky, savory flavors, ensuring each bite has the same depth and complexity. For best results, marinate your chicken for at least one hour or overnight before cooking.
  • High-heat cooking: High heat is a must in this recipe, whether baking, grilling, or cooking your chicken on the stovetop. Properly heating your cooking vessel helps sear the outside of the meat, create a crispy edge, and lock in the juices—a similar taste to what a traditional roasting spit would make. 
  • Let the meat rest: Another great way to get the most flavorful chicken shawarma is to rest 10-15 minutes after cooking. Doing so allows the meat reabsorb and evenly distribute its juices, giving each slice a succulent, bold flavor.
  • Storage: You can store your cooked shawarma chicken in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. 
  • Make-shift vertical spit: Alternatively, you can make your own “make-shift” vertical skewer pan. To do so, take a large onion, cut it in half, and run a skewer through the flat side, creating a sturdy base. Transfer it onto the baking sheet, and then thread the marinated chicken onto the skewer, just like you would with the vertical skewer pan. Please watch the how-to video for a visual.

Nutrition

Calories: 492kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 36g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 150mg | Sodium: 1316mg | Potassium: 579mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1420IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 142mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-shawarma-recipe/feed/ 3
Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-pasta-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-pasta-sauce/#comments Thu, 09 May 2024 15:35:36 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75139 Ingredients You’ll Need While you’ll find the full ingredient list and exact measurements in the recipe card below, here are…]]>

The Art of Using Greek Yogurt in Savory Recipes

Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

When I first moved to the US over 20 years ago, my friends would tease me for adding plain yogurt to almost everything. Growing up in Türkiye, that was just how we ate. 

I still can’t imagine a savory meal without a scoop of yogurt on the side.

While the US has finally embraced yogurt as a breakfast staple, there is a whole world of savory possibilities for this ingredient. And let me tell you, we haven’t even scratched the surface of what it can do.

This Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce is the perfect place to start.

Here is why this recipe works where others fail:

  • Room-temperature ingredients are key: I know it’s tempting to grab the yogurt right out of the fridge when you’re in a hurry, but please take the chill off first! If you drop ice-cold yogurt into a hot pan, it basically “panics” and seizes up, which is how you end up with that grainy, separated mess. Just let all your ingredients sit on the counter for 10-15 minutes while the water boils. Giving it a little head start at room temperature is the easiest way to guarantee your sauce stays nice and silky.
  • Low & controlled heat is key to preventing curdling: Many creamy sauces require a rolling boil to thicken and become creamy. Yogurt, however, is prone to curdling because it has a lower fat-to-protein ratio than heavy cream. The “secret” here is to keep the heat low and only warm the sauce until it’s silky and combined.
  • The Umami Balance: While you can mimic the texture, you often run into a taste issue. Greek yogurt is naturally tangy, and it can be overwhelming on its own. My solution here is Parmesan cheese. I use it not only to tame the tangy flavor of yogurt but also to round out its acidity with its salty umami notes. This is why I can confidently say this sauce is a good alternative to a rich, creamy traditional Alfredo.
  • Starch as the Emulsifier: Instead of using a roux or flour, we use starchy pasta water to bind the yogurt and cheese. This way, the sauce won’t slide off the pasta or separate.
  • A “Lighter” Decadence: You get a similar, satisfying mouthfeel to a traditional cream sauce, with a protein boost and none of the heavy feeling afterward.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Ingredients You’ll Need

While you’ll find the full ingredient list and exact measurements in the recipe card below, here are a few helpful notes to keep in mind as you gather everything.

Flat lay of ingredients for Greek yogurt pasta sauce including fettuccine, a bowl of yogurt, garlic cloves, and fresh parsley on a marble surface.

Pasta: I usually reach for a long pasta (like fettuccine and spaghetti), as it pairs well with creamy sauces, but any pasta you enjoy will work.

However, penne or similar shapes work just as well. If you are following a gluten-free diet, feel free to use your favorite gluten-free pasta. And for a veggie-packed option, my zucchini noodles are also a great alternative.

Greek yogurt: Be sure to use plain, full-fat Greek yogurt and let it come to room temperature before starting. Low-fat or nonfat yogurt is more likely to curdle and doesn’t have the same silky consistency because it doesn’t have enough fat.

Short on time? I get it, if you are making it for a quick weeknight dinner, it is likely that you won’t have the time to take out the yogurt in advance. A good shortcut is to put the yogurt in a jar and soak it in a bowl of warm water for 5 minutes.

Butter: I use unsalted butter so I can control the seasoning more precisely. Olive oil can also be used, but I prefer the depth of flavor you get with butter.

Garlic: Fresh garlic is best for this recipe. Peel and mince it finely so it softens quickly without browning. For a lighter garlic flavor, you can use ¾ to 1 teaspoon garlic powder.

Parmesan cheese: Pick up a block of Parmigiana Reggiano (and grate it yourself) or buy the grated cheese containers near the cheese section. Pecorino Romano can be a great substitute if need be.

Red pepper flakes (optional): A small pinch adds a gentle heat; you can leave them out if you prefer a milder dish.

Nutmeg (optional): If you are making this as an Alfredo sauce alternative, add a pinch of nutmeg to mimic the classic Alfredo sauce.

How to Make Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce

Making this pasta sauce with Greek yogurt recipe is simple and takes no more than 20 minutes from start to finish. 

The key is gentle heat and a little patience when warming the yogurt. Here’s how I make it:

Side by side image showing fettuccine boiling in a pot and a hand reserving a cup of starchy pasta water for the sauce.

Step 1 – Cook the pasta: Start by bringing a large pot of generously salted water to a boil. Add the pasta and cook according to the package directions until al dente, about 12 to 14 minutes. 

Pro Tip: Your pasta should have a slight bite. If you cook it too long, it will likely get mushy when mixed with the sauce.

Step 2 – Reserve the pasta water: Before draining, carefully reserve 1 cup of the pasta cooking water (you won’t need all of it, but it’s good to have extra). 

This starchy water is essential for loosening the sauce later and helping it coat the pasta smoothly. Drain the cooked pasta and set it aside.

Two-panel image showing garlic sautéing in butter and shredded Parmesan cheese being whisked into a creamy Greek yogurt base.

Step 3 – Sauté the garlic: Return the now-empty pot to the stove and melt the butter over medium-low heat. Add the minced garlic and cook for about 1-2 minutes, just until fragrant. Adjust the heat as needed to avoid burning the butter or garlic.

Step 4 – Make the yogurt sauce: Reduce the heat to very low. Add the full-fat, room-temperature Greek yogurt and Parmesan cheese. Stir constantly for 1-2 minutes, just until the yogurt is gently warmed and the cheese has fully melted.

Do not let the sauce simmer, boil, or bubble. The yogurt should warm slowly. Add the reserved pasta water gradually, 1 tablespoon at a time, stirring continuously, until the sauce loosens and reaches your desired consistency. This starchy water is what helps emulsify the yogurt and cheese into a velvety sauce that clings to the noodles.

Pro Tip: This process, adding warm pasta water gradually into cool yogurt, is called tempering, and it is critical to making this recipe work. If you add it in large quantities without whisking, the proteins in the sauce will “panic,” and your yogurt pasta sauce will likely curdle.

This is also a good time to season with salt and black pepper to taste.

A collage of images showing cooked fettuccine being tossed in yogurt sauce and the final garnished pasta in the pot.

Step 5 – Add the pasta to the yogurt sauce: Add the drained pasta to the pot and gently toss with kitchen tongs until all the noodles are evenly coated with the sauce.

Step 6 – Garnish and serve: Transfer the pasta to a serving bowl and finish with chopped fresh parsley, red pepper flakes (if using), and extra Parmesan cheese. Serve while it is still warm.

A large bowl of creamy fettuccine made with a Greek yogurt pasta sauce, topped with fresh parsley and red pepper flakes.

Troubleshooting Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce

If you follow this yogurt sauce for pasta recipe as written, you should not run into any issues. That said, if something looks off, here are a few ways to fix things:

How to fix a broken sauce?: Remove the pan from the heat and whisk in a small amount of additional Greek yogurt, about 1 tablespoon, until the sauce comes back together.

Sauce looks grainy: This usually means the heat was too high. Lower the heat and continue stirring gently. The sauce should be warmed through, not cooked for a long time or allowed to bubble.

It’s too thick. How do I thin it out?: Add more reserved pasta water, no more than 1 tablespoon at a time, stirring well between each addition until the sauce loosens to your liking.

Greek yogurt alfredo sauce mixed with cooked noodles in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce Recipe

This creamless Greek yogurt pasta sauce is silky-smooth and ready in just 20 minutes. It's a protein-packed alternative to Alfredo that uses a simple trick; slowly whisking in warm pasta water-to keep the yogurt from curdling at low heat. A budget-friendly, five-ingredient meal that feels fancy but is easy enough for a busy weeknight.
Course Dinner, Vegetarian Pasta
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 375kcal

Ingredients

  • 8 ounces fettuccine pasta or other pasta, such as spaghetti
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 3 cloves garlic peeled and minced
  • 1 cup plain whole milk Greek yogurt at room temperature
  • cup shredded parmesan cheese plus more as garnish
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt plus more for the pasta cooking water
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ cup parsley roughly chopped
  • 1/8 teaspoon red pepper flakes optional

Instructions

  • Bring a large pot of generously salted water to a boil and cook the pasta according to the package directions to al dente, about 12-14 minutes.
  • Reserve 1 cup pasta water then drain the pasta. We won't need all of it, but it is good to have enough. Set aside.
  • Place the now-empty pot on the stove. Add the butter and melt over medium heat.
  • Whisk in the garlic and cook for 1 minute or until translucent. Lower the heat, if needed, to avoid browning.
  • While still on low heat, add in the Greek yogurt and parmesan cheese. Cook, stirring constantly, for a minute or two just until the yogurt is warmed through and the cheese is melted. Add the reserved pasta water as needed, 1 tablespoon at a time, to thin and smooth out the sauce.
  • Season the sauce with salt and pepper. Taste and adjust seasoning.
  • Add the drained pasta to the pot and gently toss to ensure all the pasta is coated with the sauce.
  • Transfer to a serving bowl and top with parsley, parmesan cheese and red pepper flakes, if preferred. Serve!

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 2 cups of pasta sauce, which, when mixed with cooked pasta, serves 4 adults. The nutritional values below are per serving. 
  • Use full-fat yogurt: This recipe requires thick, whole-milk Greek yogurt, so I do not recommend substituting it with regular yogurt. The proper fat-to-protein ratio and warming it over low heat prevent the sauce from curdling.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.
  • Reheat: Gently warm it in a large skillet or pan on the stovetop over low heat, stirring frequently. The sauce will thicken as it sits in the fridge, so add a splash of water to restore it to a smooth consistency.
  • Optional mix-ins: This sauce is a great base for added vegetables. To keep it quick, sauté a handful of baby spinach or sliced mushrooms in a bit of olive oil in the pot before starting Step 3, then set them aside. Once your pasta and sauce are combined, simply fold the veggies back in for an easy veggie-packed pasta dish.

Nutrition

Calories: 375kcal | Carbohydrates: 46g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 80mg | Sodium: 909mg | Potassium: 295mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1007IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 240mg | Iron: 2mg

How to Store and Reheat

Here are my best tips for storing and reheating this creamy yogurt-based pasta sauce:

  • Storage: Store any leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. 
  • Reheating: Gently reheat the pasta on the stovetop over low heat, stirring frequently. Add a splash of water as needed to loosen the sauce and restore its smooth consistency. Do your best to avoid letting it simmer for too long or boil.
  • Microwave: I do not recommend reheating this sauce in the microwave on high heat, as it can cause the yogurt to separate. If you do use the microwave, reheat in short 15-20 second intervals at low power, stirring in between.
  • Freezing: You can technically freeze Greek yogurt sauces, but I do not recommend it. If you have to, then be sure to store the pasta sauce separately, as cooked pasta loses its texture when thawed.

What to Serve With This Recipe

So you made this Greek yogurt pasta sauce and mixed it with some spaghetti, and now you want to turn it into a whole meal? Well, I am glad you asked because I have a few great suggestions:

Other Savory Yogurt Recipes

If you enjoy cooking with yogurt in savory dishes, there are so many delicious ways to use it beyond pasta sauce.

Below are a few yogurt-based recipes that I think you’ll enjoy:

  • Five-minute Creamy Salad Dressing (or Sauce): This Greek Yogurt Dressing is creamy, easy to make, and comes together in less than 5 minutes. It tastes better than store-bought dressing and is delicious drizzled over salads, grain bowls, or roasted vegetables.
  • The most loved Turkish Breakfast: If there is one dish that instantly takes me back to my childhood, it’s Turkish Eggs. Silky poached eggs are served over garlicky yogurt and finished with a warm chili butter sauce.
  • Tangy Meal Prep Solution: This Greek Yogurt Chicken Marinade is bright, tangy, and incredibly versatile. Made with Greek yogurt, lemon, and fresh herbs, it works beautifully whether you grill, bake, or pan-cook the chicken.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-pasta-sauce/feed/ 9
Almond Flour Tahini Cookies https://foolproofliving.com/tahini-cookies-with-pistachios/ https://foolproofliving.com/tahini-cookies-with-pistachios/#comments Thu, 14 Dec 2023 16:54:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3058 Tahini is an ingredient I grew up with since it is a staple in Middle Eastern cooking. The creamy, savory…]]>

Tahini is an ingredient I grew up with since it is a staple in Middle Eastern cooking. The creamy, savory depth of tahini adds balance and rich texture to an otherwise simple grain-free, dairy-free cookie.

If you love baking with Almond Flour, you are in for a treat because we have so many almond flour cookie recipes in our archives. Gingerbread Cookies with Almond Flour, Almond Flour Peanut Butter Cookies, and Almond Butter Almond Flour Cookies are just a few to name. 

Tahini Almond Flour Cookies served on a plate with a person taking one cookie from the top view.

Ingredients

These sesame tahini cookies require nothing more than a handful of simple ingredients that are easy to find at grocery stores. We will need:

Ingredients for tahini sesame seed cookies from the top view.
  • Almond flour: Either make your own almond flour or purchase blanched almond flour (affiliate link) from the store or online. If you are in a pinch, an equal amount of almond meal is a great alternative.
  • Kosher salt: Kosher salt balances the sweetness and enhances the flavor of these sesame cookies with tahini. Sea salt can also be used.
  • Baking soda: Baking soda tenderizes and lifts the cookies ever so slightly.
  • Tahini: Also known as ground sesame seeds or sesame seed paste, one of my favorite brands of tahini is Soom (affiliate link). Just make sure to stir the tahini really well before using as the oils tend to separate easily. Additionally, make sure to purchase a sugar-free tahini for this recipe.
  • Maple syrup: The key is to use a liquid sweetener here, which can either be maple syrup, agave syrup, or honey. Keep in mind that the almond sesame cookies will be darker and a little bit sweeter if you use honey. I would not recommend coconut sugar here.
  • Sesame seeds: Sprinkling the cookies with a pinch of sesame seeds is an optional step, but I think one that you do not want to miss. You can toast sesame seeds yourself or buy toasted seeds from the store.

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

While I usually stick to the main ingredients, you can easily have fun and get creative with some of the optional additions below:

  • Chocolate Chips: Omit the sesame seeds and toss in ½ cup dark chocolate chips or chocolate chunks for tahini chocolate chip cookies.
  • Vanilla Extract: Add 1 teaspoon vanilla extract to the tahini almond flour cookies for extra flavor.
  • Ground Spices: Add warmth with the addition of ¼ – ½ tsp of cinnamon, cardamom, ginger, or nutmeg.

How to Make Sesame Cookies with Almond Flour?

These healthy tahini cookies come together in no time at all. You’ll be amazed at how fast you’ll be enjoying this freshly baked tahini cookie recipe. Below are the steps you need to follow to make them:

  1. Line baking tray: Line a cookie sheet with parchment paper. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. (176 C.)
A collage of images showing how to make the cookie dough for sesame tahini cookies.
  1. Mix dry ingredients: In a large bowl, whisk together almond flour, salt, and baking soda. 
  2. Add wet ingredients: Gently add in the tahini and maple syrup to the bowl.
  3. Stir: Mix until fully combined. At first, you might feel like there is not enough liquid in the cookie batter, but it will come together as you mix it.
Person showing how to portion, roll and arrange almond tahini cookies before baking them.
  1. Roll cookies: Scoop the cookie dough using a small cookie scoop (we used #40). Alternatively, use a tablespoon and measure out 2 tbsp of cookie batter per cookie. Roll into a ball between the palms of your hands. 
  2. Flatten cookies: Arrange the cookies on the prepared baking sheet, spacing 1 inch apart. Gently press down the cookie balls until each is 1-inch thick. 
A collage of images showing tahini almond flour cookies on a sheet pan before and after they are baked.
  1. Top with sesame seeds: This step is optional, but if you prefer, lightly brush the tops of the cookies with a very small amount of tahini paste (1 teaspoon or so) and sprinkle with toasted sesame seeds.
  2. Bake: Bake for 12-14 minutes or until lightly brown with crisp edges. Rotate the baking sheet halfway through for even browning.
  3. Cool: Allow the cookies to rest on the baking sheet for 5 minutes. Then, transfer to a wire rack to cool completely before serving.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

We think that these vegan sesame cookies are best on the day that they are baked. Therefore, we recommend baking them in small batches and storing them in a cookie jar. Here’s how I like to store them:

  • Make Ahead: Tahini cookie dough can be made in advance and tightly wrapped in plastic wrap. Store in the refrigerator for 1-2 days, or freeze for up to 1 month.
  • Storage: Flourless tahini cookies will keep in an airtight container at room temperature for 3 days.
  • Freeze: Flash-freeze the raw almond tahini cookies on a baking sheet for 1 hour, then transfer them to a freezer bag. Freeze for up to a month. 

Expert Tips

  • Stir the tahini: A jar of tahini tends to separate very easily. Give it a good stir with either a knife or thin spatula until smooth and pourable.
  • Texture of the dough: After you add in the liquid ingredients and start mixing it, you might think that there is not enough liquid in the batter to hold the dough together. However, please resist the urge to add more liquid. You will realize that it will come together as you continue to mix it.
  • They don’t spread: Unlike other cookies made with all-purpose flour, sugar, and butter, these tahini sesame cookies do not spread when baked. However, we still advise you to arrange them 1 inch apart from each other to make sure they don’t touch each other during the baking process.
Refined sugar free tahini cookies on a small plate from the top view.

FAQs

Is sesame tahini paste gluten-free?

Yes, sesame paste is naturally gluten-free as it is only ground sesame seeds.

Is tahini vegan friendly?

Yes, tahini is vegan since the only ingredient is sesame seeds.

What can I replace the tahini with?

Tahini gives these cookies a special savory, nutty flavor that is hard to replicate. However, if you can’t find tahini, another great alternative is any of the other nut butters, like almond butter, cashew butter, peanut butter, or sunflower seed butter. Keep in mind, the cookies will taste different, so it’s best to use tahini if you can.

Can you freeze tahini cookies?

Raw tahini cookie dough balls can be frozen for up to 3 months. First, flash-freeze them on a baking sheet for 1 hour. Then, transfer to a freezer bag or airtight container. When you are ready to bake them, follow the instructions on the recipe card as written. No need to thaw them.

More Recipes with Tahini:

If you try this Almond Flour Tahini Cookies recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Almond flour tahini cookies on a plate with a person taking one cookie from the plate.
Print

Almond Flour Tahini Cookies Recipe

Almond Flour Tahini Cookies are deliciously nutty, soft, and chewy and flavored with rich tahini. Vegan, gluten-free, refined-sugar-free, these tahini cookies are ready in less than 30 minutes.
Course Dessert
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 14 minutes
Total Time 29 minutes
Servings 16 cookies
Calories 130kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 2 cups almond flour 220 g.
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt or sea salt
  • ¼ teaspoon baking soda
  • 1/3 cup tahini aka sesame paste – well stirred and at room temperature + 1 teaspoon to brush the cookies
  • 1/3 cup maple syrup or honey*
  • 1 tablespoons sesame seeds toasted (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. (176 C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper. Set it aside.
  • In a large bowl, whisk together the almond flour, kosher salt, and baking soda.
  • Gently stir in the tahini and maple syrup. Mix until well incorporated. At first, it will feel like you do not have enough liquid, but as you continue to mix the dough, it will come together.
  • Using a small cookie scoop (see equipment section for the cookie scoop we used), portion the cookie dough. Alternatively, you can use a tablespoon measure and measure out 2 tablespoons of cookie batter (per cookie) and gently roll them into a firm roll in between the palms of your hands. Arrange the cookies on the prepared sheet pan, making sure that they are at least 1 inch apart.
  • Gently press down to flatten the ball so that it is 1 inch thick.
  • Lightly brush the cookies with a teaspoon of tahini and lightly sprinkle them with toasted sesame seeds on top.
  • Bake for 12-14 minutes until lightly brown on top, rotating the baking sheet halfway through for even heat distribution and browning.
  • Remove from the oven and let the cookies rest on the baking sheet for 5 minutes. Transfer onto a wire tack to cool and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 16 cookies. Nutritional values below are per cookie.
  • Using honey instead of maple syrup: If you prefer to use honey instead of maple syrup, you can substitute for the same amount. Honey will definitely add more sweetness to this cookie. It will also cause the cookie to brown faster, so you should reduce the baking time to 10-12 minutes or until lightly browned.
  • Make Ahead: Tahini cookie dough can be made in advance and tightly wrapped in plastic wrap. Store in the refrigerator for 1-2 days, or freeze for up to 1 month.
  • Storage: We find that these cookies are best on the day that they are made, so we recommend baking them in small batches. However, you can store leftovers in an airtight container at room temperature for 3 days.
  • Freeze: Flash-freeze the raw almond tahini cookies on a baking sheet for 1 hour, then transfer them to a freezer bag. Freeze for up to a month. Bake as directed in the recipe. There is no need to thaw them. However, you may have to add a few extra minutes to the baking time if you bake them right out of the freezer.

Nutrition

Calories: 130kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 92mg | Potassium: 40mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 3IU | Vitamin C: 0.2mg | Calcium: 49mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/tahini-cookies-with-pistachios/feed/ 5
Mediterranean Hummus Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/ https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/#comments Tue, 05 Sep 2023 00:39:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2804 While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that…]]>

While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that just brings me back to my roots. Simple, straightforward, and with just a few pantry staples, homemade hummus is only a few steps away.

A bowl of hummus garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

Hummus Ingredients

A traditional hummus recipe requires just a handful of ingredients. Since hummus is the Arabic word for chickpeas, it’s no wonder this is the main ingredient. Below is what you’ll need:

Ingredients for basic hummus recipe.
  • Chickpeas: Although you can cook your own chickpeas (more on this below), I find using canned chickpeas is easier and does not require any advanced planning. We will need one can of chickpeas (also known as garbanzo beans) rinsed and drained.
  • Lemon Juice: Fresh lemon juice will provide a fresh pop of citrus.
  • Water: A bit of water helps with consistency. For best results, use ice-cold water.
  • Tahini Paste: A high-quality tahini (sesame paste) makes all the difference and gives this easy hummus recipe that special nutty flavor. I love super creamy Soom tahini (affiliate link) or Seed + Mill (affiliate link.)
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: Use good quality olive oil for the best flavor.
  • Garlic Cloves: I use raw garlic when making this hummus recipe from scratch. However, if you want to take things up a notch (and are not a fan of the pungent garlic flavor), you can use Roasted Garlic, or, quicker, Air Fried Garlic as well. 
  • Seasonings: Cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt add Mediterranean flavor and warmth.
  • Fresh Herbs: Upon serving, a final sprinkle of fresh herbs like parsley is all you need. 

Substitutions and Optional Garnish Ideas

While you can serve this DIY hummus simply as is, I find extra garnishes and Mediterranean additions compliment the classic characteristics of hummus and give it depth of flavor. Some favorites you can try include:

  • Chickpeas: If you would prefer to make hummus from dried chickpeas, I recommend trying Ottolenghi’s method of cooking chickpeas. Place 1 ⅓ cups dry chickpeas in a bowl, cover with cool water, add 1 teaspoon baking soda, cover and soak overnight. The next day, drain, rinse, and cook in a pot of water for 40 minutes to an hour, or until softened. And if you prefer it to be quicker, you can cook chickpeas in a pressure cooker as well.
  • Olive Oil: Create a deep crevice into the bowl of hummus with a large spoon and finish with a generous drizzle of olive oil.
  • Pine Nuts + Olives: Add crunch and fruitiness by finishing with toasted pine nuts and chopped Kalamata olives or green olives.
  • Hummus Seasoning: Finish with an array of spices and herbs, such as my Mediterranean Seasoning or Baharat Spice Blend, bright and tangy sumac, or dried oregano.
  • Greek: Garnish with chopped sun-dried tomatoes, crumbled feta cheese, chopped red onion, and a drizzle of olive oil.

How to Make Hummus From Scratch?

If you are ever looking for a step-by-step hummus recipe, you have come to the right place. Making your own hummus will always be better than store-bought hummus and might even be faster than taking a trip to the grocery store. Here’s how I like to do it:

Step by step photos showing how to make hummus recipe.
  1. Prep ingredients: Combine the lemon juice and water in a small bowl. Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
  2. Mix Tahini: In another small bowl, whisk together the tahini and olive oil until shiny and smooth.
  3. Blend chickpeas: In the bowl of a food processor with the steel blade or a high-powered blender, add the remaining chickpeas and process for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice/water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until the mixture begins to form into a paste, about 1 minute.
Person showing how to make creamy hummus in a collage of images.
  1. Add tahini: With the food processor running, slowly add the tahini paste mixture through the tube and process until creamy, about 30-40 seconds. Be sure to stop the machine a few times and scrape down the sides.
  2. Serve: Transfer the hummus to a large bowl. Using the back of a spoon, create a deep crevice in the center. Finish with reserved chickpeas, a drizzle of olive oil, and chopped fresh parsley, and enjoy.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

Easy homemade hummus can be made ahead and stored in both the fridge and freezer. To do so, simply:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare this homemade hummus recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
  • Store: Leftovers of this chickpea hummus recipe can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: Store in a freezer-safe airtight container, with a little space at the top (to count for expansion), for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge.

How to Serve

This basic hummus recipe can be served in a number of different ways. Go the more traditional route or think outside of the box by serving as:

  • Mezze Platter: The adoration for hummus is a social activity that is meant to be enjoyed amongst the company, and no mezze plate would be complete without it. Enjoy it alongside Baba Ganoush and Middle Eastern Red Pepper Dip for an authentic experience.
  • Grilled Meat: Make it a part of a filling meal by serving your garbanzo bean hummus alongside Mediterranean Chicken, Chicken Kabobs, Grilled Lamb, or beef kabobs.
  • Appetizer / Dip: Cut up fresh veggies like raw celery sticks, English cucumber, carrots, bell peppers, or radishes and dip right into Mediterranean hummus bowls. And if you want to take it up a notch, drizzle it with a spoonful of skhug sauce for that authentic Middle Eastern taste.
  • Spread: Use it as a sandwich spread to make your lunch that much more enjoyable, or add it to your favorite grain bowls.
  • Pita / Bread: Give it a casual approach with toasted pita bread, pita chips, crackers, Air Fried Garlic Bread, Olive Bread, or No Knead Artisan Bread.
Greek hummus in a bowl garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

Expert Tips

While the recipe for this authentic hummus recipe is pretty simple and straightforward, below are a few tips to ensure you get perfect results on your first try:

  • Should I remove the skins of chickpeas? I am sure you’ve seen a lot of recipes suggesting removing the chickpea skins. While I get why they recommend doing so, I personally do not have the time or patience to do so. And I guarantee you that this recipe is just as creamy and delicious without removing the skin. 
  • Use high-quality tahini: The quality of your tahini makes a huge difference here. For optimal taste and texture, use a brand of tahini that uses the buttery white Humera sesame seeds from Ethiopia. It should also be soft and creamy. If the tahini bottle has been sitting in the fridge for a while, be sure to give it a good stir before using it.
  • Use an ice cube: This is an optional step, but it really works. To achieve an extra smooth and creamy hummus, add 1-2 ice cubes near the end of processing.
  • No food processor? Use a blender. However, please keep in mind that if you have a high-speed blender like Vitamix (affiliate link), you might have to stop the machine and scrape the sides a few times.
  • Serve at room temperature: Fun fact – restaurant hummus is never refrigerated and is made fresh each morning. While I refrigerate my batch of homemade hummus to get ahead, I always serve it at room temperature.

FAQs

What is the secret to the creamiest hummus?

The creamiest hummus is made from soft chickpeas and a high-powered food processor or blender. Adding 1-2 ice cubes at the end of the processing time would also help.

Can you have hummus on a Mediterranean diet?

Yes, hummus is a staple of the Mediterranean diet and is celebrated for being plant-based and full of protein, dietary fiber, and healthy fats.

What is the main ingredient in hummus?

The main ingredient in hummus is chickpeas, sometimes referred to as garbanzo beans.

How much tahini for hummus?

This is more about personal preference and cultural influence, but I use ⅓ cup tahini for every 1 (14-15 oz) can of chickpeas.

Other Mediterranean Recipes You Might Enjoy:

It is no secret that I love making and sharing Turkish recipes on the blog. Below are other Mediterranean classics that I know you’ll like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Mediterranean Hummus Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Authentic hummus in a bowl drizzled with olive oil.
Print

Mediterranean Hummus Recipe

A restaurant style yet Homemade Mediterranean Hummus recipe. This recipe makes the creamiest and most delicious hummus that you can make in minutes. Top it off with pine nuts, chopped olives, and a drizzle of oil for extra deliciousness.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 139kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1/4 cup water
  • 1/3 cup tahini paste
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 can chickpeas (14 oz.) drained and rinsed
  • 2 small cloves garlic minced
  • 1/4 teaspoon cumin
  • Pinch of cayenne pepper
  • Pinch of black pepper
  • 1/2 teaspoon salt
  • 2 tablespoons Italian parsley finely chopped

Instructions

  • In a small bowl, combine the lemon juice and water.
  • In a separate bowl (or a measuring cup), whisk together the tahini paste and olive oil until thoroughly incorporated.
  • Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
  • Place the rest of the chickpeas in a food processor and process them for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice and water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until mixed, scraping down the bowl as necessary, 50-60 seconds.
  • While the food processor is running, slowly (in a steady stream), pour the tahini paste and olive oil mixture from the tube, and process until smooth and creamy (or it reaches your desired consistency,) for 30-40 seconds.
  • Transfer the hummus to a plate and sprinkle it with chopped parsley and reserved chickpeas. If preferred, drizzle it with olive oil. Serve it with fresh pita, pita chips or toasted bread on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ½ cups of hummus, which is ideal for 6 servings when served as an appetizer. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply the recipe. The nutrition information below is for one serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make the recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
  • Store: Leftover hummus can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 139kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 242mg | Potassium: 86mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 132IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/feed/ 15
Baba Ganoush Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/baba-ganoush-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/baba-ganoush-recipe/#respond Mon, 21 Aug 2023 15:24:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69873 What is Baba Ganoush? Baba ganoush (also referred to as baganoush, baba gahanouj, baba ghanouj, papa ganoush, and baba ghanoush)…]]>

What is Baba Ganoush?

Baba ganoush (also referred to as baganoush, baba gahanouj, baba ghanouj, papa ganoush, and baba ghanoush) is an eggplant- and tahini-based appetizer native to Levantine regions—now located the Middle East and Mediterranean. Directly translated, baba ganoush’s meaning is “pampered papa” or “coy daddy,” which may refer to the recipe’s smooth, rich taste.

Babaganoush in a bowl garnished with pomegranate seeds served with pita chips on the side.

If you are wondering, what is in baba ganoush, this savory, smoky spread generally consists of roasted eggplant, creamy tahini, zesty lemon juice, rich olive oil, and bold garlic. However, many also add unique blends of seasonings to give this Middle East eggplant dip a tantalizingly complex flavor profile.

Ingredients

Baba ganoush ingredients include a handful of fresh, natural, and flavorful ingredients—all of which you may already have in your pantry!

Ingredients used in the recipe from the top view.
  • Eggplant: There are many eggplant varieties to choose from when selecting a baba ganoush eggplant. Plump and round, globe eggplants are an excellent option for this recipe and are the easiest type to find in most American grocery stores. However, if you can get your hands on Italian eggplants, I highly recommend them, as this variety has a more tender flesh, fewer seeds, and a deliciously sweet flavor. Japanese eggplants will also work, but you’ll need more (7-8) due to their thinner shape and smaller size. If you’d prefer not to work with fresh eggplants, you may also use canned roasted eggplant (affiliate link), though it may not have the same tenderly mild flavor.
  • Fresh garlic cloves
  • Fresh lemon juice
  • Sesame Tahini: Ground sesame paste, aka tahini, has an earthy, nutty flavor that perfectly balances the mild, smoky taste of roasted eggplant baba ganoush. My favorite tahini brand is Soom (affiliate link), which is incredibly smooth and creamy.
  • Olive oil: I recommend using extra virgin olive oil for this recipe, as it has a higher quality with pure pressed olives, a lighter color, and a more neutral taste.
  • Kosher salt
  • Optional spices: While adding spices is not traditional to the original recipe, you can add more depth to your baba ganoush by adding a mixture of ground cumin and sweet, peppery paprika. For an extra deep taste, you may also use smoked paprika to complement your smoked eggplant baba ganoush. You can also add red pepper flakes for additional heat or black pepper for slightly pinier undertones.
  • Garnishes: Topping this Mediterranean eggplant dip with different garnishes is a great way to revitalize your spread with sweet, crunchy, and fresh notes. For a tart, sweet finish, try topping your dip with pomegranate seeds, or use sesame seeds and pine nuts for a nuttier taste. Or, if you want bright, fragrant overtones, fresh herbs like parsley are some of my go-to’s.

How to Cook Eggplant for Baba Ganoush?

There are three different ways to prepare your eggplant for this simple recipe, depending on your preferred cooking method: roasted, charred, and grilled eggplant for baba ganoush.

Roasting Eggplant in the Oven

Roasting eggplant for baba ganoush is a cinch when you use my foolproof method for preparing Whole Roasted Eggplant. These instructions will ensure your eggplants come out tender and creamy with little prep time.

Person showing how to roast eggplant for baba ganoush.
  1. Prep the oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F.
  2. Poke the eggplants: Use the tines of a fork to poke 7-10 ¾-inch holes around the exterior of each eggplant.
  3. Roast: Place eggplants on a baking sheet lined with aluminum foil in a single layer and bake for 50-60 minutes, turning them every 20 minutes until they burst, collapse, and soften.

Char Eggplant On a Gas Stove

The most authentic way to prepare eggplant for this baba ganoush recipe is by charring it over the open flame of a gas stove. Making Roast Eggplant on a Gas Stove is quicker than other cooking methods and will result in a smoky baba ganoush recipe with an irresistibly complex, aromatic flavor.

Person showing how to char eggplant on a gas stove.
  1. Prepare the stove: Line the base of a gas range stove with aluminum foil, ensuring that the burners are still exposed.
  2. Add the eggplants: Turn the burners to medium heat and place the eggplants directly on the flame. Two eggplants can fit on the larger burners, and one can fit on the smaller ones.
  3. Roast: Roast the eggplants for 15-20 minutes, depending on their size, turning them every five minutes with a pair of tongs. Be careful not to burn yourself while handling the hot eggplants.
  4. Remove from heat: Remove the charred eggplants from the flame when their skin becomes burnt and flaky, and their flesh is soft.

Grill Eggplant

Learning how to grill eggplant for baba ganoush is an easy way to give this Mediterranean dip its classic rich, smoky flavor and smooth texture. Here’s how to do it:

  1. Prep the grill: Preheat the gas grill (or charcoal grill) to medium heat.
  2. Grill the eggplants: Place the eggplants directly on the grill and cook them for 40-50 minutes, turning them every 10 minutes or so. Continue grilling until the eggplants have charred skin on all sides and are fully tender.

How to Make Baba Ganoush?

There’s no secret to making an authentic baba ganoush recipe. These foolproof instructions will ensure your tastebuds explode with fresh, Mediterranean flavors in just eight basic steps.

A collage of images showing how to make baba ghanoush.
  1. Let the eggplant cool: Cook your eggplant following one of the three methods mentioned above. Allow your cooked eggplant to cool down. In the meantime, place a fine-mesh strainer over a bowl and set it aside for later.
  2. Scoop the eggplant flesh: Once cool, draw a knife lengthwise through each eggplant until cut in half. Then, use a spoon to scoop out the eggplants’ flesh, trying to remove as much skin as possible.
  3. Strain: Transfer the scooped eggplant into the fine mesh strainer and use the back of a spoon to gently press against the flesh, removing as much moisture as you can. Let the eggplant drain while you prepare the remaining ingredients. Discard the juices.
  4. Mix the garlic and lemon: Transfer the eggplant to a medium bowl and add the garlic and lemon juice. Use a fork to mix the ingredients, breaking apart and mashing the large chunks of eggplant until thoroughly combined.
A collage of images showing how to make Lebanese baba ganoush recipe.
  1. Add the tahini: Stirring constantly, pour the tahini, followed by the olive oil, into the mixing bowl in a steady stream. Mix the ingredients until emulsified.
  2. Add the seasoning: Add the salt, ground cumin, and paprika (if desired) to the bowl. Taste the mixture and add more seasoning and lemon juice if necessary.
  3. Garnish: After giving it a good stir, transfer the baba ghanoush to a serving bowl and garnish with fresh parsley and pomegranate seeds if using.
  4. Serve: If wanted, drizzle the spread with olive oil and serve with pita chips.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

This homemade baba ganoush is a must-have for anyone seeking easy meal prep. Whip up this simple dip for healthy snacking throughout the week, or make it in advance for a five-star party appetizer.

  • Make ahead: You can make this baba ganoush recipe up to four days in advance. Then, store your prepared baba ghanoush in an airtight container in the fridge until ready to eat.
  • Store: You can store your freshly made eggplant garlic dip in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to four days.
  • Freeze: While you can technically freeze this vegan baba ganoush recipe, please keep in mind that it will likely lose its creamy texture after it is exposed to freezing temperatures, so it might not taste as good after storage. However, if you still want to freeze, first transfer the mixture into an airtight container, removing as much air as possible. Then, store your baba ganoush in the freezer for up to one month. 
  • Thaw: Thaw your frozen aubergine dip in the fridge overnight. Because your mixture will likely become watery the longer it sits, drain it of excess liquid, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary before serving.

What to Serve with Baba Ganoush?

One of the best things about preparing babaganoush is the many delectable ways to serve it. Though many traditionally serve this dish alongside pita triangles or vegetables, it also works as a tasty spread on toast, sandwiches, wraps, and more. 

  • Bread: Who can say no to an appetizer as effortless and tasty as this? Serve a bowl of this popular Middle Eastern dip with your favorite pita chips, roasted pita wedges, or crackers, and you’ll have the perfect crowd-ready snack.
  • Raw vegetables: Crisp, nutritious, and garden-fresh, fresh veggies make an incomparable pair with a bowl of smoky eggplant dip recipes. My favorite raw vegetables include cucumber slices, carrot sticks, cherry tomatoes, and sliced radishes.
  • Other Middle Eastern or Mediterranean dips: Wondering what to do with baba ganoush that will make even the pickiest eaters hungry for more? Try pairing your creamy eggplant dip with other classics, like Mediterranean Hummus, Muhammara, and Tzatziki. To transform this simple spread into a next-level meze platter, you can also serve them with a side of olives and nuts—gorgeous and delicious.
  • Grilled or roasted meats: A tasty way to serve baba ganoush is as a light, creamy side dish for hearty protein mains. For a classic Middle Eastern pairing, serve it alongside brightly spiced Chicken Shish Tawook or Oven Chicken Kabobs. Or, if you want an irresistibly juicy, perfectly portioned poultry meal, try this simple dish with Grilled Cornish Game Hens.
  • Use it as a topping: A dollop of baba ganoush is an excellent topping for homemade CAVA bowl and pairs beautifully with honey harissa chicken or grilled harissa chicken.
A bowl of baba ghanouj garnished with pomegranate seeds and parsley.

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a Middle Eastern chef to make an epic baba ganoush the whole family will love. These pro tips have everything you need to keep your spread as flavorful and smooth as possible.

  • Roasting time might change based on the sizes of your eggplant: Depending on the size and variety of your eggplant, they may need more or less cooking time. Japanese eggplants are smaller and thinner, requiring less time on the stove/grill, while globe eggplants are larger and may need more time to develop tender insides than other types. In total, however, you should have about 17 ounces (~480 gr.) of cooked eggplant flesh to make this babaganoush recipe.
  • Eggplant seeds: Globe eggplants tend to have a lot of seeds—more than Italian eggplants. Though these seeds are entirely edible and blend into the dip after everything is mixed, you may remove them if you are not a fan.
  • Roasted eggplant skin: It is totally okay if some of the charred eggplant skin goes into the mixture. While we want to remove as much of the skin as we possibly can, the eggplant skin is edible, so don’t worry about it if some skin gets mixed into your baba ganouj.
  • Don’t skip the draining: The secret to an epic baba ganoush recipe is to remove as much liquid as possible from the eggplants after they are cooked. Not only do not skip this step but also take your time to ensure that the juices are fully drained as much as possible to ensure it is as creamy and tasty as possible.
  • Add the oil in a steady stream: When adding the tahini and olive oil to the mixture, it is imperative to drizzle them in a steady stream while you are vigorously mixing the eggplant mixture. If you add them at the same time, they will not mix properly, and you’ll most likely end up with a less creamy and smooth baba ganoush.
  • Taste for seasoning: One other important tip for making the best baba ganoush recipe is tasting the mixture for seasoning before serving. I cannot stress this step enough, as it’s vital that you adjust the taste of your spread to your liking. Add more salt, cumin, or paprika to achieve a more robustly flavored dip, or if you prefer a more acidic, tart flavor, add more lemon juice.
  • Let it rest: Letting your eggplant baba ganoush rest for thirty minutes will allow its flavors to mix and develop, giving every bite a rich, Middle Eastern flavor. While it is an optional step, if you do have the time, let it rest in the fridge before serving.
  • Baba ganoush without Tahini: If you are not a fan of tahini, you can use an equal amount of plain Greek yogurt for a different but equally delicious version of this recipe.
  • For the iconic smoky taste: If you want to give your roasted eggplant spread an authentically smoky, robust taste, I highly recommend charring your eggplants over an open flame. Whether you cook them on a gas stovetop or on the grill, the smoky flavor that comes from the charred eggplants is worth the effort and time, especially if you are after the traditional baba ganoush recipe you enjoy in Middle Eastern restaurants.
  • Food processor or blender: Though not a traditional preparation method, you may use a food processor or blender to make an easy baba ganoush without heavy mixing. Simply fit your food processor with a steel blade and place the roasted eggplant flesh, garlic, lemon juice, tahini, olive oil, salt, ground cumin, and paprika (if using) in the bowl. Pulse 7-9 times until thoroughly combined or longer, depending on how smooth you want the texture of your dip to be. Then, transfer the mixture to a bowl, garnish it with fresh parsley and a drizzle of olive oil, and serve.

FAQs

If you have more questions about this classic baba ganoush recipe, don’t worry! This simple FAQ has all you need to know:

Where is baba ganoush from?

Baba ganoush originated in the Levantine regions, roughly located in the Middle East and Mediterranean. This area now includes several modern-day countries, including Palatine, Lebanon, Syria, Jordan, and Turkey.

Is baba ganoush vegan?

Yes! This baba ganoush recipe is vegan, dairy-free, and gluten-free, making it the perfect recipe for anyone with dietary restrictions.

How long to grill eggplant for baba ganoush?

When grilling eggplant for baba ganoush, your eggplants will need 40-50 minutes of cooking time, depending on their size.

What does baba ganoush taste like?

This creamy roasted eggplant dip offers a delectable balance of smoky, savory, and zesty flavors—a classic profile in Mediterranean and Middle Eastern cuisine. Not only does this spread taste incredible on its own, but it also makes a fabulous appetizer when served alongside a bowl of pita bread or raw veggies.

Is baba ganoush served hot or cold?

I recommend serving baba ghanouj chilled or at room temperature to ensure you can taste all its complex flavors. 

Why is my babaganoush bitter?

If your babaganoush comes out bitter, your eggplant may be old or not in season. I recommend selecting only fresh eggplants, which tend to have milder, sweeter flesh. Furthermore, it’s possible that the tahini paste you used has a naturally bitter profile or that you added too much during the mixing process. Always be sure to taste your babaganoush as you go so that you can adjust the seasoning to counteract any unwanted bitterness. You may also try adding extra fats, such as olive oil or Greek yogurt, to balance out any bitterness you taste.

What is the difference between hummus and baba ganoush?

Though they have a similarly smooth, rich flavor profile, hummus comes from a mixture of chickpeas and tahini, while baba ganoush contains a blend of eggplants and tahini.

Is baba ganoush healthy?

Absolutely! This recipe only uses the freshest, most natural ingredients—all packed with healthy nutrients. In fact, eggplants are high in antioxidants, fiber, and vitamins, helping reduce your risk of heart disease.

How long does baba ganoush last in fridge?

As long as it is kept in an airtight container in the fridge, your baba ganoush should last for up to 4 days.

Other Eggplant Recipes You Might Also Like

Wondering what to do with roasted eggplant? If you can’t resist adding this eggplant tahini dip to every meal, you’ll love adding these other eggplant recipes to your family cookbook.

Baba ganoush in a bowl with pita wedges on the side.
Print

Baba Ganoush Recipe

Learn how to make Baba Ganoush like the pros using our foolproof method. Made with just a few simple ingredients, this popular Middle Eastern recipe is the perfect appetizer for any party.
Course Dip
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6 servings
Calories 152kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 ½-3 lbs globe or Italian eggplant ~ 2-3 eggplants if using globe eggplants
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ¼ cup lemon juice plus more to taste
  • ¼ cup tahini
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil plus more as a drizzle
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt plus more to taste
  • Pinch ground cumin optional
  • Pinch paprika to finish it off – optional
  • 1 tablespoon fresh Italian parsley chopped (as garnish)
  • Handful of pomegranate seeds optional

Instructions

  • To cook eggplants for baba ganoush, you have three options:
    a. Roast whole eggplants in the oven: Preheat oven to 400 degrees F. Using a fork, poke 7-10 ¾-inch holes throughout each eggplant. Place eggplants on the sheet pan on a single layer and roast them for 50-60 minutes, turning them every 20 minutes until they burst, collapsed, and softened.
    b. Roast eggplants on the gas stove: Line the base of a gas range with aluminum foil, making sure to keep the burners exposed. Turn the burners on medium -heat and place eggplants directly on an open flame. You can put 2 eggplants on the larger burners and 1 on the smaller ones. Roast eggplants for about 15-20 minutes (depending on their size), turning every 5 minutes or so using a pair of tongs, being careful not to burn yourself. You will know that it is fully roasted when the skin is burnt and flaky and the flesh is soft.
    c. Grill eggplants: Preheat a gas grill (or a charcoal grill) to medium heat. Place eggplants directly on the grill and cook, turning every 10 minutes or so for 40-50 minutes or until charred on all sides and fully tender.
  • Let the now-cooked eggplant cool down. Meanwhile, place a fine-mesh strainer over a large bowl and set it aside.
  • When cool enough to handle, working on one eggplant at a time, slit open each eggplant lengthwise and carefully scoop the eggplant flesh removing as much of the skin as possible.
  • Transfer the eggplant flesh into the fine mesh strainer. Using the back of a spoon, gently press to remove as much of the liquid as much as possible. Let it drain while you are working on the rest of the ingredients. In the end, you should have about 17 ounces (~480 gr.) of eggplant flesh.
  • Transfer the eggplant to a medium bowl. Add minced garlic and lemon juice. Using a fork, give it a mix while breaking the large chunks of eggplant flesh until fully combined.
  • While stirring constantly, pour in the tahini, followed by olive oil, in a steady stream. Mix until fully combined.*
  • Add salt, ground cumin, and paprika (if using.). Taste for seasoning and add in more seasoning and/or lemon juice if you want.
  • Transfer baba ganoush to a serving bowl, garnish with fresh parsley and pomegranate seeds if desired.
  • If preferred, drizzle it with olive oil and serve with pita chips on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 2 cups of this roasted eggplant dip, which is good for 4-6 servings when served as an appetizer.
  • * Food processor: While it is not traditional, you can make baba ganoush using a food processor or blender. To do so, place eggplant flesh, garlic, lemon juice, tahini, olive oil, salt, and ground cumin and paprika (if using)  in the bowl of a food processor fitted with a steel blade. Pulse 7-9 times until fully combined. You can run it for longer if you prefer it to have a smoother texture. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Transfer to a bowl, garnish with parsley and a drizzle of olive oil, and serve with pita chips on the side.
  • Eggplant seeds: Globe eggplants tend to have a lot of seeds—more than Italian eggplants. The seeds are entirely edible and will blend into the dip after everything is mixed. However, if you are not a fan, you can remove them.
  • Don’t skip the draining: The secret to an epic baba ganoush recipe is to remove as much liquid as possible from the eggplant flesh. So, be sure to take your time when draining as much liquid as possible. 
  • Add the oil in a steady stream: When adding the tahini and olive oil to the mixture, it is imperative to drizzle them in a steady stream while you are vigorously mixing the eggplant mixture. If you add them at the same time, they will not mix properly, and you’ll most likely end up with a less creamy and smooth baba ganoush.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 152kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 589mg | Potassium: 497mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 107IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 35mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baba-ganoush-recipe/feed/ 0
Shish Tawook https://foolproofliving.com/shish-tawook/ https://foolproofliving.com/shish-tawook/#comments Thu, 25 May 2023 19:46:50 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67581 What is Shish Tawook and Where Does It Come From? Also referred to as “chicken tawook” and “shish taouk”, Shish…]]>

What is Shish Tawook and Where Does It Come From?

Also referred to as “chicken tawook” and “shish taouk”, Shish tawook is a traditional Turkish dish made by threading marinated chicken on skewers and cooking them over a grill. Unsurprisingly, the word “shish” translates to “skewer,” while the word “tawook” means “chicken” in Turkish. Together, the name means “chicken threaded on a skewer.”

This recipe’s classic meat marinade—a mixture of yogurt, tomato paste, and spices—dates back to the Ottoman Empire, which ruled much of the Middle East from the 1300s to the 1900s. Since its inception, this recipe has been claimed by many countries in and around the Middle East, including Turkey, Lebanon, and Egypt.

Chicken tawook placed on a bed of tabbouleh served by a person from the top view.

Though popular in its countries of origin, shish tawook has made a considerable mark on American culture—becoming a popular dish in Mediterranean, Lebanese, and Middle Eastern fast food restaurants in the US. 

List of Ingredients

This shish tawook recipe comes together with two sets of ingredients:

Ingredients for chicken shish tawook from the top view.
  1. Shish tawook marinade: To make this Middle Eastern chicken marinade, you will need:
    • Greek yogurt: I like the thick creamy texture of full-fat Greek yogurt, but you can also use plain yogurt.
    • Lemon zest and freshly squeezed lemon juice
    • Olive oil
    • Fresh garlic cloves 
    • Tomato paste: This is mostly for color than flavor and can be omitted if preferred. 
    • Seasonings: You will need warm spices like ground cumin, dried oregano, paprika, and basic seasonings like kosher salt and black pepper. Optionally, you can also add in a pinch of cayenne pepper for some heat.
  2. Chicken: You can use boneless skinless chicken thighs or boneless skinless chicken breasts for this shish chicken kebab recipe. Regardless of which one you use, it is important to make sure they are cut in equal sizes.

In terms of equipment, you will need either metal or wooden skewers to thread your kabobs.

How to Make Shish Taouk?

The recipe for shish taouk makes authentic Middle Eastern cuisine easy for cooks at any level. Follow the instructions below for a juicy chicken dish that is guaranteed to impress:

A collage of images showing how to make shish tawook recipe.
  1. Prep the chicken: Remove any residual skin and fat from your chicken, then slice it into one-inch chunks. Transfer your sliced chicken cubes into a large bowl, and set it aside.
  2. Make the yogurt marinade: In a mixing bowl, mix yogurt, fresh lemon juice, lemon zest, olive oil, garlic, ground cumin, dried oregano, paprika, tomato paste, salt, and black pepper. Whisk until the ingredients thoroughly blend.
  3. Add the chicken: Pour the marinade over the chicken and toss the mixture until each piece of chicken has an even coating of marinade. Cover the bowl with plastic wrap and remove as much air as possible. Transfer the meat to the fridge and marinate the chicken for at least 4 hours or preferably overnight.
  4. Prepare the skewers: If you are using bamboo or wooden skewers, soak them in water for 30 minutes before assembling the chicken kebabs. 
Person showing how to cook lebanese chicken kabobs in a collage of images.
  1. Preheat the grill: Set the burners to medium-high, and let it preheat for 10 minutes or until it reaches 400 degrees F. Use tongs to dip a wad of paper towel into the olive oil and thoroughly wipe the grates.
  2. Assemble the skewers: Thread the meat through the skewers, tapping off any excess marinade. If you have any thin pieces, fold them before threading to ensure even cooking. Do not overcrowd the meat as you thread the skewers. Leaving a little room between each piece will help each chicken piece cook evenly.
  3. Cook: Place the chicken skewers onto the oiled grate in a single, even layer. Cover the grill and cook for 12-15 minutes, rotating the skewers every five minutes. This rotation will evenly brown your meat and give the dish its signature grill marks. Check doneness by inserting a meat thermometer (affiliate link) in a few of the chicken pieces. They are fully cooked if they reached 165 degrees F.
Person covering freshly cooked Middle eastern grilled chicken with foil.
  1. Rest and serve: Place a sheet of aluminum foil loosely over the grilled chicken skewers and let it rest for 10 minutes. Serve!

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat?

Chicken shish tawook is a godsend for easy meal prep and leftover storage. Whether you make it for a weeknight meal or a summer party, you won’t let a single bite go to waste with these helpful tips:

  • Make ahead: The best part about Middle Eastern marinated chicken is that its flavor deepens the longer it sits. You can marinate your chicken for up to 24 hours before cooking. Then, assemble your chicken kabobs and grill them as written in the recipe below.
  • Storage: When done eating, let your chicken reach room temperature. Then, remove the meat from the skewers and store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Reheating: You can reheat the leftover shish chicken kabobs using three different methods:
    • In the oven: Place your leftovers on a sheet pan and warm them in a preheated 325 degrees F. oven for 10-15 minutes.
    • On the stovetop: Heat your chicken in a skillet with a bit of oil over medium-high heat until heated through. 
    • In the microwave: For a super-quick reheating method, place your leftovers in a microwave-safe container and microwave them for 1-2 minutes—checking every 30 seconds—until warm. If your meat is too dry, add a splash of water to the container before heating.

What to Serve with Shish Tawook?

You won’t believe how many menus you can design around this Middle Eastern Grilled Chicken recipe. This collection has everything to help you create a feast in your own kitchen:

Chicken tawook sandwich served with tzatziki in a lavash bread.
  • Make it a sandwich or wrap: Nothing hits the spot better than a shish tawook sandwich. Simply remove your grilled chicken from its skewers, lightly grill a slice of pita bread or lavash, spread a sauce on top, and add your chicken. In Turkey, I’ve seen people make a chicken tawook wrap by spreading the pita with creamy hummus, then topping it with cooked chicken, sliced tomatoes, and red onions (or sumac onions for a zestier taste). Then, it is drizzled with a yogurt-based sauce such as yogurt dill sauce or tahini yogurt sauce
  • Turn it into Lebanese chicken kabobs: Want to make it as they do in Lebanese restaurants? Spread your lavash (or pita bread) with Lebanese garlic sauce, toum, and then place the shish tawook on top along with lettuce, pickles, and tomatoes. If you have never made this Lebanese recipe, this homemade toum garlic sauce recipe is my favorite one. 
  • Serve over rice or tabbouleh: Whip up a pot of simple rice for an easy weeknight fix. Or, for a more traditional pairing, serve this Middle Eastern chicken skewers recipe alongside Lebanese Rice with Vermicelli, Turkish Tabbouleh, or Tabbouleh with Quinoa with a helping of cool tzatziki or a serving of Turkish yogurt drink ayran on the side.
  • Simple salad on the side: Packed with protein and herby flavor, this chicken kebab recipe balances perfectly with a garden-fresh salad. Prepare an authentic Middle Eastern menu with a Turkish White Bean Salad or Fattoush Salad. You can also add tasty, crisp flavors to your table with my Yogurt Coleslaw or any of my other delicious summer salads.

Expert Tips

This five-star Middle Eastern meal is pretty straightforward and quite easy to make. Below are a few helpful tips to help you make the best chicken shish tawook on your first try:

  • Don’t skimp on the marination: Sufficient marination is the key to the tender, juicy chicken in this recipe. Like my Yogurt Chicken Marinade, the yogurt and lemon juice in this recipe’s marinade tenderizes the meat and infuses it with rich, tangy flavors. To ensure your chicken comes out as juicy as possible, I recommend letting it sit for at least 4 hours— up to 24 hours—before cooking.
  • Cut the chicken into equal sizes: Be sure to slice your chicken into even, one-inch chunks before threading them on the skewers. Evenly-sized chicken cubes will allow each skewer to cook at the same rate.
  • Thread loosely: Thread your tender chicken chunks loosely on their skewers to avoid crowding and uneven cooking. I also recommend leaving 1-2 inches on the ends of your skewers so you can easily remove the chicken pieces from the skewers.
  • Oil the grates: To avoid sticking and burnt meat, thoroughly oil your grill grates before cooking your shish taouk. Furthermore, once you add the chicken skewers to the grates, turn them a few times to ensure even cooking.
  • Check for doneness: The best way to check your shish tawook’s doneness is to insert a digital meat thermometer into the center of a piece of chicken. USDA recommends cooking chicken until its internal temperature reaches 165 degrees F. before serving.
  • Let the chicken rest: Once you remove the chicken skewers from the grill, let it rest under a sheet of aluminum foil for 5-10 minutes before serving.
  • Don’t have a grill?: If you don’t have access to an outdoor grill, you can use an indoor grill pan to prepare your chicken shish tawook on the stovetop. You can also make a slightly different version of this recipe in the oven using my recipe for Oven-Baked Chicken Kabobs.
  • Add vegetables to the skewers: The authentic shish tawook recipe is not made with vegetables. However, if you prefer, you can use quick-cooking vegetables such as onions, mushrooms, and green bell peppers as you thread the chicken.

FAQS

What is the difference between chicken shawarma and tawook?

The difference in shish taouk vs. shawarma lies in marination and cooking. Though both dishes originate in the Middle East, chicken shawarma doesn’t usually include yogurt in its marinade, resulting in a deeper flavor profile. Also, chicken shawarma comes from slow-cooking stacks of shawarma spiced chicken slices on a vertical rotisserie and slicing off the outer layer.

What is the difference between chicken mishwi and chicken tawook?

To identify chicken mishwi vs. tawook, you’ll want to look at the method of assembly and cooking process. Chicken mishwi refers to chicken grilled on charcoal, whereas shish tawook is made by cooking cubed chicken on skewers.

What is the difference between shish kebab and shish tawook?

Though both refer to dishes cooked on a skewer, shish kebabs can include any meat, including beef, chicken, or seafood. Shish kabobs may also have veggies, like bell pepper or onions, for extra freshness and fiber. Meanwhile, shish tawook refers to skewered kebabs made with marinated chicken.

Can shish kabobs be cooked in the oven?

Yes! To cook shish tawouk in the oven, line a sheet pan with parchment paper and arrange your marinated chicken pieces. Bake the meat for 15-20 minutes at 450 degrees F., flipping halfway through. Finish the cooking process by broiling the chicken for one minute on each side, up to two minutes in total.

How can I turn this into a chicken maroosh recipe?

Popularized by a Philadelphia-based restaurant, chicken maroosh is a version of shish tawook served on a hoagie roll rather than on pita or lavash. Top your hoagie with charred onions, tomatoes, pickles, and garlic sauce for an authentic maroosh recipe.

What are some other names used to describe this recipe in Middle Eastern restaurants?

Nowadays, people in the U.S. refer to this dish in dozens of different ways, including “sheesh tawook”, “chicken taouk”, and “shistaouk.” I’ve even heard it marketed as “Chickabob” in some Lebanese restaurants in the US.

Other Middle Eastern Recipes You Might Also Like

If you love this shish taouk recipe, I have dozens of other classic recipes for you to try. You won’t be able to resist these fan-favorite dishes’ mouthwatering Middle Eastern flavors.

If you try this Shish Tawook recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Shish tawook placed on a bed of tabbouleh and served with yogurt sauce.
Print

Shish Tawook Recipe

Experience authentic Shish Tawook, tender, juicy Middle Eastern chicken skewers grilled to perfection. Marinated in yogurt, garlic, lemon, and spices, this grilled chicken recipe is simple yet bold and flavorful.
Course Chicken Recipes, Dinner
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Marinading Time 4 hours
Total Time 4 hours 30 minutes
Servings 9 skewers
Calories 181kcal

Ingredients

Chicken

  • 2 pounds boneless and skinless chicken thighs or chicken breasts, cut into 1-inch cubes

For The Marinade

  • ¾ cup whole milk Greek yogurt or plain yogurt
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • ¼ cup lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil plus more for the grill
  • 6 garlic cloves minced
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon pepper
  • Pinch cayenne pepper optional

Instructions

  • Prepare the chicken: Remove any residual skin or fat from the chicken; pat dry and transfer the chicken pieces to a bowl and set aside.
  • Prepare the marinade: In a mixing bowl, whisk together the yogurt, lemon zest, lemon juice, olive oil, garlic, ground cumin, dried oregano, paprika, tomato paste, salt, and pepper so that all are incorporated.
  • Pour the marinade over the chicken and mix well, ensuring all the chicken pieces are thoroughly coated. Cover it tightly with plastic wrap, removing as much air as possible. Place it in the fridge and marinate for at least 4 hours or preferably overnight.
  • If using wooden skewers, begin soaking them in water for 30 minutes prior to assembling the marinated chicken. Remove the marinating chicken from the fridge 20 minutes before grilling.
  • When ready to grill*, turn burners to medium-high and let them preheat for 10 minutes or until it reaches 400 degrees F. Using tongs, dip a wad of paper towel into the extra olive oil and then generously wipe the grates*.
  • Meanwhile, remove the chicken from the marinade and thread the chicken pieces through the skewer. Tap off any excess marinade. If you have a thin piece, fold it as you thread it so it will cook evenly. Do not pack the pieces too tight, as this can lead to uneven cooking.
  • Place the skewers on the oiled grate in a single layer. Cover and cook for approximately 12-15 minutes, rotating every 5 minutes so that you achieve a nice browning with grill marks. If you have a meat thermometer, check doneness by inserting it into one of the chicken skewers. If the internal temperature reached to 165 degrees F., your shish tawook should be cooked.
  • Remove the skewered chicken from the grill and tent with aluminum foil for at least 10 minutes before serving.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 8-9 skewers of shish tawook with each skewer having 5 pieces of cubed chicken. The nutritional information below is per skewer.
  • Cook on the stove top*: If you do not have a grill, you can cook your skewers in a grill pan on the stove. It takes about 15-20 minutes to cook them on the stove.
  • Do not skip the oiling of the grill grates: This is an important step to ensure that the chicken releases easily (and in one piece) when cooked. If you skip this step (or do not oil them well) the chicken skewers will stick to the grates and it will be difficult to flip them.
  • Make ahead: You can marinate your chicken for up to 24 hours before cooking. When ready, assemble and cook them as directed in the recipe.
  • Storage: Bring the leftovers to room temperature. Then, remove the meat from the skewers and store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Reheating: To heat in the oven, place your leftovers on a sheet pan and warm them in a preheated 325 degrees F. oven for 10-15 minutes. And to warm it up on the stovetop, place your chicken in a skillet (or a grill pan) with a bit of oil over medium-high heat and cook until heated through. 
  • Serving suggestions: These chicken skewers can be served with cooked grains, summer salads, or in lavash bread. I served them over a bed of tabbouleh and with a side of tzatziki.

Nutrition

Calories: 181kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.02g | Cholesterol: 97mg | Sodium: 383mg | Potassium: 335mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 196IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/shish-tawook/feed/ 6
Chicken Kabobs in Oven https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kabobs-in-oven/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kabobs-in-oven/#comments Thu, 25 May 2023 19:42:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67579 Baking chicken kabobs is one of the most flavorful ways to prepare juicy, seasoned chicken all year round. A favorite…]]>

Baking chicken kabobs is one of the most flavorful ways to prepare juicy, seasoned chicken all year round. A favorite protein among many, these baked chicken skewers make the perfect meal with fresh zesty marinade, succulent meat, and easy cleanup. Even better, when you give this delicious recipe a quick broil at the very end, your chicken kabobs will taste very similar to its grilled version.

If you are a fan of cooking kabobs in the oven, be sure to also check out our Oven Baked Beef Kabobs recipe.

Baked chicken kabobs served with rice and pita on a plate.

Ingredients You’ll Need to Make Baked Chicken Skewers

You’ll need two sets of simple ingredients to make oven-cooked chicken kabobs:

Ingredients for chicken shish kabob in oven from the top view.
  • Marinade: The seasoning for chicken shish kabobs is inspired by my Mediterranean
    seasoning
    . You’ll need the following:
    • Olive oil
    • Lemon zest and fresh lemon juice
    • Spices and herbs: Dried thyme, dried oregano, garlic powder, Kosher salt, and ground black pepper.
  • Chicken: You will need two pounds of boneless, skinless chicken breasts or chicken thighs sliced into one-inch chunks.
  • Vegetables: It is optional, but you can easily turn these into chicken vegetable kabobs by including veggies such as red onions, green bell peppers, and yellow peppers.

In terms of equipment, you’ll need metal, bamboo, or wooden skewers to assemble the kabobs.

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

  • Marinade: If you prefer a tangier, creamier taste, you can use my Greek Yogurt Chicken Marinade. Or, if you’d like to make an Asian-inspired meal, you can opt for my soy sauce-based chicken teriyaki marinade instead.
  • Vegetables: The best part of cooking chicken skewers in the oven is playing around with what fresh veggies to use. In addition to onions and peppers, I recommend using quick-cooking vegetables such as button mushrooms, baby bella mushrooms, zucchini, or cherry tomatoes. 
  • Spices: Feel free to get creative by adding your favorite spices to the marinade. Earthy and flavorful spices like ground cumin and smoked paprika pair beautifully with the rest of the marinade ingredients.
  • Fresh herbs: A sprinkle of chopped fresh parsley or dill is an easy way to give these oven-roasted chicken skewers a gourmet finish.

How to Cook Chicken Shish Kabobs in the Oven?

Baking chicken kabobs in the oven is a quick and tasty way to enjoy five-star Mediterranean fare all year round. No grill, no problem! Simply follow the instructions below:

A collage of images showing how to bake chicken kabobs in oven.
  1. Prepare the chicken kabob marinade: In a large bowl (one that is big enough to accommodate all the chicken pieces), whisk together the olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, dried thyme, dried oregano, garlic powder, Kosher salt, and black pepper. Set it aside.
  2. Dry and cut the chicken: Dry chicken breasts using a sheet of paper towel on both sides. First, cut them into strips and then each strip into 1-inch cubes. 
  3. Marinade: Add the cubed chicken to the bowl of marinade, and toss to ensure each piece of chicken receives an even coating. Cover the bowl of chicken with plastic wrap. Press down on the layer to remove any air, and seal the bowl tightly. Place the meat in the fridge for at least one hour or for up to 12 hours.
  4. Soak the skewers: If you are using wooden skewers, soak them in water 30 minutes before cooking.
  5. Remove the chicken: 20 minutes before assembly, take the marinated chicken out of the fridge.
  6. Preheat the oven: Set the oven to 450 degrees F., and line a baking sheet with parchment paper. Set the prepared sheet pan aside.
A collage of images showing how to make skewered chicken in oven.
  1. Assemble the kabobs: Loosely thread the pieces of chicken on each skewer, discarding any excess liquid. If desired, alternate the chicken chunks with onion and peppers. For 2 pounds of chicken, you should have 8 skewers, with each skewer having 5 pieces of cubed chicken.
  2. Place the kabobs on the sheet pan: Arrange the assembled kabobs on the parchment-lined baking sheet, ensuring not to crowd the skewers. 
  3. Bake the chicken kabobs: Place the skewered chicken in the oven and bake for 16 minutes, flipping it halfway through baking. When rotating the chicken kabobs, I recommend removing the sheet pan from the oven as it is easier (and safer) to rotate the skewers, especially if you are using wooden ones. 
  4. Broil: Switch the oven to the broil setting and cook the chicken kabobs for one minute on each side, not exceeding a total of two minutes. Check for doneness by inserting a meat thermometer (affiliate link) into the center of one of the chicken chunks. When the meat reaches an internal temperature of 165 degrees F., remove the kabobs from the oven.
  5. Rest and serve: Loosely cover the oven-roasted kabobs with a sheet of aluminum foil, and let them rest for 5-10 minutes. Once the resting process finishes, serve!

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat?

Oven-baked chicken kabobs are excellent for anyone who enjoys easy meal prep. Prepare these kabobs, and simple meals will be ready throughout the week.

  • Make ahead: To transform this chicken skewer recipe into an easy 30-minute meal, prepare your chicken marinade up to two days in advance. Store the chicken and marinade in an airtight container in the fridge, and assemble your chicken kabobs when you are ready to bake them.
  • Storage: Let your baked shish kabobs reach room temperature before storing them. Then, place the skewers (or, if you prefer, you can remove the meat from the skewers) in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Your leftover kabobs will stay fresh for 2-3 days.
  • Reheat: You can reheat the leftovers in a preheated 350 degrees F. oven for 10-12 minutes or until heated through. If they look dry, you can lightly brush the chicken pieces with a teaspoon of olive oil before placing them in the oven. You can also reheat your chicken kabobs in the microwave for 1-1½ minutes (checking every 30 seconds), until they are warmed thoroughly.

What to Serve with Baked Chicken Kebabs?

When you bake chicken skewers, you’ll unlock countless delectable menus fit for a restaurant. This simple collection has everything to satisfy your table, from savory grains to crisp salads. 

  • Rice and grains: Jasmine rice is a simple classic, while other seasoned options—such as my Herbed Quinoa, Simple Wild Rice Pilaf, and Tabbouleh—perfectly capture the herby, hearty taste of a Mediterranean menu.
  • Pasta: Tender, filling, and simple, orzo is one of my favorite sides to prepare when I bake kabobs in the oven. Looking for a richer, more decadent pairing? Buttery Garlic Pasta is the ultimate crowd-pleaser for sophisticated pasta sides.
  • Yogurt Sauce: Nothing complements baked chicken shish kabobs like a creamy, tangy, and irresistibly rich dipping sauce. My authentic Tzatziki is a classic pairing, while my Dill Yogurt Sauce is a quicker alternative that you can put together in 5 minutes.
  • Salads: If you want a delicious, low-carb pairing, any of my easy quinoa salad recipes will do the trick. Or, if you’re looking for a simple green salad, my Spring Mix Salad and Caprese Pasta Salad only require a handful of pantry-ready ingredients for a garden-fresh side.
Baked chicken skewers in a sheet pan from the top view.

Expert Tips

Cooking chicken kabobs in the oven is an easy way to prepare Instagram-ready meals all week. With these simple tips, your chicken will always come out perfectly juicy and flavorful.

  • Don’t skimp on the marinade time: Thorough marination is the key to giving this baked shish kabob recipe its robust, herbaceous taste. I recommend a minimum of an hour or up to twelve hours for maximum flavor.
  • Soak the skewers: I prefer metal skewers because they heat up quickly, resulting in evenly cooked chicken pieces. However, if you are using bamboo or wooden skewers, be sure to soak them in water for at least 30 minutes before assembling your chicken kabobs to prevent them from burning while cooking.
  • Thread the skewers loosely: When assembling your chicken kabobs, thread them loosely and leave room at both ends so you have something to hold onto while eating. I also recommend shaking off any excess liquid to avoid creating a liquid bath in the baking tray. Finally, discard any extra marinade, as its contact with raw chicken will introduce unwanted bacteria to the mixture.
  • Flip halfway through the baking process: Flipping your baked kebabs will ensure they cook evenly on both sides of the meat. 
  • Finish under the broiler: Keep a close eye on your chicken kabobs while they finish under the broiler. Broilers cook very quickly, and over-cooking your chicken skewers may result in burnt or dry meat. If you’re not a fan of using a broiler, bake your chicken kabobs for an extra five minutes instead. Though, keep in mind that broiled chicken tastes very similar to its grilled version.
  • Uniform-sized chicken: It is important to cut the chicken in equal sizes to ensure even baking. If your pieces are different sizes, they’ll cook unevenly, giving you a mix of over- and under-cooked kabobs. If some portions of your chicken are thinner than others, feel free to fold them during the threading process to make them match the size of their fellow pieces.
  • Check for doneness: I recommend using a meat thermometer (affiliate link) to ensure that they are fully cooked. Poultry should reach 165 degrees F. before it’s safe to eat.
  • Do not skip the resting time: The key to juicy chicken kabobs is to let the skewers rest after removing them from the oven. Cover the baked chicken kabobs with foil for 5-10 minutes so that the meat can reabsorb its juices and ensure maximum flavor.

FAQs

Can you cook chicken kabobs in the oven?

Yes! Oven-roasting chicken skewers is the best way to cook kabobs without a grill. Not only is this process much easier than grilling, but it also gives your chicken a juicy, tender texture and an irresistibly delectable taste.

How to cut chicken breast for kabobs?

Cut your boneless chicken breast into one-inch chunks before threading them through the skewers. Uniform pieces will ensure that your skewers bake evenly.

How long to cook chicken kabobs in the oven?

I recommend baking your chicken shish kabob for 15-16 minutes at 450 degrees F., flipping it halfway through the cooking process. Then, broil your kabobs for one minute on each side to give them a crisp, golden-brown exterior.

What are the ideal temperature and bake time for cooking chicken kabobs in the oven?

The ideal temperature and time is 450 degrees F. for 15 minutes. However, with a two-minute broil, you can cook your skewers in the oven at 350 degrees F. for 35-40 minutes. Or, roast your chicken kabobs at 375 degrees F. for 30-35 minutes and finish with a two-minute broil.

How long to broil chicken skewers?

You should broil chicken kabobs for one minute on each side to ensure optimal browning. However, keep an eye on your chicken during this process to keep them from burning under the broiler’s heat.

How to make chicken kabobs without skewers?

If you don’t have any skewers on hand, you can easily prepare deconstructed chicken kabobs in the oven. First, line a sheet pan with parchment paper, add your marinaded chicken cubes and vegetables, and roast the sheet pan chicken kabobs, flipping the meat and veggies once during baking.

Other Baked Chicken Recipes You Might Like

If you try this Baked Chicken Kabobs recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Oven baked chicken kabobs on a sheet pan from the top view.
Print

Chicken Kabobs in Oven Recipe

No grill? No problem! Baking chicken kabobs in the oven is the best way to cook kabobs without a grill. With this easy recipe, you can enjoy juicy and flavorful chicken skewers all year long.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Gluten Free, Halal
Prep Time 4 hours 20 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 4 hours 40 minutes
Servings 8 skewers
Calories 209kcal

Ingredients

For The Marinade

  • ¼ cup olive oil or avocado oil
  • 2 teaspoons lemon zest
  • 4 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt plus more for seasoning
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For the Kabobs

  • 2 lbs boneless skinless chicken breast or boneless skinless chicken thighs cut into 1-inch chunks
  • 1 red onion quartered and sliced into 1-inch thick then separated into single layers
  • 2 green bell peppers seeded and sliced into 1-inch pieces
  • 2 yellow bell peppers seeded and sliced into 1-inch pieces

Instructions

  • Make the marinade: Whisk together olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, dried thyme, dried oregano, garlic powder, kosher salt, and black pepper in a large bowl (one that is large enough to accommodate all the chicken.)
  • Place the cubed chicken into the bowl. Toss to make sure all of the chicken is evenly coated with the marinade.
  • Cover the bowl with plastic wrap, pressing down to remove any air, and seal tightly. Place it in the fridge for at least an hour but up to 12 hours.
  • If you use wooden or bamboo skewers, soak them in water for at least 30 minutes before cooking kabobs in the oven.
  • When ready to assemble, start by preheating the oven to 450 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Loosely thread the chicken chunks on the skewer tapping off any excess marinade, and alternate with the onion and peppers. For 2 pounds of chicken, you should have 8 skewers, with each skewer having 5 pieces of cubed chicken. If your chicken is thin, you can fold it when threading on the skewer so all pieces cook evenly.
  • Place the kabobs on the parchment-lined baking sheet in a single layer. If desired, sprinkle them with ½ teaspoon kosher salt and ¼ teaspoon black pepper.
  • Bake for 16 minutes, rotating once during baking. When rotating the skewers, I recommend removing the sheet pan from the oven as it is easier (and safer) to flip the skewers, especially if you are using wooden ones.
  • At the end of 15 minutes, switch the oven to broil and broil* the chicken kabobs for 1 minute on each side (no more than 2 minutes total.) This step helps brown the chicken. Check for doneness by inserting a thermometer into one of the cubes. It should be done when it reaches 165 degrees F.
  • Remove kebabs from the oven, cover loosely with aluminum foil, and let it rest for 5 to 10 minutes. Serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 8 skewers, with each skewer having 5 pieces of cubed chicken. The approximate nutritional values listed below are per skewer.
  • Broiling: * Broiling chicken kabobs at the last minute help mimic the flavors of grilled chicken kabobs. However, if you prefer not to broil them, I recommend extending the cooking time in the oven to 20 minutes or until the internal temperature of the chicken reaches 165 degrees F.
  • Make ahead: To transform this baked chicken skewer recipe into an easy 30-minute meal, marinate the chicken up to two days in advance. Store it in an airtight container in the fridge and thread your skewers when you are ready to bake them.
  • Storage: Let your kabobs reach room temperature before storing them. Then, place the skewers (or, if you prefer, you can remove the meat from the skewers) in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Your leftover kabobs will stay fresh for 2-3 days.
  • Reheat: You can reheat the leftovers in a preheated 350 degrees F. oven for 10-12 minutes or until heated through. If they look dry, you can lightly brush the chicken pieces with a teaspoon of olive oil before placing them in the oven. Alternatively, you can warm them up in a grill pan until heated through.

Nutrition

Calories: 209kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 73mg | Sodium: 461mg | Potassium: 519mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 104IU | Vitamin C: 62mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kabobs-in-oven/feed/ 12
Mediterranean Lemon Chicken https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-lemon-chicken/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-lemon-chicken/#comments Tue, 09 May 2023 17:05:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=14063 Chicken gets an upgrade in this gorgeous lemony Mediterranean chicken recipe. All you need is your favorite Dutch Oven and…]]>

Chicken gets an upgrade in this gorgeous lemony Mediterranean chicken recipe. All you need is your favorite Dutch Oven and a little under an hour. Get ready for a delicious Mediterranean-inspired feast that is also gluten-free and low-carb diet friendly.

And if you are looking for more Mediterranean-inspired chicken recipes, you might like Chicken with Bulgur, Greek Yogurt Chicken, or Chicken Pita Wraps.

Baked Mediterranean chicken with lemon is in a skillet from the top view.

Ingredients

Mediterranean baked chicken wouldn’t be complete without a simple list of ingredients. All we need is a handful of ingredients, including:

Ingredients for this recipe are placed in bowls from the top view.
  • Chicken: Any chicken would work here, including bone-in chicken thighs, bone-in chicken breasts, skinless chicken thighs, boneless skinless chicken breasts, or a mix and match of any of those listed.
  • Olive oil
  • Potatoes: Yukon gold potatoes are my favorite, but any waxy yellow or red potato would also work.
  • Garlic: Fresh garlic cloves are the best and add tons of savory flavor.
  • Chicken broth: Either pick up a box of your favorite low-sodium chicken stock from the store or use your own Homemade Chicken Broth.
  • Olives: I used Castelvatrano green olives for their buttery richness, but any green olive, Kalamata olives, or black olives would all work. Omit the olives completely if you are not a fan, or swap them out for artichoke hearts instead.
  • Lemon: Use fresh lemon juice for the best flavor, and add some fresh lemon slices during cooking so that the flavor of the lemon rind infuses into the chicken. If you really want to amp up the lemon flavor, have a few extra lemon wedges on the side for serving.
  • Thyme: Fresh thyme is best for its special citrus-piney aroma, but dried thyme can also be used.  Fresh oregano is another popular herb to serve in this lemon chicken with olives recipe. However, keep in mind that the flavor is very strong when compared to dried oregano. Use 2-3 sprigs of fresh oregano or 1 tablespoon dried oregano.
  • Seasonings: We are using basic kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper for this recipe. However, if you have some on hand, you can sprinkle the chicken with our Mediterranean Chicken Seasoning.

How to Make Mediterranean Lemon Chicken?

This easy chicken with lemon and olives recipe comes together in one skillet, making this a healthy chicken dinner you can make any night of the week. Simply:

Person showing how to season chicken thighs in a collage of photos.
  1. Season chicken: Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F. Pat dry chicken thighs (or chicken breasts)  with a sheet of paper towel. Season all over with salt and pepper.
A collage of images showing how to make this healthy lemon chicken recipe.
  1. Brown chicken: Set an oven-proof skillet over medium heat and add the olive oil. Place chicken, skin-side down, and sear until golden brown on the first side, about 4-5 minutes. Flip and continue cooking the chicken on the other side for another 3-4 minutes.
  2. Add vegetables and broth: Scatter the potatoes and garlic evenly over the chicken and pour in the chicken broth. Turn it up to medium-high heat and bring to a boil.
  3. Add olives, lemon and herbs: Once the chicken broth has come to a boil, add the olives, lemon slices and thyme.
  4. Bake: Transfer the skillet to the oven and bake for 20-25 minutes or until the chicken is cooked through. 
  5. Serve: Serve the pieces of chicken, scooping some of the sauce and lemon slices directly on top for a delicious meal.

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers

This Mediterranean Chicken Bake can be stored in the fridge and reheated to enjoy throughout the week. Here’s how to do it:

  • Storage: Bring your lemon chicken to room temperature. Transfer into an airtight container and store in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat individual portions in the microwave in 30-second intervals. Or, reheat in a skillet on the stove, with plenty of the chicken juices or a splash of water, until warmed through.

What to Serve It With?

This Lemon olive chicken recipe is a full meal by itself when served with a glass of white wine. However, you can easily turn it into a feast by pairing it with one of the dishes below:

Mediterranean chicken bake served in plates garnished with lemon slices.

Expert Tips

With one bite of this Mediterranean lemon chicken, you will understand why we believe that this recipe will become a staple in your weekly menu. Below are a few helpful tips to ensure that your chicken is cooked to perfection and bursting with flavor:

  • Use an ovenproof skillet: I used my Le Creuset Braiser (affiliate link), which I use for just about all of my one-pot meals. It goes from stovetop to oven in a flash. However, if you do not own an ovenproof skillet, first brown the chicken in a cast-iron skillet (or large nonstick skillet), then transfer to a small baking dish (or baking sheet) to finish cooking in the oven. 
  • Do not skip the browning of the chicken: While it might come as an extra step, searing the chicken helps build flavor and give the overall dish a deeper and more complex taste. Plus, the leftover little bits of the caramelized meat at the bottom of the pan mixed with potatoes create rich, savory flavors as they bake in the oven.
  • Make it your own: Play around with the combination of olives and/or herbs to give it your personal touch. Fresh parsley, fresh dill, fresh basil, or a combination of all three would make an excellent addition.
  • Check for doneness. The cooking time will vary based on the thickness of the chicken. Your chicken is fully cooked when the internal temperature registers 165 degrees F on an instant-read thermometer when inserted at the thickest part of the meat without touching the bone.
  • Serving Suggestion: Be sure to scoop some of the juices in the pan directly over the chicken when serving. I also garnish it with bruised olives and a few caramelized lemon slices for a visually stunning meal.

Other Weeknight Chicken Dinners You Might Also Like:

If you try this Mediterranean Lemon Chicken recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mediterranean lemon chicken bake in a skillet from the top view.
Print

Mediterranean Lemon Chicken Recipe

This Mediterranean Lemon Chicken is the dictionary definition of a wholesome and visually appealing dinner made in one-pot. Ready in less than an hour, it is the perfect weeknight dinner or weekend feast.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 4 Servings
Calories 583kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 1/4 pounds bone-in skin on chicken thighs or chicken breasts
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2/3 pound Yukon gold potatoes washed and halved (or quartered, depending on the size)
  • 6 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 cup chicken broth
  • ½ cup large pitted green olives such as Castelvatrano
  • 1 lemon sliced
  • 6-7 sprigs of fresh thyme

Instructions

  • Prep chicken: Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F. Pat dry chicken thighs with paper towels. Season well with salt and pepper on both sides.
  • Brown chicken: Heat olive oil in an oven-proof skillet set over medium heat. Sear the chicken, skin-side down, until browned, about 4-5 minutes. Flip and cook the other side for another 3-4 minutes. Do your best not to move them so much. Chicken should release once it is properly seared.
  • Add vegetables and broth: Add in the potatoes and garlic and spread them around the chicken. Pour in the chicken broth. Bring it to a boil.
  • Add the rest: Add in the olives. Distribute the slices of lemon and thyme evenly over the chicken and potatoes.
  • Bake: Transfer the skillet to the oven. Bake until chicken is fully cooked and tender, 20-25 minutes.
  • Serve: Serve immediately alongside your favorite rice, bulgur, quinoa, or salad.

Video

Notes

  • Yield: Depending on the size of your chicken thighs, this recipe yields 5-6 thighs with plenty of potatoes to serve with on the side. 
  • Do not skip the browning of the chicken: While it might come as an extra step, searing the chicken helps build flavor and give the overall dish a deeper and more complex taste. Plus, the leftover little bits of the caramelized meat at the bottom of the pan mixed with potatoes create rich, savory flavors as they bake in the oven.
  • Plating: When plating, be sure to drizzle the juices over the chicken and potatoes.
  • Storage: Bring the leftovers to room temperature before storing them. Once cooled, transfer them into an airtight container and store them in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat individual portions in the microwave in 30-second intervals. Or, reheat in a skillet on the stove, with plenty of the chicken juices or a splash of water, until warmed through.
  • This recipe is adapted from Martha Steward’s Braised Chicken with Potatoes, Olives and Lemon recipe with minor changes.

Nutrition

Calories: 583kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 38g | Fat: 40g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Cholesterol: 212mg | Sodium: 969mg | Potassium: 874mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 240IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 51mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-lemon-chicken/feed/ 34
Eggplant Beef Stew https://foolproofliving.com/beef-stew/ https://foolproofliving.com/beef-stew/#comments Mon, 03 Apr 2023 23:15:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1169 Inspired by my Vegetable Beef Soup and Crock Pot Vegetable Beef Soup, along with my Turkish Stuffed Eggplant, this Turkish-style…]]>

Inspired by my Vegetable Beef Soup and Crock Pot Vegetable Beef Soup, along with my Turkish Stuffed Eggplant, this Turkish-style eggplant beef stew recipe takes home cooking to another level.

Trust the process with this one, as the low and slow cooking technique I learned from my mom is worth the wait. Love eggplant? Be sure to check out our collection of tasty eggplant recipes.

Beef and eggplant stew in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients

Many of the ingredients for this beef stew with eggplant are pantry staples, along with a few that are easy to grab on a quick trip to the grocery store. Here’s what you’ll need:

Ingredients for the recipe portioned out and photographed from the top view.
  • Stew meat: You can use Sirloin steak tips, or a whole boneless beef chuck roast cut into 1 – 1 ½ inch cubes.
  • Aromatics: Onions and garlic give it a deep, savory flavor.
  • Olive oil
  • Spices and seasonings: These include ground cumin, paprika, bay leaf, salt, and black pepper.
  • Peppers: I like jalapenos for a kick of spice or red bell peppers for mild.
  • Tomatoes: We are using tomato paste and canned tomatoes (diced or crushed).
  • Eggplant: Globe eggplant is the easiest to find in grocery stores and commercial varieties mean you no longer have to deal with Sweating Eggplant. But feel free to use any Type of Eggplant you love.
  • Chicken stock: Homemade Chicken Stock will provide the best flavor, but a store-bought chicken broth would also work.
  • Green peas: Blanched Frozen Peas or store-bought frozen peas will both work.
  • Herbs: Fresh parsley or fresh oregano leaves would also work.

How to Make Eggplant Beef Stew?

This beef with aubergine recipe takes some time and patience, but your efforts will be worth it in the end. Here’s how I like to make it:

Person drying the meat and meat is in the dutch oven.
  1. Dry meat: Dry the stew meat with a paper towel on all sides.
  2. Prep meat: Set the Dutch oven over low heat and add the meat and quartered onion. Cover with the lid and let it cook for 1 hour (no peeking).
  3. Keep it low and slow: At the end of 1 hour, open the lid and give the meat and onions a stir. Cover again and continue to cook for another 2 hours. After 2 hours, you will see that the meat will release most of its juices. Do not be tempted to increase the heat – the beauty of this recipe is to cook it low and slow.
A collage of images showing how to make the recipe.
  1. Finish beef: Continue cooking the meat for another 2 hours, stirring at the end of each hour. The meat should now be super soft. There may be some liquid in the pot, depending on the stew meat, which is totally fine. Give it a taste and make sure that it is soft and not too chewy. If it is, then continue cooking for another 30 minutes to an hour.
  2. Remove meat: Remove the meat, onion, and all the juices from the Dutch oven into a bowl. Cover with foil to keep warm. Do not wash the Dutch oven.
  3. Saute aromatics and spices: In the same Dutch oven, heat olive oil over medium heat and add chopped pepper, tomato paste, ground cumin, and paprika. Cook, stirring frequently, for 4 – 5 minutes. Stir in the garlic and cook for 1 minute, or until fragrant.
  4. Add veggies & let it simmer: Add the prepared eggplant, tomatoes, chicken stock, bay leaf, salt, and pepper. Place the beef, onion, and all of the juices back into the pot. Give it a stir and cover it with the lid. Bring it to a boil, then reduce it to a simmer for 15-20 minutes. 
  5. Add peas: After the 15-minute mark, add the frozen peas. Bring it to a final boil and let it simmer until ready to serve.
  6. Serve: When ready to serve, remove the bay leaf. Garnish with parsley and serve.
Turkish Style eggplant beef stew after it is cooked in a big pot with a wooden spoon on the side.

How to Make Ahead, Store Leftovers, Reheat and Freeze?

Beef stew and eggplant can be made ahead of time and stored in the fridge or freezer for longer storage. Here’s how to do it:

  • Make Ahead: The stew meat and onions can be prepped and slow-cooked (steps 1-5) up to 3 days in advance. This gives you a good head start if looking to prepare the stew any night of the week.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat leftovers in 30-second increments in the microwave or over medium heat on the stove until warmed through.
  • Freeze: Bring to room temperature, then store in a freezer-safe container for 1-2 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw overnight in the fridge, then reheat as instructed above.

What to Serve It With?

Any of my side dish recipes would pair wonderfully with this recipe. But if you are looking for some inspiration, some of my favorites include:

Beef eggplant stew in a plate with bread on the side.

Expert Tips

  • So delicious, you don’t even need salt. Don’t fret about not salting the meat in the beginning. The low and slow cooking method creates meat so delicious you’ll find you will not need salt until braising.
  • Keep it low and slow. Trust the process, and the meat will cook through until melt-in-your-mouth tender. Patience is a virtue with this one.
  • A quick tip for preparing eggplant for cooking: As I cut eggplant, I place it in a large bowl of water with some Kosher salt to prevent the eggplant from oxidizing and turning brown.
  • Use one kind of stew meat to ensure the best flavor and even cooking. As I learned from The Kitchn’s article, Best Choice of Meat for Stew, using one type of meat cut in equal sizes will ensure that you will end up with an eggplant beef stew that is evenly cooked.
  • Incorporate other vegetables. Mushrooms, green beans, or potatoes can be used instead of (or in addition to) eggplant. Keep in mind, potatoes or other root vegetables might take longer to cook.
  • Keep it on the smallest heat source. Use the smallest burner on the stovetop over the lowest heat setting when first cooking the meat and onions.

FAQs

Can I make this recipe in the slow cooker?

I would not recommend making this in a slow cooker (or Instant Pot) as the slow cooker is too hot, even on the low setting. The magic of this recipe is to keep it on the smallest and lowest heat source on the stove.

Can you put eggplant in beef stew?

Yes, it is one that I use in many of my stew recipes. It cooks very fast and absorbs the many delicious flavors of beef and vegetables.

How long does eggplant need to be cooked in stew?

Eggplant only takes about 15-20 minutes to cook through in stew.

Do you need to peel eggplant for stew?

No, this is a personal choice. The skin is edible, so unpeeled eggplant is just fine.

Other Beef Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Eggplant and beef stew in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Eggplant Beef Stew Recipe

Eggplant Beef Stew served with bulgur pilaf makes a satisfying dish with tender pull-apart meat. Cooked low and slow, this Turkish style beef stew is a must try!
Course Beef
Cuisine American, Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 6 hours
Total Time 6 hours 15 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 295kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 lbs stew meat Sirloin steak tips or boneless beef chuck roast, cut into 1 ½ inch cubes
  • 1 large yellow onions peeled and cut into quarters
  • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil olive oil or avocado oil
  • 3 jalapeno peppers seeded and chopped – or bell pepper would also work
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 eggplant cut into cubes ~ 1 lb.
  • 1 can diced tomatoes 14.5 oz.
  • 1 cup chicken stock
  • 1 bay leaf
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • 1 cup frozen peas no need to thaw
  • 2 tablespoons Italian parsley freshly chopped
  • Pinch red pepper flakes or Aleppo pepper if you can get your hands on it

Instructions

  • Dry meat: Using paper towels, pat-dry the stew meat as much as you can.
  • Cook meat: Place meat in a Dutch oven with the quartered onion over low heat. Put the lid on and let it cook for an hour without opening it. I recommend using the smallest burner on your stovetop.
  • Keep it low and slow: At the end of an hour, give it a stir, put the lid back on and let it continue to cook for another two hours. At the end of two hours, you will see that the meat will release most of its juices. Do not be tempted to increase the heat or move to a larger burner; the beauty of this recipe is to cook low and slow.
  • Finish beef: Continue to cook for another 2 hours, giving it a stir at the end of each hour mark. In the end, the meat should be super soft. Depending on the stew meat you are using, there may be some liquid in the pot, which is okay.
  • Remove meat: Remove the meat and onion (and all the juices) from the pot into a bowl, cover with foil, and set it aside. Do not wash the dutch oven.
  • Saute aromatics and spices: In the same dutch oven over medium heat, heat olive oil and add chopped pepper, tomato paste, ground cumin, and paprika. Cook, stirring frequently, for 4 to 5 minutes. Stir in the garlic and cook for a minute.
  • Add veggies: Add the cubed eggplant, tomatoes, stock, bay leaf, salt, and pepper.
  • Simmer: Put the now-cooked beef, onion, and all of the juices back into the pot. Give it a quick stir, cover it with the lid, bring it to a boil and let it simmer for 15-20 minutes. Add the frozen peas and let them come to one last boil.
  • Serve: When ready to serve, make sure to take out the bay leaf. Garnish with parsley and serve.

Notes

  • Make Ahead: The stew meat and onions can be prepped and slow-cooked (steps 1-5) up to 3 days in advance. This gives you a good head start if looking to prepare the stew on a weeknight.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat leftovers in 30-second increments in the microwave or over medium heat on the stove until warmed through.
  • Freeze: Bring to room temperature, then store in a freezer-safe container for 1-2 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw overnight in the fridge, then reheat as instructed above.

Nutrition

Calories: 295kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 38g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 95mg | Sodium: 563mg | Potassium: 1025mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 601IU | Vitamin C: 31mg | Calcium: 80mg | Iron: 5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/beef-stew/feed/ 17
Chicken with Bulgur https://foolproofliving.com/one-pot-chicken-with-cardamom-bulgur/ https://foolproofliving.com/one-pot-chicken-with-cardamom-bulgur/#comments Thu, 05 Jan 2023 21:23:52 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2845 If you’re not accustomed to cooking with bulgur wheat (also known as burghul), this dish is a great place to…]]>

If you’re not accustomed to cooking with bulgur wheat (also known as burghul), this dish is a great place to start! Bulgur, a whole grain, is often used in Mediterranean cooking to add a nutty flavor and chewy texture to a variety of meals. To learn more about this yummy grain, look no further than my comprehensive guide, What is Bulgur Wheat? 

If you are a fan of one-pot chicken recipes, be sure to also check out our Marry Me Chicken and Chicken Stroganoff recipes.

A roasted chicken thigh with bulgur wheat on a plate with a fork from the top view.

Ingredients

We’re using Mediterranean-inspired spices, such as cumin and paprika, to season the juicy, tender chicken thighs. The rest of the dish is packed with bulgur wheat to add substance and a satisfying, chewy texture. Here’s a breakdown of what you’ll need:

Ingredients for a dish with chicken thighs and bulgur from the top view.
  • For the bulgur wheat, you can choose from various types of bulgur. I like to use medium coarse bulgur (affiliate link) but you can also use Bob’s Red Mill red bulgur (affiliate link).
  • To make the chicken bulgur recipe, you’ll need skinless, bone-in chicken thighs, olive oil, ground cumin, paprika, kosher salt, black pepper, an onion, a bell pepper, garlic, sun-dried tomatoes, bulgur wheat, chicken stock (my favorite recipe is Ina Garten’s Chicken Stock), chopped fresh parsley, and feta cheese (optional). 

Ingredient Substitutions

If you don’t have one or more of the above ingredients and you’re in a pinch, feel free to make some swaps and substitutions to accommodate what you have on hand. Here are some suggestions: 

  • Bulgur: While I love to use bulgur for the heartiness, flavor, and texture it provides, I know that it can sometimes be tricky to find at the grocery store. If your local store is out of stock and there’s no time to buy online, you can rest assured that recipes with bulgur wheat and chicken taste great with other grain substitutes. Among all the bulgur substitutes, we recommend using quinoa for this recipe, as it provides a similar texture and flavor. If you’re unfamiliar with quinoa, we have an easy guide to help you cook quinoa with confidence.
  • Seasonings: I chose to keep things simple by seasoning the meat with cumin, paprika, salt, and pepper. If these seasonings don’t appeal to your taste buds, try substituting them with Mediterranean Spice Blend, Italian seasoning, dried oregano, or dried thyme to add a pleasant, mild flavor to the dish. 
  • Sun-dried tomatoes: For this one pot bulgur dish, I recommend purchasing a jar of sun-dried tomatoes in olive oil (8 ounces), as they tend to have the best flavor. You can also purchase packaged and dehydrated sun-dried tomatoes, although I recommend soaking them in a bowl of water for 5 minutes before adding them in. Regular canned tomatoes would also work in a pinch, but be sure only to use a cup of stock if you’re adding in the canned tomatoes with their juices. 

How to Make Chicken with Bulgur

While this Mediterranean bulgur with chicken looks (and tastes) like a restaurant-worthy dish, it requires minimal effort and only one skillet! Once you sear the meat and saute the rest of the ingredients in the pan, all you have to do is pop it in the oven, sprinkle it with a little parsley, and set it on the table to enjoy. Here’s how to make it:

  1. Preheat the oven: Set your oven temperature to 400 degrees F.
A person showing how to oil and season chicken thighs from the top view.
  1. Prep the meat: Use paper towels to thoroughly dry each chicken thigh. Drizzle them with olive oil. 
  2. Mix the seasoning: Add the cumin, paprika, salt, and pepper to a small bowl and mix until combined. 
  3. Season the meat: Rub each thigh with the spice mixture. 
  4. Heat the skillet: Add the olive oil to an oven-safe skillet (affiliate link) and heat over medium-high heat until the oil shimmers. 
A person searing chicken and cooking veggies from the top view.
  1. Sear: Place the thighs in the hot pan and sear for 4-5 minutes per side until lightly golden brown. There’s no need to fully cook the chicken, as you’re aiming just to give it some color. Transfer to a plate and set aside. 
  2. Saute the onion: Add the onion and pepper to the same skillet and saute for 7-8 minutes or until the onion is translucent. 
  3. Stir in the garlic and sun-dried tomatoes: Stir in the garlic and sun-dried tomatoes and cook for an additional minute. 
A person adding bulgur wheat and chicken stock to a pot.
  1. Add the bulgur: Add the bulgur and constantly stir for 2-3 minutes as it cooks. 
  2. Add the stock: Pour in the stock and place the seared thighs back in the skillet. Let the bulgur mixture come to a boil. 
  3. Bake: Carefully place the skillet in the preheated oven and bake for 15 minutes or until the internal temperature of one of the thighs registers 165 degrees F. 
  4. Garnish and serve: Remove the skillet from the oven and top with feta cheese (if using) and chopped fresh parsley. Serve. 

How to Serve

If you’re in need of a quick weeknight dinner, you can skip the sides and serve this burghul chicken as a complete meal. The meat adds lots of protein, and the bulgur makes it ultra hearty and filling! If you have the time, I recommend whipping up my Creamy Yoghurt Dill Sauce to drizzle right on top. 

You can also pair this dish with a side salad to add a boost of nutrients. Continue with the Turkish theme by pairing it with a Turkish Bean Salad, or keep things simple and make my Spring Salad Recipe

How to Store, Freeze, Reheat, and Thaw

Once you’ve enjoyed this bulgur chicken recipe for dinner, you can store your leftovers in the fridge for an easy next-day lunch or dinner option. This dish also freezes well, so feel free to make extra to store away for busy weeks ahead. Here are a few tips:

  • Store: Bring leftovers to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container with a lid. Store in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
  • Freeze: Bring the bulgur chicken dish to room temperature and place it in an airtight, freezer-safe container. Freeze for up to a month. 
  • Reheat: Reheat leftovers in the skillet on the stove. You may need to add a little water or stock to keep it from drying out. Or, reheat it in the microwave for about a minute or two, stirring every 30 seconds or so to ensure that it is heating evenly.
  • Thaw: Thaw the leftover bulgur wheat with chicken (from frozen) overnight in the fridge. 
A chicken and grain dish topped with feta cheese from the top view.

Expert Tips

While this recipe is fairly simple and straightforward, having some helpful tips and tricks in your toolkit can help you achieve restaurant-quality results on your first try. Here’s what you need to know:

  • Saute the bulgur before adding the stock: It might be tempting to add the bulgur and chicken broth at the same time, but it’s actually important to first saute the burger before adding your liquid. Taking the time to saute the bulgur with the rest of the ingredients ensures that the grain soaks up all those yummy flavors. I also follow this method for my Turkish Bulgur Pilaf, which resembles a bulgur risotto. 
  • Sear until just browned: We’re lightly searing the thighs before allowing them to cook fully in the oven. Most bulgur recipes with chicken recommend this method as well, as it locks in moisture and flavor. Don’t skip this step, as it only takes a few minutes and will definitely pay off in terms of texture and taste.

FAQs

Do I need to pre soak bulgur?

There is no need to pre-soak your bulgur. Bulgur is a fairly thin grain that cooks quickly, so you’ll be able to achieve a fluffy, tender texture without soaking it first.

Do I need to rinse bulgur before cooking?

Rinsing bulgur before cooking isn’t necessary, but it all comes down to personal preference. If you prefer to rinse your bulgur, you can place it in a colander and rinse it with cold water.

Other One-Pot Chicken Recipes You Might Like

One-pot meals are truly life-saving when you’re in need of a yummy, no-fuss dinner that requires minimal cleanup. If you like chicken and bulgur wheat recipes like this one, you’ll also love these other single-skillet meals: 

If you try this One Pot Chicken and Bulgur recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mediterranean Bulgur with Chicken in a skillet from the top view.
Print

Chicken with Bulgur Recipe

Chicken with Bulgur is a Mediterranean-inspired dish that features juicy chicken thighs and fluffy, tender bulgur wheat. This one-pot recipe comes together in under an hour for a quick weeknight dinner or an easy, impressive dinner party entree.
Course Main
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Halal
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 560kcal

Ingredients

  • 6 chicken thighs skinless bone in
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 medium-size onion chopped (~1 cup)1 bell pepper, chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 jar sun-dried tomatoes 8oz. drained and roughly chopped
  • 1 ½ cups bulgur wheat
  • 1 ¾ cups chicken stock
  • ½ cup feta cheese crumbled (optional)
  • ½ cup chopped parsley

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400 F˚.
  • Pat dry chicken thighs on all sides with paper towels. Drizzle them with olive oil.
  • Mix together cumin, paprika, salt and pepper in a small bowl until fully mixed.
  • Sprinkle chicken on all sides using the spice mixture.
  • Heat a large oven-proof skillet over medium heat until it is shimmering hot.
  • Add the now-seasoned thighs and sear for about 4 minutes on each side until they are nicely browned. We are not cooking the meat fully here, but rather just browning it. Transfer onto a plate and set aside.
  • Add the onion and pepper to the now-empty skillet and cook, scraping the chicken bits at the bottom using a wooden spoon for about 7-8 minutes or until the onion is translucent.
  • Stir in the garlic and sun-dried tomatoes and cook for one minute.
  • Add in the bulgur wheat and cook, constantly stirring, for 2-3 minutes.
  • Pour in the stock and transfer the seared chicken back into the skillet. Bring it to a boil.
  • Transfer the skillet to the preheated oven and roast for 15 minutes or until a digital thermometer inserted in one of the thighs registers 165 F˚.
  • Carefully remove from the oven and sprinkle with feta cheese (if using) and chopped parsley. Serve immediately.

Notes

  • Store: Bring leftovers to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
  • Freeze: Bring the dish to room temperature and place it in an airtight, freezer-safe container. Freeze for up to a month. 
  • Reheat: Reheat leftovers in the skillet on the stove. You may need to add a little water or stock to keep it from drying out. Or, reheat it in the microwave for about a minute or two, stirring every 30 seconds or so to ensure that it is heating evenly.
  • Thaw: Thaw the leftovers (from frozen) overnight in the fridge. 
  • It is optional, but you can add a fresh squeeze of lemon juice at the end for a great way to brighten the dish.

Nutrition

Calories: 560kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 38g | Fat: 41g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 18g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 216mg | Sodium: 610mg | Potassium: 623mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 426IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 36mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/one-pot-chicken-with-cardamom-bulgur/feed/ 18
Spinach and Feta Cheese Bรถrek https://foolproofliving.com/spinach-and-feta-cheese-borek/ https://foolproofliving.com/spinach-and-feta-cheese-borek/#comments Tue, 14 Jun 2022 22:52:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1824 What is Borek? Crisp and rich, borek is a savory Turkish pastry often served at breakfast and brunch. It’s made…]]>

What is Borek?

Crisp and rich, borek is a savory Turkish pastry often served at breakfast and brunch. It’s made by layering ultra-thin dough, an egg mixture, and various fillings. Borek also comes in many shapes and sizes, ranging from cigarette-shaped rolls to large trays. 

Traditionally, chefs prepare borek with Turkish yufka dough, an ultra-thin, unleavened dough made from flour, water, and salt. Yufka pastry leaves recipes—like borek—often use layers of a yogurt or milk mixture to keep the dough equally moist and flakey. 

Turkish borek sliced and placed on an oval plate

Although feta and spinach borek is a quintessential Turkish dish, you can find Turkish borek recipes across the former Ottoman Empire. The Balkans, Eastern Europe, and even Northern Africa are just a few places. Perhaps because of the pastry’s geographic range, its name has many alternate spellings. “Bourek,” “burek,” “börek,” and even “bòrek” are all popular variations.

Recipe Ingredients

Who knew authentic Turkish cuisine could be so easy to make? This spinach borek recipe only uses simple ingredients that you can find at your local grocery store.

yogurt wash and phyllo dough - ingredients for borek recipe on a marble backdrop
  • Phyllo Dough: You’ll need one package of phyllo dough to make this recipe, which you can find in the grocery store’s frozen section. Though chefs traditionally make Turkish borek dough from layers of yufka, phyllo dough (this is the brand I used) is easier to find here in the U.S. so that’s what I am using. Be sure to thaw it in the fridge overnight.
  • Yogurt Wash to Keep Layers Moist: For the yogurt wash, gather olive oil, whole milk, egg, plain unsweetened yogurt, salt, and black pepper.
spinach and feta filling ingredients from the top view
  • Borek Filling: In this spinach burek recipe, your filling will consist of olive oil, chopped onion, baby spinach, kosher salt, black pepper, crumbled feta cheese, sesame seeds, and egg yolks. You may also add poppy seeds or Nigella seeds if desired.

Substitutions

  • Cheese: Turkish feta cheese is a classic in this traditional börek recipe, but shredded mozzarella, cheddar cheese, and Monterey jack would also work.
  • Oil: If you’d rather not use olive oil, you can make this bourek recipe extra rich by using melted butter instead. Just make sure the butter is cool before using it.
  • Baby spinach: Swiss chard makes an excellent substitution for fresh spinach in this Turkish cheese pastry, as long as you sauté it first. You could also replace the baby spinach with potatoes for a heartier filling.

How to Make Borek with Spinach

Sheet pan borek is one of my recipe book’s tastiest and most effortless Turkish side dishes. You can learn how to make borek like an expert in just a few simple steps.

Cook the Vegetables & Make the Filling

person sauteeing veggies and making the yogurt milk mixture
  1. Sauté the veggies: Heat olive oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the onion to the pan and cook, frequently stirring, until translucent (4-5 minutes). Then, add the baby spinach, salt, and pepper to the pan. Toss the mixture every few minutes using kitchen tongs. Let it cook until the spinach loses most of its volume (approx. 5 minutes). Turn off the heat and let the veggies cool for 15-20 minutes.
    PRO TIP: If your veggie filling has too much liquid, I recommend straining the juices using a colander. Straining will keep your borek from turning soggy when fully assembled.
  2. Prepare the yogurt milk mixture: While your vegetables cool, whisk your olive oil, milk, egg, whole-milk yogurt, salt, and black pepper in a measuring cup.
  3. Preheat the oven: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. 

Layer the Phyllo Dough

a collage of photos showing how to assemble borek from the start
  1. Layer the bottom borek sheets: Line your sheet pan with parchment paper. Then, layer sheets of phyllo dough onto the parchment paper until the whole pan is covered, using as many sheets as necessary. Let any excess dough hang over the sides. 
  2. Brush the phyllo: Lay a second layer of phyllo on top of the first, covering every part of the sheet pan. Pour 3-4 tablespoons of the milk mixture over the sheets, and use a pastry brush to spread it evenly over the dough.
  3. Add layers: Add another two layers of phyllo sheets on top of the first. Brush the top layer again with yogurt wash. Then, place one more layer of phyllo dough on the washed layer. Don’t brush this top layer with the milk mixture.
  4. Layer the filling: Distribute your cooled sautéed veggies over the top sheet of phyllo in one even layer. Then, sprinkle the crumbled feta cheese evenly over the spinach. 
a collage of images showing how to assemble cheese borak food
  1. Layer the top borek sheets: Place another two layers of phyllo dough over the spinach filling, covering it completely. Brush the top layer with the milk and yogurt wash. Then, place two more layers of phyllo dough on top of the washed layer. Brush the top of the assembled pastry with an even layer of the yogurt mixture.
  2. Fold excess dough: If any sheets are hanging over the side of the pan, fold them in toward the pastry’s center. Be sure to brush this extra dough with the milk mixture. At this point, your borek should look moist and tightly packed.
collage of photos showing before and after bourek recipe is baked.
  1. Cut the pastry: Cut your borek into 12 equal pieces using a knife. 
  2. Add toppings: Mix the egg yolks in a bowl. Brush the top layer of the borek with a generous layer of egg wash. If desired, sprinkle the top with sesame seeds and nigella seeds.
  3. Bake: Bake the borek in the preheated oven for 30-35 minutes or until the top is golden brown. 
  4. Serve: Remove the pastry from the oven and let it cool for 15-20 minutes on a wire rack. Then, slice it along the pre-cut lines, and serve while still warm.

What to Serve with Borek

There’s a reason why so many people call it “borek bread.” This flaky and flavorful Turkish side makes a perfect pair with any dish you’d eat with bread, from light salads to meaty mains.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze

Make meal prep stress a thing of the past with this Turkish cheese borek recipe. Whether you make this dish a day or an entire month in advance, these storage tips have you covered.

  • Make ahead: To make your pastry ahead of time, cook the burek spinach and onions one day in advance. Store the veggies in an airtight container in the fridge, removing it when you’re ready to assemble your borek. Another option is to assemble the entire pastry, cover it with plastic wrap, and store it in the fridge overnight. Then, cook your burek as usual when ready to eat.
  • Store: Leftover borek will stay fresh for up to 3 days when stored in an airtight container. Just be sure to let it reach room temperature before storing.
  • Freeze: You can freeze your spinach burek recipe for up to one month before baking it. Just be sure to cover the pastry tightly with plastic wrap and cover it with aluminum foil to prevent freezer burn.
  • Thaw: Transfer your burek from the freezer to the fridge one full day before you plan to bake it. Then, bake the pastry according to the standard cooking directions (350 degrees F. for 30-35 minutes).

Filling Variations

The sky’s the limit when it comes to filling this Turkish cheese pastry. Whether you want a borek recipe with meat or a cheese burek for feta fans, these popular fillings are just what you need.

  • Meat borek: Make your pastry extra satisfying by adding a savory protein. Any meat will work, but ground beef borek, borek with minced meat, and ground lamb borek are some of my favorite savory fillings.
  • Cheese & herbs: Don’t want to add veggies? No problem! Borek with cheese and fresh herbs is a common filling you’ll adore. Simply fill your Turkish filo pastry with feta cheese and fresh parsley.
  • Try it with different vegetables: When you make burek, spinach is only one of the countless delicious veggies you can use. Roasted Shiitake Mushrooms and Baked Portobello Mushrooms are two of my favorite alternatives.
turkish cheese borek right after it comes out of the oven

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a master chef to make international eats. With these foolproof tips, your cheese and spinach borek will come out flaky, gooey, and decadent every time.

  • Don’t worry about torn phyllo dough: Phyllo dough is so delicate that it may tear while you work with it. Don’t worry! You can easily pinch phyllo dough back together, and a few tears won’t ruin the dish.
  • It’s OK if you miss a layer: Don’t stress if you miss a layer when assembling your borek. This dish is highly forgiving, and it’s always better to have too few layers than too many.
  • Cover the filo sheets with a damp towel: As you are making this Turkish spinach borek recipe, be sure to cover the filo dough sheets with a damp towel to prevent them from drying. 
  • Don’t skimp on the yogurt wash: Be sure to spread the yogurt wash evenly over your Turkish pastry. Every layer should be adequately moist after brushing. 
  • Slice before baking: Slicing the borek pastry before it goes into the oven will make cutting and serving much easier. Simply slice the dough into your ideal portion sizes when you finish layering your borek.
  • Let the borek sit overnight: Though this step is optional, I highly recommend letting your borek recipe sit in the fridge overnight. Allowing your borek to rest will give your phyllo dough time to absorb the flavorful liquid, giving your pastry extra moisture and savoriness.
  • Strain your veggie mixture: If your sautéed veggie mixture has any liquid, I suggest straining it in a colander before adding it to your borek. Too much liquid will turn your pastry soggy.
  • Prewashed baby spinach: If you have a busy schedule or simply don’t want to spend hours in the kitchen, prewashed baby spinach will save you oodles of time.
  • Phyllo dough vs. puff pastry: Though phyllo dough and puff pastry can be found in the same section of the grocery store, they are not interchangeable. French puff pastry contains many layers of dough and butter, which rise and become airy in the oven. By contrast, phyllo pastry is paper-thin and bakes to a super fine, flaky texture.
Learn how to make Turkish Spinach and Feta Cheese Borek recipe - Borek served with Turkish Tea.

FAQs

You don’t have to be Turkish to be a borek buff. This handy FAQ will answer all your questions about my recipe for Turkish borek, from the dish’s national origins to its nutritional content.

Is borek the same as spanakopita?

Turkish borek and Greek spanakopita come from the same family of pastry. However, the two often differ in preparation and texture, with Greek spanakopita often having a flakier, puffier crust. 

Is it burek or borek?

Both spellings of this pastry are technically correct, depending on the country. Turkish people tend to spell the name as “borek,” while “burek” is more common in the Balkans.

What countries have burek?

Many may think of borek as Turkish food. However, you can find this iconic dish in numerous countries across the former Ottoman Empire. This area includes countries in the Balkans, Middle East, and Northern Africa.

Is spinach borek healthy?

This recipe for burek with cheese isn’t the healthiest, with many calories coming from fats and carbs. However, borek can provide essential nutrients from its vitamin-rich spinach and calcium-rich feta when enjoyed in moderation.

How do you eat borek?

 Traditionally, people have Turkish cheese borek for breakfast or brunch during family gatherings. However, you can eat borek alongside any meal in place of bread.

Other Turkish Recipes You Might Like:

If you try this Turkish Borek recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

person serving spinach and feta cheese borek
Print

Spinach and Feta Cheese Börek – Turkish Borek Recipe

Learn how to make Spinach and Feta Cheese Borek – A classic Turkish Borek recipe made with stuffing phyllo sheets with spinach and feta. This authentic and simple recipe can be made ahead and baked right before serving for a warm and delicious breakfast or brunch recipe.
Course Appetizer, Breakfast
Cuisine Turkish
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 35 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 5 minutes
Servings 12 slices
Calories 174kcal

Ingredients

For the Spinach and Feta filling:

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil or any vegetable oil such as avocado oil
  • 1 medium-size onion peeled and chopped
  • 16 oz. baby spinach leaves washed and dried
  • 1/4 teaspoon kosher salt*
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper
  • 8 oz. crumbled feta cheese

For The Milk Yogurt Mixture:

  • 3 tablespoon olive oil or any vegetable oil such as avocado oil
  • ½ cup whole milk
  • 1 large egg
  • 2 tablespoons plain whole-milk yogurt
  • 1/2 teaspoon salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper

For The Layers:

  • 1 package of Phyllo Dough* thawed overnight in the fridge
  • 2 egg yolks
  • 2 tablespoons sesame seeds
  • ½ teaspoon Nigella seeds optional

Instructions

  • Cook the filling: Heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large pan at medium heat. Add the chopped onion and cook, stirring frequently, until translucent, 4-5 minutes. Add the spinach, salt, and pepper. Cook it, tossing it every few minutes using kitchen tongs, until the spinach loses most of its volume, around 5 minutes. Give it a stir and turn the heat off. Let it cool for 15 minutes.
  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F.
  • Make the yogurt milk mixture: Whisk olive oil, milk, egg, yogurt, salt, and black pepper in a bowl until combined.
  • To assemble: Line a baking sheet (mine is 12X17) with parchment paper. In a single layer, place sheets of phyllo dough onto the parchment paper. Use as many sheets as you need to make sure that the pan’s whole surface is covered. It is okay if some filo is overhanging on the sides.
  • Place another layer of phyllo on top of the first, again making sure that the bottom of the pan is covered. Pour 3-4 tablespoons of the milk mixture on the top layer of dough and brush it over the filo sheets, making sure that it is evenly spread.
  • Stack another two layers of phyllo dough on top of the first two. Again, brush the milk mixture over the top phyllo sheet. Then, cover the top sheet with one more layer of phyllo dough—not two. Do not brush the top sheet with the milk mixture again.
  • Spread the now-cooled spinach and crumbled feta cheese evenly over the top layer of phyllo sheets.
  • Place another two layers of phyllo sheets over the filling, covering it completely. Brush another 3-4 teaspoons of the milk mixture over the topmost sheet. Then, place two final layers of phyllo dough on top of the washed layer, and brush the top with the milk mixture. You should have 9 layers of dough in total.
  • If there are sheets overhanging on the side, fold them in towards the pastry’s center and make sure that they are brushed with the milk mixture. At this point, the borek should look nicely moist and tightly packed.
  • Using a sharp knife, pre-slice borek into 12 equal pieces (please refer to the video for a visual).
  • Mix egg yolks in a bowl.
  • Brush each slice with egg yolk and sprinkle with sesame seeds and nigella seeds if using.
  • Bake in the oven for 30-35 minutes or until it turns golden brown.
  • Let it cool for a few minutes, slice, and serve while it is still warm.

Video

Notes

  • Prior to adding salt to the filling, it is good to taste your feta cheese and determine if you need more salt or not.
  • If you have time, I recommend letting your borek rest before baking it. Simply cover the baking sheet with plastic wrap and place it in the fridge. Let the pastry rest for a few hours or up to overnight. Then, bake as usual.
  • Depending on the size of the sheet pan you are using, you may not need to use the whole package of phyllo dough. 
  • Strain your veggie mixture: If your sauteed veggie mixture has any liquid, I suggest straining it in a colander before using it as a filling. Too much liquid will turn your pastry soggy.
  • Don’t worry about torn phyllo dough: Phyllo dough is so delicate that it may tear while you work with it. Don’t worry! You can easily pinch phyllo dough back together, and a few tears won’t ruin the dish.

Nutrition

Calories: 174kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Cholesterol: 87mg | Sodium: 503mg | Potassium: 481mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 6851IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 219mg | Iron: 3mg

This recipe was originally published in November 2013. It has been updated in June 2022 with new text, photos, and a how-to video with very minor edits (mostly for clarification) to the originally published recipe.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/spinach-and-feta-cheese-borek/feed/ 69
Cream of Zucchini Soup https://foolproofliving.com/zucchini-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/zucchini-soup/#comments Tue, 14 Jun 2022 14:35:42 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1258 As zucchini season nears, you may start looking for an excellent zucchini soup recipe that you can serve warm or…]]>

As zucchini season nears, you may start looking for an excellent zucchini soup recipe that you can serve warm or cold. This “Cream of Courgette Soup”, as she would call it, was passed down from my mother and has proven time and again to be the best zucchini soup recipe.

If you’re not in the mood for soup but still want to use your fresh zucchini from your kitchen garden, check out some of my other zucchini recipes, such as Zucchini Shrimp Scampi, Zucchini Noodles, Baked Zucchini Fritters, or Paleo Zucchini Bread with Almond Flour. During the summer months, when I have so much zucchini to use these are the recipes I make.

Person serving a bowl of cream of zucchini soup garnished with yogurt and dill.

Why I Love This Recipe:

The wonderful thing about this easy soup is that it is so versatile. Regardless of who you are or where you are, there is a way to make this soup into something you love.

  • Garden Fresh: This soup is excellent for using up all those fresh garden zucchini (aka courgette) that you have been growing all summer long.
  • 5 Ingredients, One Pot, and 30 minutes is all you need: This easy creamy zucchini soup recipe only requires 5 ingredients (plus salt and pepper) and is made in one pot.
  • Creamy without Heavy Cream: Thanks to the addition of one small potato, the soup is super creamy without a drop of heavy cream.
  • Diet-Friendly: Zucchini is a healthy source of vitamins and minerals. Without modifying the recipe, you have a gluten-free, low-carb, dairy-free, low calorie, and vegan-friendly soup. It can also be made keto-friendly with one minor adjustment.
  • Enjoy Year-Round: On a cold winter night, you can warm the soup up, providing warmth and comfort without being too heavy. Enjoy it cold in the summer and let the fresh zucchini cool you off after a day in the heat.

Ingredient Checklist:

As I mentioned before, you will only need 5 core ingredients (plus salt and pepper) for this comforting soup. Grab them at any local market or from your own garden!

Ingredients for the recipe are laid out

You will need 4 medium-sized zucchini (approximately 1 1/2 lbs), 1 small/ medium onion, 1 medium-sized Yukon Gold potato (5 oz.), 2 cloves of garlic, 4 cups of vegetable broth, 1 teaspoon of Kosher salt, and 1/2 teaspoon of black pepper. 

Toppings and Substitutions:

  • Optional Toppings: While this creamy courgette soup is perfectly delicious by itself, I decided to top it off with a dollop of my Greek Yogurt Sauce (made with plain yogurt) and a squeeze of fresh lemon juice. I also sprinkled it with some chopped fresh dill but fresh parsley would also work. 
  • Vegetable Broth or Chicken Stock: I wanted my zucchini soup vegan so I used vegetable broth as the liquid in the recipe. However, if you are okay with it not being vegan/vegetarian, you can make your zucchini soup with chicken broth. If you decide to do so, simply replace the 4 cups of vegetable broth with 2 cups of chicken broth and 2 cups of water. Avoid using 4 cups of chicken broth, as the chicken taste will overpower the rest of the dish.
    With this being said, if you plan to serve this soup cold, it is highly recommended that you use vegetable stock. This will bring out the fresh flavors of the vegetables used.

How to Make Zucchini Soup Recipe:

  1. Prepare Ingredients: Prepare zucchini by cutting into 3-inch pieces (peeling is optional). Next, peel and cut the potato into chunks. Then, peel the onion and cut it in half (no need to chop). Lastly, peel the garlic cloves. 
person showing the step of making courgette soup in four step by step photos
  1. Combine Ingredients: Combine zucchini, onion, potato, garlic, vegetable broth, salt, and pepper and dump into a large pot, dutch oven, or 4-quart saucepan. Place the lid on top and place over medium-high heat.
  2. Boil and Simmer: Bring mixture to a boil and simmer for 20-25 minutes or until zucchini is tender. You can check doneness by inserting a knife through one of the zucchini or potato pieces. If it comes in and out easily, your zucchini potato soup is ready for blending. 
person showing the doneness of veggies and blending the soup in two how to photos.
  1. Blend: Remove from heat and blend mixture using an immersion blender. If you do not have an immersion blender, you can use a regular blender or a food processor. Simply puree until it is creamy with no chunks remaining. 
  2. Garnish: Add an optional garnish of yogurt sauce. You may substitute yogurt sauce with a dollop of sour cream, if you prefer. Add a squeeze of lemon or lime juice and top with fresh dill for a little extra flavor, taking this soup to the next level.

How to Serve:

When serving this delicious soup, use your creativity! There is an easy way to make this soup perfect for anyone. Below you will find my favorite ways to enjoy this delicious cream of zucchini soup.

  • Creamy Yogurt Topping: My favorite option for garnish is my quick and easy Greek Yogurt Sauce. This was a staple at home growing up in Turkey and it is how my mom served it. It makes a great addition to the soup and many of my other Turkish dishes
  • Sour Cream: Depending on what you have in your kitchen, you can easily top this Cream of Zucchini Soup with a dollop of sour cream instead of the yogurt sauce.
  • A drizzle of Extra Virgin Olive Oil: For a simple garnish, I usually drizzle it with a tablespoon of olive oil, a squeeze of lemon juice, and sprinkle it with a pinch of flaky sea salt and an optional red pepper flakes (for some heat) to finish.
  • Cheese: A sprinkling of feta or parmesan cheese is an excellent addition to this light soup. 
  • Fresh Dill (or parsley): You may even want to visit your garden for a fresh sprig of dill to top off this soup. Alternatively, you can also use fresh Italian parsley as garnish.
  • Crusty Bread: If you are looking for a heartier option, serve this soup with a crusty loaf of bread like my No-Knead Bread or Olive Bread. Both of these bread recipes pair well with many creamy soups, providing a great combination of flavors and textures. 
Person mixing soup with a ladle and a bowl of soup in a bowl (2 photos)

Storage and Freezing Instructions:

  • Storage: This Cream of Zucchini Soup can be stored in a refrigerator for up to 3-4 days in an airtight container. Before sealing the container, ensure the soup has reached room temperature. 
  • Freezing: You can freeze it by bringing the pureed soup to room temperature and sealing it into a freezer-safe airtight container. This soup can be frozen for up to 30 days. To thaw, remove it from the freezer a day before and let it thaw in the refrigerator. Heat it in a large saucepan before serving.

Variations:

If you are looking to change up this recipe, there are some easy adjustments that you can make. This soup easily fits into many diets, so there is a delicious option for everyone!

  • Yellow Squash: If you have some yellow squash in your garden, you may opt to make a zucchini yellow squash soup. Replace 2 of your zucchinis with 2 yellow squash. 
  • For a Keto Zucchini Soup: Replace the potato with ½ cup of heavy whipping cream. When your boiling is near completion, add the heavy whipping cream, stir, and bring to a boil.

FAQs:

Do You Peel Zucchini for Soup?

I do not peel the zucchini when making this soup. Fresh zucchinis during zucchini season have thin, tender skin, so you can skip the peeling. Just remember, if you choose to leave the skin on, thoroughly wash before chopping. 

Can You Freeze Cream of Zucchini Soup?

Yes, you can freeze this easy zucchini soup! Simply bring to room temperature, and seal in an airtight, freezer-safe container. Your soup is then ready to be stored in a freezer for up to 30 days. 

Other Vegetable Soup Recipes You Might Like:

If you are looking for other creamy vegetable soups made with simple ingredients, check out some of my other reader favorite recipes below:

If you try this Cream of Zucchini recipe or any other one of our zucchini recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Person spooning a bowl of cream of zucchini soup
Print

Cream of Zucchini Soup Recipe

A healthy zucchini soup recipe made with 5 ingredients in one pot in 30 minutes. This is the best way to use your garden zucchini. Serve it warm or cold this easy soup is guaranteed to please.
Course Soup
Cuisine Turkish
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 74kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 medium sized zucchini (approximately 1 ½ lbs) peeled & cut into 3 inch pieces
  • 1 small onion peeled and cut into half
  • 1 medium-sized 5 oz. Yukon gold potato, peeled and cut into chunks
  • 2 cloves garlic peeled
  • 4 cups of vegetable broth or chicken broth*
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

Optional Toppings:

  • 1 cup Greek Yogurt Sauce or a few dollops of sour cream
  • 4 tablespoons Lemon Juice Freshly squeezed
  • 2 tablespoon fresh dill or fresh parsley chopped
  • extra virgin olive oil

Instructions

  • Place zucchini, onion, potato, garlic, vegetable broth, and salt and pepper in a medium size saucepan with a lid over medium-high heat.
  • Bring to a boil and let it simmer for 20-25 minutes until zucchini and potato are softened and tender.
  • Off the heat, using an immersion blender (regular blender or food processor), puree soup until creamy and no chunks remaining.
  • Garnish with a dollop of yogurt sauce, sour cream, a drizzle of olive oil, or a squeeze of lemon juice and fresh herbs.

Video

Notes

  • Do You Peel Zucchini for Soup? I do not peel the zucchini when making this soup. Fresh zucchinis during zucchini season have thin, tender skin, so you can skip the peeling. Just remember, if you choose to leave the skin on, thoroughly wash before chopping.
  • Use chicken broth:  I wanted my zucchini soup vegan so I used vegetable broth as the liquid in the recipe. However, if you are okay with it not being vegan/vegetarian, you can make your zucchini soup with chicken broth. If you decide to do so, simply replace the 4 cups of vegetable broth with 2 cups of chicken broth and 2 cups of water. Avoid using 4 cups of chicken broth, as the chicken taste will overpower the rest of the dish. With this being said, if you plan to serve this soup cold, it is highly recommended that you use vegetable stock. This will bring out the fresh flavors of the vegetables used.  
  • Storage: This Cream of Zucchini Soup can be stored in a refrigerator for up to 3-4 days in an airtight container. Before sealing the container, ensure the soup has reached room temperature. 
  • Freezing & thawing: You can freeze it by bringing the pureed soup to room temperature and sealing it into a freezer-safe airtight container. This soup can be frozen for up to 30 days. To thaw, remove it from the freezer a day before and let it thaw in the refrigerator. Heat it in a large saucepan before serving.
  • The calorie information below does not reflect any calories coming from the optional toppings.

Nutrition

Calories: 74kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 1538mg | Potassium: 632mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 1017IU | Vitamin C: 40mg | Calcium: 44mg | Iron: 1mg

This Zucchini Soup recipe was originally published on September 2013. It has been updated with new photos and helpful information on June 2021.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/zucchini-soup/feed/ 8
Turkish Red Lentil Soup – Kฤฑrmฤฑzฤฑ Mercimek ร‡orbasฤฑ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-red-lentil-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-red-lentil-soup/#comments Wed, 08 Sep 2021 07:31:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=4764 Ingredients You’ll Need To make this traditional red lentil soup recipe, you only need a handful of simple ingredients that…]]>

The Real Deal: Why This is the Only Authentic Turkish Red Lentil Soup You’ll Ever Need

Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

If your travels ever take you to Türkiye in the cooler months, you will likely find yourself in a Lokanta, a traditional restaurant serving heartwarming, authentic Turkish food. There, you’ll almost certainly be served a bowl of this Kırmızı Mercimek Çorbası as a starter or a light meal. 

In fact, if you’re a friend of mine, you will probably come back and ask me for the recipe. I know it because it happened to me more times than I can count.

The reason this soup is so well-loved is that it transforms humble, affordable pantry staples into a dish that epitomizes Turkish comfort food. I am sharing my mom’s version with you here, which is nearly identical to the professional standard you’ll find in traditional restaurants throughout Türkiye.

One thing to note here, in the world of Turkish soups, there is another popular soup called Ezogelin Corbasi (Bride Soup). While both soups use red lentils, Ezogelin is a heartier, chunkier soup made with bulgur and rice, whereas this red lentil soup here has a creamy texture and does not use any grains.

Ingredients You’ll Need

To make this traditional red lentil soup recipe, you only need a handful of simple ingredients that are easy to find. You’ll see the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few notes from my recipe testing:

Ingredients for Turkish red lentil soup organized in small colorful bowls on a marble countertop, including red lentils, chopped onions, potatoes, carrots, garlic, vegetable broth, and lemon slices.

For the Soup:

Red Lentils (Kırmızı Mercimek): Nowadays, most supermarkets sell red lentils in their dry goods section. However, you can find red lentils online. One of the most popular Turkish brands is Duru, which is what I usually buy. However, I have also made this recipe using popular American brands like Bob’s Red Mill or Food to Live, and they worked just as well.

Pro Tip: Regardless of the brand you use, always rinse and drain your red lentils before cooking to wash away excess starch. Simply place it in a colander and wash it under cold running water until the water runs clear.

Aromatics: A simple base of yellow onion and a few cloves of garlic is all you need. Give them a rough chop. No need to spend any time chopping them finely. They will all be blended with the remaining ingredients.

The “Secret” Thickeners: Depending on the region, some people thicken this soup with a flour-and-butter roux, but in my version, I am following in my mother’s footsteps and using two starchy vegetables: a carrot and a potato to thicken the soup. That is how you end up with a creamy soup without using any cream.

I recommend using one large carrot or a handful of baby carrots. Peeling is optional, especially if it is organic, and if you give it a good scrub.

For the potato, I recommend using a Yukon Gold, as it is creamier than other varieties. However, any potato would work. Just make sure to cut it into equal-sized cubes so they cook evenly.

Tomato paste or Red Pepper Paste: In Türkiye, we often use Red Pepper Paste (Biber Salçası) for its smoky, savory profile. While you can find it online, tomato paste is a good alternative. 

Why do we use tomato or red pepper paste? Since red lentils and root vegetables are naturally mild, we need a “concentrated” ingredient to build complexity and depth. However, keep in mind that a small amount goes a long way. Our goal is to elevate the earthy lentils, not to turn this into a tomato soup.

Liquid (broth or water): I usually make this soup with Vegetable Stock to keep it plant-based, but Chicken Stock works too.

Homemade or store-bought work just as well, but if you are using a store-bought brand, I recommend buying low-sodium stock so you can control the seasoning.

You can also use water as your base, but I recommend using extra seasoning, perhaps an extra pinch of salt or cumin, as needed. 

Ground cumin (optional): While not essential, cumin is a common addition in Turkish homes. It adds a warm, earthy flavor that pairs nicely with the lentils.

Lemon juice: To me, freshly squeezed lemon juice is the most important ingredient in the entire recipe, because without it, the dish will taste bland. I listed only 2 tablespoons on the recipe card, but I usually use much more than that when I make it for my family. Taste your soup before serving and add more as needed.

Dried mint (optional): I know it can be hard to find, but most restaurants use it as a garnish after drizzling with chili oil. If you can’t get your hands on it, a good alternative would be a handful of chopped fresh parsley.

For The Chili Oil (Pul Biberli Yağ)

You know how many Asian cuisines have chili crisp? Chili oil (pul biberli yağ) is our version of that. It is usually used as a finishing oil to add a layer of complexity to the soup. 

It is optional, but if you want the restaurant-quality (lokanta-style) Turkish lentil soup, I do not recommend skipping it.

Butter or Olive Oil: Traditionally, Turkish households make this with butter. However, if you prefer to keep this recipe dairy-free and vegan, you can use olive oil instead.

Urfa or Aleppo pepper flakes: These are the most common peppers we use in Turkiye; they are smoky, slightly sweet, and a little spicy. If you do not have them, red pepper flakes or paprika are great substitutes.

How to Make Turkish Lentil Soup

Even though this Turkish red lentil soup looks and tastes like it took all day, it actually comes together in just a few simple steps. Here’s how I do it:

A two-panel image showing the cooking process: (Step 1) Sautéing chopped onions and carrots in a pot with a wooden spoon, and (Step 2) Adding a tablespoon of tomato paste to the softened vegetables.

Step 1 – Sauté veggies: Grab a large Dutch oven (a 5-qt is ideal) or a large pot. Heat oil over medium-high heat. Add the onion, carrots, and ground cumin, and cook, stirring often, until the onions are softened, about 3-4 minutes.

Step 2 – Add the aromatics: Stir in the red pepper (or tomato) paste and minced garlic and cook, stirring constantly, for about a minute.

Pro tip: Whether you are using red pepper or tomato paste, it is important to cook it for a minute to “bloom” the flavor; otherwise, you may end up with a raw, metallic taste.

A side by side process photo: (Step 3) pouring vegetable broth into a pot with red lentils and vegetables, and (Step 4) using a wooden spoon to check if a potato chunk is fork tender in the simmering soup.

Step 3 – Combine everything in the pot: Stir in the cubed potatoes and red lentils and pour in the broth. Sprinkle with salt and pepper. Give everything a good stir to make sure all the veggies are fully submerged in the liquid.

Put the lid on and bring it to a boil. Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to medium-low and let it simmer for 20 minutes, keeping a close eye on it and stirring often to prevent the veggies and lentils from sticking to the bottom of the pot.

Pro Tip: To check doneness, I usually insert a knife into a potato. If it comes in and out easily, your soup should be ready to blend.

A collage of two process photos: (step 4) using an immersion blender to puree the cooked lentil soup until smooth and creamy, and (step 5)squeezing fresh lemon juice into the blended soup for a bright finish.

Step 4 – Blend the soup: Off the heat, use an immersion blender to carefully puree the soup until silky smooth, with no visible lentils remaining. If you do not have an immersion blender, you can use a blender (or a food processor). However, for your own safety, I recommend doing it in batches.

Step 5 – Add the lemon juice: Put the pot back on the stove and bring it to a final boil. Squeeze a generous amount of lemon juice and taste for seasoning. Add more if necessary.

A collage of two process shots: (step 6) sizzling butter and chili flakes in a small skillet to make pul biber yağı, and (step 7) the final bowl of soup drizzled with the red chili butter and sprinkled with Urfa chili.

Step 6 – Make the chili oil: Make it right before serving. In a small skillet, heat unsalted butter (or oil) until melted. Add the Urfa chili and stir to combine. Let it cook for about 30 seconds. It will bubble up, so be very careful.

Step 7 – Serve: Ladle the soup into bowls and drizzle with chili oil. Garnish with dried mint (if using) and serve with lemon wedges on the side.

Pro tip: If you don’t use all the chili oil, you can stir it into the soup before refrigerating.

Helpful Tips

Adjust the consistency: I usually use 6 cups of liquid for every cup of red lentils and find that it delivers the consistency that I am accustomed to. The traditional Turkish red lentil soup has a pourable consistency, unlike most blended soups, which tend to be thick and porridge-like.
However, if you prefer your soup a bit thicker, I recommend using 5 cups of liquid. The easiest way to adjust is in half-cup increments until it looks right to you.

Leftover chili oil: While I chose to serve it restaurant-style, drizzling the pul biber yağı (chili butter) over the soup as a garnish, my mom would always add it directly to the pot, stir it in, and serve it as part of the soup itself. Either way works; it really comes down to personal preference.
That being said, if you use it as a garnish, you can simply stir any leftover oil into the pot before storing the soup in an airtight container.

Safety Tip: If you do not have an immersion blender, you can use a blender or even a food processor. However, I recommend extreme caution when working with hot soup. Always work in batches, never fill the blender more than halfway, and keep the lid slightly open with a kitchen towel on top so the steam can escape safely.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Turkish red lentil soup drizzled with chili oil in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Turkish Red Lentil Soup Recipe (Kirmizi Mercimek Corbasi)

This authentic Turkish Red Lentil Soup (Kırmızı Mercimek Çorbası) is a silky, one-pot comfort food made without flour or cream. It is a staple recipe that I grew up eating during the winter months. My mother’s foolproof method uses carrots and potatoes for a naturally creamy texture that matches the best lokantas (local restaurants) in Istanbul. Naturally vegan, gluten-free.
Course Soup
Cuisine Turkish
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 251kcal

Ingredients

For The Soup

  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 onion medium-sized, diced (about 1 ½ cups)
  • 1 carrot medium-sized, diced (about ½ cup)
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin optional
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon red pepper paste or tomato paste (optional)
  • 1 Yukon gold potato medium-sized, peeled and cut into small cubes
  • 1 cup red lentils rinsed and drained
  • 6 cups vegetable broth or water
  • 1 ½ teaspoons Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice plus, more for serving

For The Chili Oil

  • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter* or olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon Urfa chile powder or red pepper flakes, or paprika

Instructions

  • Heat the oil in a large pot over medium-high heat. Add the onion, carrots, and cumin, and cook for 3-4 minutes, until the onions are softened.
  • Stir in the garlic and red pepper (or tomato) paste, saute, stirring constantly, for about a minute.
  • Add the cubed potatoes and red lentils.
  • Pour in the vegetable broth. Season with salt and black pepper.
  • Put the lid on and bring it to a boil. Once boiled, reduce the heat and simmer for 20 minutes, stirring a few times.
  • Using an immersion blender*, carefully puree the soup until smooth and creamy. Stir in the lemon juice, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary. Set it aside.
  • To make the chili oil, melt the butter (or vegetable oil) in a small skillet over medium heat. Stir the chili pepper (or paprika) and mix to combine.
  • Ladle the soup into bowls and drizzle it with a few tablespoons of the chili oil. Serve with lemon wedges on the side.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This makes about 8 cups of soup, ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving and include the optional chili oil.
  • Butter or oil: You can make the chili oil with either butter or olive oil. To keep it vegan, use olive oil for the sizzled chili garnish; otherwise, use butter for the traditional restaurant-style finish
  • A word on the amount of lemon juice: The most important ingredient in this recipe is lemon juice. I listed only 2 tablespoons in the recipe card, but when I make it for my family, I usually triple that amount as we like it that way. So, feel free to add more after giving it a taste.
  • Storage: If you have leftovers, bring them to room temperature and store them in an airtight container. When kept refrigerated, your soup should remain fresh and tasty for up to 4 days.
  • Freezing: To freeze, bring it to room temperature, place it in an airtight container, and freeze for up to 2 months.
  • To Thaw: Remove it from the freezer and let it thaw in the fridge overnight. Heat in a small saucepan before serving. You may have to add a splash of water if it is too thick.
  • Updated: After a recent visit to Turkiye and having this soup on multiple occasions, I decided to update the recipe post with the chili drizzle (as opposed to making it optional) An earlier version of this recipe was served with croutons, which is also a good option, but the authentic version is almost always served with the oil drizzle so the newly updated version reflects that.

Nutrition

Calories: 251kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 1540mg | Potassium: 503mg | Fiber: 11g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 2496IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 3mg

How To Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze 

One reason this red lentil soup is so beloved in Turkiye is that it can be made in large batches and enjoyed for days. Here’s how I keep it fresh at home:

Storage: Let the soup cool to room temperature first, then transfer it to an airtight container. It will keep well in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. 

Freezing: This Mercimek soup freezes beautifully. Once it’s cooled, place it in airtight containers or portion it in freezer-safe bags. Be sure to leave an inch of room at the top since liquids expand as they freeze. It will keep well for up to 2 months.

Reheating: For the best results, thaw the soup overnight in the fridge. Then reheat gently in a saucepan over low heat. The soup will thicken as it sits, so you may have to use a splash of broth or water to thin it out.

What To Serve With Turkish Red Lentil Soup

If you go to a lokanta in Istanbul and order this soup, it will likely be served in a big bowl, with a wedge of lemon and some crusty bread on the side. Below are a few of my favorite pairings when I serve this soup to my family:

Crusty bread: A loaf of crusty sourdough or a French baguette is a wonderful pairing. However, if you have the time, I highly recommend making a batch of my No-Knead Artisan Bread. It is wonderful for dipping in the soup.

Traditional Turkish Salads: Serve it with a side of Piyaz (Turkish White Bean Salad) or Turkish Shepherd Salad for an authentic pairing.

Green Salad: If you prefer something lighter, pair the soup with my Butter Lettuce Salad to make it a filling meal.

Other Turkish Dishes You Might Enjoy

If you enjoyed this soup and want to explore more of the flavors I grew up with in Türkiye, here are a few of my most popular (and family-favorite) recipes:

  • Master a Classic Street Food: The viral Doner Kebab is one of the most popular Turkish dishes on the blog, not because it is a fantastic weeknight recipe, but also because it is a great shortcut that tastes just as delicious as the real thing.
  • Try a Simple Pasta Dish: The Turkish Pasta is another shortcut to the traditional dumplings, known as manti. It is a great weeknight dinner and beginner-friendly recipe to try, especially if you are new to Turkish cuisine.
  • Learn the Art of Savory Pastry: You can’t talk about Turkish cooking without mentioning Borek. Don’t be intimidated by the difficult-to-pronounce name; it is made by layering phyllo dough with fillings such as cheese, spinach, mushrooms, etc. I wrote the recipe in a simplified way so anyone can make it.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-red-lentil-soup/feed/ 26
Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant https://foolproofliving.com/vegetarian-stuffed-eggplant/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegetarian-stuffed-eggplant/#comments Tue, 10 Aug 2021 18:56:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=43350 This Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant is one of the most delectable, satisfying, and healthy vegetarian eggplant recipes out there. Similar to…]]>

This Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant is one of the most delectable, satisfying, and healthy vegetarian eggplant recipes out there. Similar to our Easy Ratatouille, not only does it boast piquant spice, creamy eggplant, and fresh tomato, but it also makes a gorgeous table presentation—perfect for summer dinner parties.

A vegetarian version of my karniyarik recipe, this simple summer dish will satisfy picky eaters and special diets alike. Make this easy, low-calorie recipe for an authentic Mediterranean feast any day of the week.

vegetable stuffed aubergine in a baking dish

Why You Should Try This Recipe

Low-fat, healthy (because eggplants are packed with antioxidants), and bursting with garden-fresh flavor, there are countless reasons to love this easy stuffed eggplant recipe.

  • Visually stunning and the perfect recipe for summer, these baked stuffed eggplant halves work as both a flavorful side for meat-based main dishes and a filling vegetarian meal.
  • Authentic Mediterranean cuisine is a cinch to make with the herby bulgur wheat and the zesty tahini sauce used in these filled eggplant halves.
  • It can be easily made vegan! You can transform this recipe into a scrumptious vegan stuffed eggplant dish simply by omitting the tahini yogurt.

Ingredients

Only the most wholesome and appetizing ingredients go into this vegetable stuffed aubergine (what they call eggplant in the U.K. or brinjal in Asia), making your ingredient checklist nutritious and delicious.

Eggplants

Globe halved eggplants on a sheet pan

When considering the size of the eggplants, I recommend using 3-4 globe eggplants—the large, round type of eggplant most common in U.S. grocery stores. If you can’t find those, smaller eggplants or medium eggplant will work, too. Just be sure to select ones that are heavy, firm, and unbruised. New to buying eggplants? Be sure to check out my article on the different types of eggplants.

Bulgur Pilaf

Ingredients for the filling

For the bulgar pilaf filling, gather together butter, onion, green pepper (or red bell pepper), tomato paste, cumin, coarse bulgur, fresh tomato (or cherry tomatoes), chickpeas, water, salt, and black pepper.

Garnish /Sauce

It is optional, but you can drizzle Tahini Yogurt Sauce—a vegetarian eggplant dressing made with fresh lemon juice, tahini, and yogurt—for a kick of tangy flavor. And if you prefer a dairy-free alternative, you can drizzle it with my creamy tahini sauce instead.

And of course, garnish it with a few tablespoons of roughly chopped Italian parsley.

How To Make Stuffed Eggplant – Vegetarian Version

There’s no secret to making authentic Mediterranean stuffed eggplant recipes like this. Other than the fact that the steps look like they are a lot, but if you multitask, you’ll see that making this simple dish is a breeze.

We can divide the whole process into 3 parts:

Roast Eggplant Halves

I shared a detailed post on how to roast eggplant halves should you want to see it in more detail and get all your questions answered. However, here is what you need to do in a nutshell:

Person showing how to roast eggplant halves with four photos
  1. Score the eggplant: Cut eggplant in half lengthwise. Score each half with a knife in a cross-hatch pattern. 
  2. Salt & Rest: Transfer the eggplant on a sheet pan and sprinkle with an even layer of salt. Wait a half hour and preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. After 30 minutes, gently squeeze excess water from the eggplant halves and pat them dry with a paper towel. 
  3. Oil eggplant halves: Brush the halves with an even coating of olive oil and place them cut face-down on the baking tray. 
  4. Roast: Bake them for 45-60 minutes, or until they collapse and turn golden brown. Remove the cooked eggplant from the oven and let them cool before assembling.

Make Bulgur Pilaf

We are using my Bulgur Pilaf recipe here. I find that it pairs well with the roasted smokey eggplant. Below is how to make it in a nutshell. Be sure to make it while the eggplants to save on time.

Person showing how to make eggplant stuffing
  1. Saute vegetables & spices: Heat oil in a medium saucepan over moderate heat. Sauteé the onion and pepper until they’re translucent, then add in the tomato paste. After a minute of constant stirring, add in the cumin, bulgur, tomatoes, chickpeas, water, salt, and pepper. 
  2. Cook: Increase heat until the mixture boils, then cover it with a lid and reduce the heat to low. Simmer the bulgur for 10-12 minutes, or until most of the liquid is absorbed.
  3. Rest & Fluff: Let the bulgur rest for 10 minutes, and then fluff it with a fork. 

If you are after a more simple version, you can check my How To Cook Bulgur post to make a basic bulgur recipe to stuff your eggplants.

Assemble:

To assemble the dish:

Person showing How To Make Stuffed Eggplant in four images
  1. Prep for assembly: Place baked eggplant boats on a baking sheet. They would be quite snuggly, which is fine. Get as many as you can in there.
  2. Stuff: Spoon each eggplant half with a heaping portion of the bulgur pilaf. 
  3. Garnish & Drizzle: Sprinkle each with fresh parsley and, if desired, drizzle them with tahini yogurt sauce.

How to Store

You don’t have to let a single bite of this lovely recipe go to waste. Whether you’re saving leftovers for later or doing meal prep, say goodbye to last-minute dinners with this easy dish!

  • Storage: In an airtight container, baked stuffed eggplant can last up to 4 days in the fridge. Just make sure you bring the aubergine halves to room temperature before storing them. To reheat, simply preheat the oven temperature to 300 degrees F. and cook the halves for 10-15 minutes, or until heated through.
  • Make Ahead: To eliminate the stress of weeknight cooking, you can make this dish in advance. Just cook the eggplant and bulgur wheat pilaf, store them in separate airtight containers, and assemble the eggplant halves right before serving. To reheat, bake the assembled halves in the oven at 350 degrees F. for 10-15 minutes, or until heated through.
  • Freezing: Both the flesh of the eggplant and eggplant shells are known to lose their shape and texture once exposed to extreme cold. To keep your eggplant skin as fresh as possible, I don’t recommend freezing them.

Expert Tips:

With these handy tips and tricks, you can learn how to make aubergine recipes exactly how you like them—and save time on meal prep, too!

  • Save time: Roasting the eggplant halves a day in advance is an easy and delicious way to cut your cooking time in half.
  • Make Your Serving Picture-Perfect: This Mediterranean stuffed eggplant looks absolutely exquisite when you arrange all the halves on a single serving platter. Plus, it’ll make assembling, serving, and taking pictures of this meal a breeze.
  • Try a Gluten-Free Version: To make this stuffed eggplant vegetarian and gluten free, try my recipe for Lemon Quinoa—a savory, light, and citrusy filling.
Baked stuffed eggplant is being drizzled with tahini sauce

How to Serve

Easy vegetarian stuffed eggplant recipes are some of the most versatile dishes out there. Flavorful yet balanced, these recipes can be served in any way that satisfies your taste buds.

  • Serve filled eggplant halves by themselves for a satisfying, nutritious, and robust vegetarian or vegan main dish.
  • Use this multipurpose recipe as a peppery side dish for meat-based mains. You can’t go wrong when you serve this delicious recipe alongside hearty Roasted Cornish Hens, Greek Yogurt Chicken, vibrant Meatball and Potato Bake, and—my favorite meatball recipe, Kofte.

Other Mediterranean Eggplant Recipes You Might Like:

Vegetarian Stuffed Aubergines in a baking dish from the top view
Print

Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant Recipe

Mediterranean-Inspired Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant Recipe – Roasted eggplant halves filled with bulgur pilaf and drizzled with tahini yogurt sauce.
Course Vegetarian Main Dish
Cuisine Mediterranean
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Cooling time for eggplants 15 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 331kcal

Ingredients

For The Eggplants

  • 4 large globe eggplants cut vertically in half
  • 2 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 4 tablespoons olive oil

For The Bulgur Wheat Pilaf

  • 2 tbsp vegetable oil or butter
  • 1 onion medium sized/chopped (approximately 1 cup)
  • 1 green pepper seeded – (jalapeno or a small bell pepper would work) approximately 1/2 cup
  • 2 tbsp tomato paste
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 cup coarse bulgur both coarse and extra coarse bulgur would work for this recipe
  • 1 fresh tomato cut into small cubes (approximately 1 cup)
  • 1 can chickpeas drained and rinsed
  • 2 cups boiling water or you can use vegetable stock
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon ground black pepper

Optional

Instructions

To Roast Eggplant Halves:

  • Rinse eggplant under cold water and dry with a kitchen towel or paper towels.
  • Cut eggplant in half lengthwise. Then using the tip of a knife, score the flesh into a diamond cross-hatch pattern going about an inch deep making sure to not pierce the skin.
  • Transfer the eggplant halves cut side up onto a sheet pan lined with parchment paper or aluminum foil. Season evenly with the kosher salt. Let them sit for 30 minutes on the sheet pan.
  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F (or 200 degrees C).
  • Over a kitchen sink, gently squeeze the eggplants to get the extra moisture out. Pat-dry the cut face of the eggplants using a paper towel.
  • Brush the halves evenly with olive oil. Arrange eggplants face down on the baking sheet. Bake in the preheated oven for 45-60 minutes or until the eggplant collapses and the bottom side turns golden brown.
  • Let it cool on the counter for at least 20 minutes. Turn the cut side up and transfer them onto a serving platter to stuff.

To Make The Stuffing:

  • While the eggplant halves are roasting, make the bulgur pilaf. Heat olive oil in a medium saucepan over medium heat. Add in onion and pepper and saute until translucent, 4 minutes. Add in tomato paste and stir constantly for a minute or until thoroughly incorporated into the vegetables and thickened.
  • Add in ground cumin, coarse bulgur, tomatoes, chickpeas, and water (or stock). Season with salt and pepper.
  • Give it a stir, bring it to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat to low. Let it simmer for 10-12 minutes or until most of the liquid is absorbed.
  • Off the heat, let it to rest for 10 minutes (with the lid on) and fluff it with a fork.

To Assemble:

  • Fill each roasted eggplant half with bulgur pilaf.
  • Sprinkle with parsley and drizzle with tahini yogurt sauce if using. Serve immediately.

Notes

  • You can save time by roasting the eggplant halves a day in advance and storing them in an airtight container. When ready to stuff  them, heat them in a 300 F oven for 10-15 minutes.
  • Arrange the eggplant halves in a baking dish to make it easier to stuff. 
  • If you want to make this recipe gluten-free try it filling the eggplant halves with my Lemon Quinoa recipe instead.
  • If you don’t care for the Tahini Yogurt Dressing, you can also use my Greek Yogurt Dressing
  • Storage: In an airtight container, baked stuffed eggplant can last up to 4 days in the fridge. Just make sure you bring the aubergine halves to room temperature before storing them. To reheat, simply preheat the oven temperature to 300 degrees F. and cook the halves for 10-15 minutes, or until heated through.
  • Make Ahead: To eliminate the stress of weeknight cooking, you can make this dish in advance. Just cook the eggplant and bulgur wheat pilaf, store them in separate airtight containers, and assemble the eggplant halves right before serving. To reheat, bake the assembled halves in the oven at 350 degrees F. for 10-15 minutes, or until heated through.
  • Freezing: Both the flesh of the eggplant and eggplant shells are known to lose their shape and texture once exposed to extreme cold. To keep your eggplant skin as fresh as possible, I don’t recommend freezing them.

Nutrition

Calories: 331kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Sodium: 1825mg | Potassium: 343mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 616IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 39mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegetarian-stuffed-eggplant/feed/ 16
Karniyarik – Turkish Stuffed Eggplant Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-eggplant-karniyarik/ https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-eggplant-karniyarik/#comments Mon, 02 Aug 2021 03:43:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=942 If you have a hankering for authentic Middle Eastern food, this classic Turkish eggplant dish, known as karniyarik, is just…]]>

If you have a hankering for authentic Middle Eastern food, this classic Turkish eggplant dish, known as karniyarik, is just what you need. Referred to as aubergines in the UK and brinjal in Asia, eggplants make for a breathtaking table presentation. You’ll need a fork and a camera after seeing the deep purple, vibrant reds, and verdant greens of this Turkish Stuffed Eggplant dish.

Whether you serve this freezer-friendly dinner on a bed of bulgur wheat pilaf or with a side of creamy tzatziki or a serving of ayran, it’s bound to make mouths water. If you’re still craving Turkish cuisine after this picture-perfect meal, there are so many other recipes to try! You’ll rave about my garlicky Eggplant Yogurt Dip, hearty Simit Recipe, and spicy Turkish Kofta Recipe.

Karniyarik recipe garnished with tomatoes and parsley

What is Karniyarik?

Karniyarik is a popular Turkish eggplant dish usually made during the summer months when eggplants are in season.

The original recipe is made by first frying whole eggplants and then filling them with a ground beef mixture. They are then finished in the oven after being drizzled with a quick tomato sauce.

Our version of this popular eggplant dish is made healthier (and easier) by roasting whole eggplants in the oven rather than frying them in oil.

Why Should You Try This Recipe

This Turkish ground beef stuffed eggplant dish is equal parts stunning and scrumptious. With so much to love, it’s impossible not to fall head over heels for this Middle Eastern main course.

  • Visually impressive and easy to serve, this recipe makes for a gorgeous table presentation. Wow your dinner party guests the next time you treat them to this one-portion meal.
  • Out of all the Turkish aubergine recipes, this one has stood the test of time. In fact, it was one of the most popular eggplant dish among Ottoman Empire royalty!
  • Turkish eggplant recipes are a great way to eat from your garden this eggplant season without boring your taste buds.
  • Say yes to healthy eating with this nutritious take on a classic. Though the original recipe uses fried eggplant, my version uses whole roasted eggplants (or even fire-roasted eggplants) instead.

Ingredients

Because this Turkish brinjal dish uses so many home-grown ingredients, you can eat fresh without a last-minute trip to the grocery store.

Eggplants:

For this recipe, you’ll need 5 medium-sized eggplants. To make your Turkish aubergine recipes as authentic as possible, try to find eggplants that are long and lean. However, amongst all the different kinds of eggplants, globe eggplants (the ones I used in the pictures) are the easiest to find so I use them in my recipe.

If they are too large to fit in one baking dish, you may have to roast them in separate sheet pans.

Globe eggplants on a sheet pan lined with aluminum foil

Pro Tip: When you’re on the hunt for the perfect eggplants, try to select ones that are heavy for their size, firm to the touch, and not bruised. Also, try to choose eggplants that are of similar size to one another to ensure even cooking.

The Stuffing – Meat Filling Mixture:

Stuffed eggplant filling ingredients

For the ground beef filling, gather olive oil, chopped onion, ground cumin, bell peppers, ground beef, garlic, diced tomatoes, salt, black pepper, Italian parsley, hot water, and tomato paste.

How To Make Karniyarik

Whether you’re new to Turkish cuisine or someone who is interested in the flavors of the Middle East, you won’t believe how simple it is to make this Turkish baked eggplant filled with ground beef. 

  1. Preheat the oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. and line a baking sheet with aluminum foil.
person poking eggplants before roasting in the oven
  1. Prepare the eggplant: Wash the eggplants in the sink and dry them off with paper towels. Position them on a lined baking sheet and poke 7-10 holes in each with a fork.
  2. Roast the eggplant in the oven: Place the eggplants in the preheated oven and bake for 50-60 minutes, turning them over once or twice to ensure even roasting. Then, remove the eggplants and let them cool for a couple minutes on the counter. Reduce the oven temperature to 350 degrees F.
Person showing how to make ground beef mixture for Turkish eggplant
  1. Prepare the meat mixture: While the eggplant is roasting, make the ground beef stuffing. Heat the olive oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Then, add onion, ground cumin, pepper, and ground beef. Stir frequently for 10-12 minutes before adding garlic. Then, cook for 30 more seconds. 
  2. Cook the stuffing: Add in the tomatoes, a little salt, and pepper. Bring the ground beef mixture to boil over medium heat before turning it down to medium-low. Let the stuffing simmer for 10-15 minutes (until the meat is fully cooked), and add more seasoning as necessary. Remove mixture from heat and add chopped parsley.
Step by step photos of how to make karniyarik recipe
  1. Assemble: Mix the water and tomato sauce in a measuring cup, and place eggplants in a large casserole dish. Use a knife to create a slit belly in the center of each eggplant. Fill the sliced eggplants with a heaping portion of the meat stuffing and spoon 2-3 tablespoons of the tomato sauce mixture over each eggplant’s top. Pour the remaining mixture into the bottom of the baking dish. Garnish each eggplant with a few tomato slices.
stuffed eggplants garnished with tomatoes in a casserole dish before going into the oven
  1. Bake: Cover the casserole dish with aluminum foil and bake for 15 minutes. Then, remove the foil and bake for 10 minutes more. 
  2. Serve: Garnish with fresh parsley and serve.

Note: When making this karniyarik recipe, there are many different ways to cook the eggplant. For more detailed instructions, visit my guide on Whole Roasted Eggplant in Oven. Or, you can visit my recipe for Fire Roasted Eggplants to add a gentle smoky flavor to your meal.

How to Serve This Turkish Eggplant Recipe

Eggplant dishes taste spectacular on their own, but they’re utterly irresistible when served alongside my other classic Turkish sides.

  • Turkish Bulgur Pilaf: Every flavor in my hearty Turkish eggplants comes to life when served on a bed of herby, vegan bulgur.
  • Tzatziki Sauce: There’s no better pair than creamy, tangy tzatziki sauce and meaty Turkish baked eggplant filled with ground beef.
  • Piyaz Salad: Soft beans, juicy tomatoes, and zesty citrus make the ultimate side dish for this summer-ready meal.
  • Shepherd Salad: The classic Turkish pairing for karniyarik is this cucumber and tomato salad that takes no more than 15 minutes to prepare.
Turkish baked eggplant filled with ground beef served on a plate

How to Store & Freeze

Just because you meal prep doesn’t mean you can’t eat five-star cuisine on a weeknight. Enliven dinner any day of the week with this storage-friendly meal.

  • Storage: When stored in an airtight container, leftovers can stay fresh in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. To reheat, preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. and bake in a casserole dish for 15-20 minutes.
  • Freezing: Bring the stuffed eggplants to room temperature and place them in an airtight container. Because karniyarik freezes so well, you can store it in the freezer for up to 2 months. 
  • Thawing: Remove the karniyarik from the freezer and let it thaw in the fridge overnight. When ready to serve, preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Place the stuffed eggplant on a baking sheet and bake for 15-20 minutes or until fully warmed.

Other Ways to Prepare Eggplant

One of the best things about eggplant is how many ways there are to prepare them! Cook your garden goods to perfection using each different version listed below.

  • Frying: Want to add richness to your Turkish stuffed eggplant? Try frying your eggplant the authentic Turkish way, and every plate will be licked clean. Instead of roasting the eggplants, cut a slit in the eggplants and soak them in salted water for 30 minutes. Then, squeeze the eggplants dry with a clean kitchen towel. Heat some vegetable oil in a deep frying pan and fry the eggplants evenly on each side, until they’re soft and browned. Finally, remove the fried eggplant from the pan and rest it on a paper towel to absorb excess oil.
  • Roasted Halved Eggplants: You can also roast eggplant halves in the oven and stuff each half one by one with the meat sauce.
  • Fire roasting: A great way to add smokiness to this Turkish summer classic is to roast the eggplant before adding the filling. Just place the eggplants on a gas stove, turn them with a set of tongs, and roast them until fully softened. Once cooked, set the eggplants on a casserole dish. Slice open the belly section of the eggplant and fill it with the stuffing. Follow the rest of the recipe as written.
    For full instructions, advice, and tips on how to make this fiery substitute, follow my Fire Roasted Eggplant recipe.

Expert Tips

Even new chefs can make stuffed aubergines like a pro. With these simple substitutions, you can have a tasty dish that’s delicious and new every time you make it!

  • Use ground lamb instead of ground beef for a lamb aubergine recipe bursting with a robust, tender flavor.
  • Don’t have fresh tomatoes on hand? Try canned tomatoes instead. Only one cup is necessary to make this mouthwatering Turkish meal.
  • Size of the eggplant: You may have to adjust the amount of the meat sauce depending on the size of your eggplant. If yours are larger, use more ground meat to ensure that you have enough filling.
  • If you prefer a meat free version of stuffed eggplants, be sure to try my Mediterranean Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant recipe.

FAQs

What does karniyarik mean in Turkish?

“Karin” means belly and “yarik” means opening. So, karniyarik can roughly be translated as “With the belly open”

How is karniyarik different than imam bayildi (Imam Fainted) recipe?

Turkish Imam fainted is the vegetarian version of karniyarik. While it is made in a very similar way, instead of stuffing the eggplants with a ground beef mixture you stuff it with an onion and tomato mixture.

What is eggplant in Turkish?

In Turkish, eggplant is called patlican.

More Turkish Eggplant Recipes You Might Also Like:

Turkish Stuffed Eggplant Recipe close up
Print

Karniyarik Turkish Stuffed Eggplant Recipe

This Turkish Stuffed Eggplant recipe, also known as Karniyarik, is made by stuffing roasted eggplants with tasty ground beef, pepper and tomatoes filling. Originated from the Ottoman cuisine, this is a delicious way to use eggplants that are in abundance during the summer months.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Turkish
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 25 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
Servings 5 portions
Calories 394kcal

Ingredients

  • 5 medium sized eggplants preferably similar in size
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 medium-size bell pepper seeded and chopped
  • 1/2 lb ground beef 80/20
  • 4 cloves garlic thinly chopped
  • 1 cup diced tomatoes plus more as garnish on top
  • 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt plus more for seasoning the belly of eggplants
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1/2 cup Italian Parsley chopped more as a garnish
  • 1 cup hot water
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste

Instructions

To Roast The Eggplants:

  • Preheat oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with aluminum foil.
  • Using a fork, poke 7-10 holes in each eggplant.
  • Place them on the prepared baking sheet. Bake for 50 minutes to an hour making sure to turn once or twice for even roasting.
  • Take it out of the oven and let it cool on the counter.
  • Turn the heat down to 350 degrees F.

To Make The Meat Sauce:

  • Meanwhile, make the meat sauce. Heat oil in a large skillet over medium heat.
  • Add onion, ground cumin, pepper, and ground beef and cook, stirring frequently, for 10-12 minutes.
  • Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
  • Add in the tomatoes, salt, and pepper. Bring it to a boil over medium heat, turn down the heat to medium-low, and let it simmer for 10-15 minutes or until the meat is fully cooked. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • Off the heat, stir in a cup of chopped parsley.

To Assemble:

  • Mix together the water and tomato paste in a measuring cup.
  • Place roasted eggplant in a large casserole dish. It might be tight and that is okay.
  • Using a knife, gently cut a small opening in the "belly" of each eggplant. Lightly season the belly of each eggplant with salt (use 1/2 teaspoon salt in total.)
  • Fill the opening of each eggplant with the meat mixture letting it mound through the slit.
  • Spoon the tomato sauce & water mixture over the stuffed eggplant. You should use 2-3 tablespoons of the mixture for each eggplant. Pour the remaining mixture at the bottom of the casserole dish.
  • To garnish, slice a large tomato (or two small ones) into 6 thin slices and place a few slices on top of each eggplant, like you see in the photos.
  • Cover with aluminum foil. Bake for 15 minutes. Remove the foil and bake for another 10 minutes.
  • Garnish with chopped parsley and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Eggplant: You would have the adjust the amount of meat sauce based on the size of your eggplants. Mine were 1/2 to 2/3 pounds each. However, if yours are larger, I recommend using 2/3 pounds of ground beef.
  • Storage: When stored in an airtight container, leftovers can stay fresh in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. To reheat, preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. and bake in a casserole dish for 15-20 minutes.
  • Freezing: Bring the stuffed eggplants to room temperature and place them in an airtight container. Because karniyarik freezes so well, you can store it in the freezer for up to 2 months. 
  • Thawing: Remove the stuffed eggplants from the freezer and let it thaw in the fridge overnight. When ready to serve, preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Place the stuffed eggplant on a baking sheet and bake for 15-20 minutes or until fully warmed.
  • Use ground lamb instead of ground beef for a lamb aubergine recipe bursting with a robust, tender flavor.
  • Don’t have fresh tomatoes on hand? Try canned tomatoes instead. Only one cup is necessary to make this mouthwatering Turkish meal.

Nutrition

Calories: 394kcal | Carbohydrates: 51g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 41mg | Sodium: 396mg | Potassium: 2107mg | Fiber: 23g | Sugar: 29g | Vitamin A: 1287IU | Vitamin C: 63mg | Calcium: 128mg | Iron: 4mg

This recipe was originally published in July 2013 but updated with helpful notes in August 2021.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-eggplant-karniyarik/feed/ 40
Eggplant Yogurt Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-eggplant-with-garlic-yogurt-and-zaatar/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-eggplant-with-garlic-yogurt-and-zaatar/#comments Mon, 02 Aug 2021 03:37:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=4161 This Eggplant Yogurt Recipe is a Turkish appetizer that will make your mouth water with every bite. Fire-roasted eggplant adds…]]>

This Eggplant Yogurt Recipe is a Turkish appetizer that will make your mouth water with every bite. Fire-roasted eggplant adds a smoky flavor to this tangy and bold dish, and fresh lemon juice gives it a tantalizing citrus bite. Whether you serve it as a side dish or as an eggplant yogurt dip with pita chips, this recipe is guaranteed to satisfy!

Spain has tapas and Italy has antipasti, but in my opinion, Middle Eastern mezze is the most delicious. If you’re craving even more appetizing mezze recipes, you’ll love my Muhammara Recipe, Roasted Eggplant Red Pepper Spread, and Hummus Dip. You can also try my Yoghurt Dressing and Turkish Stuffed Eggplant for even more Turkish Cuisine inspiration.

Aubergine yogurt recipe in a bowl garnished with parsley

Why You Should Try This Recipe

With all the best flavors of Mediterranean cuisine, this eggplant and Greek yogurt recipe will be your new go-to dish to serve at parties and in your own home!

  • This recipe is a great alternative to Baba Ganoush if you don’t have tahini on hand or simply want to try out a new Middle Eastern spread.
  • You can serve this recipe as Turkish eggplant dip or as a side dish, depending on how you present it.
  • Take the stress out of meal prep by making this dish up to 2 days in advance.

Ingredients

Who knew eating around the world could be so easy? This authentic Israeli dish is just as scrumptious as other Yotam Ottolenghi dips, but it only uses a handful of pantry staples.

Ingredients for eggplant dip with yogurt

Eggplants

Whether you have globe eggplants or long and lean Japanese eggplant, both work perfectly for this recipe. Just be sure to adjust how many eggplants you gather depending on their size. You’ll need 4 medium eggplants or 2 large ones.

Pro Tip: The best eggplants are those that are firm, heavy for their size, shiny on the outside, and unbruised. Choosing the freshest produce will ensure that your Turkish grilled eggplant tastes as smoky, tender, and non-bitter as possible. (Source)

Greek Yogurt Mixture

For the yogurt mixture, gather Greek yogurt, garlic cloves, olive oil, fresh lemon juice, salt, black pepper, and Italian parsley.

How To Make It

If you love the taste of Turkish smoked eggplant, with a little planning, you will find that the steps of making this easy side dish are a breeze.

Photos showing how to roast brinjal on stove top
  1. Fire roast the eggplants: Turn the gas stove on low and place the eggplants directly on the flame. Use a pair of tongs to turn the eggplants every 3-5 minutes until they’re blackened and soft. Remove them from the flame and cover them with aluminum foil to steam further. (For more instructions, tips, and tricks be sure to check out my guide on How To Cook Eggplant on Gas Stove)
    Alternatively, if you want a more hands off approach for cooking eggplants, you can roast whole eggplants in the oven, scoop out their flesh using a spoon, and use the flesh in this recipe.
  2. Peel the eggplant skins: When the eggplants reach about room temperature, run them under cool water and gently peel off as much of their black outer layer as possible. Place in a colander placed over a bowl and let them sit on the counter for 10-15 minutes. 
  3. Cut the flesh: If you choose to, remove both the eggplant flesh and any large chunks of seeds. Then, cut the flesh into small pieces and place them in a medium bowl.
Showing steps of making the yogurt eggplant dip greek style
  1. Make the yogurt mixture: In a large bowl, whisk together the yogurt, lemon juice, salt, and pepper until creamy.
  2. Combine the eggplant: Spoon yogurt sauce over the slices of eggplant and mix with a fork. Make sure that there are no large chunks and each piece of eggplant is evenly coated in yogurt. You may find you need more or less yogurt depending on how much eggplant you have.
  3. Serve: Transfer the mixture to a serving platter, and put pita chips or pita bread on the side. Garnish with parsley and/or sesame seeds, and it’s ready to eat!

PRO TIP: Because the amount of eggplant used varies so greatly, you may find you need more salt than listed in the recipe to give your dish enough flavor. Make sure you taste this recipe as you go and add extra seasoning as needed. 

Turkish Eggplant Dip on a plate with chopped parsley on top

Expert Tips & Variations

I always have so much fun playing with recipes to make them my own. Satisfy your taste buds with this classic Israeli yogurt dip by using these genius variations:

  • Take the stress out of fire roasting by roasting whole eggplants instead. Just poke 7-10 holes in each eggplant using a fork and place them on a rimmed baking sheet lined with aluminum foil. Roast them in the oven at 400 degrees F. for 50-60 minutes, making sure to turn them halfway through. Then, remove the eggplants from the oven and set them aside to cool. You can find complete instructions for this hands-free method in my guide on how to Roast Whole Eggplant in Oven.
    Alternatively, you can cut eggplants in half lenghtwise and bake eggplant halves in the oven. Then scoop out the flesh to use in this recipe.
  • Don’t worry if you can’t get off all the burnt eggplant skin when peeling it in the sink. These charred bits will actually add more smoky flavor to the recipe.
  • Add a drizzle of sumac and pomegranate molasses for a delicious, tart twist to this eggplant dip with yogurt.
  • Pita chips, crackers, and even slices of pita bread pair perfectly with this Middle Eastern appetizer.
  • Transform this dish into aubergine yoghurt salad by adding a little bit less yogurt mixture to your roasted eggplant.
  • Give your spice rack a spin by using any fresh herbs you want in this recipe. Parsley, dill, fresh mint, or even a combination of them all make this eggplant dip Greek style.
  • Sprinkle it with this Homemade Everything Bagel Seasoning for extra crunch and flavor.
  • Prefer a version of this without the yogurt sauce? Try this Roasted Eggplant Dip

How to Make Ahead and Store

Whether you’re preparing a side dish for a dinner party or a quick snack for when you’re on the go, this aubergine yoghurt is the perfect recipe for meal prep.

  • Make ahead: When making this recipe ahead of time, prepare the fire roasted eggplant and yogurt mixture separately. This way, the eggplant won’t absorb too much liquid, and it will better retain its gentle smoky flavor.
  • Store: This eggplant dip with yogurt can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. Before serving, be sure to stir the mixture to keep the yogurt, lemon, and olive oil from getting watery.
  • Freeze: Although this dip keeps well in the fridge, I don’t recommend freezing it.

Other Yogurt Recipes You Might Also Like:

Other Eggplant Recipes You Might Also Like:


Eggplant yogurt dip recipe in a bowl garnished with parsley
Print

Eggplant Yogurt Dip Recipe

This Eggplant yogurt recipe is made by roasting eggplants on the stove top and then mixing it with a garlic yogurt sauce. Served with pita chips on the side, it is the perfect side dish or appetizer that you can make with eggplants.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Turkish
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 servings
Calories 190kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 medium size eggplants or 2 large eggplants* – no need to peel them.
  • 1 cup full fat plain Greek yogurt
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil plus more to drizzle at the end
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1/4 cup Italian parsley chopped
  • Pita chips for serving
  • 1 tbsp sesame seeds or Z'aatar as garnish – optional

Instructions

  • To fire roast the eggplants on the stove: Place eggplants directly on the gas stove. Roast them on direct flames, turning it every 3-5 minutes until they are charred, soft and collapsing. Set them aside to cool.
  • When cool enough to handle, peel them gently under cold running water. At this point, all you want to do is to remove the outer black layer as much as you can. And if some pieces make it to the dip, that is perfectly fine.
  • Remove the flesh. If there are large chunks of seeds, you can remove them as well. This is an optional step and it would be okay if you didn’t remove them, especially if you are making this during the eggplant season when they are the freshest.
  • Cut the eggplant flesh into small pieces and place it in a medium sized bowl.
  • While the eggplant is cooking, whisk together the yogurt, fresh garlic, olive oil, lemon juice, salt and pepper in a bowl until creamy.
  • Pour the yogurt mixture over the cooked eggplant. Mix with a fork, gently breaking the large chunks of eggplants and making sure that they are all coated with the yogurt mixture.
  • Garnish with parsley
  • Serve with pita bread or pita chips on the side.

Notes

  • After roasting the eggplants, you should have about 3 1/2 to 4 cups of eggplant flesh for this recipe.
  • Make ahead: When making this recipe ahead of time, prepare the fire roasted eggplant and yogurt mixture separately. This way, the eggplant won’t absorb too much liquid, and it will better retain its gentle smoky flavor.
  • Store: This eggplant dip with yogurt can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. Before serving, be sure to stir the mixture to keep the yogurt, lemon, and olive oil from getting watery.
  • Freeze: Although this dip keeps well in the fridge, I don’t recommend freezing it.
  • For cooking eggplants, if you prefer a more hands-off approach try roasting them as a whole: To do so, poke 7-10 holes in each eggplant using a fork and place them on a rimmed baking sheet lined with aluminum foil. Roast them in the oven at 400 degrees F. for 50-60 minutes, making sure to turn them halfway through. Then, remove the eggplants from the oven and set them aside to cool. You can find complete instructions for this hands-free method in my guide on how to Roast Whole Eggplant in Oven.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 190kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 8mg | Sodium: 40mg | Potassium: 1185mg | Fiber: 14g | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin A: 482IU | Vitamin C: 20mg | Calcium: 125mg | Iron: 1mg

This eggplant yogurt recipe was originally published in August 2014. It has been updated with new photos and helpful text in August 2021.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-eggplant-with-garlic-yogurt-and-zaatar/feed/ 19
How To Roast Whole Eggplant In Oven https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-roast-whole-eggplant-in-oven/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-roast-whole-eggplant-in-oven/#comments Mon, 02 Aug 2021 03:32:21 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=43048 I recently added a Turkish eggplant dish referred to as karniyarik to my collection of Turkish recipes. While the original…]]>

I recently added a Turkish eggplant dish referred to as karniyarik to my collection of Turkish recipes. While the original recipe for karniyarik is made by frying eggplants in oil in a skillet, I like the hands-off approach of baking whole eggplants in the oven instead. Plus, it is healthier.

You can also make karniyarik by cooking eggplants on the gas stove (or on the stovetop) or by using roasted eggplant halves. However, in this post, I will show you how to roast a whole eggplant (or aubergine as it is called in the UK) in the oven with step-by-step photos and will answer all your questions about the basic whole roasted eggplant recipe.

Whole roasted aubergine on a baking sheet from top view

What Type of Eggplant Should I Buy For This Method?

I tested this recipe with both standard globe eggplants (the ones you see in the pictures) and graffiti eggplants, both of which are the most common variety of eggplants that you can find in American grocery stores.

When shopping for eggplants for roasting in the oven, there are a few things I recommend paying attention to:

  1. As it is explained in this tips for buying eggplant guide, eggplant should be heavy for its size, firm to touch, even colored with a shiny skin, and without any bruises.
  2. Take a few moments and select eggplants that are similar in size for even roasting.

With that being said, you can use this method for other kinds of eggplants like Japanese eggplants or Chinese eggplants. The time of roasting in the oven would change (possibly requiring less time) but the method would still be the same.

How To Prepare Eggplant for Baking

To prepare whole eggplants for baking:

Person washing and drying eggplants
  1. Rinse: Start by rinsing them under cold water. If there is a sticker on it, this is the time to remove that as well.
  2. Dry: Using a kitchen towel or paper towels, dry each eggplant thoroughly. You do not need to peel the skin.

How To Cook Whole Aubergines in the Oven

The steps for oven-roasted whole eggplant recipe are as follows:

  1. Heat the oven: Pre-heat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with aluminum foil and set it aside.
Person poking holes in an eggplant on a baking sheet
  1. Poke Holes: Using a fork or tip of a sharp knife, poke 7-10 ¾-inch holes throughout each eggplant. This is a crucial step to prevent the eggplant from exploding and creating a mess in your oven.
  2. Arrange: Place eggplants on the baking tray on a single layer and transfer them into the preheated oven.
Person placing eggplants to roast in oven
  1. Bake in the oven: Roast until they are burst, collapsed, and softened making sure to turn them every 20 minutes. This process should take about 50-60 minutes depending on the size of your eggplants.
Baked whole eggplants right out of the oven
  1. Allow them to cool: Remove from the oven and let them cool before using in your recipe.

How To Use Whole Roasted Eggplants in Recipes:

The uses for whole roasted eggplants are endless, but below are a few basic eggplant recipes to put them to use:

Eggplant recipes, karniyarik and eggplant yogurt side by side
  1. Roasted Eggplant Pulp: Slice open the belly of the roasted eggplants, scoop out eggplant flesh with a small spoon and transfer into a bowl to use in recipes like eggplant dip with yogurt, Baba ghanouj, or add it in salads (such as this Eggplant Salad), stir fries, or dips (with pita chips on the side.) You can discard the skins. 
  2. Stuff it with or whole grains: Using a knife, create a slit belly (from top to bottom) in the center of each eggplant, gently open it to stuff it with ground beef or lamb (like we do in Turkish Stuffed Eggplant.) Or fill it with simple grain dishes like Bulgur with Vermicelli or Seasoned Quinoa for a light lunch like I did in my Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant recipe.
  3. Remove the skin and chop it up: I think this is one of my favorite ways to cook eggplant as a side dish. To do so, gently peel the skin of the whole baked aubergines, transfer the flesh onto a cutting board and give it a rough chop. Transfer into a large bowl, drizzle with fresh lemon juice, a drizzle of olive oil, kosher salt and pepper and sprinkle it with fresh parsley. Serve it as a simple side dish with dinner recipes.

FAQs

What temperature to roast whole eggplants?

The best temperature to roast whole eggplants is 400 degree F.,which is about 204 degrees C.

How long to roast eggplants?

The eggplant baking time depends on the size of the eggplants. However, globe eggplants usually roast between 40-60 minutes in the oven.

Do I need to salt the whole eggplants before roasting them in the oven?

You do not need to salt them before roasting them in the oven. However, I recommend seasoning roasted eggplant flesh properly before using it in your recipe.

How do you know when eggplant is done cooking?

You will know that the eggplant is done cooking when it starts to lose its perfect round shape, starts to collapse onto itself, is soft to the touch, and is charred on the outside.

Do you need to peel eggplant before roasting?

You do not need to peel eggplant before roasting it. As a matter of fact, I recommend against peeling as the skin protects the flesh from burning and/or overcooking leaving you with a perfectly roasted soft and creamy whole eggplant.

Do you eat eggplant skin and seed? 

Roasted eggplant skin is edible and if some of the remains of the charred skin gets into your recipe it only makes it better by carrying over some of the delicious smoky flavor. The seeds are also edible. However, if you want you can remove the larger seeds before using it in your recipe.

Do you recommend roasting whole eggplants in the oven for making baba ganoush?

You can use this method for making baba ghanoush. However, if you are after the delicate smoky flavor of burnt eggplant that this Middle Eastern dip is known for, I recommend cooking eggplants on the gas stove on an open flame instead.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Whole roasted Eggplant on a sheet pan right after it comes out of the oven
Print

How To Roast Whole Eggplant In Oven

Learn how to roast a whole eggplant in the oven to use in recipes like karniyarik (Ground Beef Stuffed Eggplants, Baba Ganoush, or Baingan Bharta.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 3 servings
Calories 1kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 3 Whole Globe Eggplants*

Instructions

  • Heat the oven: Pre-heat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with aluminum foil and set it aside.
  • Rinse and dry: Wash eggplants under cold running water. Dry with a paper towel or a clean kitchen towel. There is no need to peel the eggplants for this method.
  • Poke Holes: Using a fork or tip of a sharp knife, poke 7-10 ¾-inch holes throughout each eggplant. This is a crucial step to prevent the eggplant from exploding and creating a mess in your oven.
  • Arrange: Place eggplants on the sheet pan on a single layer and transfer them into the preheated oven.
  • Bake in the oven: Roast until they are burst, collapsed, and softened making sure to turn them every 20 minutes. This process should take about 50-60 minutes depending on the size of your eggplants.
  • Allow them to cool: Remove from the oven and let them cool before using in your recipe.

Notes

  • When buying eggplants at the store, take a moment to select ones that are similar in size for even roasting.
  • The timing might change based on the size of the eggplant. I would recommend checking it every 20 minutes and turning them to make sure they are roasting evenly.
  • You can use this exact method for other types of eggplants. However, smaller eggplants would roast faster so it is recommended that you keep an eye on them as they roast.
  • Storage: You can roast a whole eggplant, bring to room temperature, place in an airtight container, and keep it in the fridge for upto 2 days.
  • Freezing: I do not recommend freezing whole eggplants after they are roasted. If you want to freeze, I recommend first peeling them before placing them in an airtight container.

Nutrition

Calories: 1kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Sodium: 1mg | Potassium: 2mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 1IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 1mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-roast-whole-eggplant-in-oven/feed/ 15
Fire Roasted Eggplant https://foolproofliving.com/fire-roasted-eggplant/ https://foolproofliving.com/fire-roasted-eggplant/#comments Mon, 02 Aug 2021 03:29:51 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=43128 It is no secret that roasting a whole eggplant in the oven is the most hands-off method of cooking it.…]]>

It is no secret that roasting a whole eggplant in the oven is the most hands-off method of cooking it. However, in my opinion, the method that delivers the most flavor is by cooking it on the stovetop on a direct flame.

If you are not familiar with this method, you might think of it being similar to grilling it but it is not. Instead, we cook eggplants over a direct flame on the gas burner by turning every few minutes to ensure even roasting. Some people also refer to this method as chargrilling as the eggplants get charred during the cooking process.

Fire roasted eggplants on a plate served by a person

Why Cook Eggplant on A Gas Stove – Pros & Cons

Before I show you how to use this method, I want to lay out the pros and cons of it so that you can decide for yourself. 

Pros:

  1. Delicate smoky flavor: Having been cooking eggplant since I was 10 years old, I do not know any other method that delivers the authentic smoky flavors that eggplant is known for. 
  2. Fast: Depending on the size of your eggplants, you can roast a whole eggplant in about 15-20 minutes. In my experience, this is faster than roasting it in the oven or grilling it.
  3. Easy to batch cook & freeze: You can have several burners on and roast several eggplants at the same time. This way, you can roast a large batch, use some in recipes and freeze the rest for later. This is especially a good method if you are growing eggplants in your garden.
  4. No need to salt eggplant: You do not need to take the step of salting the eggplant before cooking it.

Cons:

  1. Gas stove: You need a gas stove with an open flame. I tried a few other ways, like grilling on a gas grill, but I couldn’t get the char that the direct flame delivers.
  2. It is not hands off: While it is quicker, you have to keep a close eye on it and turn it in every few minutes to ensure even roasting.
  3. It is messy: Below I will show you a quick tip to minimize the cleaning, but still there is a little bit of cleaning afterwards.

How To Fire Roast Eggplant on A Gas Stove Top:

For this method, I used the most popular (and widely available) globe eggplants. However, you can use other eggplant varieties like Italian eggplant and graffiti eggplant as well.

Person preparing eggplant for fire roasting
  1. Rinse & Dry: Rinse eggplants under cold running water. If there is a sticker on them, remove it. Dry with a kitchen towel or a paper towel. Set them aside.
Person laying the bottom of a stove with aluminum foil
  1. Prepare your gas range: Line the base of a gas range with aluminum foil making sure to keep the burners exposed. I usually cut out the part where the burners are located (as seen in the photo above) to make it easier for cleaning purposes later on.
Person cooking eggplants on a gas stove on direct fire
  1. Turn the burners on: Turn the burners on medium heat and place eggplants directly on an open flame. I usually put 2 eggplants on the larger burners and 1 on the smaller ones.
Roasted eggplants on stovetop
  1. Roast: Roast eggplants for about 15-20 minutes (depending on their size), turning every 5 minutes or so using a pair of tongs being very careful not to burn yourself. You will know that it is fully roasted when the skin is burnt and flaky and the flesh is soft.
Person peeling fire roasted eggplants under cold water
  1. Let them cool: Transfer the now-fire roasted eggplant onto a plate and let them cool. This may take between 10-15 minutes.
  2. Peel & Drain: Place a colander over a large bowl. When eggplants are cool enough to handle, peel them under cold running water by gently removing the black skin making sure to keep the flesh intact. If some burnt bits of skin are left behind that is okay. Discard the rest of the skin. Transfer the eggplant flesh (aka pulp) to the colander and let it drain for 10-15 minutes.
    Alternatively, you can skip the whole peeling under the running water part and use a small spoon to separate the white flesh from the charred skin.
roasted eggplant pulp seeds being taken off by a person
  1. Use it in your recipe or freeze for later use: When ready to use, give it a rough chop or mash them on a cutting board (or food processor) according to the recipe you are following. Or, freeze for later use (more on how-to freeze that below.) It is optional, but if there are large seeds, you can remove them with a knife.

How To Store & Freeze:

  • Storage: Place fire roasted eggplant in an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Freezing: Once the roasted eggplants are fully drained, place the eggplant pulp in a freezer bag like Stasher (affiliate link) or Zip Lock and get the air out of it as much as you can. 

Helpful Tips:

  • Do not skip the draining process: This is especially important if you are going to make baba ganoush. If you skip this step, it will make your recipe soggy. 
  • Keep a close eye on the eggplants as they are cooking: For safety purposes, be sure to not leave the side of your eggplants as they are roasting on the gas stove.
  • Be sure to season well: If you give your fire-roasted eggplants a taste, they might taste a bit bland. But you should think of it as a blank canvas begging to be flavored. You can make a quick tahini sauce by mixing tahini paste with fresh lemon juice, a few minced garlic cloves, olive oil, kosher salt, and black pepper and drizzle it over eggplants. Or, give them a rough chop and mix with fresh produce like tomatoes, green or red onions, fresh parsley to make a chopped eggplant salad.

FAQs:

Do I need to remove the seeds?

The seeds are edible but you can remove the large visible seeds if you want. If your eggplants are older, sometimes seeds might have an unpleasant bitter taste so be sure to give it a quick taste to decide whether or not to remove them.

Do I need to salt eggplant before cooking on the gas stove?

No, you can salt it after it is chargrilled and peeled.

Is eggplant healthy?

Yes, it is. According to Healthline, ” Eggplant is a high-fiber, low-calorie food that is rich in nutrients and comes with many potential health benefits.”

Other Basic Cooking Methods For Eggplants:

Aubergine Recipes You Might Like:

fire roasted eggplants on a plate
Print

Fire Roasted Eggplant Recipe – Cooking eggplants on stovetop

Learn how to make fire roasted eggplant by cooking eggplants on the stove top over direct flame to use in recipes like Stuffed Eggplants, Baba Ganoush, and Baingan Bharta.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 2 eggplants
Calories 115kcal

Equipment

  • Gas stove
  • Tong
  • Colander

Ingredients

  • 2 globe eggplants

Instructions

  • Rinse & Dry: Rinse eggplants under cold running water. If there is a sticker on them, remove it. Dry with a kitchen towel or a paper towel. Set them aside. There is no need to peel the eggplant for fire roasting it.
  • Prepare your gas range: Line the base of a gas range with aluminum foil making sure to keep the burners exposed. I usually cut out the part where the burners are located to make it easier for cleaning purposes after the roasting process is completed.
  • Turn the burners on: Turn the burners on medium-heat and place eggplants directly on an open flame. I usually put 2 eggplants on the larger burners and 1 on the smaller ones.
  • Roast: Roast eggplants for about 15-20 minutes (depending on their size), turning every 5 minutes or so using a pair of tongs being very careful to not to burn yourself. You will know that it is fully roasted when the skin is burnt and flaky and the flesh is soft.
  • Let them cool: Transfer the now-fire roasted eggplant onto a plate and let them cool. This may take between 10-15 minutes.
  • Peel & Drain: Place a colander over a large bowl. When eggplants are cool enough to handle, peel them under cold running water by gently removing the black skin making sure to keep the flesh intact. If some burnt bits of skin are left behind that is okay. Discard the rest of the skin. Transfer the eggplant flesh to the colander and let it drain for 10-15 minutes*. Alternatively, you can skip the whole peeling under running water part and use a small spoon to separate the white flesh from the charred skin.
  • Use it in your recipe or freeze for later use: When ready to use, give it a rough chop or mash them on a cutting board (or food processor) according to the recipe you are following. Or, freeze for later use.

Notes

  • I listed only 2 eggplants in the ingredients list but you can cook as many eggplants as you like.
  • I used globe eggplants but you can use other eggplants like graffiti eggplant, Italian eggplant, etc. The timing might be different but it would still work.
  • Storage: Place fire-roasted eggplant in an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Freezing: Once the roasted eggplants are fully drained, place the eggplant pulp in a freezer bag like Stasher or Zip-Lock and get the air out of it as much as you can. 
  • Do not skip the draining process: This is especially important if you are going to make baba ganoush. If you skip this step, your recipe will turn out soggy. 
  • Keep a close eye on the eggplants as they are cooking: For safety purposes, be sure to not leave the side of your eggplants as they are roasting on the gas stove.

Nutrition

Calories: 115kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 9mg | Potassium: 1049mg | Fiber: 14g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 105IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 41mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/fire-roasted-eggplant/feed/ 4
Piyaz – Turkish White Bean Salad https://foolproofliving.com/piyaz/ https://foolproofliving.com/piyaz/#comments Thu, 01 Jul 2021 18:40:21 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=41923 You can’t talk about Turkish Cuisine and not mention Piyaz, our version of White Bean Salad recipe. Growing up, this…]]>

You can’t talk about Turkish Cuisine and not mention Piyaz, our version of White Bean Salad recipe. Growing up, this was a staple in our house. My mom would serve this as a side dish with her kofte (aka Turkish meatballs) or karniyarik (aka stuffed eggplants).

Whenever we had this on the menu, she would call it the “Kofte Piyaz” dinner. It was her version of a weeknight meal because it comes together so quickly with minimal effort. If you are a fan of one of the most popular Turkish recipe kisir, aka tabbouleh, you will love this recipe.

A bowl of Piyaz Salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side

Why I love this recipe:

If you have ever traveled around the Middle Eastern and Mediterranean regions or visited one of the Turkish restaurants around the world, chances are you are familiar with this cold white bean salad recipe. Several cuisines like Greek, Turkish, Persian, and even Armenian offer a version of this salad. 

Here are a few reasons why I think this recipe is so popular and stood the test of time:

  1. Made with simple everyday ingredients in 10 minutes: You probably already have everything in your pantry.
  2. Easy to customize: Any type of white beans (Navy Bean, Cannellini, Butter Beans, etc.) would work here. Plus, there are a number of popular variations which I cover below.
  3. Special diet friendly: The traditional version is vegan and gluten free. Though some people also serve it with a few boiled eggs on top. Either way, it is a vegetarian, gluten free and low-carb recipe making it ideal for most special diets.

Ingredients:

As it is with most salad recipes, this Turkish white bean recipe has three sets of ingredients; a zesty salad dressing, fresh salad ingredients, and optional toppings.

Ingredients for Turkish salad dressing on a marble backdrop
  1. The dressing: This happens to be my favorite Turkish salad dressing and it takes just a few minutes to make. You will need olive oil, apple cider vinegar, fresh garlic, lemon juice, salt and pepper and optional red chili pepper flakes, such as Aleppo pepper.
ingredients for the recipe are individually placed in bowls from the top view
  1. Key Ingredients for the salad: For the rest, you will need home cooked or canned white navy beans, tomatoes, red onion, and Italian parsley.
  2. Optional Toppings: If you want to take it up a notch, you can garnish your Turkish beans salad with sumac, black olives, and even a few boiled eggs on top.

Substitutions:

  • White beans: You can cook your own white beans from dry beans or use canned beans. I personally like to make this salad with Navy beans, but Cannellini beans or even butter beans would also work. Here is a handy guide to show you how to cook beans for salad.
  • Vinegar: The traditional piyaz salad recipe is made with grape vinegar, which is slightly sweeter than your usual white wine vinegar. To me, apple cider vinegar offers the closest fruity tones, but you can also use white or red wine vinegar.
  • Tomatoes: I used two-medium-sized heirloom tomatoes but you can use cherry or roma tomatoes as well.
  • Sumac: If you are not familiar, sumac is a tangy spice with a sour, acidic flavor similar to lemon juice. It is made from the dried and ground berries of the wild sumac flower. You can find it in any Middle Eastern market, but you can also buy it on Amazon. This sumac brand (affiliate link) is my favorite one. While it is customary to sprinkle the finished dish with a small amount of sumac, alternatively, you can use my sumac red onions recipe in place of red onions for a more intense sumac and onion flavor.

How To Make This Turkish Salad?

person whisking the dressing and red onions soaking in water
  1. Make the salad dressing: Place all ingredients in a bowl and whisk until fully combined.
  2. Prep the salad ingredients: Drain canned beans and rinse them under cold water. Slice the tomatoes in ½ inch and red onions in ¼ inch half moon shape. Place red onions in a bowl with water and let them soak for a few minutes. Doing so helps with removing the harsh flavors of raw onion and makes it easier to digest.
Person showing the steps for how to make the recipe for white bean salad with 4 photos
  1. Assemble: Add the beans, sliced tomatoes and red onion in a large salad bowl. Stir in the roughly chopped Italian parsley and drizzle it with the dressing.
  2. Cover & let it rest: While it is optional, I recommend letting it rest in the fridge for 30 minutes before serving. Doing so allows the white beans to soak in all the flavors and make it extra delicious.
  3. Serve: Sprinkle with sumac and if using, garnish with boiled eggs and olives.

Serving Suggestions:

Make Ahead and Storage Instructions:

  • Make Ahead: Most people include this navy bean salad recipe as a part of their meal prep because it gets better as it sits. You can make the whole recipe a day in advance and serve it on the next day.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container up to 3 days in the fridge. You might have to taste the seasoning and add it if necessary.
Turkish side salad placed in an oval dish and garnished with eggs and parsley.

A Few Variations:

  • Antalya Piyazi made with tahini: If you are not familiar, Antalya province is located in the South of Turkey and this Turkish bean salad is one of their local dishes. However, their version is slightly different because they add a quarter cup of tahini into the dressing. Some recipes suggest that they use sesame oil instead of olive oil, but I usually make it with olive oil. The rest of the recipe is the same. It is a truly delicious version of serving it, especially if you want to try something different.
  • Play with the amount of tomatoes you use: During the summer months, when summer tomatoes are in abundance I usually use more than what I would use during the winter months. With that being said, an easy piyaz salad recipe can also be made without tomatoes. Simply omit them if you wish to do so.

FAQs:

What is piyaz?

Piyaz is a Turkish salad recipe that is made with cooked white beans, red onions, and a zesty grape vinegar and lemon juice salad dressing. It is also a popular dish served as a side dish, meze (small tapas like dishes), or a main meal in most Middle East and Mediterranean countries.

What is the meaning of word, “piyaz”?

The word piyaz, pronounced as peeh-has, in Turkish means bean salad. However, piyaz means onion in Farsi.

What does piyaz taste like?

Piyaz offers refreshingly zesty and creamy flavors with every bite. The soft white beans mixed with red onions and zesty vinaigrette delivers a bit of savory, sweet, creamy, and tangy all at the same time.

Other Bean Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you liked this piyaz recipe, it is likely that you are a fan of bean salads like we do. Here are a few more recipes you might also like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Piyaz - Turkish White Bean Salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side
Print

Piyaz – Turkish White Bean Salad Recipe

Piyaz, a refreshing, creamy and zesty Turkish white bean salad that is the perfect side dish when you want to impress. It comes together in 10 minutes and can be made in advance.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Turkish
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 136kcal

Ingredients

For The Dressing:

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 4 tablespoons apple cider vinegar
  • 1 garlic clove peeled and minced
  • 2 tablespoon lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

For Piyaz Salad:

  • 1/2 small red onion sliced thinly in half moon shape (1/2 cup)
  • 2 cans white bean Cannelini or Navy Beans would work – drained and rinsed
  • 2 medium sized tomatoes sliced ½ inch in half moon shape
  • ½ cup Italian Parsley roughly chopped
  • 1 tablespoon sumac

Optional:

  • 3 tablespoons Black pitted olives
  • 2 hard boiled eggs sliced

Instructions

  • To make the dressing: Place olive oil, apple cider vinegar, garlic clove, lemon juice, kosher salt, and black pepper in a bowl and whisk until fully incorporated. Set aside.
  • Place sliced red onion in a bowl of water and let soak for 5 minutes, drain.*
  • Assemble the salad: Place white beans, drained red onions, sliced tomatoes, and chopped parsley in a large bowl. Drizzle it with the dressing and sumac. Give it a gentle toss.
  • Cover it with plastic wrap and let it sit in the fridge for 30 minutes before serving. This is an optional step but allows flavors to mingle and deliver a next level delicious salad.
  • If preferred, garnish with black pitted olives and hard boiled eggs. Serve.

Video

Notes

  • Soaking red onions is an optional step. If you don’t have time, simply use sliced onions. I find that soaking them for a few minutes helps with digestion and tames their strong flavor.
  • Antalya Piyaz made with tahini: If you have ever been to the Antalya province of Turkey, you may have had their version of this piyaz recipe made with tahini. If you want to give that version a try, add in a quarter cup of tahini (sesame paste) into the dressing and follow the rest of the recipe exactly written.
  • Make Ahead: Most people include this navy bean salad recipe as a part of their meal prep because it gets better as it sits. You can make the whole recipe a day in advance and serve it on the next day.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container upto 3 days in the fridge. You might have to taste the seasoning and add it if necessary.
  • The calorie values listed here do not include the optional toppings.

Nutrition

Calories: 136kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 588mg | Potassium: 109mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 705IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 19mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/piyaz/feed/ 12
Baked Zucchini Fritters with Breadcrumbs and Feta https://foolproofliving.com/oven-baked-zucchini-fritters-feta-dill/ https://foolproofliving.com/oven-baked-zucchini-fritters-feta-dill/#comments Fri, 25 Jun 2021 19:15:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=9889 It is a shame that for as long as I have been blogging I haven’t shared a baked zucchini fritter…]]>

It is a shame that for as long as I have been blogging I haven’t shared a baked zucchini fritter recipe. Because growing up, baked courgette fritters (as my mom called them) were one of those dishes that my mother made very often during the summer months.

After receiving requests from many people asking for her zucchini feta fritters recipe, I knew that it needed to be added to my collection of Turkish recipes. So today, this healthy zucchini appetizer recipe comes to you directly out of my mom’s handwritten cookbook.

Baked Courgette Fritters on a plate served with yogurt sauce

Before I continue to explain the recipe, I want to clarify the terminology around it. Because if you do a quick search you will realize that people refer to this recipe in several different ways. Some examples are baked zucchini patties, baked zucchini latkes, baked zucchini cakes, baked zucchini puffs, zucchini bites, or baked zucchini pancakes. Essentially, they are all the same thing.

Got some extra zucchini to use? Check out our reader favorites Zucchini Noodles and Low-Calorie Zucchini Soup recipes.

Why I Love This Recipe:

Whether you refer to them as fritters, cakes, puffs, pancakes, or patties, they are good. Here are a few reasons why this recipe is better than any other:

  1. It is healthier compared to the classic fried zucchini fritters: If you were asking yourself, can I bake zucchini fritters? this recipe is your answer. There is no frying happening here. Instead, we mix everything in a bowl, portion them out on a sheet pan, and bake in the oven. And surprisingly, this healthy version is just as good in terms of taste.
  2. A great way to use leftover shredded zucchini: If you have some leftover shredded zucchini from making zucchini bread (like my Almond Flour Zucchini Bread or Vegan Zucchini Bread recipes), you can use the leftover zucchini to make these zucchini patties.
  3. The Perfect Side Dish: When summer rolls around and fresh zucchini is in abundance, these summery baked vegetable fritters make the best vegetable side dish to serve with breakfast eggs or chicken, meat, and vegetarian dinner recipes.
  4. Easy To Customize: My mom flavored her baked courgette fritters with dill and feta cheese but you can use other types of cheeses and herbs, ie. parmesan cheese and parsley.
  5. No Flour: This recipe uses breadcrumbs instead of flour, which gives it a nice body and texture. Also, if you are following a keto diet, you can use almond flour instead of breadcrumbs.

Ingredients:

As I mentioned earlier, this baked zucchini pancakes recipe has a lot of Turkish/Greek influences. The combination of zucchini-dill-feta is truly delicious and a very easy way to flavor what could otherwise be quite boring a baked zucchini appetizer. The rest is a bunch of simple ingredients you probably have in your fridge/pantry.

Ingredients for the recipes are placed in individual cups on a marble backdrop

In terms of ingredients, you will need medium-size zucchini, fresh garlic, baking powder, large eggs, feta cheese, panko bread crumbs (or regular bread crumbs), scallions, and fresh dill.

Substitutions & Helpful Notes on Ingredients:

  • Zucchini: You will need 2 1/2 cups (packed tightly) of shredded zucchini. I used 2 medium-sized zucchinis (about 1 1/2 lbs in total) but if yours are smaller or larger adjust the number of zucchinis you use accordingly. You do not have to peel them, especially if it is during the summer months when they are in season.
  • Breadcrumbs: I use panko breadcrumbs (aka Japanese breadcrumbs) that have a crunchier and lighter texture. However, you can use regular (or gluten-free) breadcrumbs as well. The texture will be a little bit heartier but still good.
  • Baking Powder: I know that baking powder is an unusual ingredient here, but using a little bit of baking powder helps them keep their shape and also rise a bit.
  • Feta Cheese: As it is with any recipe with feta cheese, make sure to taste the cheese before adding salt to the recipe. In this dish, I used only a ½ teaspoon of kosher salt to help extract the juices from the zucchini. My feta cheese was quite salty so I didn’t add any more salt. But if yours is less salty, adjust the amount of salt accordingly.
  • Topping for Baked Fritters: I used my yogurt sauce, but you can also serve it with my easy tzatziki recipe.

How to Make Oven Baked Zucchini Fritters:

  1. Preheat the oven: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
Person showing how to remove the excess liquid from the shredded zucchini
  1. Prepare the zucchini: Shred the zucchini using the large holes of a box grater. Place the shredded zucchini in the middle of a clean tea towel, collect it from the sides and squeeze as much liquid as possible. You should have about 2 to 2 1/2 cups of zucchini. Set it in a large bowl.
Four images showing how to make courgette patties
  1. Add in the rest of the ingredients: Add in garlic, olive oil, baking powder, black pepper, eggs, feta cheese, Panko bread crumbs, scallions (green onions), and fresh dill in the bowl with zucchini.
  2. Scoop onto a baking sheet: Using a spoon or medium-sized ice cream scoop, scoop out about 2 tablespoons of the batter and drop onto the prepared baking sheet. Continue until you run out of the batter. Gently press each fritter with your fingers (or back of a spoon) to make flatten.
  3. Bake in the oven: Bake in the preheated oven for 22-25 minutes or until they turned golden brown on the outside. Take it out of the oven and let it cool for 5 minutes before serving.
  4. Make the yogurt sauce: If using, make the Greek yogurt sauce by mixing all ingredients in a bowl.
  5. Serve: Place a few of the freshly baked zucchini bites on a plate and top them off with the sauce. Serve.

Variations:

  • Gluten-free: If you want to make them gluten-free, be sure to use gluten-free breadcrumbs.
  • Use different kinds of cheese: You can change it up by using shredded cheddar or parmesan instead of feta cheese. I promise parmesan zucchini bites are just as good as its version with feta cheese.
  • Low Carb Keto Zucchini Fritters: If you want to make this recipe low-carb/keto-friendly, use 1/2 cup almond flour or almond meal instead of 1 cup of breadcrumbs.
  • Use different fresh herbs: The classic Greek zucchini fritters recipe uses dill, but you can swap dill with fresh parsley as well. And if you are not a fan or have no herbs on hand, feel free to omit using them.

Make Ahead, Storage & Freezing Instructions:

  • Make ahead: You can prepare all the ingredients in advance to save on time. However, I recommend mixing the batter right before baking so you won’t end up with soggy fritters.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. You can serve them cold or warm them up in a low-heat 280-300 degrees F oven for 5-7 minutes.
  • Freezing Thawing: While I personally liked the freshly baked version the most, you can freeze these fritters. Before freezing, be sure to bring them to room temperature. Then place in an airtight container and freeze for up to a month. Thaw in the fridge overnight and warm up in a low heat oven until warmed thoroughly, 5-10 minutes.
A plate with Baked courgette Fritters with Feta and Dill are served with yogurt sauce and photographed from the front.

Expert Tips:

  • Do not skip the process of squeezing the juices out of the zucchini: I know it is extra work, but it is an important step to help fritters to hold their shape and not be soggy.
  • Use an ice cream scoop for even fritters: An ice cream scoop is a really helpful tool to use here as it will help to get equal-sized zucchini balls, which in turn will help them bake at the same time and evenly. So if you have one, I would highly recommend using it.
  • Use a box grater instead of a food processor: While a food processor might be easier and quicker to shred the zucchini, I find that grating it in a box grater does a better job. Mainly because the food processor makes the shredded zucchini pieces too thin.

FAQs:

Can you bake zucchini fritters?

Yes, you can. If you are used to eating the fried version of zucchini bites you might be surprised to hear that you can totally cook them in the oven with a few minor changes. And the baked version of this recipe is not only healthier but also doesn’t taste much different than its fried version.

Do I need to peel the zucchini to make fritters?

If I am making it in the summer time during the zucchini season I do not peel the skin. I make sure to give it a through wash though. However, this is a personal preference. You can make this recipe both ways, with or without the skin on.

Can I make Baked Zucchini Fritters batter in advance?

I would not recommend making this batter in advance. The reason is because of the high water content of zucchini. As the batter sits in the fridge, the shredded zucchini releases more of its juices and the excess water turns to batter into a very soggy mixture. I have tried this twice and in both cases thought that the end product was not ideal.

Can I freeze these Baked Zucchini Pancakes?

Yes, you can. However, I recommend baking them first. You also want to make sure that they are at room temperature before freezing. When ready to serve, simply place them in a 350-degree oven for 8-10 minutes. No need to thaw beforehand. I also recommend keeping a close eye on them as they bake because they warm-up (and burn) pretty quickly.

Can I pan-fry these zucchini fritters instead of baking them in the oven?

Yes, you can. Heat a tablespoon of vegetable oil in a large 12-inch non-stick skillet. Scoop 3-4 fritters at a time making sure not to overcrowd the pan. They should be on a single layer without touching each other. Cook 3-5 minutes on one side and flip to cook the other side. Store the cooked zucchini pancakes in a low heat (200 F oven) while working on cooking the rest with adding more oil to the skillet after each batch.

Other Recipe Ideas for Shredded Zucchini:

Think about what else you can make with grated zucchini? I’ve got you covered. Here are a few more ideas to put that leftover shredded zucchini to good use:

Other Zucchini Recipes You Might Like


Baked Zucchini Fritters placed on a plate served with yogurt sauce on the side
Print

Baked Zucchini Fritters Recipe

These Baked Zucchini Fritters are flavored with feta cheese, fresh dill, and scallions. In my version, instead of using flour I used Panko breadcrumbs and ground oats as well as eggs to bind all the ingredients. You can serve them with fried eggs or as a side dish with any of your meat and vegetable dishes.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Turkish
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 10 fritters
Calories 107kcal

Ingredients

For the Zucchini Fritters

  • 2 medium-sized zucchini (1 1/2 pounds) – 2 1/2 cups after shredded, peeled and grated
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 large eggs
  • ¾ cup crumbled feta cheese
  • 1 cup Panko Bread Crumbs
  • 2 scallions chopped thinly
  • 2 tablespoons fresh dill chopped – plus more as garnish

For the Yogurt Sauce: (optional)

  • 1 cup Greek yogurt
  • 2 cloves of garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Prepare the zucchini: Shred the zucchini using the large holes of a box grater. Place the shredded zucchini in the middle of a clean kitchen towel, collect it from the sides and squeeze as much liquid as possible. You should have about 2 to 2 1/2 cups of zucchini. Set it in a bowl.
  • Mix together the grated zucchini, garlic, olive oil, baking powder, black pepper, eggs, feta cheese, Panko bread crumbs, scallions, and dill in a bowl.
  • Using a spoon or medium-sized ice cream scoop, scoop out about 2 tablespoons of the batter and drop onto the baking sheet. Continue until you run out of the batter. Gently press each fritter with your fingers to make flatten.
  • Bake for 22-25 minutes or until golden. Take it out of the oven and let it cool for 5 minutes before serving.
  • To make the yogurt sauce: Whisk together all the ingredients in a bowl.
  • Serve zucchini fritters with the yogurt sauce and more dill on the side.

Video

Notes

  • If you watch the how-to video above, you will see that I placed the shredded zucchini in a colander and sprinkled it with salt to get its juices out. You can use both the cloth method or the colander method. The reason why I changed it is that I want to make sure I am not adding too much salt into the recipe, especially because I am using feta cheese. 
    While you can use both methods to get the juices out, I highly recommend giving a taste to your feta cheese and adjusting the amount of salt you put in the recipe accordingly.
  • Make ahead: You can prepare all the ingredients in advance to save on time. However, I recommend mixing the batter right before baking so you won’t end up with soggy fritters.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. You can serve them cold or warm them up in a low-heat 280-300 degrees F oven for 5-7 minutes.
  • Freezing Thawing: While I personally liked the freshly baked version the most, you can freeze these fritters. Before freezing, be sure to bring them to room temperature. Then place in an airtight container and freeze for up to a month. Thaw in the fridge overnight and warm up in a low heat oven until warmed thoroughly, 5-10 minutes.
  • Can I pan-fry these zucchini fritters instead of baking them in the oven?Yes, you can. Heat a tablespoon of vegetable oil in a large 12-inch non-stick skillet. Scoop 3-4 fritters at a time making sure not to overcrowd the pan. Cook 3-5 minutes on one side and flip to cook the other side. Store the cooked zucchini pancakes in low heat (200 F oven) while working on cooking the rest by adding more oil to the skillet after each batch.
  • An earlier version of this recipe listed 2 tablespoons of ground oats in the list of ingredients. After testing the recipe a few more times, I decided that this recipe can also be made without oats. You can still add them but it is an optional ingredient.

Nutrition

Calories: 107kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 44mg | Sodium: 469mg | Potassium: 178mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 203IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 131mg | Iron: 1mg

This Easy Baked Zucchini Fritters Recipe was originally published in 2016. It is updated with additional helpful information in June 2021. A few minor changes to the originally published recipe were made.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/oven-baked-zucchini-fritters-feta-dill/feed/ 18
Turkish Simit Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/simit/ https://foolproofliving.com/simit/#comments Sat, 20 Mar 2021 06:42:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2967 If you have ever visited Turkey or are a fan of Turkish food, you know our version of a bagel,…]]>

If you have ever visited Turkey or are a fan of Turkish food, you know our version of a bagel, Turkish Simit bread. It is one of those iconic Turkish recipes, right up there with Turkish Coffee, Borek, and Turkish Bulgur Pilaf.

Usually served with feta cheese, olives, and Turkish tea or ayran (aka Turkish Yogurt Drink), simit has been a breakfast staple in every Turkish household for centuries. Sadly, for those of us living outside of Turkey, it is not easy to find (unless you are living in a town with a great Turkish restaurant.) The good news is that making simit at home is easy with my foolproof method.

Turkish Simit in a large bowl from the front.

What Is Simit?

Simit also referred to as gevrek or gjevrek, is a sesame-bathed, circular Turkish bread. It is similar to an American bagel in how it looks but crustier on the outside and softer on the inside.

Because it is mainly served for breakfast, I’ve heard some people in the US refer to it as “Turkish Bagel” or “Turkish Pretzel.”

Traditionally sold by street vendors on the streets of Turkey for no more than $0.50, it is usually made by twisting simit dough and dipping it in molasses and toasted sesame seeds before baking it in the oven.

Simit Ingredients:

To make it easier, I will divide the Turkish Sesame Bread ingredients into three parts.

Ingredients needed to activate the yeast.

The Yeast & Milk Mixture:

  • Water at 110 Fahrenheit degrees (43 Celsius degrees)
  • 1 cup whole milk (or heavy cream) at room temperature: You can use milk and heavy cream interchangeably in this recipe. The version of Simit bagel made with heavy cream is richer due to the higher fat content of heavy cream. Still, if you can’t find it, you can substitute it with whole milk. I would not recommend substituting plant-based milk in this recipe.
  • 2 tablespoons or 3 (1/4 oz.) packets of active dry yeast (I used Fleischmann’s)
  • Granulated sugar
Ingredients for simit dough recipe.

The dough of the ingredients:

  • All-purpose flour: I tested this recipe with several all-purpose flour brands, and the results were similar. I personally like King Arthur Flour as it has a higher amount of protein which is ideal for making bread. The recipe below starts with 5 cups, but you will need at least 1 to 1 ½ cups or more flour to use on the surface as you are kneading the simit dough.
  • Large egg
  • Kosher salt
  • Vegetable oil (avocado oil, canola oil, or grapeseed oil would all work.)
Ingredients to dip the raw dough.

The Sesame Coating

  • Molasses (I used Grandma’s Molasses – affiliate link): Alternatively, you can also use pomegranate or grape molasses (this Turkish Molasses is my favorite) if you can get your hands on them, which is traditionally used in Turkey. Molasses coating helps sesame seeds stick to the dough and give the overall bread slight sweetness that its known for.
  • White sesame seeds

How To Make Simit?

This Simit bread recipe below makes ten sesame breads. Even though the steps look like a lot, the process of making simit is quite simple.

A person filling a measuring cup with the ingredients to activate the yeast.
  1. Activate the yeast: Place water, milk, sugar, and active dry yeast into a measuring cup. Give it a quick whisk, cover it with stretch film, and let it sit on the counter for 10 to 15 minutes or until bubbles form on top.
A person showing how to make the simit Turkish recipe in a collage of photos.
  1. Make the simit dough: Place 5 cups (700 grams) of all-purpose flour, kosher salt, oil, egg, and now-risen yeast-milk mixture in a large mixing bowl. Start mixing the sesame Turkish bread dough by hand until it comes together. Lightly dust the counter with flour and dump the dough onto the surface. Knead by hand to form a smooth and elastic dough until the dough is not sticking to your fingers. This may take around 15 to 17 minutes. Alternatively, you can do this in a stand mixer. I included the instructions for that in the recipe card below.
Showing the simit dough before and after it is risen.
  1. Let the simit dough rise: Lightly wet a kitchen towel with hot tap water and place it over the dough. Let it sit on the kitchen counter until it doubles in size, 30-45 minutes.
Person toasting sesame seeds in a skillet top view.
  1. Toast sesame seeds: While the dough is rising, place sesame seeds in a large non-stick skillet over medium heat, stirring constantly, and toast until they turn golden brown, 20-25 minutes. Transfer to a large shallow plate to cool. 
Person showing how to roll the dough into a cylinder.
  1. Turn the dough into a cylinder: Fold the dough from each end onto itself towards the middle, gently pinch, and roll into a cylinder of roughly 20-inches (51 cm.)
Person dividing the  Turkish bagel dough into small pieces and placing on a sheet.
  1. Divide the now-risen dough: Using a sharp knife or a pastry scraper, divide the dough into 10 equal pieces and transfer onto a sheet pan (lined with parchment paper and sprinkled with flour.) Cover it with a clean kitchen towel (to prevent them from drying as you work on each piece.) 
  2. Preheat the oven to 400 F degrees. Line two baking sheets with parchment paper.
Person showing how to shape and twist Turkish bread recipe.
  1. Shape each simit dough: Roll each dough ball into a roughly 40-inch (102 cm) long strand. Fold the string onto itself using your finger to hold it in the middle. Twist the dough in the opposite direction to form a spiral rope. Roll it into a 5-inch diameter ring and gently pinch the end to seal. 
Shaped dough on a sheet pan.
  1. Let them rest: Transfer the now-shaped dough onto the parchment-lined baking sheet. Repeat the same process for the rest of the dough balls. Let them rest until they rise for 30 minutes. How much they rise depends on the temperature of your kitchen. (You can learn more about this in the tips section below)
Person dipping Turkish Simit bagel into molasses and sesame seeds.
  1. Dip simit into molasses and sesame seeds: Mix together molasses with water in a large shallow plate. Bring in the sesame seeds. First, dip simit into the molasses mixture (on both sides) and then into the sesame seeds making sure that all sides are fully covered with sesame seeds. Transfer the sesame-seeded bread onto a baking sheet and repeat the same process for the rest of the limit. Do not skip this part as sesame seeds add a nutty flavor and crunch texture to simit, which makes this bread so special.
Baked Turkish simit bread on a sheet pan.
  1. Bake: Bake both sheets in the oven for 18-20 minutes or until golden brown, making sure to rotate them from top to bottom halfway through the baking process. Let them cool for 5 minutes and serve while still warm.

What To Serve with Turkish Simit Bread?

Traditionally, we serve simit bread for breakfast with feta cheese, olives, sliced tomatoes, cucumbers, Turkish eggs and Turkish tea or Ayran. With that being said, you can serve it with any cheese and even with your favorite jams or preserves.

Showing ways to serve Turkish simit.

Alternatively, you can make a simit sandwich by slicing it horizontally in half and place cheese, sliced tomatoes, and cucumbers in the middle. You can also do a simit toast by toasting each slice in a toaster.

Simit sandwich on a plate layered with feta cheese and tomatoes.

How To Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

The best part of this Turkish bread recipe is that it can be made ahead. So, you can easily make a batch, eat some right away, and freeze the rest for later.

  • Make Ahead: Whenever I am serving simit for breakfast, I make the dough a day before (up to 12 hours before), store it in the fridge, and bake it fresh in the morning. To do so, make the recipe until the step right before dipping the braided dough into sesame seeds. Place them on a parchment-lined baking sheet and store them in the fridge. In the morning, remove them from the fridge, let them come to room temperature for about 15-20 minutes, and follow the recipe as written.
  • To store leftovers: Bring simit to room temperature, place in a plastic bag, remove the air out as much as you can, and store at room temperature. It should be fresh for up to 2 days. You can toast it for a few minutes before serving.
  • To freeze: Repeat the same process but place in the freezer instead. When ready to serve, let it thaw for 10 minutes on the counter, and then heat it in a preheated 300 F degree oven for 10-12 minutes.

Expert Tips:

  • The shape doesn’t matter:  If this is your first time trying your hand in making this Turkish simit recipe and if your simit strands don’t look like the ones in the pictures, do not worry. I promise that they will look better as they rise, and regardless of their appearance, they will taste great after they are baked. You will get the hang of it after you make it a few times.
  • The temperature of the water & milk: For the active dry yeast to get activated, your water must be around 110 F degrees (43 Celsius), and your milk (or heavy cream) is at room temperature. If they are colder or warmer, the yeast might not get activated, and as a result, your simit Turkish bread might fall flat.
  • The temperature of your kitchen: As it is with any bread recipe (like I explained in my Challah bread recipe), the temperature of your kitchen (or the time of the year) will affect how much your dough rises. If you are making simit on a hot summer day, it will likely double in size. However, I have made this recipe several times all throughout the year, and it consistently delivered great results.
  • The temperature of your oven: Most Turkish simit recipes start with a 400 F degree oven, bake for 20-25 minutes, raise the temperature to 425 to 450 F degrees and then bake a little longer (usually 5-7 minutes). I tested this recipe several times and did not think it was necessary to bake it in two stages. However, I recommend keeping an eye on it after the 18th-minute mark.
  • Sesame seeds cook faster than the simit dough: Be careful when you open the oven door at the end of the baking process as some smoke might come out due to sesame seeds cooking faster than the limit. 
  • Istanbul Simit vs. Street Simit: If you ever visit Turkey, you will see that the simit sold on the street does not have this many sesame seeds because sesame seeds are costly. My mom, who grew up in Istanbul, always made simit with a lot of sesame seeds, similar to how I did here. If you are not a fan, you can adjust the amount and use less.

FAQs:

What is simit made of?

This Turkish sesame bread is made by mixing flour, yeast, milk (or heavy cream), sesame seeds and molasses.

How is Turkish simit different from American Bagel?

Compared to American bagels, the Turkish simit is lighter and crustier. Also, there is no boiling done during the process of making simit. Instead, we dip simit dough in a water-molasses mixture and coat it in sesame seeds before baking.

What does simit taste like?

It tastes like a lightly sweetened, savory crusty bread with a very pronounced sesame flavor.

Can I make this recipe without molasses?

While it is not traditional, you can use honey instead of molasses. However, please be aware that the taste might be slightly different. To do so, use a mixture of 5-6 tablespoons of honey and 4 tablespoons of water instead.

Can I use a stand mixer (like KitchenAid) instead of kneading the simit dough by hand?

Yes, you can, and I recommend using the dough hook to knead. Also, you might have to adjust the amount of flour by adding more until the dough no longer sticks to the bowl.

How many calories per serving?

Each serving of this recipe is 370 calories.

Other bread recipes you might also like

Other Turkish recipes you might like

Simit Turkish bread on a baking sheet from the top view.
Print

Turkish Simit Recipe (Turkish Bagel)

Learn how to make Turkish simit bread recipe using my foolproof method. Traditionally served for breakfast, our version of bagel is the most popular street food in Turkey. The good news is that you can now make it with these foolproof step by step instructions.
Course Breakfast, Snack
Cuisine Turkish
Diet Halal
Prep Time 1 hour
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Servings 10 simits
Calories 370kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup water at 110 F degrees (43 Celsius)
  • 1 cup whole milk at room temperature (or heavy cream)
  • 2 tablespoons active dry yeast Or 3 (1/4 oz.) packets
  • 2 tablespoons granulated sugar
  • 1 large egg at room temperature
  • 2 teaspoons kosher salt
  • 3 tablespoons vegetable oil (Canola, avocado, and grapeseed oil would all work)
  • 5 cups all purpose flour (25 oz.) plus more for when kneading the dough and for the surface
  • 3 cups sesame seeds (12 oz.)
  • 7 tablespoons molasses diluted with 5 tablespoons of water

Instructions

  • Activate the yeast: Place water, milk, sugar, and active dry yeast into a measuring cup. Give it a quick whisk, cover it with stretch film, and let it sit on the counter for 10 to 15 minutes or until bubbles form on top.
  • Make the dough: Place 5 cups (700 grams) of all-purpose flour, kosher salt, oil, egg, and now-risen yeast-milk mixture in a large mixing bowl. Start mixing by hand until it comes together. Lightly dust the counter with flour and transfer the dough onto the surface. Knead by hand to form a smooth and elastic dough until the dough is not sticking to your fingers. This may take around 15 -17 minutes.
  • Let the simit dough rise: Lightly wet a kitchen towel with hot tap water and place it over the dough. Let it sit on the kitchen counter until it doubles in size, 30-45 minutes.
  • Toast the sesame seeds: While the dough is rising, place sesame seeds in a large non-stick skillet over medium heat, stirring constantly, and toast until they turn golden brown, 20-25 minutes. Transfer into a large shallow plate to cool.
  • Roll The Dough into a Cylinder: Fold the dough from each end onto itself towards the middle, gently pinch, and roll into a cylinder of roughly 20-inches (51 cm.)
  • Divide: Using a sharp knife or a pastry scraper, divide the dough into 10 equal pieces, transfer onto a sheet pan (lined with parchment paper), and cover it with a clean kitchen towel (to prevent them from drying as you work on each piece)
  • Preheat the oven to 400 F degrees. Line two baking sheets with parchment paper.
  • Shape the dough and let it rest: Roll each dough ball into a roughly 40-inch (102 cm) long strand. Fold the string onto itself using your finger to hold it in the middle. Twist the dough in the opposite direction to form a spiral rope. Roll it into a 5-inch diameter ring and gently pinch the end to seal.
  • Let it rise: Transfer the now-shaped simits onto the parchment-lined baking sheet. Repeat the same process for the rest of the dough balls. Let them rest until they rise for 30 minutes. How much they rise depends on the temperature of your kitchen.
  • Dip: Mix together molasses with water in a large shallow plate. Bring in the sesame seeds. First, dip simit into the molasses mixture (on both sides) and then into the sesame seeds making sure that all sides are fully covered with sesame seeds. Transfer onto a baking sheet and repeat the same process for the rest of the limit.
  • Bake in the oven: Bake both sheets in the oven for 18-20 minutes or until golden brown making sure to rotate them from top to bottom halfway through the baking process. Let them cool for 5 minutes and serve while still warm.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 10 of these sesame breads. The nutritional information below is per simit.
  • Make Ahead Instructions: Whenever I am serving simit for breakfast, I make the dough a day before (up to 12 hours before), store it in the fridge, and bake it fresh in the morning. To do so, make the recipe until the step right before dipping the braided dough into sesame seeds (until step 10.) Place them on a parchment-lined baking sheet and store them in the fridge. In the morning, remove them from the fridge, let them rest on the counter, and come to room temperature for about 30 minutes, and follow the recipe as written.
  • To store leftovers: Bring simit to room temperature, place in a plastic bag, remove the air out as much as you can, and store at room temperature. It should be fresh for up to 2 days. You can toast it for a few minutes before serving.
  • To freeze: Repeat the same process but place in the freezer instead. When ready to serve, let it thaw for 10 minutes on the counter, and then heat it in a preheated 300 F degree oven for 10-12 minutes.
  • The shape doesn’t matter:  If this is your first time trying your hand at making this Turkish simit recipe, and if your simit strands don’t look like the ones in the pictures, do not worry. I promise that they will look better as they rise, and regardless of their appearance, they will taste great after they are baked. You will get the hang of it after you make it a few times.
  • The temperature of the water & milk: For the active dry yeast to get activated, your water must be around 110 F degrees (43 Celsius), and your milk (or heavy cream) is at room temperature. If they are colder or warmer, the yeast might not get activated, and as a result, your simit Turkish bread might fall flat.
  • Using a standing mixer: The most time-consuming part of this recipe is kneading the dough by hand. If you have a standing mixer, you can knead the dough using the dough hook. To do so, in step 2, instead of mixing everything in a bowl, mix them in the bowl of your mixer. Mix until everything comes together (no more than 7-8 minutes), and it turns into a soft bowl, stopping and scraping the bottom of the bowl a few times. Towards the end, if it is too sticky, you can add a small amount of flour to help it come together.

Nutrition

Calories: 370kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 19mg | Sodium: 494mg | Potassium: 462mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 67IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 499mg | Iron: 7mg

This Turkish Simit recipe post was originally published in April 2014. It has been updated with new photos and minor changes to the originally published recipe in January 2024.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/simit/feed/ 82
Easy Tabbouleh Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/easy-tabbouleh-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-tabbouleh-recipe/#comments Tue, 09 Mar 2021 19:10:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=39674 You cannot talk about Turkish cuisine and not mention bulgur wheat. And you cannot speak about bulgur recipes and not…]]>

You cannot talk about Turkish cuisine and not mention bulgur wheat. And you cannot speak about bulgur recipes and not mention tabbouleh, also known as Middle Eastern Parsley salad. It is that simple.

If you are new to cooking with bulgur and need a refresher, be sure to check out the posts I wrote on Types of Bulgur and How To Cook It based on the type you are using. 

Tabbouleh salad served in a bowl by a person from top view

In today’s post, I will share everything you need to know about making tabbouleh salad, including but not limited to the origin of it, ingredients and procedure (with step-by-step how-to photos), variations, along with my mom’s tips for the best tabouli recipe.

What Is It & Where Is It From?

Tabbouleh, also known as tabouli and tabouleh salad, is a fresh herb (mostly made with fresh parsley and mint) salad made with fine bulgur (parboiled crack wheat). It is mainly served as a meze or a side dish similar to other Middle Eastern recipes like Tzatziki sauce and Mediterranean hummus.

According to this article on tabbouleh from Wikipedia, it originated from the Levantine region – the large area in the Eastern Mediterranean region that consists of Syria, Lebanon, Israel, Palestine, Jordan, Turkey, and Iraq.

While most popular tabouli recipes are labeled as Lebanese, it is commonly made in the Middle Eastern (Arab countries) and Mediterranean regions (including Cyprus and Greece). 

What Is It Made Of?

To make it easier, I am breaking down the ingredients for my homemade tabouli recipe into four categories:

Fine Bulgur:

The authentic tabbouleh recipe uses fine bulgur, but if you cannot get your hands on it, you can also use medium-coarse and red bulgur for this recipe. The cooking method would be different, but it would still work.

Fine bulgur and the rest of the ingredients to soak bulgur to make Mediterranean Parsley salad

To soak fine bulgur, you will need boiling water, tomato paste, and salt.

If you want to purchase it online, this fine bulgur (affiliate link) is the one I always buy.

A Quick Note on The Amount of Bulgur I Use:

As I was doing my research for this recipe I realized that some of the Lebanese tabbouleh recipes online uses less bulgur than what I am accustomed to.

In my version of tabbouleh salad here, I am cooking 1 cup of fine bulgur but if you prefer yours less bulgur, feel free to cook less.The bulgur to water ratio I use is one to one and a quarter. In other words, I use 1 cup bulgur wheat to 1 1/4 cups of water.

If you decide to use less bulgur, be sure to adjust the amount accordingly.

Salad Ingredients:

  • Fresh Herbs:  I used a combination of fresh parsley (flat-leaf or Italian parsley), fresh mint, and fresh dill. Finely chopped.
Ingredients for the salad including Fresh herbs and scallion with fresh lemon

A quick note about the fresh herbs: Most authentic recipes feature parsley as the only herb, which is why it is also called Mediterranean Parsley Salad. However, the Turkish tabbouleh recipe (aka kisir)that I grew up eating was always made with a combination of fresh parsley, dill, and mint. With that being said, if you are not a fan of tabbouleh with mint or dill, you can easily substitute it with an equal amount of fresh parsley.

  • Scallions: Finely chopped with both green and white parts. It is not traditional, but you can substitute scallions with chopped red onions.


The Dressing:

The tabbouleh dressing is made with olive oil and lemon juice and seasoned with salt and pepper.

Person whisking tabouli dressing with lemon juice, olive oil, and salt and pepper

Optional Spices:

I kept my easy tabbouleh recipe simple and used only salt and pepper. However, my mom would always sprinkle it with sumac. I recommend using it if you have some, as it will add an additional layer of zesty flavor to the overall dish.

How To Cook Bulgur for Tabouli?

As I mentioned earlier, since fine bulgur is thin/small to cook, we prefer soaking it in hot water instead of boiling it on the stovetop. To do so:

  1. You will need a large bowl: Place fine bulgur in a large bowl (one that is big enough to make the salad)
Person showing how to cook bulgur wheat for tabouli
  1. Prep the liquid mixture: In a measuring cup, mix 1 ¼ cups of hot boiling water with 2 tablespoons of tomato paste and a teaspoon salt (I used Diamond kosher salt.)
  2. Pour it in: Pour the mixture into the bowl, making sure to cover the bulgur fully.
Soaked fine bulgur in a bowl
  1. Rest & Fluff: Let it soak for 10-15 minutes or until the liquid is fully absorbed and bulgur is cooked. Fluff it with a fork before adding the rest of the ingredients.

How To Make It?

Once the bulgur wheat is cooked, the rest of making Mediterranean salad is relatively easy. Simply:

person showing how to make bulgur wheat salad with step by step photos
  1. Make the tabbouleh dressing: Whisk together the freshly squeezed lemon juice with olive oil and salt and pepper in a bowl. Set it aside.
  2. Chop the herbs & green onions: Prep the parsley, mint, dill, and scallions and place them on top of the soaked bulgur.
  3. Pour the dressing over & mix: Drizzle the salad with the dressing and give it a gentle mix to combine.
  4. Taste for seasoning and serve: Give it a taste and add in more if necessary. Serve.

Make-Ahead Instructions:

If you want to make it a day earlier, I recommend soaking the bulgur, chopping the herbs and scallions, and keeping them in an airtight container. You can also prep the dressing and store them separately in the fridge. 

When ready to serve, pour the dressing over and give the tabouli mix a gentle toss to combine.

Storage Tips & How Long Will It Keep In the Fridge?

To store, place your Mediterranean bulgur salad into an airtight container and place it in the fridge. It should stay fresh in the fridge for up to 3 days.

Keep in mind that this is one of those salads that gets better as it sits. I personally enjoy it more on the next day. For that reason, I usually make this easy tabbouleh recipe as a part of my weekly meal prep.

A bowl of Middle Eastern tabbouleh salad recipe in a bowl with a wooden spoon on the side.

Variations:

The beauty of this Turkish tabbouleh is that it can be customized in various ways to make it match your taste buds. Here are a few variations you can try:

  • Tabbouleh without bulgur: If you prefer this recipe without bulgur or following a gluten-free diet, be sure to try my Quinoa Tabbouleh Salad recipe.
  • With Tomatoes and Cucumber: While it is not traditionally added into tabbouli, you can add half a cup of each chopped fresh tomato and cucumber into your tabbouleh.
  • Without Parsley: If you are not a fan of fresh parsley, you can substitute it with a combination of fresh mint and dill. If you do not prefer using fresh herbs, you can chop a few cups of romaine lettuce thinly and use that instead. 
  • Warm Tabbouleh Salad: You can serve this salad warm by heating it in the microwave for 15-30 seconds until it reaches the temperature of your liking.
  • Red bulgur tabbouleh: If you live in the US and shop for bulgur in the supermarkets, you will likely be able to find Bob’s Red Mills’ red bulgur. This Mediterranean bulgur and parsley salad can be made with red bulgur. However, I recommend following my detailed instructions on cooking red bulgur rather than soaking it.

Serving Suggestions & Calories:

The easy tabbouleh recipe below makes about 4 cups of tabbouleh. I thought it would be ideal to serve 1 cup per serving, which is about 386 calories.

What To Serve it With:

While it is traditionally served as a meze, I usually serve this Middle Eastern salad with bulgur as a side dish with meat and chicken dishes or as a light salad by itself. Below are a few recipes that I recommend to enjoy your salad:

Tabbouleh Salad in a bowl with a wooden spoon on the side top view
Print

Easy Tabbouleh Recipe

My mom's Easy Tabbouleh recipe made with fine bulgur, fresh parsley, mint and dill and drizzled with a zesty dressing. This vegan Mediterranean/Middle Eastern meze / side dish comes together in less than 30 minutes and can be enjoyed with meat and chicken dishes or by itself as a light and healthy meal.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean, Middle Eastern
Prep Time 15 minutes
Resting Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 cups/servings
Calories 386kcal

Ingredients

For The Fine Bulgur:

  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 1 ¼ cups of boiling water
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 cup fine bulgur

For The Dressing:

  • ½ cup of olive oil
  • ¼ cup lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Tabbouleh Salad:

  • 1 cup fresh parsley finely chopped
  • 1 cup fresh dill finely chopped*
  • ½ cup fresh mint leaves roughly chopped*
  • 3-4 stalks of green onions chopped with both green and white parts

Instructions

  • In a measuring cup, whisk together tomato paste, water, and salt until fully combined.
  • Place fine bulgur in a large bowl and pour the mixture over it. Let it rest on the counter for 10-15 minutes or until the whole liquid is absorbed. Fluff it with a fork.
  • Meanwhile, make the dressing by whisking together olive oil, lemon juice, and salt and pepper.
  • Add in the herbs and scallions into the bowl and drizzle it with the dressing.
  • Give it a gentle toss, taste for seasoning and add in if necessary. Serve.

Notes

  • A note on herbs: If you are not a fan of mint and dill, you can substitute them with an equal amount of fresh parsley.
  • A note on the amount of bulgur used: If you prefer using less bulgur, feel free to half the amount that is used. If you do so, soak 1/2 cup bulgur with 2/3 cups of boiling water mixed in with 1 tablespoon of tomato paste and 1/2 teaspoon salt.
  • Taste for seasoning: The recipe written here uses the least amount of salt, but be sure to taste it at the end to make sure that it is to your liking.
  • To store: Place the leftovers in an airtight container and keep in the fridge up to 3 days.
  • Freezing? I would not recommend freezing tabbouleh salad.

Nutrition

Calories: 386kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 964mg | Potassium: 469mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 2626IU | Vitamin C: 41mg | Calcium: 85mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/easy-tabbouleh-recipe/feed/ 6
How To Cook Bulgur Wheat https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-bulgur/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-bulgur/#comments Tue, 02 Mar 2021 22:40:33 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=39524 I recently published a post explaining what bulgur wheat is, where I did a deep dive into the types of…]]>

I recently published a post explaining what bulgur wheat is, where I did a deep dive into the types of bulgur, where it originated, how it is different from cracked wheat, it’s nutritional values, and where to find it.

In this post, we are going back to basics again and covering how to cook bulgur wheat. Below you will find details on how to make my basic bulgur recipe based on its type, along with instructions on cooking it on the stovetop, microwave, and rice cooker.

A bowl of bulgur garnished with flat leaf parsley.

If you are into Mediterranean & Middle Eastern cooking, be sure to check out all my Turkish recipes.

Water Ratio for Cooking:

Before I continue explaining how to cook bulgur I think it is important to provide you with the water to bulgur ratio for cooking my basic bulgur recipe. This ratio works for any type of bulgur regardless of its size, except when cooking it in a rice cooker.

I find that the ratio of 1 to 2, meaning 1 cup of bulgur to 2 cups of water, provides the best-cooked bulgur. 

Water, salt, and bulgur showing the ratio of bulgur to water

In short, the water-to-bulgur ratio for each method is below:

  • Soaking for extra fine (or fine) bulgur – 1:2 – 1 cup bulgur wheat to 2 cups of boiling water/liquid
  • Stovetop – 1:2 – 1 cup bulgur wheat to 2 cups of water/liquid
  • Microwave – 1:2 – 1 cup bulgur wheat to 2 cups of water/liquid
  • Rice Cooker – 1:1 – 1 cup bulgur wheat to 1 cup of water/liquid

In terms of liquid, you can use a combination of water, chicken, or vegetable stock

Do I Need To Wash It Before Cooking?

The answer to this question is that it is up to you.

Growing up, my mom would always wash bulgur before cooking it. When I say wash, I mean she would put it in a fine-mesh strainer and rinse it under cold water for 30-45 seconds before cooking it.

Nowadays, if I am buying packaged bulgur, I do not rinse it before cooking. The only time I give it a quick rinse is if I am using the bulgur that I purchased from the bulk bin, as it is sold in open containers and can get dusty quickly.

I do not feel any difference between rinsed and not rinsed bulgur after it is cooked in terms of taste.

Cooking Fine versus Coarse Bulgur:

If you have shopped for it before, you know that there are 4 common types of bulgur:

Types of bulgur wheat in small cips with their respective names on each side
  1. Fine bulgur also referred to as Extra Fine, Quick Cooking Bulgur, or #1 
  2. Medium Coarse Bulgur or #2 
  3. Coarse Bulgur or #3
  4. Extra Coarse Bulgur or #4 

While the basic cooking method for any type of bulgur wheat can be done by placing it into a saucepan with water, I prefer cooking fine bulgur differently than other types of bulgur. Because it is so small in size, I do not see any point in boiling it. 

Instead, I soak it.

How To Cook Fine Bulgur?

There is a reason why some people refer to fine bulgur as “quick-cooking bulgur.” Similar to the other types, it has a subtle nutty flavor. Since it is so small, you do not need to cook it on the stove. Instead, just soak it in hot liquid. Here is how:

Person showing how to cook fine bulgur
  1. Place a cup of fine bulgur into a large bowl and pour 2 cups of boiling hot water (or vegetable or chicken stock) over it. 
  2. Let it soak for 10-12 minutes. The cooking time for fine bulgur should be no longer 12 minutes but feel free to taste and let it sit longer if necessary.
Person fluffing bulgur with a fork
  1. Fluff it with a fork and use it in your recipe.

How To Cook Coarse Bulgur Wheat? The Stove Top Method:

Please know that the method of cooking I am listing below would work for medium-coarse, coarse grind, and extra-coarse bulgur. However, the cooking time might be slightly different depending on their size. 

You can find the timing according to the size of the bulgur below.

To Cook Coarse Bulgur on the stovetop:

person showing how to cook bulgur wheat with step by step shots
  1. Place coarse bulgur and water into a medium-size saucepan. If you want, you can add ¼ teaspoon of kosher salt for flavor.
  2. Bring it to a boil in medium heat, put the lid on, turn it down to low heat and let it cook until all (or most of the liquid) is absorbed.
Person fluffing cooked bulgur wheat with a fork
  1. Let it rest for 5 minutes and fluff it with a fork before using it in your recipe.

One cup of dry bulgur yields approximately 4 cups of cooked bulgur.

Do I need to soak coarse bulgur?

You can if you want. And it will soften as it soaks. 

However, because it takes no longer than 15-20 minutes from start to finish to cook it, I think soaking coarse bulgur is not a necessary step.

Cooking Time For Various Coarse Bulgur Types:

The times listed below are after the liquid comes to a full boil.

  • Medium coarse bulgur #2 takes about 12 minutes to cook
  • Coarse bulgur #3 takes between 12 to 14 minutes
  • Extra coarse bulgur #4 takes about 15 minutes

How About Cooking Red Bulgur?

If you live in the US and go to a supermarket to buy packaged bulgur, you will find out that the popular Bob’s Red Mill brand sells red bulgur.

The difference between regular yellow bulgur and red bulgur is that the yellow one is made from durum wheat (also known as pasta wheat) (source), and the red one is made from whole grain red wheat.

A jar of red bulgur with other types of bulgur in jars around it.

Compared to durum wheat, red wheat is softer, and because of that, it cooks faster. Therefore, the cooking time for red bulgur is slightly shorter. The cooking process is no different, and it takes about 12-13 minutes for it to cook.

In terms of nutrition and texture, red bulgur has a similar profile of vitamins and minerals and a chewy texture.

As you can see in the image, in terms of size, it is close to medium coarse bulgur (#2), and it takes about the same amount of time to cook.

Microwave Cooking Instructions:

Similar to cooking quinoa in a microwave, the fastest way to cook bulgur is in the microwave. From start to finish, it takes about 13 minutes to cook. 

The method I explain below was tested with medium bulgur (#2) as it is the most widely available in the US. 

The cook time for other coarse types might be 1-3 minutes, depending on the size, and should be adjusted accordingly.

To cook it in the microwave:

  1. Place 1 cup of bulgur in a large microwave-safe glass bowl. Pour two cups of water over it. If you want, you can add a pinch of salt as well.
  2. Put a microwave-safe plate or a lid over the bowl, making sure that it covers it entirely.
  3. Microwave bulgur on high for 5 minutes, carefully remove it from the microwave, give it a stir, put the lid on, and microwave for another 3 minutes. 
  4. When it is done, there might be some liquid in the bowl. That is normal. Remove it from the microwave and let it sit on the counter for 5 minutes. As it sits, the water will be fully absorbed. 
  5. Fluff it with a fork and serve.

One cup of uncooked coarse bulgur cooked in the microwave yields approximately 3 ⅓ cups of cooked bulgur.

Rice Cooker Cooking Instructions:

I find that cooking bulgur wheat in a rice cooker is convenient as there is no need to tend it. It takes longer, 45-50 minutes, compared to all other cooking methods, but I appreciate the fact that there is no need to babysit it.

I tested the recipe below in my Aroma Rice Cooker (affiliate link), both with medium-coarse and coarse bulgur and the cooking time was not much different. 

To Cook it in a Rice Cooker:

  1. Place 1 cup of bulgur wheat and 1 cup of water in the bowl of your rice cooker. 
  2. Secure the lid and set it to cook on brown rice setting.
  3. It should take somewhere between 45-55 minutes from start to finish. 

Depending on the rice cooker you are using, there might be slight differences in settings. I tested this recipe using both the white rice and brown site settings, and the results in terms of cook time and taste were not different.

One cup of uncooked bulgur cooked in a rice cooker yields approximately 3 ½ cups of cooked bulgur.

How To Cook It Turkish Style?

Even though I am sharing a detailed post on how to cook bulgur like rice, I never cooked it this way until I moved to the US. 

Turkish Bulgur Pilaf in a bowl with a spoon on the side

My Turkish mom always cooked it like rice, and we called it Bulgur Pilaf. It is what she served as a side dish with almost every meal.

I wrote a whole detailed post on how to cook Turkish Bulgur Pilaf and use bulgur as a rice substitute, so be sure to check that out for more information on cooking it like rice.

What if I am Cooking it for tabouli?

In Turkey, we use extra fine bulgur for tabouli salad (aka fresh herb and bulgur salad widely popular in Middle Eastern cuisine). This is not to say you can not use other varieties, but that is just how my mom (and many other Turkish cooks) did/does.

As it is with any other grain, while cooking fine bulgur, you can use any type of liquid you want to match your recipe’s flavor profile.

Person showing how to soak fine bulgur wheat to make tabbouleh

For example, if you are cooking bulgur wheat for tabouli, you can mix in a few tablespoons of tomato paste and salt into the boiling water and soak it in that mixture. This way, your tabbouleh salad will have a nice tomato-ey flavor that carries throughout the whole dish.

The same goes for soaking it in chicken or vegetable broth. The important thing here is to make sure that the liquid is boiling hot so that bulgur will cook quickly.

You can soak it in non-boiling liquid, but it will take longer to soften/cook.

Freezing Instructions:

You might ask, can you freeze cooked bulgur. The answer is yes, and here is how you can do it:

  1. Bring cooked bulgur wheat to room temperature.
  2. Line a sheet of parchment paper on a baking sheet. Spread the cooked bulgur evenly in a single layer.
  3. Place the sheet in the freezer. Freeze for at least 2 hours or until frozen. 
  4. Remove and place it in an airtight container or freezer bag (just be sure to remove the air from it)

Should Bulgur Wheat Be Crunchy?

No, it should not. Instead, it should be soft and slightly chewy similar to brown rice.

What Is A Good Substitute?

My favorite substitute for bulgur is quinoa, especially if you are looking for a gluten-free alternative.

While they taste quite different, I like that they offer a pretty similar texture when used in recipes. Therefore, recipes like the popular tabouli can be made with quinoa.

Wheat berries, farro, and barley can also be a great substitute for bulgur. If you need more substitution ideas, be sure to check our article on Bulgur Substitutes.

Do you have a favorite bulgur brand you recommend?

I usually buy bulgur from a local Turkish supermarket. However, if I don’t have time to go there, I usually order it online. Below are brands that I use and recommend. Please know that these are affiliate links:

Both of these brands offer various types of bulgur you can use in your cooking. I have used and continue to use and recommend them.

Recipe Ideas:

Now that you have some cooked bulgur, here are a few ways to use it in recipes:

  1. Basic Seasoned Bulgur Bowl: The most straightforward way to serve is to place this basic bulgur recipe in a bowl, drizzle it with olive oil, a squeeze of lemon juice, salt, and pepper. If you have it, you can also sprinkle it with chopped flat-leaf parsley and or fresh mint. You can serve it with a drizzle of yogurt dressing or a bowl of Tzatziki sauce on the side.
  2. Serve it as a side dish: I usually serve it with Ina’s Pot RoastChicken Fricassee, and even with my Orange Chicken with Fennel.
  3. Add into salads: Add a cup of cooked bulgur into any of your favorite salad recipes as a grain to make it more filling and meal-worthy. This Butternut Squash and Bulgur Wheat Salad is a great example.
  4. Use it as stuffing vegetables: One of my favorite vegetables to stuff is stuffed peppers. This Middle Eastern Stuffed Peppers recipe is one that I make often.
  5. Add it in soups, stews, and stir-fries: One of my favorite ways to use bulgur is by adding it to vegetarian/vegan recipes to mimic the texture of meat. This Vegan Chili recipe is an excellent example of this.
  6. For Breakfast: Try this Bulgur Breakfast Bowls recipe from my friends at Give Recipe.

Other Basic Grain Recipes You Might Like:

Cooked bulgur wheat placed in a bowl with a spoon on the side
Print

How To Cook Bulgur Wheat Recipe

Learn how to cook bulgur wheat with step by step instructions based on the type of bulgur you are using. This recipe includes cooking times for each type of bulgur.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Prep Time 3 minutes
Cook Time 14 minutes
Resting Time 10 minutes
Total Time 27 minutes
Servings 4 cups
Calories 120kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup bulgur medium-coarse, coarse, or extra coarse bulgur
  • 2 cups water you can also use vegetable/chicken stock
  • 1/4 teaspoon kosher salt

Instructions

  • Place bulgur, water, and salt into a medium-size saucepan over medium heat.
  • Give it a stir.
  • Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat to low and cook until the liquid is absorbed. For medium coarse bulgur (#2), cooking time should be around 12 minutes, for coarse bulgur (#3), cooking time should be 12-14 minutes, and for extra coarse bulgur (#4) cooking time should be around 15 minutes.
  • Once cooked, let it rest for 5-10 minutes with the lid on off the heat.
  • Fluff it with a fork and serve.

Notes

Microwave Method:
  1. Place 1cup bulgur and 2 cups of water in a large microwave-safe bowl. Cover it with a plate large enough to cover it fully.
  2. Microwave for 5 minutes, carefully remove from the microwave, give it a stir, put the plate back on, and cook for another 3 minutes.
  3. When it is done, there might be some liquid in the bowl. That is normal. Remove it from the microwave and let it sit on the counter for 5 minutes. As it sits, the water will be fully absorbed.
Rice Cooker Method:
  1. Place 1 cup of bulgur wheat and 1 cup of water in the bowl of your rice cooker. 
  2. Secure the lid and set it to cook on brown rice setting.
  3. It should take somewhere between 45-55 minutes from start to finish.
  4. Fluff it with a fork and serve.
How To Cook Fine Bulgur:
I prefer soaking fine bulgur (#1) instead of cooking it as it is so small. To cook fine bulgur using my soaking method:
  1. Place a cup of fine bulgur into a large bowl and pour 2 cups of boiling hot water over it. 
  2. Let it soak for 10-12 minutes. The cooking time for fine bulgur should be no longer 12 minutes but feel free to taste and let it sit longer if necessary.
  3. Fluff it with a fork and use it in your recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 120kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 157mg | Potassium: 144mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 3IU | Calcium: 16mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-bulgur/feed/ 36
What is Bulgur Wheat? https://foolproofliving.com/what-is-bulgur-wheat/ https://foolproofliving.com/what-is-bulgur-wheat/#comments Tue, 02 Mar 2021 21:02:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=39409 If you are interested in Middle Eastern or Mediterranean cooking, chances are that you have heard of bulgur (also referred…]]>

If you are interested in Middle Eastern or Mediterranean cooking, chances are that you have heard of bulgur (also referred to as burghul and bulgar.) In Turkey, recipes like bulgur pilaf and tabouli (kisir as we call in Turkish) were a staple in our house. 

After I moved to the US, I realized that most people don’t know what bulgur is. Because of that they are intimidated by it. They are also confused about what to buy at the grocery store when a recipe calls for bulgur. 

Bulgur wheat placed in jars in a kitchen setting

I thought it would be helpful if I were to create a guide for bulgur, where I explain everything you need to know about it, including what is it made of, types of bulgur, where to find it in supermarkets (and online), health/nutritional benefits (including protein value & calories), and recipe ideas to use it in your daily cooking.

I hope that with the help of this guide, from now on, you will be able to shop for bulgur and use it in your daily cooking with confidence.

After you learn all these basics, be sure to check out my detailed post of How To Cook Bulgur wheat with step by step instructions, tips and tricks, and recipe ideas to use it in. And if you are interested in Middle Eastern cooking, be sure to check all my Turkish recipes.

What is it made of? Is Cracked wheat and bulgur the same thing?

You cannot define bulgur wheat without first defining cracked wheat as they are pretty the same thing with one big difference.

Then you might ask, what is cracked wheat? 

According to this article I found on Dr. Weil, cracked wheat are whole wheat berries made by milling them into smaller pieces. This process reduces cooking time while preserving the nutrient and fiber-packed bran and germ layers. 

On the other hand, bulgur wheat is cracked wheat that is parboiled, dried, and then broken into various smaller pieces. This is why, when you look for bulgur you see most brands specify the type of bulgur on the packaging as fine (or also referred to as extra fine), medium-coarse, coarse, or extra coarse bulgur.

Additionally, the fact that bulgur wheat is cut into smaller pieces makes bulgur a quick-cooking grain. However, the process and time of cooking change depending on its size. 

To answer the initial question, crack wheat and bulgur are essentially the same things, but bulgur is parboiled (or steamed) during the processing. This is why bulgur cooks faster than crack wheat.

Different sizes of bulgar wheat placed in four bowls from the top view

Is bulgur whole wheat? 

Yes, it is, and the best explanation I was able to find comes from this article I found on Wikipedia:

“Bulgur is made from the cracked parboiled groats of several different species, most often durum wheat.”

If you are not familiar, durum wheat (also called pasta or macaroni wheat) is the second most cultivated wheat globally. 

Additionally, according to this article on Healthline, it is considered a whole grain because the entire wheat kernel; including the germ, endosperm, and bran, is eaten.

Is it Gluten-Free?

Since it is made from wheat, bulgur is not gluten-free. If you have celiac disease and/or follow a gluten-free diet, I would not recommend consuming bulgur. If you need a gluten free alternative for bulgur, be sure to check out our article on the best Bulgur Substitutes.

Where is it from?

While the specific country of origin is unknown, it is believed that it was born in the Levant region – the large area in the Eastern Mediterranean region that consists of Syria, Lebanon, Israel, Palestine, Jordan, Turkey, and Iraq.

With that being said, according to this article on Wikipedia, it is commonly used in Indian and Pakistani cuisine as a cereal to make sweet or savory porridge.

Types of Bulgur:

When you go to the store or search for it for purchasing it online, you will see that bulgur comes in different sizes. As I explained earlier, this is because bulgur is cut into various sizes during its production.

Various sizes of bulgur wheat placed in bowls with their names written next to them.

I think this is one of the main reasons why most people feel confused about which one to get for the dish they are making that calls for bulgur.

Bulgur Wheat comes in four different types and there are fine, medium coarse, coarse, and extra coarse bulgur.

Below you will find each type of bulgur with popular uses of recipes that you may have heard of. 

If you want to learn more about cooking each of these various sizes of bulgur, be sure to check out my post on How To Cook Bulgur Wheat.

Fine Bulgur: 

Also called quick-cooking bulgur and extra-fine bulgur, this is the smallest size of bulgur. Some brands also advertise it as #1.

Extra fine bulgur in a bowl

In Turkish cuisine, this is what we use in making kisir (aka tabbouleh salad). Since it is so small, it cooks the fastest compared to its medium and coarse varieties.

While some other Middle Eastern countries cook it like rice on the stovetop, in Turkish cuisine, we soak fine bulgur in boiling hot water for about 10 minutes instead of cooking it on the stovetop in a pan. 

Medium Coarse Bulgur:

Medium-coarse bulgur is the most widely available type of bulgur in the US. This is the variety of bulgur you find in the bulk bins of most supermarket chains. Some brands advertise it as #2.

Medium coarse and red bulgur from in bowls from the top view

As the name suggests, it is medium coarse. In other words, in terms of its size, it is between fine and coarse.

Medium coarse bulgur can be used to make bulgur pilaf, porridge and as an addition to various stuffing, salad, meatball, soup, stew, and stir fry recipes. 

While I am sure there are exceptions, you can use medium-coarse bulgur in many recipes where you use rice, quinoa, and couscous.

Red Bulgur – How is it different than the regular kind?

There is also red bulgur, which is also considered a medium-coarse cut. Bob’s Red Mill sells red bulgur and advertises it as a quick-cooking whole grain in the US.

As the name implies, red bulgur is darker in color. It is made from whole grain red wheat, which is softer than yellow bulgur made from durum wheat (the hardest of all wheat.)

Person scooping red bulgur in a jar

Because of that, technically, it cooks faster compared to bulgur made from durum wheat. However, during my recipe testings in my own kitchen, I found that the difference in time was no longer than a few minutes. 

Coarse & Extra Coarse Bulgur:

These are the largest size when it comes to types of bulgur. They are also advertised as #3 & #4. In Turkey, we refer to coarse bulgur as pilavlik bulgur, which means bulgur used for making pilaf.

Due to being the largest bulgur type, it takes the longest to cook. If you want to cook bulgur like rice, I find that this is the best type of bulgur to use.

Coarse bulgur placed in a bowl close up

With that being said, depending on the recipe that you are using, the time difference in cooking between medium-coarse and coarse bulgur is usually no longer than 2-4 minutes. 

This is why, in general, you can use medium-coarse and coarse bulgur interchangeably and cook them the same way. A great example of this is my tomato bulgur pilaf recipe. Either type of bulgur can be used to make bulgur pilaf and deliver great results.

What Does It Taste Like?

Bulgur has an earthy and nutty flavor. It has a satisfying chewy texture, which is why it is usually served as a side dish for chicken and meat dishes in the Middle Eastern Cuisine. This is also why bulgur makes the best stuffing/filling in vegetarian recipes, similar to how I used it in this Middle Eastern Stuffed Peppers recipe.

Nutrition Facts:

According to this article in Healthline, because it is minimally processed, it is a nutritious grain than more refined wheat products. It is high in fiber and offers a variety of vitamins and minerals.

A bowl of cooked bulgur garnished with parsley

1 cup (182 grams) of cooked bulgur offers (source 1 & source 2):

  • Calories: 151
  • Carbs: 34 grams
  • Protein: 5.6 grams – 11% of the Daily Intake
  • Fat: 0 grams
  • Fiber: 8 grams
  • Folate: 8% of the Daily Intake 
  • Vitamin B6: 8% of the DI
  • Niacin: 9% of the DI
  • Manganese: 55% of the DI
  • Magnesium: 15% of the DI
  • Iron: 10% of the DI

As you can see above, bulgur is rich in manganese. This mineral has many health benefits, including but not limited to improving bone health and blood sugar regulation and reducing inflammation. (Source)

Where to find it in the supermarket?

Nowadays, you can easily find bulgur in the international section (Mediterranean or Middle Eastern sections) of most supermarkets. I also recommend looking for it in bulk bins in major supermarkets like Whole Foods and Fresh Market.

Different brands and sizes of it in packages

You can also find it online on Amazon. Below are the brands my mom used and I still use to this day (These are affiliate links):

Storage & Shelf Life

Bulgur should be stored in an airtight container and protected from light, heat, and moisture. As it is with any other whole grain, as long as it is properly stored, it should be fresh for up to 24 months.

What do I do with it? Recipe Ideas:

Now that you know what to look for and which type of bulgur to buy, here are a few ways I recommend using it in your daily cooking:

A recipe idea to use it in
  1. Enjoy it simply by boiling in water similar to the way you cook rice or pasta. Check out my post on how to cook coarse bulgur perfectly for more information.
  2. Make Bulgur Pilaf
  3. Add a cup of cooked bulgur wheat to salads. If you need inspiration, you can use it in all my quinoa salad recipes in place of quinoa.
  4. Make tabbouleh 
  5. Add it into soups to give it a texture & to thicken – An excellent example of this is my Vegan Chili, where I used to provide the meaty texture to compensate for the lack of ground beef.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/what-is-bulgur-wheat/feed/ 14
Chicken Rice Pilaf with Fresh Herbs (Turkish Style) https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-pilaf-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-pilaf-recipe/#comments Mon, 21 Dec 2020 05:53:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=5305 Today’s recipe, Chicken Rice Pilaf, comes from my mother’s cookbook that I inherited after her passing. This easy pilaf recipe…]]>

Today’s recipe, Chicken Rice Pilaf, comes from my mother’s cookbook that I inherited after her passing. This easy pilaf recipe was an elevated version of her Vermicelli Rice that she would make during the holiday season. It is the newest addition to my collection of easy Turkish recipes.

Nowadays, I make it every time I make chicken stock and/or have leftover shredded chicken that I want to use. With that being said, I wrote the recipe below in a way that shows you how to prepare and cook chicken from scratch just in case you do not have leftover chicken on hand.

Chicken and Rice Pilaf garnished with fresh herbs on an oval plate with a spoon on the side.

I serve this dish as an entree, but it could also be served as a side dish with chicken recipes

What Is Rice Pilaf, and how is it different from rice?

If you do a quick search online, you will see that the term “pilaf” has many names depending on the cuisine it is featured in. In Turkey, we call it pilav, whereas, in other countries, it has been referred to as plov, pilau, and pilaf. They are essentially the same thing, white (mostly long-grain or jasmine rice) cooked with aromatics.

The difference between “rice” and “rice pilaf” is the technique that is used for cooking them. Rice is cooked by first boiling water and then adding rice in it without any additional flavorings. Whereas, rice pilaf is cooked by first sautéing rice with aromatics like butter, spices, onion, garlic, etc., and then cooking it in water/broth. 

In the Mediterranean and Middle Eastern cuisines, rice pilaf is usually cooked by sauteing orzo or vermicelli noodles with butter before adding in the rice.

Chicken Thighs and Rice Pilaf in a dutch oven from the top view.

What Kind of Rice Do You Use In This Recipe?

The type of rice I used in this recipe is long-grain white rice. To me, long-grain white rice provides me with a similar taste to my mom’s chicken pilaf recipe.

Ingredients:

This easy chicken pilaf recipe has two sets of ingredients. The first set is for the chicken and the second set is for the rice pilaf.

For The Chicken:

Ingredients for chicken plov laid out on a marble counter

As I mentioned earlier, I usually make this chicken pilaf when I have leftover store-bought rotisserie chicken or if I have some leftover from making chicken stock. Feel free to skip cooking the chicken (and the chicken ingredients) if you are using leftover chicken as well.

If not, gather bone-in chicken thighs, onion, garlic, lemon juice, and water. 

For The Rice Pilaf:

To cook the chicken rice pilaf, you will need butter, orzo, long-grain white rice, allspice, ground cinnamon, pine nuts, and water (or chicken stock).

Greek chicken and rice ingredients from the top view.

You will also need dried currants, scallions, fresh dill, and fresh herbs to flavor and garnish this chicken rice pilaf recipe. 

Substitutions for Ingredients:

  • Chicken: I used chicken thighs, but you can also use chicken breast or drumsticks. I prefer using a bone-in chicken to provide more flavor, but any chicken you have on hand would work in this recipe.
    I usually remove the skin, but it is a personal preference, and either way would work.
  • Dried Currants: If you cannot find dried currants, you can also use dried golden raisins.
  • Orzo: You can substitute orzo with vermicelli noodles.
  • Pine nuts: You can use sliced or slivered almonds in place of pine nuts.

Step By Step Instructions – How To Make It:

The recipe for this stove-top rice pilaf has three folds. 

The first step is cooking the chicken, the second is cooking the rice pilaf with aromatics, and the final step is garnishing it with fresh herbs, currants, and scallions.

How To Prepare Chicken?

Start with cooking chicken thighs with the aromatics. To do so:

Showing how to cook the chicken
  1. Prep the chicken: Place chicken thighs, onion, garlic, lemon juice, 1-teaspoon salt, and water in a saucepan with a lid over medium heat.
  2. Bring it to a boil & let it simmer: Once it comes to a boil, lower the heat and let it simmer until the chicken is cooked through, skimming off any foam collected on the top. This should take about 20-25 minutes.
Person shredding the chicken with two forks
  1. Shred the chicken: Reserve a cup of the liquid to use to cook the rice. Using two forks, shred the chicken into small bite-sized pieces. Set aside. Discard the rest of the liquid, bones, and cooked vegetables.

Soak Currants:

To me, what makes this chicken rice pilaf so special is the addition of currants. The sweetness of dried currants mixed with pine nuts and fresh herbs transforms this otherwise boring rice pilaf recipe into an incredibly flavorful one. Soaking the currants in hot water allows them to plump up. 

Person soaking dried currants

All you have to do is to place them in a bowl and pour over some boiling water and let them sit while you are cooking the chicken and rice.

How to make rice pilaf on the stove?

Start working on cooking the rice pilaf as your chicken is cooking. To cook rice pilaf on the stove, simply:

Person showing how to make rice pilaf with orzo
  1. Saute orzo with unsalted butter: Heat butter in a Dutch oven (or any other heavy bottom pot with a lid) over medium heat. Add orzo and cook, stirring constantly until it is browned. This will take about 5-7 minutes, and your kitchen will smell amazing. Don’t be alarmed if your orzo looks like it is burned a little bit. That is fine. 
  2. Add the rest of the flavoring agents & rice: Stir in allspice, cinnamon, pine nuts, and white rice. Sautee, stirring constantly for 6-7 minutes. Make sure that the rice is thoroughly mixed in the rest of the ingredients. Season with salt and pepper.
  3. Pour in the liquid: Add 1 cup of the reserved liquid (from cooking the chicken) and 2 ⅓ cups of boiling water over the rice. Give it a stir. Put the lid on, bring it to a boil, turn down the heat to low, cover tightly with the lid, and simmer for 20 minutes or until all the water is absorbed.

Garnish & Let It Rest:

Once the pilaf is cooked, remove the lid and top it off with the shredded chicken, drained currants, fresh chopped parsley, dill, and scallions.

Easy rice pilaf with chicken in a dutch oven from the top view.

Put the lid back on and let it rest for 15 minutes. The steam in the cooked rice will warm up the chicken. 

How To Serve?

After it is rested, give it a gentle toss and make sure the fresh herbs and chicken are mixed in with the rice pilaf. 

I usually serve this chicken pilaf recipe as a centerpiece in a large oval serving or casserole dish. With all the sweet and savory ingredients, it makes the most delicious looking holiday dish. While it is optional, I also recommend seasoning it with a generous amount of freshly ground black pepper at the very end. That is exactly how my mom served this Turkish pilaf with chicken recipe.

Alternatively, you can serve it with vegetable sides such as Butter Garlic Green Beans, Instant Pot Carrots, or Roasted Sweet Potatoes.

Variations:

  • Baked Chicken and Rice Pilaf: Alternatively, you can use this rice pilaf to stuff a whole chicken (like you would do with turkey) and cook it in the oven. If you prefer to do that, skip cooking the chicken separately and cook the pilaf as it is written in the recipe. Fill the cavity of your chicken with the cooked pilaf and roast it in the oven. When ready to serve, garnish with the fresh herbs and scallions.
  • Chicken Rice Pilaf Casserole: If you follow the recipe below, you will see that I took advantage of the steam in the pot and warmed the chicken on top of the cooked rice. Alternatively, you can place the cooked rice in a casserole dish, top it off with the shredded chicken, and warm it up in a 300 degrees F oven for 15-20 minutes.

How To Store Leftovers? & How To Freeze?

Leftovers kept in an airtight container in the fridge should keep fresh up to 3 days. When reheating, you might have to add some water into the rice.

I have never been successful with freezing rice. Although you can technically freeze this dish, it becomes so mushy that I would not recommend it.

Other Chicken Recipes You Might Also Like:

There you have it, friends, an easy healthy rice pilaf recipe that is (to me) the best way to use leftover chicken. If you are adventurous in the kitchen and want to try chicken recipes from all over the world, here are a few other recipes you might also like:

Chicken Rice Pilaf Recipe in a dutch oven
Print

Chicken Rice Pilaf Recipe

This Chicken Rice Pilaf recipe is an easy to make one pot recipe that is flavored with currants, all spice and pine nuts. While in the recipe below, I cook my chicken from scratch, It is also a great way to use leftover chicken for a filling and flavorful meal.
Course Main Course
Cuisine Mediterranean
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6 servings
Calories 567kcal

Ingredients

To Cook The Chicken:

  • 1 1/2 pounds bone-in chicken thighs washed skins removed
  • 1 large or 2 small onions, cut into 4 pieces
  • 2 cloves of garlic cut into smaller pieces
  • 2 tablespoons of lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 8 cups of water

For The Currants:

  • 1/4 cup dried currants
  • 1 cup water

For The Rice:

  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 1/4 cup orzo
  • 1 1/2 teaspoons all spice
  • 1/2 teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • 1/2 cup pine nuts
  • 1 1/2 cup long-grain rice rinsed thoroughly
  • 2 1/3 cup water boiling hot

As Garnish:

  • 1/2 cup fresh dill roughly chopped
  • 1/2 cup fresh parsley roughly chopped
  • 2 stalks of scallions (green parts only) – chopped
  • 1 tsp kosher salt
  • 1/2 tsp ground black pepper

Instructions

Cook the chicken and make a quick chicken stock:

  • Place chicken thighs, onion, garlic, lemon juice, 1-teaspoon salt, and water in a large pot. Bring it to a boil, and then gently simmer (in medium-low heat) until the chicken is cooked through, skimming and discarding the foam from the top as you go, 25-30 minutes.
  • Transfer the chicken thighs to a plate, and allow them to cool for 10 minutes. Using two forks shred them into smaller and thinner strips. Cover with aluminum foil and set aside. Discard the bones. Reserve 1 cup of the liquid that the chicken was cooked in.

Soak Currants:

  • Place currants in a small bowl and pour boiling water over it. Set aside.

Cook the rice:

  • Heat the butter in a large pan. Add orzo, and cook, stirring constantly, until brown. It will look like it is (almost) burning. This will take 5-7 minutes.
  • Add the allspice, cinnamon, pine nuts, and rice. Cook in medium heat, stirring constantly for 6-7 minutes, making sure that the rice is thoroughly mixed with orzo and spices.
  • Add 1 cup of the reserved liquid and 2 1/3 cups of boiling water, 1-teaspoon salt and 1/2 teaspoon black pepper. Give it a stir. Bring it to a boil, turn down the heat to low, cover tightly with the lid, and simmer for 20 minutes or until all the water is absorbed.

Garnish and rest:

  • Remove from the heat. Open the lid, place the shredded chicken on top of the rice. Drain the currants and scatter it on top of the chicken.
  • Top it off with the fresh herbs and scallions on top of the chicken and currants. Put the lid back on and let it rest (steam) for 15 minutes.
  • Give it a gentle mix making sure that the shredded chicken pieces are equally distributed within the dish. Place it in a serving or casserole dish,
  • When ready to serve, season it with freshly grounded black pepper.

Notes

  • The amount of water and time to cook the rice may differ based on the brand you use. Check for the cooking directions on the package for the right amount of water and time to cook the rice.
  • I used 1 cup of the liquid that the chicken was cooked in to enhance the chicken flavor and subtracted that 1 cup from the total amount of water I needed to cook the rice.

Nutrition

Calories: 567kcal | Carbohydrates: 57g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 104mg | Sodium: 497mg | Potassium: 702mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1219IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 87mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-pilaf-recipe/feed/ 7
Mediterranean Quinoa Salad Recipe (Ready in 30 Min!) https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-quinoa-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-quinoa-salad/#comments Thu, 02 Apr 2020 21:11:41 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=28187 Meal-worthy quinoa salads are popular for a reason. They are easy and quick to make and with a powerhouse ingredient…]]>

Meal-worthy quinoa salads are popular for a reason. They are easy and quick to make and with a powerhouse ingredient like quinoa, they are good for you too. Today’s recipe, Mediterranean Quinoa Salad, is packed with other superfoods like tomatoes, olives, parsley, and more.

As I was creating this recipe, I took some inspiration from my Southwestern Quinoa Salad, Kale Quinoa Salad, Quinoa Lentil and Feta Salad, and Quinoa Squash Salad but incorporated a modern, Mediterranean twist (much like my Quinoa Tabouli).

Fan of quinoa? Be sure to check out all our Quinoa Recipes.

A bowl of Mediterranean Quinoa Salad with Chickpeas

Since quinoa is fluffy and delicate, it is better at absorbing looser vinaigrettes rather than creamy dressings. That’s why I decided to drizzle it with my homemade Lemon Vinaigrette.

This Mediterranean Quinoa Salad may be fresh and light, but it will certainly fill you up with good-for-you ingredients. Enjoy cold for lunch or serve it to all your friends during the warmer months as a wonderfully healthy side dish. It just so happens to be Gluten-Free and Vegetarian, too!

Ingredients

This easy Mediterranean quinoa bowl is made with a simple lemon vinaigrette, quinoa, cherry tomatoes, Persian cucumbers, Kalamata olives, chickpeas, red onion, Feta cheese, and Italian parsley (or arugula).

All ingredients for the recipe are laid out on the counter
  • Cooked Quinoa: It is no secret quinoa is a great protein with a number of benefits for those of us following a wholesome diet. You can cook quinoa on the stove, in microwave, in a rice cooker or in a pressure cooker. I bacth cook some every week, divide it into portions and freeze them in small portions to use throughout the week.
    For this recipe, white, red, or tricolor would all work.
  • Kalamata Olives: Known as ‘Greek black olives,’ Kalamata olives are deep-purple, plump and oblong. These were the olives I grew up eating and those you will find in many Greek and Mediterranean recipes. You can typically find them at the Olive Bar in large grocery stores or in the same aisle as jarred olives. Purchase the pitted variety for easy chopping.
  • Italian Parsley: Make sure to purchase flat-leaf parsley, since curly parsley does not have much flavor, and always look for bright, vibrant, crisp leaves.
  • Arugula: Arugula can be considered a ‘fancy’ ingredient that many people think is more expensive than other greens. But I find it to be just as economical when purchased in moderation. I love baby arugula for its tender leaves and milder, peppery bite, which you can find year-round in the packaged greens section of most grocery stores.

How To Make It?

This cold Quinoa Cucumber Feta salad recipe has all the qualities of a Greek Salad with a plant-based twist! Simply:

Step by step photos on how to make quinoa salad with feta
  1. Make the vinaigrette. In a small mason jar, combine the olive oil, lemon juice, garlic, Dijon mustard, salt and pepper. Shake vigorously for 30 seconds to emulsify.
  2. Dress the quinoa. Place the cooked quinoa (preferably warm – see PRO TIP below) in a large bowl and drizzle half of the lemon dressing on top. Stir to combine.
  3. Add the prepared vegetables. Add the cherry tomatoes, Persian cucumbers, Kalamata olives, chickpeas, and red onion. Toss together with the remaining dressing.
  4. Finish with Feta and greens! Add in the crumbled feta cheese and Italian parsley or arugula. Give it a gentle toss (so as not to wilt the greens), taste for seasoning and add, if necessary. Serve warm, room temperature or cold.

PRO TIP: Pouring the dressing over the quinoa while it is still warm ensures the quinoa absorbs more flavor. The tiny grains act as a sponge to soak up that wonderful citrus dressing!

Can I Make This Salad In Advance?

Yes and no.

If you are prepping this vegetable quinoa salad for lunch, then yes, I would simply follow the recipe as written and store it in the fridge for a few days.

However, if you are planning to serve to a crowd, feel free to cook the quinoa one day in advance and drizzle it with half of the lemon vinaigrette recipe while it is still warm (as noted above). I would then store the dressed quinoa, remaining dressing and all other ingredients in separate containers in the fridge.

When ready to serve, add all the ingredients in a large bowl and gently toss to combine.

How To Store?

This quinoa salad will keep best for up to 2 days in an airtight container in the fridge.

I love prepping it the night before. It makes a wonderful cold grain salad my husband and I enjoy as a light lunch during the week.

What Dishes Go Well With This Salad?

Since this recipe is packed with protein, carbs and fat, I often enjoy it as a complete meal for lunch. But for those nights when I want a hearty, full-flavored meal, I serve this simple quinoa salad as a side dish to some of my favorite meat dishes such as:

  • Whole Roasted Chicken with Potatoes: I cannot imagine a better salad recipe to serve this simple roasted chicken recipe.
  • Mediterranean Lemon Chicken: If you want to make the theme of your meal fully Mediterranean, serve this salad with this weeknight lemon chicken.
  • Turkish Meatballs: I usually make a batch of these meatballs and serve them with this salad. This combo is also a great meal prep option.

Calories:

One serving of this quinoa bowl is only 378 calories. You can find more information on the nutritional values of this salad in the recipe card below.

It’s Gluten-Free, Vegetarian and packed with a generous amount of vegetables and plant-based protein to keep me satisfied until dinner.

A bowl of Greek Quinoa Salad served wit lemon vinaigrette on the side

Variations

With a few easy ingredient swaps, you can make this Mediterranean-diet quinoa salad your own!

  • Black Olives: Use pitted black olives instead of Kalamata. If you’re really adventurous, try oil-cured black olives (found at the Olive Bar). These are dense, rich, meaty black olives with a pungent and briny bite.
  • Herbs: Substitute half or all of the Italian parsley with any Mediterranean soft herb, such as mint or basil.
  • Alternative Leafy Greens: If you can’t find arugula or simply don’t like it, use an equal amount of baby spinach or baby kale. If you use regular kale, slice into thin strips and massage the sliced leaves with a tablespoon of lemon vinaigrette for 1-2 minutes before adding to the salad. This helps tenderize the sturdy leaves.
  • Add in a small cubed avocado: Similar to the way I did in my Quinoa Salad with Avocado, you can always add in a small cubed avocado to make it more delicious.
  • Roasted Red Peppers: Drain and chop a small jar of roasted red bell peppers and add to the salad mix along with the remaining vegetables.
  • Goat Cheese: Replace the feta with an equal amount of crumbled goat cheese (either plain or garlic & herb). Tip – the goat cheese goes particularly well with the above mentioned roasted peppers.
  • Following a vegan diet? Simply omit the Feta cheese for a vegan Greek Quinoa Salad.

A Few Helpful Tips

  • This quinoa vegetable salad is completely versatile! If there’s any ingredient in this recipe you’re not a fan of, simply omit it altogether.
  • Serve warm, room temperature or cold. Feel free to enjoy this quinoa salad freshly-made, after a few hours at room temperature or cold from the fridge over the next few days. Just note if you are going to eat it as a cold salad, remove from the fridge 5 minutes beforehand to take some of the chill off.
  • Bring it to potlucks, picnics, and BBQs! This makes a wonderful addition to all your spring and summer parties since the ingredients hold up so well to time and temperature. Trust me – your friends will thank you!

It is no secret quinoa is a great source of protein with a ton of benefits for those of us following a wholesome diet. This simple salad is just one of the many ways to incorporate it into your diet. I hope you’ll give it a try and enjoy it as much as we do.

If you try this Mediterranean Quinoa Salad recipe or any other quinoa recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of Mediterranean Quinoa Salad with lemon vinaigrette on the side
Print

Mediterranean Quinoa Salad Recipe

A 30-minute Mediterranean Quinoa Salad recipe that you can make for lunch or as a side dish for any of your meat dishes. Made with tomatoes, chickpeas, olives, and parsley this easy Greek salad is guaranteed to impress.
Course Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean
Prep Time 30 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 378kcal

Ingredients

For The Lemon Vinaigrette:

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 small clove of garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon dijon mustard
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Salad:

  • 3 cups cooked quinoa from 1 cup uncooked quinoa – white, red, tricolor quinoa would all work
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes cut in half
  • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and cut into small cubes
  • ¾ cup Kalamata olives roughly chopped
  • 1 can 15 oz. can of chickpeas, drained
  • ½ red onion about ½ cups, chopped
  • ½ cup feta cheese crumbled (optional)
  • 1 cup Italian Parsley or 2 cups fresh arugula, washed and rinsed

Instructions

  • Make the vinaigrette. In a small mason jar, combine the olive oil, lemon juice, garlic, Dijon mustard, salt and pepper. Shake vigorously for 30 seconds to emulsify.
  • Dress the quinoa. Place the cooked quinoa in a large bowl and drizzle half of the lemon dressing on top. Stir to combine.
  • Add the prepared vegetables. Add the cherry tomatoes, cucumbers, Kalamata olives, chickpeas, and red onion. Toss together with the remaining dressing.
  • Finish with Feta and greens: Add in the crumbled feta cheese and Italian parsley (or arugula). Give it a gentle toss (so as not to wilt the greens), taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
  • Serve warm, cold, or at room temperature.

Video

Notes

  • How To Store: This quinoa salad will keep best for up to 2 days in an airtight container in the fridge.
VARIATIONS:
With a few easy ingredient swaps, you can make this quinoa salad your own:
  • Black Olives: Use pitted black olives instead of Kalamata. If you’re really adventurous, try oil-cured black olives (found at the Olive Bar). These are dense, rich, meaty black olives with a pungent and briny bite.
  • Herbs: Substitute half or all of the Italian parsley with any Mediterranean soft herb, such as mint or basil.
  • Alternative Leafy Greens: If you can’t find arugula or simply don’t like it, use an equal amount of baby spinach or baby kale. If you use regular kale, slice into thin strips and massage the sliced leaves with a tablespoon of lemon vinaigrette for 1-2 minutes before adding to the salad. This helps tenderize the sturdy leaves.
  • Roasted Red Peppers: Drain and chop a small jar of roasted red bell peppers and add to the salad mix along with the remaining vegetables.
  • Goat Cheese: Replace the feta with an equal amount of crumbled goat cheese (either plain or garlic & herb). Tip – the goat cheese goes particularly well with the above mentioned roasted peppers.
  • Following a vegan diet? Simply omit the Feta cheese for a vegan Greek Quinoa Salad.

Nutrition

Calories: 378kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 1239mg | Potassium: 661mg | Fiber: 11g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1671IU | Vitamin C: 35mg | Calcium: 201mg | Iron: 5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-quinoa-salad/feed/ 20
Greek Yogurt Salad Dressing https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-salad-dressing/ https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-salad-dressing/#comments Tue, 25 Jun 2019 12:29:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=24936 This post is sponsored by Stonyfield Organic. As always, all opinions are my own. Ever since I came back from…]]>

This post is sponsored by Stonyfield Organic. As always, all opinions are my own.

Ever since I came back from my trip to Stowe with Stonyfield Organic, I have been making a lot of plain yogurt-based salad dressings, dips, and sauces. While this Greek Yogurt Salad Dressing is a current favorite, you can find a plethora of other Greek yogurt recipes in our archives, each offering a unique twist and flavor profile.

While I love fruity yogurt mixes, my true love is plain whole-milk Greek yogurt. I prefer plain yogurt as it allows me to use it as a blank slate to create dips, dressings, and spreads such as my Yogurt Tahini Sauce, White Gyro Sauce, Creamy Yogurt Dill Sauce, and Greek Yogurt Ranch Dressing.

What is in a Greek Yogurt Dressing Recipe?

Making this easy Greek yogurt dressing requires nothing more than what is already in a well-stocked pantry. Below, you will find the essential ingredients you’ll need, along with versatile substitutions and optional add-ins to ensure that this creamy yogurt dressing recipe meets your needs.

Ingredients for Greek yogurt dressing recipe from the top view.
  • Plain Greek yogurt (aka strained yogurt): When it comes to yogurt, I am a big fan of Stonyfield Organic’s Greek yogurt as it is nice and thick and super high quality. However, you can make this Mediterranean yogurt dressing recipe with plain yogurt as well. If you are calorie-conscious and prefer the low-fat or low-calorie version of this dressing, feel free to swap whole milk yogurt with fat-free plain yogurt.
  • Fresh garlic: You will need two garlic cloves that are either minced or pressed through a garlic press. Alternatively, for a lighter garlic flavor, you can use a teaspoon of garlic powder in place of fresh garlic.
  • Lemon Juice: Use freshly squeezed lemon juice if you can, as it will deliver the best-tasting yogurt salad dressing.
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: Olive oil is a key ingredient in providing a rich flavor and ensuring a creamy texture in this yogurt dressing recipe. 
  • Fresh dill: Fresh chopped dill is a classic ingredient in many Mediterranean salad dressings (hello, Tzatziki), and this creamy dressing is no exception. If you are not a fan of fresh dill, you can use dried dill. However, please be aware that the dried version has a very mild flavor compared to its fresh version.
  • Seasonings: You will need the good old salt and pepper. I prefer kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper. However, you can use table salt and white pepper as well. 

Substitutions and Optional Add-ins

  • Vinegar: To turn this into a Greek yogurt vinaigrette, use an equal amount of apple cider vinegar or white wine vinegar in place of lemon juice.
  • Yogurt: While I make this recipe with Greek yogurt, regular plain yogurt can also be a suitable choice. However, be aware that it will result in a thinner consistency, but the overall flavor will still be great.
  • Fresh Herbs: Not a fan of dill? Use fresh parsley, fresh chives, or fresh mint instead.
  • Dijon Mustard: While it is not traditional, adding a teaspoon of Dijon mustard would add some depth and complexity to the dressing, lending a richer and creamier texture.
  • Sweetener: Some version of this homemade yogurt dressing uses a small amount of sweetener, mostly to balance out the tanginess of Greek yogurt. If you prefer your dressing to have a sweet and savory flavor contrast, you can add in a small amount of (1 teaspoon or less)  maple syrup, agave nectar, or honey. 
  • Optional seasonings and spices: While the basic garlic lemon yogurt dressing is versatile on its own, you can tailor it to complement the dish you are pairing it with by incorporating seasonings and spices like ground cumin, onion powder, cayenne pepper, and red pepper flakes.

How to Make Greek Yogurt Salad Dressing Recipe?

Making this healthy and creamy salad dressing cannot be easier. Simply:

Person showing how to make creamy Greek dressing in a collage of images.
  1. Prepare ingredients: Place Greek yogurt, garlic, lemon juice, salt and pepper in a small bowl. Stir to combine.
  2. Add in the oil: As you continuously whisk, slowly drizzle in the olive oil and mix until the mixture is thoroughly emulsified. If you prefer it to be thinner, you can whisk in a few tablespoons of water.
  3. Stir in the herbs: If using, add the dill (or any other fresh herbs you are using) and whisk until combined.

And voila, just like that, you have yourself a delicious, healthy, creamy, and homemade dressing that you can use pretty much on anything.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

My favorite thing about this creamy yogurt dressing is that it gets better as it sits, so it is great for meal prep or if you want to make it ahead of time. Here is how I do it:

  • Make ahead: Make a batch, place it in a mason jar, cover it tightly with the lid, and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days. Be sure to give it a vigorous shake before using it.
  • Storing leftovers: You can store the remaining yogurt sauce in a jar (or an airtight container), put the lid on, and place it in the fridge. It should be fresh for up to 5 days. If it begins to separate or appear watery as it sits, simply give it a good shake or blend in a few tablespoons of plain yogurt to restore its creamy consistency.

How To Use This Dressing In Your Daily Cooking? 

Growing up in Turkey, this was my mom’s go-to creamy salad dressing. The good news is that while it is referred to as a “salad dressing,” it can be used as a sauce as well. It is wonderful when served with grain bowls, sandwiches, and wraps. Need more ideas? Here are a few other ways to put it to good use:

Expert Tips:

While the recipe for this dressing is pretty straightforward, making the best creamy Greek Yogurt Salad Dressing involves some culinary intuition. Here are a few expert tips to help you succeed on your first try:

  • Taste as you go: It is best to give it a taste to ensure that the seasoning is to your liking and it is properly seasoned for the dish you are pairing it with.
  • Adjust the consistency: Should you prefer a more pourable consistency, feel free to add a splash of water to achieve the desired texture. Conversely, if it is too thick, you can thicken it by adding more Greek yogurt.
  • Experiment with flavors: Use this dressing as a place to start, but feel free to try it with different spices and fresh or dried herbs to tailor it perfectly to the dish you are accompanying.
  • Blend well: When incorporating olive oil into dressings (as we do here), it is important to whisk or blend it in slowly to create a creamy, emulsified texture. Doing so prevents the dressing from separating. The good news is that you can easily whisk it by hand, but if you are making a large amount (perhaps if you are making it for a crowd), you can use a food processor or a blender to whip it up.
  • Let it rest: Keep in mind that this healthy creamy salad dressing gets better as it sits. While you can enjoy it right away, letting it rest in the fridge for a few hours gives the ingredients time to meld and the flavors to marinate, resulting in a dressing that is more robust in taste.
  • Use it as a marinade: Got some leftovers? Similar to my Yogurt Marinated Chicken Thighs recipe, this sauce makes an excellent marinade for chicken thighs or chicken breasts.
Yogurt sauce for salad in a bowl with a whisk.

FAQs

What Kind Of Yogurt Works Best For This Recipe?

Plain, unsweetened whole milk Greek yogurt would be the best option. However, if you are after fewer calories, you can use low or non-fat, plain, unsweetened yogurt. You can also use plain instead of Greek yogurt.

What Can I Use Instead Of Dill?

You can use any fresh herbs you have on hand. Fresh parsley, chives, basil, and mint would all work.

Is yogurt salad dressing good for you?

Yes, it is. According to Healthline, plain unsweetened Greek yogurt is a good source of protein, supports gut and bone health, and helps with muscle recovery and healthy body composition. Since the main ingredient in this Greek dressing is plain unsweetened yogurt, it can be considered healthy.

What can I use to thin out Greek yogurt?

You can use water to thin out Greek yogurt.

Can I Use Sour Cream Instead Of Greek Yogurt?

I would not recommend substituting sour cream in place of Greek Yogurt in this recipe.

Other Homemade Salad Dressings You Might Like:

If you try this Greek yogurt dressing recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Greek Yogurt Salad Dressing Recipe Image
Print

Greek Yogurt Salad Dressing Recipe

This healthy Greek Yogurt Salad Dressing recipe is creamy, flavorful, easy to make, and tastes better than any store bought dressing. Ready in 5 minutes, it is delicious when drizzled on salads, roasted vegetables, and even on grilled meat.
Course Salad Dressing
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 cup
Calories 394kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup Plain Whole Milk Greek Yogurt
  • 2 cloves fresh garlic minced
  • 4 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper or white pepper
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • ¼ cup fresh dill* chopped or (1 teaspoon dried dill), optional
  • 2 tablespoons water optional

Instructions

  • Whisk together Greek yogurt, garlic, lemon juice, salt and pepper in a mixing bowl.
  • While whisking constantly, drizzle in the olive oil and mix until the mixture is thoroughly emulsified.
  • If it is too thick to your liking, you can use a few tablespoons of water to thin it out.
  • Mix in the fresh dill, if using.
  • Drizzle onto your favorite salads, roasted vegetables, grain bowls, sandwiches, and more.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields one cup of Greek yogurt dressing. The nutritional values below are for the whole dressing.
  • Yogurt: While I highly recommend using plain full fat Greek yogurt, if you want, you can use plain yogurt or low-fat or non-fat yogurt (for fewer calories) as well. These substitutions would make it less creamy, but it would still taste good.
  • Fresh Herbs: Not a fan of dill? Use fresh parsley, basil, chives or mint instead. Or, you can omit using herbs altogether.
  • Dijon Mustard – Optional: While it is not traditional, you can whisk in a teaspoon of Dijon mustard to add some depth and complexity to the dressing and a richer and creamier texture.
  • Sweetener – Optional: If you prefer your dressing to have a sweet and savory flavor contrast, you can add in a small amount of (1 teaspoon or less)  maple syrup, agave nectar, or honey. 
  • Make ahead: Make a batch, place it in a mason jar, cover it with the lid, and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days. Be sure to shake before using.
  • Storing leftovers: You can store the remaining yogurt sauce in a jar (or an airtight container), put the lid on, and place it in the fridge. It should be fresh for up to 5 days. If it begins to separate or appear watery as it sits, simply give it a good shake or blend in a few tablespoons of plain yogurt to restore its creamy consistency.

Nutrition

Calories: 394kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 21g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 10mg | Sodium: 2407mg | Potassium: 431mg | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 907IU | Vitamin C: 35mg | Calcium: 255mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-salad-dressing/feed/ 67
How to Make Turkish Coffee https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-turkish-coffee/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-turkish-coffee/#comments Sun, 17 Mar 2019 14:53:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2775 My love of coffee comes from my mother. For her, having Turkish coffee was almost a daily ritual that had…]]>

My love of coffee comes from my mother.

For her, having Turkish coffee was almost a daily ritual that had to be done with friends and family. More than anything, it was a way to celebrate her friendships and show gratitude to the ones she loved.

A cup of freshly cooked turkish coffee is photographed from the front view.

Though she worked most of her life, on those rare days when she was home, she would invite her friends over for coffee in the morning. Prior to their arrival, she would make me set up two trays: the first one with Turkish coffee cups and the second one with water glasses. We would always have something sweet to serve the coffee with. Although Turkish delights are more traditional, my mother loved serving hers with chocolate.

When her friends would arrive, it was my job to make and serve the coffee. After welcoming them, I would ask how they take their coffee and then immediately go to the kitchen to make it to their liking. It was such a proud moment for my mother when I would come out of the kitchen with the tray in my hand.

When I look back and think about it today, I realize how important it was for her that I understood the tradition behind it. I was very fortunate that I was allowed to drink coffee at a young age and learn to enjoy it through the family tradition.

A woman is photographed from the front view as she is serving coffee

In Turkey, when you go to somebody’s house, the first question isn’t if you want to drink Turkish coffee, but rather how you would like to have your coffee prepared. By how, your host is asking about the amount of sugar you would like to have in your coffee. To answer the question, you may say “sade” which means no sugar; “az seker” which means very little sugar; “orta”  which means with 1-2 teaspoons of sugar; or “sekerli”  which means with 3-4 teaspoon sugar.

Once you place your request, it is the responsibility of the person making the coffee to prepare it according to everyone’s individual sugar preferences. Usually, that person is the youngest girl of the house. As you can imagine, as the only daughter of our household, I’ve made more than my fair share of coffee in my lifetime. Therefore, I feel qualified enough to share my knowledge with you.

Turkish Coffee is being poured into the cup photographed from the front view

Ingredients You Need:

Ingredients to make Turkish coffee are photographed from the top view

You will need:

  • Cold filtered water
  • Turkish coffee: Turkish coffee is much more finely ground than regular coffee. Even though you can grind it yourself, nowadays you can find it in most Middle Eastern or Mediterranean supermarkets. My favorite brand is Kurukahveci Mehmet Efendi (affiliate link).
  • Cezve (a special wide-bottomed pot, usually made of copper) I have one similar to this Copper Turkish Coffee Pot (affiliate link) and have been using it for years.
  • Turkish coffee cups: Here is a set (affiliate link) you can purchase
  • Granulated sugar

How to Make Turkish Coffee

Making Turkish coffee is easy and requires no special skills, so long as you know a couple of tricks.

Here is how in a nutshell:

A woman is pouring water into the cup to measure
A woman is pouring water into cezve
  • Water: Always use cold, filtered water. To measure the amount of water for each cup, use the coffee cup you are going to use.
    When it comes to the water to Turkish coffee proportions my rule of thumb is 1½ “cup” of water per cup. Once again, the “cup” measurement is the coffee cup that you are going to serve the coffee in, rather than a standard measuring cup.
A woman is placing coffee into the  pot - aka cezve
A woman is placing sugar into cezve
  • Coffee & Sugar: For each cup of coffee, use a heaping tablespoon of ground coffee. If preparing a cup with sugar, add it in the very beginning, stirring the mixture until combined. However, if one or more of the guests prefer no sugar, prepare and pour that cup first. After returning the coffee pot to the stove, add in more sugar to suit the preferences of the remaining guests.
A woman is photographed from the front view as she is mixing ingredients
A woman is photographed from the front view as she is serving a coffee

How To Cook Turkish Coffee

Slowly bring the mixture to a boil over medium heat. This will take 3-4 minutes, so keep a close eye on it. As the coffee warms, a dark foam will build.

A pot of of coffee is cooking on the stovetop highlighting the thick foam
A woman is pouring freshly cooked Turkish coffee from cezve

It is customary and important to serve Turkish coffee with foam on top. When the mixture is close to a boil, use a teaspoon to transfer some of the foam into each coffee cup. Return the coffee pot to the stovetop.

As coffee comes to a boil, pour half of the coffee into the cups, over the foam. Return coffee pot to stovetop and boil the remaining coffee for an additional 10-15 seconds and fill the cups to the rim.

How To Serve:

A woman is serving two cups of coffee on a tray

To serve:

  • We always serve Turkish coffee with cold (or room temperature) water, because a sip of water will allow the person to clear his/her palate before drinking coffee for the best enjoyment. In addition to water, most people like to serve it with a small sweet treat like Turkish delights, chocolate, candy, etc.
  • When serving it is important to start with the eldest guest in the room. It is a sign of respect to acknowledge their age and considered disrespectful not to do so.
  • Since this type of coffee is much denser than filtered coffee, it is not customary to drink more than one cup. I have read on some websites that some people add milk or cream to their coffee, but to be honest, I have never seen anyone in Turkey add milk or cream to their Turkish coffee.
A cup of Turkish Coffee is photographed from the front view.

Almost eight years after her passing, when I close my eyes and think about my mother today, I picture her with a Turkish coffee cup in her hand, telling stories of whatever is happening on that particular day. Though I want to continue our family tradition every opportunity I get, I know it will never be the same without her.

A cup of coffee photographed from the top view with chocolate and water on the side

Frequently Asked Questions:

What kind of coffee/roast should I buy to make Turkish Coffee?

I have a few readers asked me if Starbucks’ coffees would work if they were to ask the barista to grind it as Turkish coffee. To be quite honest, I have never tried this, but I do not think so. What I know for sure (and the one I recommend) is Kurukahveci Mehmet Efendi (affiliate link). This is the coffee that I use (and grew up drinking) when I make my Turkish coffee.

Do I need that special pot (cezve or ibrik) to make Turkish coffee?

The answer is, it depends. I recommend getting it as (1) it is a tradition to cook Turkish coffee in a cezve and (2) cooking it in a cezve will give you the thick foam (more in this below) on top. With that being said, if you are not concerned with those two things, you can make our coffee in a very small saucepan.
I have one similar to this Copper Turkish Coffee Pot (affiliate link) and have been using it for years.

How do you get that thick foam on top?

This is a much-debated subject and you might get different answers if you asked different people. Below steps were what my mother taught me:

  • Once you mix water, coffee and sugar (if using), give it a quick mix but do not overmix it. Since you are cooking it in a very small pot (cezve), as it boils it will mix itself. I know that it is very tempting to want to mix it but resist the urge.
  • Once you pour your first pour, then you can give it a mix because the thick foamy part should already be in the cup.
  • As you pour your second, be sure to pour very slowly to not break the foam.

What if I am making Turkish coffee for multiple people with different sugar preferences?

If this is the case, you can do one of two things. First, you can make them in different pots, but for that, you would have to have more than one cezve.

Second, you can start making it with no sugar, pour the first pour to all the cups and then add in the sugar in the second pour.

For example: Let’s say I making Turkish coffee for 2 of my guests. First, start with the person who wants his sade (with no sugar) and then continue with the second person who wants his orta (1-2 teaspoon sugar). Below are the steps I would follow to make them at the same time in one pot (cezve):

  • Start by cooking water and coffee for 2 servings with no added sugar
  • Pour your first pour halfway into two coffee pots.
  • Boil the second pour and fill up the first serving with no sugar.
  • Then add in sugar into the pot, mix it, and bring it to a boil before you top off the second serving. Since Turkish coffee is pretty thick and served in such a small cup, it will have enough sweetness.

Where did you get the blue cups in the photos?

I borrowed those cups from a friend of mine. They were a gift to her from her husband. He purchased them from Pasabahce many years ago. I am not sure if they are still selling them, but since this was asked more than once I thought I can answer it here.

Where can I find Turkish Coffee cups?

If you ever visit Turkey and most other nearby countries, you can find a variety of options for Turkish coffee cups. However, if that is not possible you can easily find them online. Additionally, you can use espresso cups. They are a little larger but they would do the job.
Here is a set (affiliate link) you can use to make both types of coffees.

What is Turkish Coffee reading (fortune-telling)? Do you believe it?

It is a tradition that after you finish your coffee, you turn your cup upside down and let it cool down so that someone else can “read your cup”. This is a fun tradition, where someone (who is talented enough to make up stuff) looks into the cup and tries to guess your future based on the shapes of the coffee’s residue that stuck on the walls of your cup. If you are a believer of this kind of stuff, it could be quite entertaining.

My mom was one of those people, who would read people’s cups just for the fun of it. I no longer believe in such readings, but when I was a teenager and was falling in love with a different guy every week, I remember drinking a lot of Turkish coffee and begging her to read my cup to see if “my new found love” is going to ask me out any time soon. ๐Ÿ™‚

A cup of Turkish Coffee and pot are photographed from the front view
Print

How to Make Turkish Coffee At Home

Learn How To cook, brew and make Turkish Coffee at home from the way I learned from my mother with step-by step how-to photos along with the answers to frequently asked questions. 
Course Drink
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 2 servings

Ingredients

  • 3 Turkish coffee cup-sized cups of cold filtered water 1 1/2 cup per cup
  • 2 heaping tablespoons Turkish Coffee ground
  • Sugar – as requested

Instructions

  • Place the sugar (if desired), water, and Turkish coffee in metal Turkish coffee pot (Cezve).
  • Using a small spoon, stir briefly until just combined and place pot on stovetop.
  • Slowly bring coffee mixture to a boil over medium heat. This will take 3-4 minutes, so keep a close watch.
  • As the coffee warms, you will see a dark foam building up. Closer to it coming to a boil, using a teaspoon, transfer some of the foam into each of your two Turkish coffee cups. Return coffee pot to stovetop.
  • As coffee comes to a boil, pour half of the coffee into the cups, over the foam.
  • Return coffee pot to stovetop and boil the remaining coffee for an additional 15-20 seconds and pour the rest in to the coffee cups to the rim.
  • Serve with water and Turkish delight.

Video

Notes

What if I am making Turkish coffee for multiple people with different sugar preferences?

If this is the case, you can do one of two things.
First, you can make them in different pots, but for that, you would have to have more than one cezve.
Second, you can start making it with no sugar, pour the first pour to all the cups and then add in the sugar in the second pour.
For example: Let’s say I making Turkish coffee for 2 of my guests. First, start with the person who wants his sade (with no sugar) and then continue with the second person who wants his orta (1-2 teaspoon sugar). Below are the steps I would follow to make them at the same time in one pot (cezve):
  • Start by cooking water and coffee for 2 servings with no added sugar
  • Pour your first pour halfway into two coffee pots.
  • Boil the second pour and fill up the first serving with no sugar.
  • Then add in sugar into the pot, mix it, and bring it to a boil before you top off the second serving. Since Turkish coffee is pretty thick and served in such a small cup, it will have enough sweetness.

Nutrition

Sodium: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-turkish-coffee/feed/ 215